CODE-1 Plus User`s Guide for IBM i - Support

CODE-1 Plus User`s Guide for IBM i - Support
CODE-1 Plus™
Version 4.1.0
User’s Guide
For IBM i
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No
part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without the written
permission of Pitney Bowes, 3001 Summer Street, Stamford CT 06926-0700.
© 2016, Pitney Bowes Software Inc.
All rights reserved. MapInfo, Group 1, and Group 1 Software are trademarks of Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All other marks and trademarks are property of
their respective holders.
Pitney Bowes Inc. holds a non-exclusive license to publish and sell ZIP + 4® databases on optical and magnetic media. The following trademarks are
owned by the United States Postal Service: CASS, CASS Certified, DPV, eLOT, FASTforward, First-Class Mail, Intelligent Mail, LACSLink, NCOALink, PAVE,
PLANET Code, Postal Service, POSTNET, Post Office, RDI, SuiteLink, United States Postal Service, Standard Mail, United States Post Office, USPS, ZIP
Code, and ZIP + 4. This list is not exhaustive of the trademarks belonging to the Postal Service.
Pitney Bowes Inc. is a non-exclusive licensee of USPS® for NCOALink® processing.
Prices for Pitney Bowes Inc. products, options and services are not established, controlled or approved by the USPS® or United States Government. When
utilizing RDI™ data to determine parcel-shipping costs, the business decision on which parcel delivery company to use is not made by the USPS® or United
States Government.
3001 Summer Street
Stamford CT 06926-0700
USA
www.pitneybowes.com
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
What is CODE-1 Plus? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
What is Address Standardization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
What is the Matching Process? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Understanding the CODE-1 Plus Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
What is CASS Certification? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Certifying Your Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Certified Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Total Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CODE-1 Plus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using the Batch System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
File Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Interactive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Address Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Database Inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Site Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Other CODE-1 Plus™ Programs and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Program Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Callable Routines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Executable Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Database Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Program and Screen ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Release Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Date/Time Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Job ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
User-Defined System Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
System-Defined Screen Heading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Saving to an External File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Chapter 2: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Getting Started After Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Creating a CODE-1 Plus Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CODE-1 Plus Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Job Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Chapter 3: System-Wide Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Entering Commands at the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using C1RUNJOB to Run CODE-1 Plus Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Executing C1RUNJOB Interactively. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Release 4.1.0
3
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using C1SBMJOB to Submit CODE-1 Plus Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Executing C1SBMJOB Interactively. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Using the Job Import Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
What Are the Database Functions?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Accessing the Database Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Creating a Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Accessing the Create Reduced Database Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Specifying the Library for the Reduced Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting States to be Included in the Reduced Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Viewing Your Selections and Storage Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Changing Your Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Creating the Reduced Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Installing a CODE-1 Plus Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Accessing the Install CODE-1 Plus Database Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Installing the Database from Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Installing the Database from Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database Detail Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database State Size Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Displaying Database Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Changing the Default CODE-1 Plus Database Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Converting EWS File into CODE-1 Plus Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Returning to the Work With Jobs Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 5: Defining Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Defining Your Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using the Name and Address Layout Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Determining Your Address Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Defining Input Address and ZIP Code Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Defining Address and ZIP Code Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Defining Additional Input File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Activating Z4CHANGE Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Defining Urbanization Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Defining SuiteLink Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Defining Confirmation Options and LACSLink Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Confirming Special ZIP Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Confirming Records with Confirmation Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Confirmation Compare Values Screen (C1CPCF11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Defining List Processor/Mailer Information Screen (C1CPID60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
List Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Defining Input File Sequence Check Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Defining Delivery Point Validation Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Defining Additional Delivery Point Validation Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Reformatting Your Input Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Release 4.1.0
4
User’s Guide - IBM i
Reformat Input Record Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Chapter 6: Defining Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Defining Your Output File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Output Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Storage Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Defining ZIP Code Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Defining ZIP Code Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Defining Carrier Route Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Defining Carrier Route Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Defining ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Defining ZIP + 4 Add-On Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Defining Standardized Address Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Defining Standardized Address Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Base and Alias Street Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Defining Additional Standardized Address Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Defining Address Element Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Defining City and State Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Defining City and State Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Defining County and Congressional Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Defining Address Match Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Return Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Match Scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Other Address Matching Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Defining Additional Address Match Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Delivery Sequence File (DSF2) footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Defining Extra Data Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Defining Normalized/COA Information Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Defining Line of Travel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Defining Delivery Point Validation Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Defining Additional Address Match Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Reformat Output Record Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 7: Running Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Component Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Files and File Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Exit Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Limiting the Number of Records Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Restricting the ZIP Code Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Decimal Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 (C1CPSB02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 (C1CPSB03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 (C1CPSB04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 5 (C1CPSB05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 6 (C1CPSB06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Release 4.1.0
5
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 7 (C1CPSB07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 8 (C1CPSB08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 9 (C1CPSB09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Chapter 8: Geographic Coding Definition Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Using the Geographic Coding Definition Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Accessing the Geographic Coding Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations Screen (C1CPG910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG911) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG912) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG913) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Introduction to Batch Jobs in CODE-1 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Finding Your Sample Name and Address File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Analyzing the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Name/Address File Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Output Record Posting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Generated Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Report Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
What Will Be Covered in This Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Submit Batch Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Creating the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Defining Your Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Specifying the Input Name/Address File Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Defining Street Address Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Defining the City/State/ZIP Code Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Exiting the Name/Address File Layout Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Defining Your Output Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
ZIP Code Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Carrier Route Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Standardized Address Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Address Elements Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
City/State Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Address Match Information Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Normalized Address and “Care Of” Information Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Exiting the Name/Address Record Posting Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Selecting Reports to be Printed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Submitting The Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reading Your Output Files and Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Chapter 10: Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Understanding the CODE-1 Plus Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Required Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Optional Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Release 4.1.0
6
User’s Guide - IBM i
Report Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Build Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Using the IBM i Screens to Generate Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Defining Defaults for Print Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Defining Report Format Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Defining Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Address-Match Execution Statistics Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Control Totals Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Execution Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Parameter Record Listing Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Analysis of Matched Records Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Build Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Coding by State Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
ZIP + 4 Coding by State Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Carrier Coding by State Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Line of Travel Coding by State Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Coding by List Code Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ZIP + 4 Coding by List Code Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Carrier Route Coding by List Code Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Line of Travel Coding by List Code Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
ZIP + 4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Processing Summary Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Delivery Point Validation Processing Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Delivery Point Validation Processing by List Code Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Residential Delivery File Build Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Residential Delivery File Build Execution Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
National Deliverability Index (NDI) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
USPS Form 3553 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Getting Started With the Interactive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Address Matching Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Database Inquiry Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Correcting Uncoded Records Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Navigation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
CODE-1 Plus Interactive System Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Online Help Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Address Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Scrolling Through the Match Results Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Database Inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Navigating Through the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Moving to a Line on a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Release 4.1.0
7
User’s Guide - IBM i
Displaying Data about a Database Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Querying the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
An Example Work Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Step 1. Accessing the Interactive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Step 2. Matching an Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Step 3. Querying the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Step 4. Matching an Address—Second Attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Step 5. Geographic Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Correcting Uncoded Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Interactive Screen Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Command Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Address Matching Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Address Match Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Delivery Sequence Footnotes Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Miscellaneous Information/Base Address Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Expanded Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Geographic Coding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Match Settings Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Multiple Elements Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Parsed Elements Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Return Codes Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Address Stack Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Database Inquiry Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Apartments at a House Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Cities in a State Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Cities in a ZIP Code Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
City Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Firms in a House Range Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Houses on a Street Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Streets in a City or Streets in a ZIP Code Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Geographic Coding Plus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Screens that Support Site Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Administration Sign-on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Interactive Customization Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Database Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Customization File Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
File Backup and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
File Repair, Re-Initialization, and Password Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Batch Uncoded Records Interface (G1CPBNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
UR COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
UW COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Release 4.1.0
8
User’s Guide - IBM i
Description of Supplied Sample G1CPBNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Chapter 12: Using Z4CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
What is the Z4CHANGE Option? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Z4CHANGE Option Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Rules for Using the Z4CHANGE Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Activating the Z4CHANGE Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Using Z4CHANGE Option Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Calling Z4CHANGE From Your Own Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Generating Reports for Z4CHANGE Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Chapter 13: Using Delivery Point Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
What is Delivery Point Validation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Resolving Multiple Matches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Using the Delivery Point Validation Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Installing the DPV Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Activating Delivery Point Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Activating DPV in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Activating DPV in Callable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Understanding DPV Return Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
DPV Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
DPV by List Code Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
DPV Processing Summary Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
DPV Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Expiration of DPV Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Open/Read Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Seed Records and Stop DPV Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Software Incompatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
DPV File Load or Location Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Testing Your File Using Seed Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Required Action When Encountering a Seed Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Chapter 14: Using LACSLink
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
What is LACSLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
What are the Benefits of LACSLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Who is Eligible to Use LACSLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
How Does LACSLink Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
How Do I Install the LACSLink Option? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
How Do I Install the LACS Database? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
How Do I Activate LACSLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Using the Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing Screen to Activate LACSLink. . . 306
Activating LACSLink in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Activating LACSLink in Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Activating LACSLink in Callable Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Understanding LACSLink Return Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Release 4.1.0
9
User’s Guide - IBM i
LACSLink Processing Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
LACSLink Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
LACSLink Information on USPS Form 3553 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Interactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Chapter 15: Using SuiteLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
What is SuiteLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
What are the Benefits of SuiteLink?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Who is Eligible to Use SuiteLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
How Does SuiteLink Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
How do I Install the SuiteLink Option? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
How do I Install the SuiteLink Database? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
How Do I Activate SuiteLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Using the SuiteLink Processing Definition Screen to Activate SuiteLink . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Activating SuiteLink in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Activating SuiteLink in Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Activating SuiteLink in Callable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
SuiteLink Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
DD Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
SuiteLink Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Input and Output Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
SuiteLink Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
What is Line of Travel?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Why Use Line of Travel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Accessing Line of Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Getting Started with Line of Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Sorting Your LOT Coded Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Calling the LTO10 Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Input Area — Parameter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Output Area — Parameter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Line of Travel Exit Routine (LTO60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
EXITOP Parameter for the LTO60 Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Control Totals Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Alternate Sequence Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Sorting LOT Records Using Alternate Sequence Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Sequence Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Chapter 17: Using Residential Delivery Indicator (RDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
What is Residential Delivery File Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Building the Residential Delivery File in CODE-1 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
C1DBRDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Importing the RDI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Activating the RDI Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Release 4.1.0
10
User’s Guide - IBM i
DPVIN Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
DPVOUT Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
PGMNAM Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
REPORT Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
RDI Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Chapter 18: Auxiliary File Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
What is the Early Warning System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Auxiliary File Processing and EWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Building the Auxiliary File with the Early Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
C1AUXBLD Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
AUXIL Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Activating the Auxiliary File/Early Warning System File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
EWS With C1BM00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
EWS When Calling C1MATCHx or C1BMCBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Auxiliary File Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Auxiliary File Build (C1AUXBLD) Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Auxiliary File Build Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Auxiliary File Build Execution Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Auxiliary File Reporting in the CODE-1 Plus Matcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Chapter GL: Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Release 4.1.0
11
User’s Guide - IBM i
Release 4.1.0
12
User’s Guide - IBM i
CODE-1 Plus Concepts
In this chapter:








What is CODE-1 Plus? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
What is Address Standardization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
What is the Matching Process? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Understanding the CODE-1 Plus Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
What is CASS Certification? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Total Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
CODE-1 Plus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Using the Batch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
1
What is CODE-1 Plus?
What is CODE-1 Plus?
CODE-1 Plus is an address-matching and standardization system that improves the address data
quality and deliverability of your mail to enable you to qualify for USPS postal discounts. CODE-1
Plus matches input addresses to the addresses in the CODE-1 Plus database to correct your postal
information and add additional postal information. CODE-1 Plus helps you save money by helping
you qualify mail for USPS automation-based discounts and carrier route discounts (Line of Travel
based). You can use CODE-1 Plus to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Add, correct, or verify 5-digit ZIP Codes
Correct or add the ZIP + 4 Codes
Add Delivery Point Codes
Add carrier route codes
Standardize street, city, and state fields according to USPS conventions
Validate addresses using the Delivery Point Validation (DPV) option
•
Use the LACSLink option to access USPS address conversion information and convert
addresses as needed
•
Use the SuiteLink option to improve business addresses deliverability by adding accurate
secondary (suite) information to the business addresses in your mailing list
Determine if an address is a business or residential address using the Residential Delivery
Indicator (RDI) option
Prevent “false positives” by using the Early Warning System (EWS)
Qualify your standard letters and flats for USPS Enhanced Carrier Route rates by using Line of
Travel.
•
•
•
You can perform these functions interactively (online) or in batch mode. Processing results are
written to one or more output files, depending on your specifications.
What is Address Standardization?
The USPS has established guidelines for what it calls quality addressing. Quality addressing
ensures standardized addresses that help the USPS provide timely mail delivery. This goal becomes
even more critical when mailers attempt to qualify for postal discounts.
A standardized address is an address that has been matched against the CODE-1 Plus database
and formatted based on USPS addressing conventions. CODE-1 Plus uses USPS conventions to
ensure deliverability of your addresses. The USPS addressing conventions include guidelines for:
•
•
•
Format
Punctuation
Address components
The first step to quality addressing is a healthy mailing list. CODE-1 Plus uses USPS address
standardization guidelines set forth in USPS Publication 28 to correct your addresses and ensure
your mail's deliverability.
For more information on address standardization, please see Postal Addressing Standards, USPS
Publication 28 at http://pe.usps.gov/cpim/ftp/pubs/pub28/pub28.pdf. You can order this publication
from:
NATIONAL CUSTOMER SUPPORT CENTER
MEMPHIS TN 38188-0001
(800) 238-3150
Release 4.1.0
14
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
What is Address Standardization?
CODE-1 Plus considers the address to be only the street, and considers the city/state/ZIP Code to
be additional information—separate from the address. For this reason, when we refer to an address
in this book, we mean any or all of the following elements shown in the figure below:
4235
House
Number
N
MAIN
ST
Leading
Street Name Suffix
Directional
RR
123
Rural Route or
Highway
Contract
Route Type
BOX
Rural Route or
Highway
Contract
Number
NW
Trailing
Directional
APT
Apartment
Designator
100
Apartment
Number
19
Rural Route,
Highway Contract
or PO Box Number
PMB 345
Private
Mailbox
Designator
Private
Mailbox
Number
Address Components
Address elements and city/state/ZIP information combine to make lines. For the purposes of this
product, these lines are defined as shown in the figure below:
ATTN TECHNICAL SUPPORT
PITNEY BOWES INC.
ONE GLOBAL VIEW
TROY, NY 12180-8399
Attention Line
Secondary Address Line (Firm Name)
Primary Address Line
City/State/ZIP Line
Address Lines
The USPS allows the following placements for suite/apartment numbers:
•
•
•
On the primary address line (just above the city/state/ZIP line), following the street information
On the secondary address line (just above the primary address line), by itself
On the secondary address line, with the secondary address line information.
CODE-1 Plus recognizes both apartment/suite designators and apartment/suite numbers on both
secondary and primary address lines, and formats those accordingly.
Release 4.1.0
15
User’s Guide - IBM i
What is Address Standardization?
In standardizing or normalizing an address with a Private Mailbox (PMB), CODE-1 Plus puts the
PMB designator and number on the secondary address line if a secondary address line is provided.
If a secondary address line is not provided and CODE-1 Plus finds a PMB, then CODE-1 Plus
attempts to append the PMB designator and number to the primary address line. If there is not
enough room on the primary address line, CODE-1 Plus drops the PMB designator and number. For
more information on using this option to verify PMB/MSC data, refer to "Using Delivery Point
Validation” on page 291.
Since there is no PMB data on the postal database, CODE-1 Plus will not attempt to correct or verify
PMB information. However, if you have the DPV option, it is possible to verify some PMB information
by providing Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA) return codes. For more information on
CMRAs, refer to “DPVOUT” in “Parameter Reference” in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide. The
following figures provide a standardization example. For a detailed discussion and more examples
for address standardization, refer to USPS Publication 28.
The original address is:
JoeJoe
Addressee
Addressee
553553-A
East Plaza
A
EastCircle,
PlazaSuite
Circle
Litchfield Park, AZ 85340
Litchfield Park, AZ 85340
Example Address on Envelope
For automation compatibility, the USPS prefers the address to appear as:
The street suffix
(Circle) is
standardized as
CIR.
JOE ADDRESSEE
553 E PLAZA CIR STE A
LITCHFIELD PARK AZ 85340-4996
The directional (E)
appears on the same
line as the street
address.
Punctuation
(except hyphens)
is removed; type
is upper case.
The suite or
apartment
number
follows the
street address
on the same
line.
The ZIP Code is next to the
city/state on the last address
line. The ZIP + 4 Code is
separated from the ZIP Code
by a hyphen.
USPS Preferred Address on Envelope
Release 4.1.0
16
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
What is the Matching Process?
What is the Matching Process?
During address matching and standardization, address lines are separated into components
(analyzed), and compared to the contents of the CODE-1 Plus database. Any address information
not used as part of matching is referred to as dropped address information. If a match is found, the
input address is standardized according to the contents of the database.
If no database match is determined, CODE-1 Plus provides the option to normalize input addresses.
The normalization process attempts to format the address lines according to conventions outlined in
USPS Publication 28. When the normalization option is invoked and no database match is found for
a particular address, CODE-1 Plus attempts to recognize the individual elements and formats them
according to USPS conventions.
Understanding the CODE-1 Plus Database
The CODE-1 Plus database contains virtually every house number range in the U.S. CODE-1 Plus
ensures that your addresses are correct and in the USPS-specified format. Optionally, CODE-1 Plus
stores match results and return codes relating to each input address. These include match results
for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ZIP Codes
ZIP + 4 Codes
Carrier route codes
Standardized address line and/or elements
City names and state abbreviations
Normalized address lines
Address match return codes
The return codes help you to flag errors in your input file and allow you to select or reject processed
addresses based on your job requirements.
What is CASS Certification?
The USPS Coding Accuracy Support System (CASS) measures the accuracy of address-matching
software. To receive automated processing discounts, you must use software that has been CASScertified and registered by the vendor with the USPS. The following regulations apply:
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
The address-matching software used must have been CASS-certified for the current CASS
cycle.
Coding of each file must be performed at least annually (e.g., the mailing date must be within
one year of the coding date).
The database used during an address-matching run must be “current.” A current database is
defined by the matrix in DMM 708.
USPS Form 3553 lists the address-matching software used to process the mailing list. This
report must be submitted with each mailing and must represent all address lists used to generate
that mailing.
CODE-1 Plus includes LACSLink, DPV, and SuiteLink processing. For further details regarding the
options and requirements for CASS certification, see the USPS-issued document on CASS
Cycles on the Rapid Information Bulletin Board System (RIBBS) website, http://ribbs.usps.gov.
CODE-1 Plus does not produce a CASS statement if LACSLink, DPV, or SuiteLink processing is
turned off.
17
User’s Guide - IBM i
What is CASS Certification?
Certifying Your Configurations
If you do not use one of the configurations certified by Pitney Bowes, or if you are calling CODE-1
Plus™ from your own application, you will have to certify the configurations you are using in order to
qualify for mailing discount rates.
Before undertaking your own CASS certifications, serious consideration should be given to support,
audit, and on-going testing for CASS. The standard maintenance and support agreement does not
provide support for clients obtaining their own certification or NCOA approval.
You can obtain support from our Professional Services Group for your own certification or NCOA
approval. Please contact your local sales or support representative for details.

Your product license agreement may not permit you to obtain your own certification. Please
review your software agreement for scope and use of CODE-1 Plus.
When ordering the CASS materials from the USPS, you can request:
•
•
•
Stage 1 (self-measurement) media
Stage 2 (certification test) media
Both media
You are encouraged to order both media, and to experiment with the Stage 1 File until you are
satisfied with the results. During this process, examine the returned address elements returned by
CODE-1 Plus that differ from those the USPS views as “correct.”
When you submit your Stage 2 test. the USPS will probably require you to submit the “parameters
used for matching.” To satisfy this requirement, you should set up a job for CASS, and submit the
parameter list produced by the job to the USPS.
Use the “CASSA1” parameter to fill in the CASS-certified company name, software name, and
software version if you attempt CASS certification with CODE-1 Plus (using our batch driver
C1BM00) and have your company and/or software name on record with the USPS as a CASScertified company.
Certified Configurations
USPS Form 3553 is required to include the specific configuration of the address-matching software
that was used in the mailing. This specific configuration must have been CASS-certified. CODE-1
Plus™ automatically produces USPS Form 3553 when the parameters are set to a certified
configuration.

Release 4.1.0
WARNING: If you use CODE-1 Plus™ with an uncertified configuration, CODE-1 Plus™
does not produce a USPS Form 3553. It is against USPS regulations for address-matching
software to produce a USPS Form 3553 when uncertified configurations are used. If you use
uncertified configurations, CODE-1 Plus™ generates a message telling you that the
configuration is not certified, and that no form was printed.
18
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
What is CASS Certification?
Pitney Bowes has CASS-certified the following configurations.
CODE-1 Plus Certified CASS Configurations
Parameter
Position/Value
Description
AM OUT
8-10
blank
USPS record type.
CONFIG
8
10
12
M (default)
M (default)
M (default)
Strictness code for street name match, firm name
match and directional/suffix match must all be
medium.
CS OUT
19
Blank (default)
I
Store the information in position 72.
Store the input city.
CS OUT
59
Z
Store the ZIP + 4 File preferred last line city name
(override city name).
DPVIN
DPV must be invoked to produce USPS Form
3553.
FIRMNM
The FIRMNM parameter is required when you use
the STELNK parameter.
LACS
LACSLink must be invoked to produce a USPS
Form 3553.
SA2OUT
15
Y
Perform preferred alias processing.
SA OUT
51
N
Return the base street name.
You must invoke SuiteLink processing to produce
USPS Form 3553.
You must specify “S” (default) in STELNK position
8. If you specify “I” or “W” in position 8, CODE-1
Plus does not generate a USPS Form 3553. The
value in position 8 determines whether to shut
down when SuiteLink reports an error.
• I — Ignore error and continue to attempt
SuiteLink processing. CODE-1 Plus does not
generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report) if you specify the value “I”.
STELNK
• S — Shutdown when SuiteLink reports an error
(default). Specify the value “S” if you want to
generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report).
• W — Issue warning message and turn off
SuiteLink processing. CODE-1 Plus does not
generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report) if you specify the value “W”.
NOTE: The FIRMNM parameter is required
when you use the STELNK parameter.
Release 4.1.0
19
User’s Guide - IBM i
What is CASS Certification?
A non-CASS configuration is determined if the maximum probability of correctness indicators are not
the same for all the parameters. The following table provides descriptions of all non-Cass
configurations.
CODE-1 Plus Non-CASS Certified Configurations (Part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Position/Value
Description
AE OUT
64
X
Store all Private Mailbox Designator.
AM OUT
8-10
BYPEXP
1-6
CONFIG
8, 10, 12
Any other combination of strictness codes other
than MMM (Ex. MEM, EEE, TEM, etc.).
CONFIG
14
Y
Accept multiple matches.
CONFIG
38
P
For dual address match, return a PO Box match
regardless of address line.
CONFIG
40
X
For unique ZIP Code handling, store the input ZIP
Code.
CONFIG
42
X
For PMB handling, store all private mailbox
numbers.
CONFIG
44
N
For enhanced high rise alternate matching, do not
attempt to match to the base record.
CONFIG
46
N
For multiple secondary component processing,
assign default ZIP + 4 Code.
CONFIG
49
X
Return vanity city names when they most closely
match input city (a CASS certified configuration will
be created but will not be eligible for postal
automation presort discount).
CONFIG
53
X
For limited locality option, limit address match to
ZIP Code locality.
CONFIG
55
N
Do not perform split indicia processing.
CS OUT
19
Z
Store the primary city for the valid input ZIP Code.
CS OUT
59
C
Store the USPS-preferred City Name from USPS
City/State File.
Store the Primary City Name from the USPS City/
State File.
Location for USPS record type code is specified.
BYPEXP
Override expired US Postal database.
P
DPVIN
8
N
Do not attempt to DPV confirm if the input file
contains multiple matches of the ZIP Code and the
PO Box or rural route/highway contract.
DPVIN
10
N
Do not attempt to DPV confirm if the input file
contains multiple matches of the ZIP Code and the
street address type.
DPVIN
12
N
Do not attempt to DPV confirm if the input file
contains multiple matches of the Carrier Route in
CODE-1 Plus.
Release 4.1.0
20
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
Total Solution
CODE-1 Plus Non-CASS Certified Configurations (Part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Position/Value
Description
DPVIN
14
N
Do not attempt to DPV confirm if the input file
contains multiple matches of the directional.
DPVIN
16
N
Do not attempt to DPV confirm if the input file
contains multiple matches of the suffix.
DPVIN
18
N
Do not attempt to DPV confirm if input file contains
multiple matches of the suffix/directional
correction.
DPVIN
20
N
Do not attempt to DPV confirm if input file contains
multiple matches of the secondary components
with no designator.
DPVIN
22
N
Do not perform DPV validation using the ZIP+4
assigned by CODE-1 Plus during regular
processing.
DPVIN
24
N
Do not perform DPV validation using secondary
information.
DPVIN
52
N
DPVIN position 52 (RDI Indicator) indicates
whether to perform RDI processing:
• Blank — Perform DPV processing only.
• Y — Attempt both DPV and RDI processing.
• N — Do not attempt DPV processing. Perform
RDI processing only. If you specify “N” in
position 52, CODE-1 Plus does not generate a
USPS Form 3553.
SA OUT
69
M
For multiple standardized address matches, store
the standardized address anyway.
SA2OUT
15
N (default)
Do not perform preferred alias processing.
SA2OUT
50
A
Return alternate address.
Z5 OUT
66
X
For unique ZIP Code handling, store the
information indicated in position 72.
Total Solution
CODE-1 Plus can be used with other Pitney Bowes products as the first step to a total postal
discount and list management solution. Once you have processed a file with CODE-1 Plus, you can:
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Use the CODE-1 Plus reports and return codes to determine the quality of your input file.
Use the Pitney Bowes MailStream Plus software to obtain automation, carrier route, and
additional presort discounts such as machinable and non-automation presort rates.
Use MAIL360 to generate Intelligent Mail® Barcodes.
Use Residential Delivery Indicator to help you make informed shipping decisions by identifying
whether a delivery type is classified as residential or business (especially helpful for parcel
shippers and rate analysis agents).
Use List Conversion Plus to easily convert rented or purchased mailing lists from one format to
another more usable format.
21
User’s Guide - IBM i
CODE-1 Plus Overview
CODE-1 Plus Overview
CODE-1 Plus is divided into a batch component and an interactive component.
Using the Batch System
The batch system enables you to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Process a name-and-address file
Create, edit, and save CODE-1 Plus parameters
Submit CODE-1 Plus jobs
Generate output file(s)
Generate reports
Download and reduce the size of the CODE-1 Plus Database
Batch Processing Components
Component
Description
Batch Driver (C1BM00)
Acts as the “engine” by coordinating the matching and output engine
processes.
The standard C1BM00 driver program allows for 200 list codes, and
requires 390 K of memory. An identical C1BM00XL driver program
allows for up to 10,000 list codes, and requires 2.25 MB of memory to
run. To take advantage of the additional list code processing, change
your control language appropriately.
Address Analyzer Module
Analyzes each input record for use by the matcher.
Batch Matching Module
Matches the analyzed elements to the database to determine address
matches.
The figure below provides an overview of the CODE-1 Plus batch components
* Required to generate USPS Form 3553.
Release 4.1.0
22
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
CODE-1 Plus Overview
File Names
CODE-1 Plus Batch System Files (Part 1 of 2)
File Name
System File Name
Assignment
Description
City Database File
CODE-1 Plus City database file.
CITYDB
County Names Database File
CODE-1 Plus USPS County Names
database file.
COUNTY
Customization File
Site customization file for online.
G1CPFDF
Delivery Point Validation Files
(DPV)
Delivery Point Validation system files
• DPVDB for Flat DPV DB
• DPVHDB for Full DPV DB
• DPVSDB for Split DPV DB
Details Database File
CODE-1 Plus Details database file.
DTLDB
Enhanced Street Matching
(ESM) File
Enhanced Street Matching file
C1STRDB
Input Name-and-Address File
Contains the records that you want to
correct using CODE-1 Plus.
C1BMNAM
Input Parameter Record File
Contains the parameters that define
your batch job requirements. These
parameters are discussed later in
this chapter.
C1BMPRM
Invalid ZIP Code Unmatched
Output File
Contains the records with invalid ZIP
Codes that did not match against the
CODE-1 Plus database.
C1BMIZP
LACS Database File
LACSLink Database File
LLKDB
Line of Travel File
CODE-1 Plus Line of Travel
database file
LTMASTR
Locality Database File
CODE-1 Plus Locality database file.
LCLDB
Output 3553
USPS Form 3553.
PRNTCAS
Output Execution Log File
Contains the Execution Log.
PRNTXLG
Output Matched Records FIle
Contains all the records that CODE-1
Plus matched with the CODE-1 Plus
database and then verified and
corrected.
C1BMCOK
Output Reports File
Contains the CODE-1 Plus reports,
including the standard Parameter
Record Listing, Control Totals, and
Form 3553.
PRNTRPT
Output Statistics File
Contains all information currently
available in CODE-1 Plus generated
reports (with the exception of
percentages).
C1BMSTA
Release 4.1.0
23
User’s Guide - IBM i
CODE-1 Plus Overview
CODE-1 Plus Batch System Files (Part 2 of 2)
File Name
System File Name
Assignment
Description
Output Unmatched Records
File (Uncoded)
Contains the records with valid U.S.
ZIP Codes that did not match against
the CODE-1 Plus database for some
reason.
C1BMNCO
Preferred/Abbreviated
Database File
Preferred/Abbreviated Database File
C1PAL2
Residential Delivery File (RDI)
Residential Delivery File (RDI)
RDIMSTR
SuiteLink Database File
SuiteLink Database File
SLKDB
Z4CHANGE Option Database
Z4CHANGE USPS database.
Z4CHNG
ZIP + 4 Coded Output File
Contains all the records to which
CODE-1 Plus standardized the ZIP +
4 Codes.
C1BMZP4
ZIP Index Database File
CODE-1 Plus ZIP Index database
file.
ZIPIDX
System Components
When you type specifications for your input name-and-address records and for the layout and
contents of the output records, the batch system generates one or more output files of matched,
standardized name-and-address records. The are seven main components of batch CODE-1 Plus
are described in the following sections.
Defaults for Print Output
The Defaults for Print Output component allows you to specify the headers, footers, date, and the
number of lines to print on each page of the CODE-1 Plus reports.
Reformat Input Record
The Reformat Input Record component allows you to rearrange the components of your input
records before the record is processed. The information you identify is copied, but not removed,
from its original location in the input record. This feature is useful for saving data that might
otherwise be overwritten by data returned from CODE-1 Plus. A maximum of 100 MOVE I
operations can be defined for a job. The move operations are processed one at a time, in sequence.
Name/Address File Layout
The Name/Address File Layout component allows you to specify information about the layout of the
data in the input name-and-address records.
Name/Address Record Posting
The Name/Address Record Posting component allows you to define the content and layout of your
output records.
Release 4.1.0
24
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
CODE-1 Plus Overview
Reformat Output Record
The Reformat Output Record component allows you to rearrange pieces of the output record before
the record is written to the output file. CODE-1 Plus:
•
•
•
•
•
Processes the record
Copies the record to an output record array
Copies the entire record to a temporary work area (if requested)
Copies data from a specific location in the work area back to a specific location in the output
record array
Writes the information directly to your output file (or passes the information to an output exit
routine).
You can define a maximum of 100 MOVE O parameters for a job. The move operations are
processed one at a time, in sequence.
Report Selection
The Report Selection component allows you to determine the CODE-1 Plus reports to print when
you submit your job. Some reports are required and print for every job. You can select the optional
reports to print with your job.
Submit Batch Job
The Submit Batch Job component allows you to submit a job to:
•
•
•
Match your input records
Create your output records
Generate your reports
This component allows you to limit the number of records processed during the job. Limiting the
number of records processed during the job can be particularly useful when you want to test the
specifications you have defined for your job.
Release 4.1.0
25
User’s Guide - IBM i
The Interactive System
The Interactive System
The interactive system enables you to perform three functions:
•
•
•
Address matching
Database inquiry
Site customization
Address matching, database display, and site customization components operate independently of
the CODE-1 Plus batch driver. Use address matching as part of your own (or other vendor)
applications. The figure below illustrates the relationship of the interactive CODE-1 Plus
components.
For more detailed information on the CODE-1 Plus Interactive System, refer to "Getting Started With
the Interactive System” on page 234.
Address Matching
Interactive address matching enables you to:
•
•
•
•
Match a single input address against the master file.
Analyze return codes to determine the actions taken when attempting a match.
Detect the types and quantities of problems encountered in an input address.
Control the closeness (“tightness” or “looseness”) of address matches.
Additionally, the address matching function provides access to the Pitney Bowes Geographic
Coding Plus screen where you can access geographic match results for the ZIP and ZIP + 4 Code
from your address matching attempt.
Release 4.1.0
26
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
Other CODE-1 Plus™ Programs and Modules
Database Inquiry
Database inquiry lets you browse the contents of the CODE-1 Plus database. Using this feature, for
any city on the CODE-1 Plus database, you can display the following information:
•
Street Information — Leading directional, street names, street suffixes, post-directional, and ZIP
Codes.
House Information — Even/odd house number ranges, ZIP Codes, ZIP + 4 Code ranges, carrier
routes, USPS record types, alias information, and firm names
Firm Information — House and apartment number ranges, firm names, ZIP Codes, ZIP + 4
Codes, and carrier route codes.
Apartment Information — Apartment number ranges, ZIP Codes, ZIP + 4 Codes, carrier route
codes, USPS record types, apartment types, and number of firms.
ZIP Code Information — Long/short city names, state codes, and city types.
City Information — City names, state codes, ZIP Code ranges, city type codes, urbanization
indicators, and unique ZIP indicators.
•
•
•
•
•
Site Customization
Site customization enables you to do the following:
•
•
Update access passwords
Change site-specific default values.
For more detailed information on the CODE-1 Plus Interactive System, refer to "Getting Started With
Interactive Processing” on page 233.
Other CODE-1 Plus™ Programs and Modules
CODE-1 Plus™ also provides you with program modules, callable routines, and executable
programs for flexible use of CODE-1 Plus™ with your own applications.
Program Modules
The program modules enable you to analyze and match input addresses and add ZIP + 4 Codes
and carrier routes to your addresses. For more information about these program modules and call
areas, refer to your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide. There are platform limitations for the different
C1MATCHx memory models.
Program Modules (Part 1 of 2)
Module
Description
C1MATCHI
Address matcher for interactive processing.
C1MATCHB
Default address matcher for the batch environment (using 3 MB of memory).
C1MATCHS
Matcher for batch processing uses 1 MB (small memory model).
C1MATCHM
Matcher for batch processing uses 6 MB (medium memory model).
C1MATCHL
Matcher for batch processing uses 12 MB (large memory model).
Release 4.1.0
27
User’s Guide - IBM i
Other CODE-1 Plus™ Programs and Modules
Program Modules (Part 2 of 2)
Module
Description
C1MATCHH
Matcher for batch processing uses 28 MB (huge memory model).
C1ANZADR
Analyzes the elements of an input address, so that the elements can be used by
C1MATCHx for matching purposes. If an address cannot be matched against
the CODE-1 Plus™ database, it can be normalized to standard address formats.
To use a module, pass, as parameters, the names of pre-defined call areas. These call areas give
the module all the information necessary to perform the function accurately and return the
appropriate information. RPG copybooks are available in the Source member that is used in your
program to define the call areas.
Two other input call areas are available for IBM i users. G1CP has no calling parameters and
accesses the combined interactive database match/inquiry screens available from the Work with
Jobs screen. G1CP1 has no calling parameters and accesses the interactive database inquiry
screen in Flip mode positioned at a city name of your choice.
Callable Routines
CODE-1 Plus™ includes the following callable routines.
Callable Routines
Module
Description
C1BMCBD
Enables you to produce a sample CASS report with a callable version of the
CODE-1 Plus™ matcher. Current USPS regulations require any user-written
program calling CODE-1 Plus for the purpose of claiming automation discounts
to undergo CASS certification. Therefore, the user-written program must
generate and print the USPS Form 3553, not use the sample generated by
C1BMCBD.
C1PRPT
Enables you to print CODE-1 Plus™ reports without using the CODE-1 Plus™
batch driver.
C1CTYLKP
Enables you to match ZIP Codes to city/state combinations.
C1CTYLKC
Enables you to match ZIP Codes to city/state combinations from your own CICS
application.
EXTADDR2
Enables you to separately call a six-line address extractor.
G1CPLKB
Enables you to browse the contents of the CODE-1 Plus™ database from batch
applications.
G1STATW
Enables you to create statistical file records.
C1P430
Enables you to process only those input records that have not been coded by
CODE-1 Plus™ with the most recent changes according to the USPS
Z4CHANGE product.
C1PDR
Enables you to build a reduced-size database from either your delivery media or
a previously installed CODE-1 Plus™ database.
LTO10
Enables you to assign Line of Travel information to input records.
Release 4.1.0
28
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
Other CODE-1 Plus™ Programs and Modules
To use these callable routines, pass, as parameters, the names of pre-defined call areas. These call
areas give the routine all the information necessary to perform the function accurately and return the
appropriate information. For more information, refer to "CODE-1 Plus Callable Subroutines" in your
CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Executable Programs
The executable programs include the following:
Executable Programs
Executable Program
Description
G1CPDFL
Provides various functions related to the interactive system file G1CPFDF. It
can initialize or repair the file, and can be used to display the encrypted
password stored on the file’s ADMIN record. For more information about
G1CPDFL and the customization file, refer to "Customization File
Administration” on page 280.
G1G001
Enables you to print detailed reports using your coded record output file. To
execute the module, you define parameters. The parameters enable you to
define the input file; headers and footers to print on the reports; column
headers; report layout and content; and records to select based on input record
values. For more information on G1G001, refer to "Using G1G001" in your
CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
G1AUXBLD
Allows you to build an Early Warning System (EWS) auxiliary file.
C1DBRDI
Allows you to build an Residential Delivery File (RDI) to conduct RDI
processing.
C1PDRDSK
Allows you to create a reduced or regional CODE-1 Plus™ database from a
previously installed CODE-1 Plus™ database (disk). If you process name-andaddress records in a limited geographic region of the United States, building
and using a reduced database can save you a significant amount of disk space.
For more information about reducing your database, refer to "Creating a
Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database” on page 60.
C1DBSTSZ
Produces the CODE-1 Plus™ State Sizes Report. Using this program, you can
determine the total size, in bytes, of the CODE-1 Plus™ database and the
approximate sizes for each state’s data. The total size of the database is not
equal to the sum of the state sizes, because there is global data that is common
to all states. For more information about the State Sizes Report, refer to
"Generating Reports” on page 211.
C1PDBPRT
Enables you to produce the CODE-1 Plus™ Database Print Report. Using this
program, you can select up to 100 ZIP Code ranges and then print the
addresses from the database residing within those ranges. You can produce
reports with information relative to a single ZIP Code or a range of ZIP Codes.
For more information about the State Sizes Report, refer to "Generating
Reports” on page 211.
G1DBLOAD
Enables you to create a generic database load program.
G1DBTAP2
Copies complete or reduced databases to media files.
Release 4.1.0
29
User’s Guide - IBM i
Database Expiration
Database Expiration
The CODE-1 Plus™ database expires regularly in accordance with USPS regulations outlined in
DMM 708. When your CODE-1 Plus™ database is within 45 days of the expiration date, the
following message appears on your Parameter Record Listing Report in batch and on the CODE-1
Plus™ Interactive screen:
**********************************************************************************
* WARNING: THE CODE-1 PLUS MASTER FILE WILL EXPIRE IN 36 DAYS ON MM/DD/YYYY
* CONTACT PITNEY BOWES CUSTOMER SUPPORT IF ASSISTANCE IS NEEDED
**********************************************************************************
If your database expires (i.e. it is not current as defined by the DMM 708 matrix), CODE-1 Plus™ will
not run. In batch mode, the Parameter Record Listing Report prints with the following message:
**********************************************************************************
*
CODE-1 Plus Master File EXPIRED on MM/DD/YYYY
**********************************************************************************
The interactive matcher ceases to function in accordance with the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM)
A960 matrix. The interactive system inquiry area, however, remains available even after the
interactive matcher expires. In this case, the following message will be displayed on the prompt line
above the function key descriptions:
CODE-1 PLUS DATABASE IS EXPIRED
You can, however, use the EXTEND command to bypass the expiration date in the interactive
system.
You can use the BYPEXP parameter to override an expired database and run a job. However, a
USPS Form 3553 will not be produced. The following message prints.
**********************************************************************************
* USPS FORM 3553 SUPPRESSED DUE TO BYPASSING DATABASE EXPIRATION DATE CHECK *
**********************************************************************************
For more information on the BYPEXP parameter, refer to “Parameter Reference” in your CODE-1
Plus Reference Guide.
The Delivery Point Validation (DPV) option will stop working at the end of the fourth month from the
release of the database.
If you have an expired DPV database, this message will appear:
**********************************************************************************
*DELIVERY POINT VALIDATION SUPPRESSED DUE TO DATABASE EXPIRATION DATE CHECK*
**********************************************************************************
Release 4.1.0
30
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
Screens
Screens
Each component of CODE-1 Plus™ consists of a series of screens. Each screen contains fields into
which you type specifications about your job. To move from screen to screen within the CODE-1
Plus™ System, use the function keys. A sample screen is shown below.
Date/Time Stamp
and Job ID
System-defined screen
heading and sub-heading
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TEST
User-defined
System Heading
Program/ Screen ID
Release Number
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
Replace with screen heading desired
Name/Address Record Posting
Address Match Information Storage
[AM OUT] Specify storage of Address Match result information.
Field Names
USPS Record Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Return Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directional Return Code. . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Return Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apartment Return Code. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firm-name Return Code. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Probable Correctness Code. . . . . . .
Alternate Address Scheme Indicator . . . . . .
Street-name Match Score . . . . . . . . . . .
Firm-name Match Score . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Probable Correctness Code . . . . . .
ZIP Code Confirmed/Altered/Original indicator
VeriMove Universal Field . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD080
RXX.XM00
Posn
107
____
____
____
____
____
____
Len
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
250
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
F10=Additional storage
Function Key List
F24=Field Search
Entry Fields
Screen Components
The main elements that make up each screen are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Program and screen IDs
Release number
Date/time stamp
Job ID
User-defined system heading
System-defined screen heading
Fields
Function keys
31
User’s Guide - IBM i
Screens
Program and Screen ID
The program and screen IDs are located at the upper right of the screen. The program ID identifies
the program for this screen. The screen ID is a unique label that identifies the screen.
Program and Screen IDs
Character
1-4
Name
System ID
5-6
Module ID
Meaning
Possible Values
Identifies what Pitney Bowes
IBM i system this screen is a
part of.
• C1CP — Batch system
Identifies what module within
CODE-1 Plus™ this screen is a
part of (the modules are usually
the component name).
• NJ — Create New Job
• C1IN — Database installation
• CJ — Copy Job
• RJ — Rename Job
• MM — Work with Jobs (main menu)
• DS — Define and/or Submit
• PX — Defaults for Print Output
• F3 — Exit Confirmation
• OD — Name /Address Record Posting
• ID — Name/Address File Layout
• MI - Reformat Input Record
• MO - Reformat Output Record
• CF — Confirmation Compare Values
• RP — Report Selection
• SB — Submit Batch Job
• IP — Copy from an external file
• OP — Copy to an external file
• DB — Database Functions
• DR — Create reduced database
7-9
(screen ID
only)
Screen
Number
Identifies the screen within the
module.
Any 2- or 3-digit number
For example, the program ID on the previous page is C1CPOD00, and the screen ID in "Screens” on
page 31 is C1CPOD080.

Release 4.1.0
The screen numbers are not always in sequence or continuous. For example, if the screen ID
is C1CPOD18, that does not mean that this is the 18th screen in the Name/Address Record
Posting component. Also, it does not indicate that there are 18 screens total in the Name/
Address Record Posting component. Numbers are used for identification only.
32
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
Screens
Release Number
The release number is at the top right corner of the screen, directly below the screen ID. This tells
you the software release and modification level of CODE-1 Plus™. In our sample screen in Figure 3,
the release number is RXX.XM00.

Screen examples in this book do not show the release number. This is done to avoid
unnecessary updates to the documentation when there is a new release of the software and
the screens have not changed.
Date/Time Stamp
The date/time stamp, located in the upper left corner of the screen, shows you the current date and
time. In our sample screen in Figure 3, the time is HH:MM:SS and the date is shown as
MM/DD/YYYY.

The date/time stamp reflects the time at which the screen was “drawn,” and will not change
until you press a key that causes the screen to change. For example, if you were interrupted
in the middle of your work, and came back to your terminal after a few minutes, the date/time
stamp would not represent the current time.
Job ID
The job ID, located just below the date/time stamp in the upper left corner of the screen, uniquely
identifies this CODE-1 Plus™ job. It is not unique to a specific screen; while you are working with a
particular job, that job ID is displayed on every screen. In Figure 3, our job ID is “TEST.”

In our example screens throughout the rest of this book (except the tutorial), we do not show
the job IDs.
User-Defined System Heading
The user-defined system heading is always “Replace with screen heading desired” unless you
change it. The user-defined system heading is not unique to a particular screen or job — the same
heading will be displayed on each screen, regardless of the screen ID or job ID. This feature is
provided so that you may customize the CODE-1 Plus™ screen to contain your company's name or
a slogan across the top. You can enter "CN" from the Main Menu to change the User-Defined
Screen Heading.
System-Defined Screen Heading
The system-defined screen heading tells the name of the specific screen that is displayed on your
monitor. In addition to the screen heading, there is often a subheading that more uniquely identifies
the screen. For example, all of the screens in the Name/Address Record Posting component have
“Name/Address Record Posting” as the main system-defined screen heading, but only one screen
has the subheading, “Address Match Information Storage.”
Release 4.1.0
33
User’s Guide - IBM i
Saving to an External File
Fields
Fields are underlined “blanks” on the screen for you to fill in with information. Each field is labeled
with a field name, and has space for you to type data. You enter all of the information about your
CODE-1 Plus™ job through fields. Some fields are optional, and some fields have default values
that are used if you leave them blank.
Note that there is complete online help for each field (with the cursor in a field, simply press F1 or
Help). On our sample screen, the first field has the name “USPS Record Type” and has space for
you to type up to a 4-digit location and a 1-character length.
Function Keys
Each screen has a specific set of function keys associated with it. These function keys allow you to
move to a different screen, save information you have typed on this screen, or perform some task
with the data you have typed on the screen. At the bottom of each screen, you will find a list of the
function keys that are valid on that screen. In our example in Figure 2-3, the function keys listed are
F3, F6, F10, and F24.
There are some function keys that are global to the entire CODE-1 Plus™ System. These function
keys work the same for every screen on which they are available (though not every global function
key is available from every screen).
Function Keys
Function Key
Description
F1
Obtain online help.
F3
Exit the system.
F5
Refresh the screen (put the last-saved values back in the fields).
F6
Update the job by saving the information in the current component.
F12
Back-up one level to the previous screen, usually without saving your changes.
F17
Position the list at the top.
F18
Position the list at the bottom.
F19
Shift left to see more information.
F20
Shift right to see more information.
F24
Display additional function keys.
Saving to an External File
CODE-1 Plus™ provides you with the ability to save job data to an external file. Once you have
saved the data, you may then load the data from the file into other jobs. This is particularly useful if
you have a company standard, or a specific format for all of your company's name-and-address files.
The file you are saving to must be created before you submit the job to run. The file must be a
source physical file with a record length of 92.
Release 4.1.0
34
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 1: CODE-1 Plus Concepts
Online Help
Online Help
Each screen in CODE-1 Plus™ has online help available at the touch of a function key. Any time you
are unsure what you are supposed to type for a particular field, or what a specific function key does,
you can press F1 or your Help key. Detailed, context-sensitive information is displayed about the
purpose of the screen, the fields on the screen, and the function keys you can use from the screen.
The help text will be positioned to the information about the field your cursor was on when you
pressed Help or F1.
Release 4.1.0
35
User’s Guide - IBM i
Online Help
Release 4.1.0
36
User’s Guide - IBM i
Getting Started
In this chapter:


Getting Started After Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Creating a CODE-1 Plus Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
2
Getting Started After Installation
Getting Started After Installation
This chapter provides information on the files that were installed on your system and libraries that
were created during installation.
Creating a CODE-1 Plus Job
If you performed the standard CODE-1 Plus installation, the default product libraries are
[email protected]@PGMS (containing global/job management utilities) and G1C1PGMS (CODE-1 Plus
application files). The first time that you sign on, you will see the following menu:.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Pitney Bowes Software Application Selection
My Sample Job
G1MM01
G1MM0001
RXX.XM00
Select one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System
List Conversion System
Label Printing System
Merge/Purge System
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
Generalized Selection System
EZ-CASE Plus
Geographic Coding Plus
I/O-Jet Plus
Business Merge/Purge Plus
GeoTAX
VeriMove
60. Canadian/International Products
Option
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
38
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 2: Getting Started
Creating a CODE-1 Plus Job
1. Type a 5 in the Option field. The CODE-1 Plus™ Work with Jobs screen (C1CPMM03) displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
C1CPMM00
My Sample Job
C1CPMM03
Work with Jobs
RXX.XM00
Type options, press Enter.
3=Copy
4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 12=Work with
16=Submit 99=Release job lock
Position to job
OPT
JobID
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Creation
Date
*- - - - - - -Last Activity- - - - -* Work
Date
User
Function
Library
F5=Refresh
F19=Reclaim space
F6=Create
F11=Display Descriptions
F21=Print Summary F24=More keys
2. Press F6 to create a new job. You are prompted to type the new job ID. Keep in mind that the job
ID typed through this screen cannot already exist in the CODE-1 Plus™ system.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
New Job ID
OPT
JobID
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Work with Jobs
C1CPMM00
C1CPMM03
RXX.XM00
TUTOR
Creation
Date
*- - - - - - -Last Activity- - - - - -*
Date
User
Function
F5=Refresh
F19=Reclaim space
Work
Library
F6=Create
F11=Display Descriptions
F21=Print Summary F24=More keys
3. Type TUTOR in the New Job ID field, and press Enter. The Create New Job screen (C1CPNJ01)
displays.
Release 4.1.0
39
User’s Guide - IBM i
Creating a CODE-1 Plus Job
4. Fill in the fields as shown below.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Create New Job
C1CPNJ00
C1CPNJ01
RXX.XM00
Specify Library to hold job objects.
Library for job objects: DEMO
Provide job details as required:
Input N/A file . . . . . . . . . . C1TUTOR
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEMO
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *FIRST
Exit Routine
or
Job description. . . . . . . . . . QDFTJOBD
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . .
QGPL
F3=Exit

More...
F6=Create Job
In this tutorial, we use a work library called DEMO. Create this library before starting the
tutorial or specify a different library name (one that already exists on your system). If you
do not know a valid library to use, see your company's system administrator for help. You
cannot specify a Pitney Bowes product library.
5. Page down to view the fields on the next screen. CODE-1 Plus™ verifies that you have filled in
all fields correctly. The second Create New Job screen (C1CPNJ02) appears. We want to accept
all default values on this screen, so no action needs to be taken.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Create New Job
C1CPNJ00
C1CPNJ02
RXX.XM00
Select Address Matching output files.
Successfully coded file. . . . . C1NAMTUTOR
Library. . . . . . . . . . . .
*LIBWK
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . CODED
*LIBWK
ZIP+4 coded file . . . . . . . .
Library. . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C1NAMTUTOR
*LIBWK
ZIP4
*LIBWK
Unsuccessfully coded file. . . . C1NAMTUTOR
Library. . . . . . . . . . . .
*LIBWK
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNCODED
*LIBWK
Invalid ZIP(s) file. . . . . . .
Library. . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*LIBWK
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Create job
40
C1NAMTUTOR
*LIBWK
INVZIP
Bottom
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 2: Getting Started
Creating a CODE-1 Plus Job
6. Press F6 to create the new job. The job is created, and the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job
screen (C1CPDS02) appears. Notice that your job ID is displayed in the upper left corner, just
below the date.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
PX
MI
ID
OD
MO
RP
G9
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
SB
Submit Batch Job
F3=Exit
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
F12=PrevScrn
We have completed the task of creating the job.
7. If you don't want to define your specifications, press F3. You will again see the Work with Jobs
screen with your new job listed alphabetically among the other jobs.
CODE-1 Plus Parameters
Now that you have created a new job, you can start defining the job details. CODE-1 Plus jobs
require you to define the following basic components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
You can access these components from the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen. For each
component you define, CODE-1 Plus stores parameter definitions to the following members.
CODE-1 Plus Parameter Members (Part 1 of 2)
Member
Contents
FILEDF Members
BMPRM
FILEDF for the CODE-1 Plus program
Individual Parameter Members
@@PXT
Release 4.1.0
HEADER parameter record
41
User’s Guide - IBM i
Creating a CODE-1 Plus Job
CODE-1 Plus Parameter Members (Part 2 of 2)
Member
Contents
IDPRM
Input file parameter records
ODPRM
Output file parameter records
RPPRM
Report parameter records
MIPRM
Reformat Input Record
MOPRM
Reformat Output Record
Job Files
CODE-1 Plus creates several job files in the Pitney Bowes work library each time you run a job. The
xxxxx indicates the job name.
IBM i Data Files
File Name
Description
PRMC1xxxxx
Contains all the parameter files for your input, output, and report information.
C1NAMxxxxx
Contains all the results for your CODE-1 Plus processing: coded file, uncoded
file, invalid ZIP Code file, and ZIP + 4 file.
C1STAxxxxx
Contains the statistical information.
Release 4.1.0
42
User’s Guide - IBM i
System-Wide Commands
In this chapter:




Entering Commands at the Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Using C1RUNJOB to Run CODE-1 Plus Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Using C1SBMJOB to Submit CODE-1 Plus Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Using the Job Import Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
3
Entering Commands at the Command Line
Entering Commands at the Command Line
From a command line, you can enter the following commands to run or submit a CODE-1 Plus job:
•
•
C1RUNJOB – Runs the job interactively
C1SBMJOB – Submits the job to run in batch mode
When you enter the C1RUNJOB or C1SBMJOB commands, you have two options.
•
Type the command and then press F4 for a screen prompting you for the input name/address
file, library, and member, as well as processing limitations.
– Or –
•
Type the command and the Job ID of the job you want to run or submit, and then press Enter to
run or submit the job with the same name/address file and other parameters that you used last
time this job was submitted.
In addition to entering these commands at the system prompt, you can include them in your control
language (CL) programs to run or submit several jobs in succession.

For your system to recognize these commands, your library list must contain the CODE-1
Plus library (default G1C1PGMS). The libraries for other products should not be in the library
list.
Using C1RUNJOB to Run CODE-1 Plus Jobs
C1RUNJOB (CODE-1 Plus Run Job) is an optional command that executes a CODE-1 Plus job:
•
•
•
Interactively
From a command line
From within a control language program
You can use C1RUNJOB in a job stream to run jobs in a specific order. The library list must contain
the CODE-1 Plus library before C1RUNJOB can be executed using command ADDLIBLE
LIB(G1C1PGMS).
The C1RUNJOB command fields reflect the field values that are available through the job
submission function screens. The value *SAME indicates that the last values on those screens will
be used. However, the values typed on this command do not replace the values on the Submit
CODE-1 Plus Job screens.
Release 4.1.0
44
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 3: System-Wide Commands
Using C1RUNJOB to Run CODE-1 Plus Jobs
Executing C1RUNJOB Interactively
To execute the C1RUNJOB command interactively:
1. Position your cursor on the command line.
2. Type C1RUNJOB, and press F4. The Run CODE-1 Plus Job (C1RUNJOB) screen displays.
Run CODE-1 Plus Job (C1RUNJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
Job ID . . . . . . . . . . .
Input N/A File Name . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . .
Input File Exit Routine . .
Extended List Code Support?
Memory Module Options . . .
Use RDI Large Memory Module?
CODE-1 Plus Database Library
Override expired database? .
Output File Record Length .
Coded Output N/A File Name .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . .
Coded file Exit Routine . .
Delete existing Coded file?
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*DEFAULT
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
F12=Cancel
Character value
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME, *NONE
Name, *SAME
Y, N
S, M, L, H
Y, N
Name, *DEFAULT
Y, N
Number
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME, *NONE
Name, *SAME
N, Y
More...
F13=How to use this display
The initial C1RUNJOB screen displays three columns.
•
•
•
The first column lists the field and parameter selections available in C1RUNJOB.
The second column provides entry fields for all parameter definitions.
The third column lists all valid values or valid value types for each field.
3. Press F11 to display the keywords for your parameter selections. The keywords provide an
alternative method for typing commands and parameters.
4. Complete the entries on this screen. When you use C1RUNJOB:
•
•
Release 4.1.0
You must specify the Job ID to execute.
If you specify *SAME for any output file, library, member name, or exit routine name,
CODE-1 Plus uses either the value specified in your most recent job submission or the
default values.
45
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using C1RUNJOB to Run CODE-1 Plus Jobs
5. Page down to see additional C1RUNJOB selections.
Run CODE-1 Plus Job (C1RUNJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
Produce ZIP+4 Coded file? . .
ZIP+4 Coded Output N/A File .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZIP+4 Coded file Exit Routine
Dlt existing ZIP+4 Coded file?
Produce Invalid ZIP file? . .
Invalid ZIP Output N/A File .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invalid ZIP file Exit Routine
Dlt existing Invalid ZIP file?
Produce Uncoded file? . . . .
Uncoded Output N/A File Name .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
F12=Cancel
N, Y
Name,
Name,
Name,
Name,
N, Y
N, Y
Name,
Name,
Name,
Name,
N, Y
N, Y
Name,
Name,
Name,
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME, *NONE
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME, *NONE
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME, *NONE
More...
F13=How to use this display
6. Use the instructions for completing the first screen to complete the second screen with valid
entries for your job.
7. Page down to see additional C1RUNJOB selections.
Run CODE-1 Plus Job (C1RUNJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
Uncoded file Exit Routine . .
Delete existing Uncoded file?
Produce Statistics file? . . .
Statistics File Name . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dlt existing Statistics file?
Street,Firm,Dir/Sfx Match Code
Return Vanity City Names? . .
Accept Multiple Matches? . . .
Dual Address Match Logic . . .
Mixed Case . . . . . . . . . .
Return ZIP if not Correlated?
Store Non-Standard PMB Nbrs? .
Max Address Correctness . . .
Max Overall Correctness . . .
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F12=Cancel
Name, *SAME
N, Y
N, Y
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME, *NONE
N, Y
Character value
Y, N
Y, N
N, S, P
C, L
Y, N
Y, N
0-9
0-9
More...
F13=How to use this display
Complete the fields on the third C1RUNJOB screen with valid entries for your job.
Release 4.1.0
46
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 3: System-Wide Commands
Using C1RUNJOB to Run CODE-1 Plus Jobs
8. Page down to see additional C1RUNJOB selections.
Run CODE-1 Plus Job (C1RUNJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
CASS Configuration Sfx . . . .
Terminate if Non-CASS cert? .
Enhanced HR Alt Matching? . .
Mult Sec Component Proc? . . .
Execution log counter . . . .
Enhanced Street Matching? . .
Limit match to ZIP locality? .
Split Indica Processing? . . .
Write NCO if ZIP+4 = 0000,9999
Append C/O Data Flag . . . . .
Low ZIP of ZIP range . . . . .
High ZIP of ZIP range . . . .
Input records to skip . . . .
Fraction of input to process .
Max input records to process .
Nth records to process . . . .
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
00-99
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Number
S, A
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Character value
Character value
Number
Number
Number
Number
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Complete the fields on the fourth C1RUNJOB screen with valid entries for your job.
9. Page down to see additional C1RUNJOB selections.
Run CODE-1 Plus Job (C1RUNJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
Included or Excluded
Fraction of records . .
EXITOP Program Name . .
EXITOP CODE-1 Plus ID .
EXITOP User-Defined Data
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CASS-Certified Company Name
CASS-Certified Software Name
CASS-Certified Software:
Version . . . . . . . . .
Release . . . . . . . . .
Modification . . . . . . .
Z4CHANGE-Cert Company Name .
Z4CHANGE-Cert SW Name/Ver .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
. .
. .
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
ELOT-Cert Company Name . . . . .
*SAME
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
INC, EXC
Number
Name, *SAME
P
Character value
Character value
Character value
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Complete the fields on the fifth C1RUNJOB screen with valid entries for your job.
Release 4.1.0
47
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using C1SBMJOB to Submit CODE-1 Plus Jobs
10. Page down to see additional C1RUNJOB selections.
Run CODE-1 Plus Job (C1RUNJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
ELOT-Cert Software Name/Ver
. .
*SAME
Use Auxiliary Reference File? .
Write Aux to NCO or COK? . . . .
N, Y
N, C
Bottom
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
F13=How to use this display
Complete the fields on the sixth C1RUNJOB screen with valid entries for your job.
11. Press Enter to run your job using your specified parameters.
Using C1SBMJOB to Submit CODE-1 Plus Jobs
C1SBMJOB (CODE-1 Plus™ Submit Job) is an optional command that submits a
CODE-1 Plus™ job to batch from the command line or from within a control language program. You
can use C1SBMJOB in a jobstream to submit jobs in a specific order. The library list must contain
the CODE-1 Plus™ library before C1SBMJOB can be executed.
The fields on the C1SBMJOB command reflect the field values that are available through the job
submission function screens. The value “*SAME” indicates that the last values on those screens will
be used. The values typed on this command, however, will not replace the values on the Submit
CODE-1 Plus™ Job screens.

Release 4.1.0
The Submit Job command (C1SBMJOB) is identical to the Run Job command
(C1RUNJOB) except for the addition of the job description, job name, and hold on queue
parameters.
48
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 3: System-Wide Commands
Using C1SBMJOB to Submit CODE-1 Plus Jobs
Executing C1SBMJOB Interactively
To execute the C1SBMJOB command interactively:
1. Position your cursor on the command line.
2. Type C1SBMJOB, and press F4. The Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1SBMJOB) screen displays.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1SBMJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
Job ID . . . . . . . . . . .
Input N/A File Name . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . .
Input File Exit Routine . .
Extended List Code Support?
Memory Module Options . . .
Use RDI Large Memory Module?
CODE-1 Plus Database Library
Override expired database? .
Output File Record Length .
Coded Output N/A File Name .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . .
Coded file Exit Routine . .
Delete existing Coded file?
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*DEFAULT
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
F12=Cancel
Character value
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME, *NONE
Name, *SAME
Y, N
S, M, L, H
Y, N
Name, *DEFAULT
Y, N
Number
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME, *NONE
Name, *SAME
N, Y
More...
F13=How to use this display
The initial C1SBMJOB screen displays three columns.
•
•
•
The first column lists the field and parameter selections available in C1SBMJOB.
The second column provides entry fields for all parameter definitions.
The third column lists all valid values or valid value types for each field.
3. Press F11 to display the keywords for your parameter selections. The keywords provide an
alternative method for typing commands and parameters.
4. Complete the entries on this screen. When you use C1SBMJOB:
•
•
Release 4.1.0
You must specify the Job ID to execute.
If you specify *SAME for any output file, library, member name, or exit routine name,
CODE-1 Plus uses either the value specified in your most recent job submission or the
default values.
49
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using C1SBMJOB to Submit CODE-1 Plus Jobs
5. Page down to see additional C1SBMJOB selections.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1SBMJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
Produce ZIP+4 Coded file? . .
ZIP+4 Coded Output N/A File .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZIP+4 Coded file Exit Routine
Dlt existing ZIP+4 Coded file?
Produce Invalid-ZIP file? . .
Invalid ZIP Output N/A File .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invalid ZIP file Exit Routine
Dlt existing Invalid ZIP file?
Produce Uncoded file? . . . .
Uncoded Output N/A File Name .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
F12=Cancel
N, Y
Name,
Name,
Name,
Name,
N, Y
N, Y
Name,
Name,
Name,
Name,
N, Y
N, Y
Name,
Name,
Name,
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME, *NONE
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME, *NONE
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME, *NONE
More...
F13=How to use this display
6. Use the instructions for completing the first screen to complete the second screen with valid
entries for your job.
7. Page down to see additional C1SBMJOB selections.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1SBMJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
Uncoded file Exit Routine . .
Delete existing Uncoded file?
Produce Statistics file? . . .
Statistics File Name . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dlt existing Statistics file?
Street,Firm,Dir/Sfx Match Code
Return Vanity City Names? . .
Accept Multiple Matches? . . .
Dual Address Match Logic . . .
Mixed Case . . . . . . . . . .
Return ZIP if not Correlated?
Store Non-Standard PMB Nbrs? .
Max Address Correctness . . .
Max Overall Correctness . . .
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F12=Cancel
Name, *SAME
N, Y
N, Y
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME
Name, *SAME, *NONE
N, Y
Character value
Y, N
Y, N
N, S, P
C, L
Y, N
Y, N
0-9
0-9
More...
F13=How to use this display
Complete the fields on the third C1SBMJOB screen with valid entries for your job.
Release 4.1.0
50
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 3: System-Wide Commands
Using C1SBMJOB to Submit CODE-1 Plus Jobs
8. Page down to see additional C1SBMJOB selections.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1SBMJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
CASS Configuration Sfx . . . .
Terminate if Non-CASS cert? .
Enhanced HR Alt Matching? . .
Mult Sec Component Proc? . . .
Execution log counter . . . .
Enhanced Street Matching? . .
Limit match to ZIP locality? .
Split Indica Processing? . . .
Write NCO if ZIP+4 = 0000,9999
Append C/O Data Flag . . . . .
Low ZIP of ZIP range . . . . .
High ZIP of ZIP range . . . .
Input records to skip . . . .
Fraction of input to process .
Max input records to process .
Nth records to process . . . .
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
00-99
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Number
S, A
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Y, N
Character value
Character value
Number
Number
Number
Number
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Complete the fields on the fourth C1SBMJOB screen with valid entries for your job.
9. Page down to see additional C1SBMJOB selections.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1SBMJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
Included or Excluded
Fraction of records . .
EXITOP Program Name . .
EXITOP CODE-1 Plus ID .
EXITOP User-Defined Data
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CASS-Certified Company Name
CASS-Certified Software Name
CASS-Certified Software:
Version . . . . . . . . .
Release . . . . . . . . .
Modification . . . . . . .
Z4CHANGE-Cert Company Name .
Z4CHANGE-Cert SW Name/Ver .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
. .
. .
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
.
.
.
.
.
*SAME
*SAME
ELOT-Cert Company Name . . . . .
*SAME
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
INC, EXC
Number
Name, *SAME
P
Character value
Character value
Character value
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Complete the fields on the fifth C1SBMJOB screen with valid entries for your job.
Release 4.1.0
51
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using the Job Import Utility
10. Page down to see additional C1SBMJOB selections.
Run CODE-1 Plus Job (C1RUNJOB)
Type choices, press Enter.
ELOT-Cert Software Name/Ver
. .
*SAME
Use Auxiliary Reference File? .
Write Aux to NCO or COK? . . . .
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
N, Y
N, C
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
Complete the fields on the sixth C1SBMJOB screen with valid entries for your job.
11. Press Enter to submit your job for batch processing using your specified parameters.
Using the Job Import Utility
Use the Job Import Utility to create a ready-to-run job from a flat parameter file and parameters
specified on the import command. To use the Job Import Utility, follow these steps:
1. Add the product install and global library to your library list.
Use the ADDLIBLE or EDTLIBL command.
ADDLIBLE LIB(G1C1PGMS)
ADDLIBLE LIB([email protected]@PGMS).
2. Verify that the job does not already exist.
a. Call G1MM01.
b. Select option 5: CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System.
c. Verify that the job does not appear in the list.
3. Create a file to hold the job parameters to be imported using the create source file command:
CRTSRCPF FILE(MYLIB/PARMFILE) RCDLEN(92)

The file must have a record length of 92.
You may also use an existing source file.
4. FTP the job parameters into the source file using your preferred method.
You will FTP the parameter file from the source platform (Windows or Unix, for example) into a
new or existing member of the source physical file created in step 3.

Release 4.1.0
Some FTP clients cannot send parameters directly to a source physical file. In these
cases, create an 80-byte file and FTP the parameter file into that file. Copy that file to the
source physical file using the CPYF command with parameter option
FMTOPT(*CVTSRC).
52
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 3: System-Wide Commands
Using the Job Import Utility
5. Import the job. Type IMPJOBC1P and press F4. The Import CODE-1 Plus Job (IMPJOBC1P)
screen displays.
Import CODE-1 Plus Job (IMPJOBC1P)
Type choices, press Enter.
Parm Input File Name . .
Library . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . .
Job ID . . . . . . . . .
Job Work Library . . . .
Create Work Library? . .
Job Input N/A File Name
Library . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
N
F12=Cancel
Name
Name
Name, *FIRST
Character value
Name
Y, N
Name
Name
Name, *FIRST
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
6. Complete the fields on the IMPJOBC1P screen with valid entries for your job.
Parameter
Description
[Parameter] Input File
Name/Library/Member
Source physical file that you created in step 3 and member
you FTP'd the parameters into in step 4.
Job ID
Name of the job you want to create. A Job ID may be from
one to five characters in length. The characters may be AZ, 0-9, or special characters $, @, #, or _. Embedded
blanks are not permitted.
Job Work Library
Name of the library where the IBM i parameter file will be
created (PRMC1jobid).
Create Work Library
Specify whether to create the Job Work Library if it does not
already exist. If library does not exist but Create Work
Library was not specified, the program will fail with
CPF9810.
Job Input N/A File Name/Library/Member
In the created job, this is the default input file name on the
job submission screen. Specify the input file name here
(there is no parameter to define the input file name).

Other variables on the Submit Batch Job screens (C1CPSBnn) are set to default values,
including job description and output file names.
7. Verify the results.
a. Review the IBM i parm file using the WRKMBRPDM command:
WRKMBRPDM C1WORKLIB/PRMC1jobid
In this case, you would use:
WRKMBRPDM C1WORKLIB/PRMC1DEMO
Release 4.1.0
53
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using the Job Import Utility
b. Use option 5 to view the members.
Work with Members Using PDM
File . . . . . .
Library . . . .
PRMC1DEMO
C1WORKLIB
Position to
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit
3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display
8=Display description 9=Save 13=Change text
Opt
Member
@@PXT
BMPRM
G9PRM
IDPRM
IGNORED
MIPRM
MOPRM
ODPRM
Type
MDG1ISPL
. . . . .
6=Print
7=Rename
14=Compile 15=Create module..
Text
[email protected]@PXT Parameter Cards
380BMPRM Parameter Cards
850G9PRM Parameter Cards
500IDPRM Parameter Cards
Recognized but ignored parm cards
300MIPRM Parameter Cards
700MOPRM Parameter Cards
600ODPRM Parameter Cards
More...
Parameters or command
===>
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F9=Retrieve
F10=Command entry
F5=Refresh
F23=More options
F6=Create
F24=More keys
8. Review the following members by specifying option 5=Display.
Parameter Member
Description
IGNORED
Parameters that were recognized, but not otherwise
processed, such as TESTIT and CHCKPT.
ORIGINAL
Copy of the complete list of parameters being imported, as
specified in step 5
PROCESSED
Parameters that were imported, but that do not appear in
any parameter member, such as parameters that are
specified on the “Submit Batch Job” screens. For example:
FILEDF, DB LIB, BYPEXP, AUXIL1, and EXITOP, and so
on. The values on those parameters will appear on the
“Submit Batch Job” screens.
UNKNOWN
Parameters that were ignored because their names were
unrecognized.
Other members
Contain the imported, sorted-out parameters used by the
application.

Parameters that are commented out with a leading “*” (asterisk) or “* “ (asterisk+space) are
sorted to the appropriate member, but are not otherwise processed.
9. Run the job.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Verify that the job now exists and is ready to run with no modifications.
Start the product by calling G1MM00, or G1MM01.
Select option 5: CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System.
The Last Activity displayed on the Work with Jobs screen (C1CPMM03) will show as "Import
Job"
e. On the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (C1CPDS02), the values listed under Last
Activity indicate the date and time the job was imported, and will show user IMPJOBC1P.
Release 4.1.0
54
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 3: System-Wide Commands
Using the Job Import Utility
Example
This example describes the steps to create a job using an existing library:
•
•
•
•
Named DEMO
Using the work library C1WORKLIB
Using the product install library G1C1PGMS
Created from parameters FTP'd into the file MYLIB/PARMFILE member PARMMBR
This example assumes the library MYLIB already exists.
1. Run the commands ADDLIBLE LIB(G1C1PGMS) and ADDLIBLE LIB([email protected]@PGMS).
2. CALL G1MM01 and select option 5: CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System and verify that
the job DEMO does not appear in the list.
3. Run the command:
CRTSRCPF FILE(MYLIB/PARMFILE) RCDLEN(92).
4. FTP parameters into MYLIB/PARMFILE member PARMMBR.
5. Run the IMPJOBC1P command.
6. Verify the results of the import. In this case, you would use:
WRKMBRPDM C1WORKLIB/PRMC1DEMO
Use option 5 to display the contents of the members.
7. Run the job.
a. CALL G1MM01 and select option 5: CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System.
b. Use option 16 next to the job "DEMO" or use the commands C1RUNJOB or C1SBMJOB to run
or submit the job. For example:
C1RUNJOB JOBID(DEMO).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
Replace with screen heading desired
Work with Jobs
Type options, press Enter.
3=Copy
4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename
16=Submit 99=Release job lock
Opt JobID
16 DEMO
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Release 4.1.0
T
M
B
12=Work with
Position to job
Creation
*----------- Last Activity --------------*
Date
Date
User
Function
01/27/2016 01/27/2016 IMPJOBC1P Import Job
F5=Refresh
F19=Reclaim space
F6=Create
F21=Print Summary
55
C1CPMM00
C1CPMM03
RXX.XM00
Work
Library
C1WORKLIB
F11=Display Descriptions
F24=More keys
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using the Job Import Utility
Error Messages
IMPJOBC1P may return the following escape messages:
•
•
IMP0100: Job already exists
All CHKOBJ escape messages, including:
– CPF9810: Library xxxxxxxxxx not found
– CPF9801: Object xxxxxxxxxx in library xxxxxxxxxx not found (file not found)
– CPF9815: Member xxxxxxxxxx file xxxxxxxxxx in library xxxxxxxxxx not found
Release 4.1.0
56
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using the Database
Functions
In this chapter:









What Are the Database Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Accessing the Database Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Creating a Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Installing a CODE-1 Plus Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database State Size Reports . . . . . . . .72
Displaying Database Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Changing the Default CODE-1 Plus Database Library . . . . . . . . .74
Converting EWS File into CODE-1 Plus Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Returning to the Work With Jobs Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
4
What Are the Database Functions?
What Are the Database Functions?
CODE-1 Plus™ provides utilities that allow you to:
•
•
•
•
•
Reduce the size of the CODE-1 Plus™ database
Specify the location of the CODE-1 Plus™ database files
Install a new CODE-1 Plus™ database
Display CODE-1 Plus™ database information
Change the default library name for CODE-1 Plus™ database files.
These options are available through the database functions menu — a utility that can be accessed
through the Work with Jobs screen. The CODE-1 Plus™ System provides the following screens for
working with the database functions:
•
•
•
•
Create Reduced Database Files
Print CODE-1 Plus™ Database State Size Report
Install CODE-1 Plus™ Database
Database Functions (for changing the default library).
Accessing the Database Functions Menu
To access the Database Functions Menu, you need to be positioned at the Work with Jobs Menu.
For more details on accessing the Work with Jobs Menu, refer to the IBM i Job Management Guide.
1. Press <F20> from the Work with Jobs screen.
HH:MM:SS
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
T
MM/DD/YYYY
My Sample Job
M
[Job]
Work with Jobs
B
Type options, Press Enter.
3=Copy
4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 12=Work with
16=Submit 99=Release job lock
Position
OPT
JobID
BRK01
JOB01
JOB02
JOB03
JOB04
JOB05
JOB06
JOB07
JOB08
JOB09
JOB10
JOB11
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel

Release 4.1.0
Creation
*- - - - Date
Date
05/01/1999 05/01/1999
05/01/2000 05/01/2000
05/01/2001 05/01/2001
05/01/2002 05/01/2002
05/01/2003 05/01/2003
05/01/2004 05/01/2004
05/01/2005 05/01/2005
05/01/2006 05/01/2006
05/01/2007 05/01/2007
09/01/2008 09/01/2008
10/01/2008 10/01/2008
11/01/2008 11/01/2008
F5=Refresh
F19=Reclaim space
- -Last Activity- - User
Function
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
D1DEF
Upd: Print
- - -*
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
Dflts
C1CPMM00
C1CPMM03
RXX.XM00
to job
Work
Library
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
UPTEST
F6=Create
F11=Display Descriptions
F21=Print Summary F24=More keys
“F20=Database Functions” does not need to be displayed at the bottom of the Work with
Jobs screen to access this function.
58
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Accessing the Database Functions Menu
2. The Database Functions screen displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Database Functions
C1CPDB00
C1CPDB01
RXX.XM00
Select one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
P.
Option
Reduce DB by State
Install DB
Import RDI Tables
Print DB Detail Reports
Print DB State Size Report
Display DB Information
Change default DB
Convert EWS File
Load License File
Print License Report
Create and process the DPV Seed File
Display encrypted administration password
__
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
59
User’s Guide - IBM i
Creating a Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database
Creating a Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database
The database functions allow you to create a reduced database. Through the Create Reduced
Database screen, you can create a reduced database that includes only those states you selected.
Reduced databases are useful when working with limited storage space.
Accessing the Create Reduced Database Screen
To access the Create Reduced Database screen:
1. Type 1 in the Option field of the Database Functions screen and press Enter.
2. The Create Reduced Database screen displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
C1CPDR00
My Sample Job
C1CPDR01
Create Reduced Database
RXX.XM00
MonthName YYYY Database created by CODE-1 Plus NN.N
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select State
Opt
F3=Exit
3D Range
006-009
008-008
010-027
028-029
030-038
039-049
050-059
060-069
070-089
100-149
150-196
197-199
F6=Create
Abbr
PR
VI
MA
RI
NH
ME
VT
CT
NJ
NY
PA
DE
Original Database Library: C1DBFILES
Reduced Database Library:
State
Puerto Rico
Virgin Islands
Massachusetts
Rhode Island
New Hampshire
Maine
Vermont
Connecticut
New Jersey
New York
Pennsylvania
Delaware
More...
F10=Selected only
States on the Create Reduced Database screen display in order of ascending 3-digit ZIP Code
ranges (the first 3 digits of the state's inclusive 5-digit ZIP Codes). Every state has a unique
range of 3-digit ZIP Codes.
For example, referring to the screen shown above, all ZIP Codes in Rhode Island either begin
028xx or 029xx. Option fields are provided at the left of each 3-digit range in order to include that
range in the reduced database.

To estimate the size of your reduced database, use the Print CODE-1 Plus Database
State Size Report option on the Database Functions screen.
This screen has two views: the Display All view and the Selected Only view. The Selected Only
view displays only the 3-digit ranges you have selected (i.e., states with a “1" in their Option
field). All other 3-digit ranges are eliminated from the display. Press F10 to toggle between the
two views.

Release 4.1.0
All states and 3-digit ranges available cannot be displayed on a single screen. You can
access 3-digit ranges that are not shown on the screen by paging up and down the list.
60
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Creating a Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database
Specifying the Library for the Reduced Database
CODE-1 Plus™ does not delete files when reducing a database. Instead, CODE-1 Plus™ recreates
the CODE-1 Plus™ database files you select and stores the files another library. For this reason, it is
necessary to specify the library in which the database is to be recreated.
To specify the library:
1. Position your cursor at the Reduced Database Library field.
2. Type the name of the library that will hold the reduced database.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Create Reduced Database
MonthName YYYY Database created by CODE-1 Plus NN.N
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select State
Opt
F3=Exit
3D Range
006-009
008-008
010-027
028-029
030-038
039-049
050-059
060-069
070-089
100-149
150-196
197-199
F6=Create
Abbr
PR
VI
MA
RI
NH
ME
VT
CT
NJ
NY
PA
DE
C1CPDR00
C1CPDR01
RXX.XM00
Original Database Library:
Reduced Database Library:
State
Puerto Rico
Virgin Islands
Massachusetts
Rhode Island
New Hampshire
Maine
Vermont
Connecticut
New Jersey
New York
Pennsylvania
Delaware
F10=Selected only
More...
The library specified to contain the reduced database must be a valid library and cannot already
contain a CODE-1 Plus database. Attempting to create a reduced CODE-1 Plus database in a
library that already contains one results in an error message.
Selecting States to be Included in the Reduced Database
Option fields are provided at the left of each 3-digit range on the Create Reduced Database screen.
There are only two options for these fields — a “1" in one of these fields indicates that the associated
state is to be included in the reduced database. If you leave the field blank, the state is not included.
To select the states you want:
Release 4.1.0
61
User’s Guide - IBM i
Creating a Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database
1. Type 1 in the Opt field to the left of each state you want to include in the database.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
C1CPDR00
My Sample Job
C1CPDR01
Create Reduced Database
RXX.XM00
MonthName YYYY Database created by CODE-1 Plus™
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select State
Opt
_
_
1
_
_
_
_
_
1
_
1
_
F3=Exit

3D Range
006-009
008-008
010-027
028-029
030-038
039-049
050-059
060-069
070-089
090-098
100-149
150-196
Abbr
PR
VI
MA
RI
NH
ME
VT
CT
NJ
AE
NY
PA
F6=Create
Original Database Library:
Reduced Database Library:
DEMO
State
Puerto Rico
Virgin Islands
Massachusetts
Rhode Island
New Hampshire
Maine
Vermont
Connecticut
New Jersey
APO AE
New York
Pennsylvania
More...
F10=Selected only
To select states and 3-digit ranges not shown on the screen, page down to view
additional choices.
Viewing Your Selections and Storage Space Requirements
After indicating all states to include in the database, you may display information for only those
states and 3-digit ranges you selected.
1.
To display the states and 3-digit ranges you have selected, press F10.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
C1CPDR00
My Sample Job
C1CPDR01
Create Reduced Database
RXX.XM00
MonthName YYYY Database created by CODE-1 Plus™
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select State
Opt
3D Range
Abbr
_
006-009
PR
_
008-008
VI
1
010-027
MA
_
028-029
RI
_
030-038
NH
_
039-049
ME
_
050-059
VT
_
060-069
CT
1
070-089
NJ
_
090-098
AE
1
100-149
NY
_
150-196
PA
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Create
Original Database Library:
Reduced Database Library:
State
Puerto Rico
Virgin Islands
Massachusetts
Rhode Island
New Hampshire
Maine
Vermont
Connecticut
New Jersey
APO AE
New York
Pennsylvania
DEMO
More...
F10=Selected only
62
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Creating a Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database
2. CODE-1 Plus displays only the 3-digit ranges that have a “1” in the associated Option field. The
example below shows the selected states from the previous page (Massachusetts, New Jersey,
and New York).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
C1CPDR00
My Sample Job
C1CPDR01
Create Reduced Database
RXX.XM00
MonthName YYYY Database created by CODE-1 Plus™
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select State
Opt
1
1
1
3D Range
010-027
070-089
100-149
Abbr
MA
NJ
NY
Original Database Library:
Reduced Database Library:
DEMO
State
Massachusetts
New Jersey
New York
Bottom
F3=Exit

F6=Create
F10=Selected only
If no Reduced Database Library is indicated or if the library specified could not be
found, an error message displays.
Changing Your Selections
You can change your selections at any time before you create the reduced database. Ranges can
be added or subtracted by using the Create Reduced Database screen displaying all 3-digit ranges.
Release 4.1.0
63
User’s Guide - IBM i
Creating a Reduced CODE-1 Plus Database
1. To return to a full display of 3-digit ranges from the “selected only” display, press F10 (Display
All) from the “selected only” display.
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
C1CPDR00
My Sample Job
C1CPDR01
Create Reduced Database
MonthName YYYY Database created by CODE-1 Plus™
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select State
Opt
1
1
1
3D Range
010-027
070-089
100-149
Abbr
MA
NJ
NY
Original Database Library:
Reduced Database Library:
DEMO
State
Massachusetts
New Jersey
New York
Bottom
F3=Exit
F6=Create
F10=Display All
2. You return to the previous display.
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
C1CPDR00
My Sample Job
C1CPDR01
Create Reduced Database
MonthName YYYY Database created by CODE-1 Plus™
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select State
Opt
_
_
1
_
_
_
_
_
1
_
1
_
F3=Exit
3D Range
006-009
008-008
010-027
028-029
030-038
039-049
050-059
060-069
070-089
090-098
100-149
150-196
F6=Create
Abbr
PR
VI
MA
RI
NH
ME
VT
CT
NJ
AE
NY
PA
Original Database Library:
Reduced Database Library:
State
Puerto Rico
Virgin Islands
Massachusetts
Rhode Island
New Hampshire
Maine
Vermont
Connecticut
New Jersey
APO AE
New York
Pennsylvania
DEMO
More...
F10=Selected only
3. To add or subtract a range from this display, type or delete a 1 in the option field of each range
you want to add or subtract.
4. If desired, you can press F10 again and have CODE-1 Plus™ display the new set of selected
ranges.
You can continue to add or subtract ranges in this way until you are satisfied with your selections.
Release 4.1.0
64
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Installing a CODE-1 Plus Database
Creating the Reduced Database
When you have selected all 3-digit ranges that you want, you are ready to create the reduced
database. To create the reduced database:
1. Press F6.
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
C1CPDR00
My Sample Job
C1CPDR01
Create Reduced Database
MonthName YYYY Database created by CODE-1 Plus
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select State
Opt
_
_
1
_
_
_
_
_
1
_
1
_
F3=Exit
3D Range
006-009
008-008
010-027
028-029
030-038
039-049
050-059
060-069
070-089
090-098
100-149
150-196
F6=Create
Abbr
PR
VI
MA
RI
NH
ME
VT
CT
NJ
AE
NY
PA
Original Database Library:
Reduced Database Library:
State
Puerto Rico
Virgin Islands
Massachusetts
Rhode Island
New Hampshire
Maine
Vermont
Connecticut
New Jersey
APO AE
New York
Pennsylvania
DEMO
More...
F10=Selected only
2. CODE-1 Plus™ recreates the records from the original database.
Installing a CODE-1 Plus Database
The database functions provide a utility to install CODE-1 Plus™ databases from the master file
media supplied with the system. This option allows you to install updated or new CODE-1 Plus™
databases obtained from Pitney Bowes, or move an existing CODE-1 Plus™ database from media
to a new library. This function can be performed from the Install CODE-1 Database screen,
accessed from the Database Functions screen.
Accessing the Install CODE-1 Plus Database Screen
To perform a database installation from your media device, you must first access the Install new
CODE-1 Plus Database screen from the Database Functions screen. To access the Install DB
screen:
1. Type 2 in the Option field of the Database Functions screen and press Enter.
Release 4.1.0
65
User’s Guide - IBM i
Installing a CODE-1 Plus Database
2.
The Install CODE-1 Plus™ Databases screen appears.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Install CODE-1 Plus Databases
C1INDB01
C1INDB01
RXX.XM00
Specify database installation parameters:
Install US Postal Database?_
Reduce US Postal Database? _
Include ELOT? _
Include Enhanced Street? _
Install DPV Flat DB? _ Install DPV Full(Hash) DB? _ Install DPV Split DB?_
Install LACSLink Database? _
Install SuiteLink Database? _
Install Source . . . . . . _
C=CD-ROM, I=Internet Download
Install to Library . . . . __________
3. Complete the appropriate fields.
Install Databases Screen Fields
Field
Install US Postal Database?
Description
Indicate if you wish to install the US Postal Database.
• Include ELOT—indicate if you wish to include ELOT in your
database install.
• Include Enhanced Street—indicate if you wish to include Enhanced
Street in your database install.
Reduce US Postal
Database?
Indicate whether to reduce your US Postal Database.
Install DPV Database?
Indicate the DPV Database you want to install:
• Install DPV Flat DB
• Install DPV Full (Hash) DB
• Install DPV Split DB
Install LACSLink Database?
Indicate whether to install the LACSLink Database.
Install SuiteLink Database?
Indicate whether to install the SuiteLink Database.
Install Source?
Specify whether you are installing using a CD-ROM or an Internet
download.
Install to Library?
Specify the name of the library to which you want the database installed.
Upon initial display, the current default database library displays. To load
the database to a new library, simply type over the existing library name.
Release 4.1.0
66
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Installing a CODE-1 Plus Database
Installing the Database from Media
To install the CODE-1 Plus™ database, you must have one of the following:
•
•
Database file that you downloaded from the website
Media purchased from the Pitney Bowes eStore
Once you have this information, and you have accessed the Install CODE-1 Plus™ Database
screen, you are ready to install a new CODE-1 Plus™ database. To begin the installation process,
take the follow the steps in the appropriate section.
Installing the Database from Internet Download
To prepare a database library for IDS installation, you must first access the appropriate screen from
the Database Functions screen.
1. Type 2 in the Option field of the Database Functions screen and press Enter.
2. The Install CODE-1 Plus™ Databases screen appears.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Install CODE-1 Plus Databases
C1INDB01
C1INDB01
RXX.XM00
Specify database installation parameters:
Install US Postal Database?_
Reduce US Postal Database? _
Include ELOT? _
Include Enhanced Street? _
Install DPV Flat DB? _ Install DPV Full(Hash) DB? _ Install DPV Split DB?_
Install LACSLink Database? _
Install SuiteLink Database? _
Install Source . . . . . . _
C=CD-ROM, I=Internet Download
Install to Library . . . . __________
3. To install from an Internet download, specify “I” for Install Source. Complete the appropriate
fields.
Install Databases Screen Fields
Field
Install US Postal Database?
Description
Indicate if you wish to install the US Postal Database.
• Include ELOT—indicate if you wish to include ELOT in your
database install.
• Include Enhanced Street—indicate if you wish to include Enhanced
Street in your database install.
Reduce US Postal
Database?
Release 4.1.0
Indicate whether to reduce your US Postal Database.
67
User’s Guide - IBM i
Installing a CODE-1 Plus Database
Install Databases Screen Fields
Field
Description
Install DPV Database?
Indicate the DPV Database you want to install:
• Install DPV Flat DB
• Install DPV Full (Hash) DB
• Install DPV Split DB
Install LACSLink Database?
Indicate whether to install the LACSLink Database.
Install SuiteLink Database?
Indicate whether to install the SuiteLink Database.
Install Source?
Specify whether you are installing using a CD-ROM or an Internet
download.
Install to Library?
Specify the name of the library to which you want the database installed.
Upon initial display, the current default database library displays. To load
the database to a new library, simply type over the existing library name.
If you have previously downloaded a US Postal Database or a DPV database, those existing
databases will be lost once you start the IDS install process.
Installing the Database from Media
To install the database from media:
1. Type 2 in the Option field of the Database Functions screen and press Enter.
2. The Install CODE-1 Plus™ Databases screen appears.
3. Specify option C in the Install Source field to install from media.
4. Specify the library name to which you would like the database installed in the Install to Library
field and press F6 to confirm your choices.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Install CODE-1 Plus Databases
C1INDB01
C1INDB01
RXX.XM00
Specify database installation parameters:
Install US Postal Database?
Reduce US Postal Database?
Include ELOT?
Include Enhanced Street?
Install DPV Flat DB? Install DPV Full (Hash) DB? Install DPV Split DB?
Install LACSLink Database?
Install SuiteLink Database?
Install Source . . . . . .
Install to Library . . . .
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
C=CD-ROM,
C1PJUL09
I=Internet Download
F6=Install
68
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database Detail Report
5. CODE-1 Plus™ prompts you to verify the library name before beginning the installation process.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Specify
Install
Include
Install
Install
Install
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Install CODE-1 Plus Databases
C1INSTDB
C1INDB01
RXX.XM00
database installation parameters:
US Postal Database?
Reduce US Postal Database?
ELOT?
Include Enhanced Street?
DPV Flat DB? Install DPV Full (Hash) DB? Install DPV Split DB?
LACSLink Database?
Install SuiteLink Database?
Source . . . . . .
C=CD-ROM, I=Internet Download
Install to Library . . . . C1PJUL08
Verify name for CODE-1 Plus Database Library. Press F6 to install database.
F3=Exit
F6=Install
6. If you are satisfied with the library name, to continue with the database installation, press F6.
CODE-1 Plus™ begins copying the database files.
7. Continue to mount the database volumes as requested. When all media are loaded, CODE-1
Plus™ returns to the Install CODE-1 Plus™ Database screen. At this point, the installation
process is complete.
8. To exit without installing the database, press F3.
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database Detail Report
You can use the CODE-1 Plus™ Database Detail Report to print addresses from the database. You
can select up to 100 ZIP Code ranges and then print the addresses from the database that resides
within those ranges. You can also generate reports for each ZIP Code within a range.
Follow these steps to print the CODE-1 Plus Database Detail Report.
1. In the CODE-1 Plus job screen, press F20 to access the Database Functions menu.
2. Select option 5, “Print CODE-1 Plus Database Detail Reports.”
Release 4.1.0
69
User’s Guide - IBM i
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database Detail Report
3. The “Database Print ZIP-range selection” screen appears.
HH:NMM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Database Print ZIP-range selection
[CONTRL] City Report . . . . . Y
Y, N
Address Columns
Related ZIP Report . . Y
Y, N
Alias Street .
Address Report . . . . Y
Y, N
Page Eject . .
[HEADER] Date . .
Title . .
[PAGESZ] Lines per page . . 60
[UHDxx] 1 A
2 A
3 A
4 A
[UFTxx] 1 A
2 A
3 A
4 A
[SELZIP]
From-------To From-------To From-------To From-------To
F3=Exit
C1CPDP00
C1CPDP01
RXX.XM00
. . 2
. . Y
. . Y
1, 2
Y, N
Y, N
From------To
+
F6=Print
4. Complete the appropriate fields.
Database Print ZIP Code Range Selection Screen Fields
Field
City Report
Description
Indicate whether to generate a City Report for each ZIP Code that falls
within a range defined by the SELZIP parameter record.
• N — Do not generate City Reports.
• Y —Generate City Reports.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Related ZIP Code Report
Indicate whether to print the Related ZIP Code Report for each ZIP Code
that falls within a range defined by the SELZIP parameter record.
• N — Do not generate Related ZIP Code Reports.
• Y — Generate Related ZIP Code Reports.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Address Report
Indicate whether to generate an Address Report for each ZIP Code that
falls within a range defined by the SELZIP parameter record. Enter one
of the following codes:
• N — Do not generate Address Reports.
• Y — Generate Address Reports.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Address Columns
Indicate whether to generate an Address Report in a 1- or 2-column
format for each ZIP Code that falls within a range defined by the SELZIP
parameter record.
• 1 — Generate Address Reports in a 1-column format.
• 2 — Generate Address Reports in a 2-column format.
• Blank — Default is 2.
Release 4.1.0
70
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database Detail Report
Database Print ZIP Code Range Selection Screen Fields
Field
Alias Street
Description
Indicate whether to generate an Alias Report for each ZIP Code that falls
within a range defined by the SELZIP parameter record. Enter one of the
following codes:
• N — Do not generate Alias Reports.
• Y — Generate Alias Reports.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Page Eject
Indicate whether the City and Related ZIP Code Reports should begin
on a new page.
• N — Print the City Report and Related ZIP Code Report without
starting a new page after each report.
• Y — Start printing on a new page, after printing the City Report or the
Related ZIP Code Report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Date
Specify the date to print at the top line of the first page of each report.
Default is to print the system date.
Title
Specify the title to print on the top line of every page of each report. No
default.
Lines-Per-Page
Specify the number of lines to print on each page of the Execution Log
or the other reports.
• Minimum is 25.
• Maximum is 225.
• Blank — Default is 60.
Line (1, 2, 3, 4)
Specify a code to indicate the side of the header line on which this text
should appear:
• A — Left side of the line
• B — Right side of the line.
• Blank — No default.
Specify the text to appear at the top of each page of every report. No
default.
Line (1, 2, 3, 4)
Specify a code to indicate the side of the footer line on which this text
should appear:
• A — Left side of the line
• B — Right side of the line
• Blank — No default.
Specify the text to appear at the bottom of every page of each report. No
default.
From
Specify the lowest 5-digit ZIP Code for each ZIP Code range. You must
enter at least one ZIP Code range. No default.
To
Specify the highest 5-digit ZIP Code for each ZIP Code range. You must
enter at least one ZIP Code range. No default.
5. To print the Database Detail Report, press F6.
6. To exit without printing the report, press F3 to return to the Database Functions screen.
For more information on C1PDBPRT, the callable routine that generates the CODE-1 Plus Database
Print Report, refer to "CODE-1 Plus Callable Subroutines" in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Release 4.1.0
71
User’s Guide - IBM i
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database State Size Reports
Printing the CODE-1 Plus Database State Size Reports
You can use the CODE-1 Plus™ State Sizes Report to determine the total size in bytes of the
CODE-1 Plus™ database and the approximate sizes for each state’s data. The total size of the
database is not equal to the sum of the state sizes, because there is global data that is common to
all states. You can also produce this report for a database that is created by the CODE-1 Plus™
database reduction process.
To display this information about your database:
1. Type 6 in the Option field of the Database Functions screen and press Enter.
2. The Print CODE-1 Plus™ Database State Size Report screen displays.
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Database Functions
Print CODE-1 Plus Database State Size Report
C1CPDB00
C1CPDB70
RXX.XM00
Specify CODE-1 Plus Database Library.
CODE-1 Plus Database Library. . . . . . . .
C1PNOV221
Specify Job details.
Submit to Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y
Job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QBATCH
QGPL
Job name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hold on job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STATE_SIZE
N
F3=Exit
F6=Print Report
3. To print the State Sizes report, press F6.
4. To exit the screen without printing the report, press F3 to return to the Database Functions
screen.
For more information on C1DBSTSZ, the callable routine that generates the CODE-1 Plus State
Sizes Report, refer to "CODE-1 Plus Callable Subroutines" in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Release 4.1.0
72
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Displaying Database Information
Displaying Database Information
You can display the following information for the database that you are using:
•
•
•
•
•
Date on which the database was created
Library in which the database resides
USPS vintage date of the database
Expiration date of the database
Date on which CODE-1 Plus was installed
To display this information about your database:
1. Type 7 in the Option field of the Database Functions screen and press Enter.
2. The Database Information screen appears.
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Database Functions
CODE-1 Plus Database Information
C1CPDB00
C1CPDB80
RXX.XM00
March 2016 Database created by CODE-1 Plus 04.1
CODE-1 Plus Database Library is C1PMAR221
USPS vintage date of CODE-1 Plus Database is 03/01/2016
Expiration date of CODE-1 Plus Database is 06/30/2016
CODE-1 Plus Rls 04.1 was installed 14:57 02/05/16
F3=Exit
3. To exit the screen, press F3 to return to the Database Functions screen.
Release 4.1.0
73
User’s Guide - IBM i
Changing the Default CODE-1 Plus Database Library
Changing the Default CODE-1 Plus Database Library
If you have several CODE-1 Plus databases, this option can be used to direct CODE-1 Plus to the
database you would like to use as the default. The default database is the one CODE-1 Plus will use
for all address matching, database display, and any other CODE-1 Plus database functions. Since
each database must exist in a separate library, to specify the database CODE-1 Plus should use, all
that you have to do is specify the unique library in which it resides.
To change the default CODE-1 Plus database library:
1. Type 8 in the Option field of the Database Functions screen and press Enter.
2. The Database Functions' Change Default Library screen appears.
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Database Functions
C1CPDB00
C1CPDB01
RXX.XM00
Specify default CODE-1 Plus™ Database Library.
Default CODE-1 Plus™ Database Library. . . . G1C1FILES
F3=Exit
3. Type the name of the desired CODE-1 Plus™ database library.
4. To save the library name and exit the screen, press Enter. The Database Functions screen
appears.
5. To exit without changing the default database library, press F3.
Release 4.1.0
74
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 4: Using the Database Functions
Converting EWS File into CODE-1 Plus Format
Converting EWS File into CODE-1 Plus Format
If you downloaded an Early Warning System File from the USPS website, you will need to convert
that data into a CODE-1 Plus format. To convert your EWS file into CODE-1 Plus format:
1. Type 9 in the Option field of the Database Functions screen and press Enter.
2. The EWS File Conversion screen displays.
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Database Functions
[AUXIL] Enter parameters for EWS file
Input EWS file . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
conversion:
. .
. . .
. . *FIRST
. .
C1CPDB00
C1CPDB01
RXX.XM00
A, E
A=Street, Suffix, Direcs in single addr line, E=Address elements separately
Output work file . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . .
Address Element Locations:
5-digit ZIP. . . . . . . .
Street Name/Address Line .
Street Suffix. . . . . . .
Pre-directional. . . . . .
Post-directional . . . . .
House Range. . . . . . . .
Secondary Range. . . . . .
Secondary Designator . . .
F3=Exit
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Pos
Len
F6=Execute
3. Fill in Input EWS file with the name of the file you created. The output file is automatically placed
in your database library.

The Output work file and Address Element Locations are not changeable at this time.
4. Press F6 to run the conversion.
5. When you return to the main menu, your file has been successfully converted. You can now use
this Auxiliary File as input to your CODE-1 Plus job by using the AUXIL1 parameter.
Returning to the Work With Jobs Screen
When you finish using the database functions, you may exit and return to the Work with Jobs screen.
To exit the database functions and return to the Work With Jobs Menu:
1. Display the Database Functions screen (C1CPDB01).
2. Press F3. The Work with Jobs screen appears.
Release 4.1.0
75
User’s Guide - IBM i
Returning to the Work With Jobs Screen
Release 4.1.0
76
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Input
In this chapter:












Defining Your Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Using the Name and Address Layout Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Defining Input Address and ZIP Code Information . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Defining Urbanization Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Defining SuiteLink Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Defining Confirmation Options and LACSLink Processing . . . . .88
Confirmation Compare Values Screen (C1CPCF11) . . . . . . . . . . .91
Defining List Processor/Mailer Information Screen (C1CPID60) .92
Defining Input File Sequence Check Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Defining Delivery Point Validation Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Defining Additional Delivery Point Validation Processing . . . . . .96
Reformat Input Record Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
5
Defining Your Input File
Defining Your Input File
This chapter provides information for using the IBM i screens to define information in your input file
to be used during processing of your CODE-1 Plus job.

You must create your CODE-1 Plus job before using the screens described in this chapter to
define your input file. For information on creating a CODE-1 Plus job, refer to "Creating a
CODE-1 Plus Job” on page 38.
Function Keys
The following function keys are available on the Name/Address File Layout screens.
Function Keys
Function Key
Name
Description
F3
Exit
Exit from the Name/Address File Layout component, without
saving the data.
F4
Edit Function
Move your cursor next to the comparison value you want to
edit. Press F4. The Confirmation Compare Values screen
(C1CPCF20) appears filled in with the selected comparison
value information.
F6
Update
Save the data and quit from the Name/Address File Layout
component.
F10
Compare Values
Goes to the first Confirmation Compare Values screen
(C1CPCF11).
Insert
Insert new MOVE I operation.
F11
Delete at cursor
Move your cursor next to the comparison value you want to
delete. Press F11. The Confirmation Compare Values
screen (C1CPCF20) appears filled in with the selected
comparison value information. Indicate whether to delete the
selected value.
F17
Top
Moves to the first CONFRM parameter record in your
confirmation compare value list.
F18
Bottom
Moves to the last CONFRM parameter record in your
confirmation compare value list.
F24
Field Search
Allows you to display the location and lengths of the fields in
an external file. Type file name and library of external file.
Using the Name and Address Layout Screens
The Name and Address Layout screens allow you to define address information in your input file
including:
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Location, length, and format of address information in your input file
Conditions for selecting records for processing
Additional processing options
78
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Using the Name and Address Layout Screens
Determining Your Address Format
The options above indicate how the address elements are stored in your input file. Option M
indicates that all street address parts are located in a single field:
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5
123 Main Street, Apt. 24A
Option F indicates that the street address parts are located in two or more separate fixed fields:
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5
123
Main
St
W
And option L indicates that the street address is stored in two or more fields that correlate to the
address “lines” as they would appear on a label:
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5
123 Main Street
Apt.24A
For a more detailed description of these three options, please read the following sections.
Single Field Address Formats
The single field address format is the simplest and, perhaps, most common. In this scenario, all
street address parts — including the house number, leading directional, street name, street suffix,
trailing directional, apartment designator, and apartment number — are stored as a continuous
string in a single fixed field. For example, in the figure below an input file layout has the street
address stored in a single fixed location.
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
4200 PARLIAMENT PL STE 600
LANHAM MD 20706-1844
564 N HOLLY STREET NW APT 43
HYATTSVILLE MD 20782
Entire Street Address
Example for Single Field Address Formats
Positions 1-49 of this example contain all the street address parts. Additionally, the city, state, and
ZIP Code are located in a separate single fixed field, positions 50-79.
Multiple Field Address Formats
With the multiple field format, the street address parts — including the house number, leading
directional, street name, street suffix, trailing directional, apartment designator, and apartment
number — are stored in two or more separate fixed fields.
When you choose this option CODE-1 Plus strings together the separate fields in the order that you
define them, deleting all extraneous spaces to form a continuous single street address line.
Release 4.1.0
79
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using the Name and Address Layout Screens
For example, the figure below illustrates an input file layout that has the street address parts stored
in six separate fields.
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
4200
PARLIAMENT PL
STE 600
LANHAM MD
20706
564
N HOLLY STREET
NW APT 43
HYATTSVILLE MD
20782
1 House Number
6 Apartment Number
5 Apartment Designator
4 Trailing Directional
2 Leading Directional
3 Street Name
Multiple Field Address Formats
•
•
•
•
•
•
Positions 1-6 of this example contain the house number
Positions 7-8 contain the leading directional
Positions 9-28 contain the street name and street suffix
Positions 29-31 contain the trailing directional
Positions 32-41 contain the apartment designator
Positions 41-48 contain the apartment number.
The city and state are located in positions 50-69, and the ZIP Code is located in another separate
field, positions 75-79.
Multiple Line Address Formats
The multiple line format also has address parts stored in two or more fields on the input file. Multiple
line fields correspond to the “lines” of a standard address label. For example, in the figure below the
address label displays four lines of information.
Attention Line
Address Line 1
Address Line 2
City, State, ZIP Line
PITNEY BOWES
4200 PARLIAMENT PL
STE 600
LANHAM MD 20706-1844
Figure 1: Multiple Address Lines on a Label
This example is a typical label format where address line 1 contains street information and address
line 2 contains apartment information. The next figure illustrates the input file layout that corresponds
to the label lines shown above.
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
4200 PARLIAMENT PL
STE 600
Address Line 1
Address Line 2
Address Lines Corresponding to Label Example
Positions 1-29 of the input file contain the first address line of a label, and positions 30-49 contain
the second address line.
Release 4.1.0
80
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Defining Input Address and ZIP Code Information
Defining Input Address and ZIP Code Information
The Name/Address File Layout screens define the position and length of address and ZIP Code
information in your input file.
Defining Address and ZIP Code Locations
Use the Address and ZIP Code Locations screen (C1CPID10) to define the location of address
elements in your input file. To access the Address and ZIP Code Locations screen (C1CPID10):
1. From the Work With Jobs screen, use F12 to select the job for defining input. The Define/Submit
CODE-1 Plus Job screen displays.
2. Select Name/Address File Layout.
3. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Address and ZIP Code Locations screen.
Address and ZIP Code Locations Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field
Description
Location of Street Address in Input File
Location Method
Required. Type one of the following codes to describe where the street
address information is located in the input record.
• F — Street address information is located in multiple fields. 2,3,4,5,
or 6 fields.
• L — Street address information is located in multiple address lines.
2,3,4,5, or 6 lines (with or without city and state).
• M — Street address information is located in a single field. All street
address elements are stored as a continuous string in a single fixed
field.
• blank — No default.
Position
Required. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location in the
input record where the street address information is found. As many as
6 address position fields may be defined. No default.
• blank — No default.
Len
Required. Enter a number from 1-99 to specify the length(s) in the input
record of the indicated address line(s).
• blank — No default.
Location of City/State/ZIP Code in Input File
Release 4.1.0
81
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Input Address and ZIP Code Information
Address and ZIP Code Locations Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field
Location Method
Description
Required. Location of the City, state, and ZIP Code information is
located in the input record.
A
City, state, and ZIP Code found in the address lines defined
above. (The street address location method must be L.)
C
City and state found in the address lines defined above, and
place the ZIP Code in a separately specified position. (The
street address location method must be L.)
M
City and state are found in a single field, with the specified
position and length. Place the ZIP Code in a separately
specified position.
S
City, state, and ZIP Code are found in separately specified
positions, with separately defined lengths.
X
City, state, and ZIP Code are found in a single field, with the
position and length defined in the city or city/ST fields.
• blank — No default.
NOTE: Options A and C are only valid here in conjunction with multiple
line records. (L must be specified for the street address location
method.)
Location of ZIP Code in Input File
Pos
Required if C, M, or S is specified as the ZIP Code location method.
Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting location in the input
record of the ZIP Code, when the ZIP Code is to be located separately
from the rest of the address. No default.
Fmt
Required if C, M, or S is specified as the ZIP Code location method.
Specify the format of the input ZIP Code:
• B — 3-byte binary format.
• C — 5-byte EBCDIC character format.
• P — 3-byte packed decimal format.
• 9 — ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Codes in a 4-byte binary format.
• blank — No default.
Location of City or City/State in Input File
Pos
Required if your input records are in a format other than L (multiple
lines). Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting location in the
input record of one of the following:
• City (location method S).
• City and state (location method M).
• City, state, and ZIP Code (location method X).
Len
Release 4.1.0
Required if your input records are in a format other than L (multiple
lines). Enter a number from 1-99 to specify the length of city, state, and/
or ZIP Code field in the input record.
82
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Defining Input Address and ZIP Code Information
Defining Additional Input File Information
Use the Additional Input File Information screen (C1CPID20) to define the location of additional
information in your input file. To access the Additional Input File Information screen (C1CPID20):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the Additional Input File Information screen
(C1CPID20).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Additional Input File Information screen.
Additional Input File Information Screen Fields
Field
Description
Specify input file Firm Name location
Position
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting position of
the firm name in the input file. No default.
Length
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to specify the length(s) of the firm
name in your input record. No default.
Firm name within input
address lines?
Required if location not specified in first field.
• Y — Indicates the firm name is located within specified input address
lines.
• N — Indicates the firm name is NOT located within specified input
address lines.
• blank — Default is N.
NOTE: If N is selected, the Location Method L is required
Specify storage of output standardized Firm Name
Position
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting position of
the standardized firm name in the input file. No default.
Length
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to specify the length(s) of the
standardized firm name in your input record. No default.
Disposition for non-stored
firm name
Optional. Code indicating what to store in cases where the standardized
firm name was not stored, because no match was found.
• B — Store blanks.
• I — Store the extracted input.
• X — Store nothing.
• blank — Default is X.
Specify storage of original ZIP Code
Location to store extracted
ZIP Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting position in
the output record for storing the extracted input ZIP Code. No default.
Specify existing ZIP+4 and Carrier Route locations
Original ZIP + 4 Code, if
desired
Release 4.1.0
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting position in
the input record of the original ZIP + 4 Code (if present). No default.
83
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Input Address and ZIP Code Information
Additional Input File Information Screen Fields
Field
Description
Fmt
Optional. Code indicating the format of the original ZIP + 4 Code:
• B — 2-byte binary format.
• C — 4-byte EBCDIC character format.
• P — 3-byte packed decimal format.
• Blank — No default.
Original Carrier Route Code,
if desired
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting location in
the input record of the original carrier route code. No default.
Activating Z4CHANGE Processing
Use the Activate Z4CHANGE Option screen (C1CPID30) to specify the input record location of the
CODE-1 Plus Master File vintage date or type the vintage date on the screen. For Z4CHANGE
processing, the vintage date is the date the input file was last processed with the CODE-1 Plus
database. For more information on the Z4CHANGE option, refer to Chapter 7, Using the
Z4CHANGE Option.
The Z4CHANGE option uses the vintage date to determine if a 9-digit ZIP Code has changed since
the last time your records were processed. The Z4CHANGE Master File contains all of the changes
to ZIP + 4 Codes in the last 12 months. Records that contain an unchanged 9-digit ZIP Code,
according to vintage date, do not need to be re-coded and are skipped.
To access the Activate Z4CHANGE Option screen (C1CPID30):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the Activate Z4CHANGE Option screen
(C1CPID30).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Activate Z4CHANGE Option screen.
Activate Z4CHANGE Option Screen Fields
Field
Description
Location of CODE-1 Plus Vintage Date in N/A record
Position
Required if the literal vintage date is not specified. If the Master File
vintage date appears on your input records, enter a number from 1-9999
to specify the starting position of the CODE-1 Plus vintage date on the
input record.
Vintage
Required, if the position and format of the vintage date is not
specified.The literal CODE-1 Plus vintage date in YYYYMM format. The
first two digits must contain’19’ or ’20’. The last two digits must be
between ’01’ and ’12’.
Format of Vintage Date
Required if the literal date is not specified. Code indicating the format
of the vintage date:
• B — 2-byte binary (YYMM).
• C — 4-byte character (YYMM).
• P — 3-byte packed-decimal (YYMM).
• 3 — 3-byte binary (YYYYMM).
• 4 — 4-byte packed-decimal (YYYYMM).
• 6 — 6-byte character (YYYYMM).
• blank — No default.
Release 4.1.0
84
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Defining Urbanization Information
Defining Urbanization Information
Use the Input Urbanization Definition screen (C1CPID40) to define urbanization information in the
input file including:
•
•
•
Location and length of the urbanization name
Whether the urbanization name is within multiple address lines
Output location for the urbanization name
•
Whether to activate SuiteLink and how to process if SuiteLink reports an error
An urbanization name is used mainly in Puerto Rican addressing to further describe the location of a
street address. Urbanization names are essential in Puerto Rican addressing because there may be
multiple streets within a town that have the same street name. The urbanization name designates a
more specific area to locate the address. Specific areas can include a housing development or an
apartment building. Some areas in Puerto Rico do not have street names, so the urbanization name
is considered the street name.
To access the Input Urbanization Definition screen (C1CPID40):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the Input Urbanization Definition screen
(C1CPID40).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Input Urbanization Definition screen.
Input Urbanization Definition Screen Fields
Field
Description
Specify urbanization Name options
Urbanization name is within
multiple address lines?
An option indicating whether the input record urbanization name is
located randomly in the address lines or in its own field.
• Y — Urbanization name is located randomly within the address (only
if address location method is L).
• N — Urbanization name is located in its own field.
• blank — Default is N.
Urbanization name location and length in N/A record
Position
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting position of
the urbanization name in the input record. No default.
Length
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to specify the length of the
urbanization name in the input record. No default.
Location to store extracted Urbanization name
Position
Release 4.1.0
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the storage location on
the output record for the urbanization name field as extracted from the
input record by CODE-1 Plus. No default.
85
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining SuiteLink Processing
Input Urbanization Definition Screen Fields
Field
Description
Length
Enter a number from 1-99 to specify the length of the output urbanization
name field as extracted from the input record by CODE-1 Plus.
Left justify primary/secondary
address lines, urbanization
name?
Optional. Code indicating whether to left justify the following:
• Contents of the primary and secondary address lines.
• Firm name (if assigned).
• Urbanization name (if assigned).
Enter one of the following codes:
• L — Left justify the fields listed above.
• Blank — Do not left justify the fields listed above.
Defining SuiteLink Processing
Use the SuiteLink Processing screen (C1CPID45) to define SuiteLink processing options. To access
the SuiteLink Processing screen (C1CPID45):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the SuiteLink Processing screen
(C1CPID45).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the SuiteLink Processing screen (C1CPID45).
SuiteLink Processing Screen Fields
Field
Description
Specify SuiteLink Process
SuiteLink Error Shutdown
Indicator
Optional. Code indicating how to proceed if SuiteLink reports an error:
• I — Ignore error and continue to attempt SuiteLink processing. CODE1 Plus does not generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report) if you specify the value “I”.
• S — Shutdown when SuiteLink reports an error (default). Specify the
value “S” if you want to generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report).
• W — Issue warning message and turn off SuiteLink processing.
CODE-1 Plus does not generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report) if you specify the value “W”.
• blank — Default is S.
Location of SuiteLink Return
Code
Optional. Location for SuiteLink return code. One of the following codes
is stored:
• A — Business name matched.
• 00 — Business name not matched.
• Blank — No default.
Release 4.1.0
86
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Defining SuiteLink Processing
SuiteLink Processing Screen Fields
Field
Location of SuiteLink Match
Code
Description
Optional. Location for SuiteLink match code. One of the following codes
is stored:
• A — Matched.
• B — Not matched.
• C — Business name was all noise.
• D — Highrise default record not found.
• E — Database is expired.
• Blank — No default.
Location of SuiteLink Fidelity
Code
Optional. Location for SuiteLink match fidelity. One of the following
codes is stored:
• 1 — Exact match.
• 2 — Acceptable match (one word not matched).
• 3 — Unacceptable match (more than one word not matched).
• Blank — No default.
NOTE: You should ignore the Fidelity Code if the Match Code is not
'A'. The Fidelity Code is '0' if the Match Code is B (no match), C
(business name consisted entirely of "noise" words), or D (9-digit zip
not recognized as a high rise default).
Memory Model
Optional. This option allows you to specify size of SuiteLink memory
module.
• P — Pico memory model (no files in memory).
• U — Micro memory model (no files in memory, only indexes).
• S — Small memory model (slkhdr, slknormal, slknoise in memory).
• M — Medium memory model (slknine file also in memory).
• L — Large memory model (lcd file also in memory).
• H — Huge memory model (slk file also in memory).
• Blank — Default is M.
Exclude Secondary from
Output Address Line
Optional. Specify a code to indicate whether to call SuiteLink without
appending the secondary information to the output address line. All
other fields, ZIP + 4 value, DPC code, are determined using the
secondary information returned by SuiteLink.
• I — Include secondary information from SuiteLink on the output
address line.
• E — Exclude secondary information from SuiteLink from the output
address line.
• Blank — Defaults to I.
Exclude any Invalid/
Extraneous Secondary
Information from Output
Address Line
Optional. Specify a code to include or exclude any invalid (extraneous)
input secondary information.
• I — Include the invalid input secondary information.
• E — Exclude the invalid input secondary information.
• Blank — Defaults to I.
Release 4.1.0
87
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Confirmation Options and LACSLink Processing
Defining Confirmation Options and LACSLink Processing
Use the Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing screen (C1CPID50) to:
•
Specify that records containing either special ZIP Codes (APO/FPO, military base, and/or
government agency ZIP Codes) or “confirmation marks” should be confirmed as valid ZIP Codes
without undergoing the matching process. You can define up to 250 different confirmation marks
to search for in the input record.
•
Define LACSLink processing options.
Confirming Special ZIP Codes
Often CODE-1 Plus is unable to successfully match APO/FPO ZIP Codes, military base ZIP Codes,
and government agency ZIP Codes. This screen allows you to have these “special” records
automatically confirmed, without CODE-1 Plus attempting to match them to the USPS database
(and taking the chance of having the records rejected). For each of the record types that you specify
here, CODE-1 Plus “confirms” the records as correct, bypasses the normal matching process, and
stores the records in the output file.
Confirming Records with Confirmation Marks
Confirmation marks are values in your input record that, if equal to the value(s) specified on this
screen (or if not equal depending on your specifications), indicate to attempt no match against the
USPS database. Instead, the record is automatically written to the output file. Using confirmation
marks in your records allows you to automatically confirm records you know are correct, even
though CODE-1 Plus does not match them.
Example
For example, an insurance agency wants to mail solicitations to new homeowners. This agency has
a standard mailing list and has also bought lists of addresses from several builders that have just
finished new housing developments. Because the streets in these new developments are so new,
the addresses have not yet been put on the USPS database.
The insurance agency merges these new lists with their standard mailing list, but first inserts
confirmation marks in the records on the builders' lists. The records are confirmed, even though the
addresses are not yet on the CODE-1 Plus database.
To define confirmation marks, on the Confirmation Options screen:
1. Specify whether to define equal to (EQ) or not equal to (NE) confirmation values.
For EQ confirmation values, if the value in the input record equals the confirmation value, the
input record is confirmed automatically. For NE confirmation values, if the value in the input
record does not equal the confirmation value, the input record is confirmed automatically.
2. Specify the location for the confirmation return code on the output record.
3. Press F10 to add your EQ/NE confirmation values.
The Confirmation Compare Values screen (C1CPCF11) appears.
4. To add confirmation values, press F10.
The Confirmation Compare Values screen (C1CPCF20) appears.
5. Enter the confirmation value to search for in the input record, the location on the input record of
the value, and the length of the value.
Release 4.1.0
88
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Defining Confirmation Options and LACSLink Processing
6. To save the information, press F6.
The Confirmation Compare Values screen (C1CPCF11) appears with your new confirmation
value. It appears as a CONFRM parameter record.
To add another value, press F10. To edit the current value, press F4. To delete the current value,
press F11.

You may specify up to 250 confirmation values to which the confirmation mark in the input
records are compared. If a string of blank spaces is one of the confirmation values, it
must be the first value.
7. Once you define all the comparison values, at the Confirmation Compare Values screen
(C1CPCF11), press F6.
To access the Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing screen (C1CPID50):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the Confirmation Options/LACSLink
Processing screen (C1CPID50).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing
screen (C1CPID50).
Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing Screen Fields
Field
Description
Specify confirmation by class of ZIP Code
Confirm APO/FPO ZIP Codes
Optional. Code indicating whether to confirm APO/FPO ZIP Codes
automatically. For each record “confirmed,” no address matching is
done. Confirmed records are automatically written to the output file.
• Y — Confirm APO/FPO ZIP Codes.
• N — Process APO/FPO ZIP Codes as normal records.
• Blank — Default is N.
Confirm Military Installation
ZIP Codes
Optional. Specify a code to indicate whether or not to confirm military
base ZIP Codes automatically. For each record “confirmed,” no address
matching is done. Confirmed records are automatically written to the
output file.
• Y — Confirm military base ZIP Codes.
• N — Process military base ZIP Codes as normal records.
• Blank — Default is N.
Confirm Government Agency
ZIP Codes
Optional. Specify a code to indicate whether or not to confirm
government agency ZIP Codes automatically. For each record
“confirmed,” no address matching is done. Confirmed records are
automatically written to the output file.
• Y — Confirm government agency ZIP Codes.
• N — Process government agency ZIP Codes as normal records.
• Blank — Default is N.
Specify input file confirmation mark comparison type
Release 4.1.0
89
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Confirmation Options and LACSLink Processing
Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing Screen Fields
Field
Description
Comparison Type
Optional. Code indicating whether the confirmation flag in the records
should be equal to or not equal to the confirmation value(s) on this
screen. Type one of the following codes:
• EQ — The confirmation flag in the record must be equal to any of the
confirmation values on this screen for the record to be confirmed
automatically.
• NE — The confirmation flag in the record must not be equal to one of
the confirmation values on this screen for the record to be confirmed
automatically.
• Blank — No default.
Specify location for output confirmation code
Location for output
confirmation code
Optional. Location in the output where CODE-1 Plus will store the code
indicating whether or not the record was confirmed without processing,
and if so, why. One of the following codes will be stored:
• Blank — Not confirmed (record was address-matched).
• A — Confirmed as an APO/FPO ZIP Code.
• G — Confirmed as a government agency.
• M — Confirmed as a military installation ZIP Code.
• V — Confirmed by comparison to an input confirmation flag value.
• Blank — No default.
Specify LACSLink processing
LACSLink Processing Type
Required. Type of LACSLink processing to be performed:
• Z — Perform the ZIP + 4 processing prior to LACSLink.
• Blank — Default is blank.
LACSLink Seed Record
treatment
Required. This option allows LACSLink to stop batch jobs when a falsepositive (seed record) has been encountered.
• S — Shut down CODE-1 Plus processing when a false-positive (seed
record) is encountered.
• W — Allow CODE-1 Plus to continue processing to completion of the
entire job, generating USPS Form 3553.
• Blank — Default is W.
LACSLink Alternate Option
Specify if you want to perform alternate LACSLink processing.
• R — Perform LACSLink processing.
• L — Invoke limited LACSLink subsystem processing. Provides the
CODE-1 Plus non-LACS converted street address, city, and state
data to the output standardized address and parsed elements fields.
Release 4.1.0
90
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Confirmation Compare Values Screen (C1CPCF11)
Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing Screen Fields
Field
Description
LACSLink Suppress 99
Return Code
Specify whether to produce a “99” return code for LACS seed record
processing.
Y
Do not produce “99” return code for LACS seed record
processing.
N
LACS seed record processing results in “99” return code.
NOTE: An “S” in “LACSLink Seed Record treatment” overrides this
option.
Memory Model
Required. Specify the memory size of the LACSLink module.
• P — Pico memory model (no files in memory).
• U — Micro memory model (no files in memory, only indexes).
• S — Small memory model (Rv9 expansion in memory).
• M — Medium memory model.
• L — Large memory model.
• H — Huge memory model (all files in memory).
• Blank — Default is M.
Confirmation Compare Values Screen (C1CPCF11)
The first Confirmation Compare Values screen (C1CPCF11) is the sixth screen of the Name and
Address File Layout component. This screen allows you to view the CONFRM parameter records
CODE-1 Plus generated based on your confirmation values. If you have defined values, this screen
lists the generated CONFRM parameter records. From this screen you can add, edit, and delete a
value. You can also define up to 250 different confirmation marks for CODE-1 Plus to search for in
the input record.

For instructions on defining confirmation compare values, refer to the previous section
"Defining Confirmation Options and LACSLink Processing” on page 88.
If you have not defined any values yet, the second Confirmation Compare Values screen
(C1CPCF20) displays.
Confirmation Compare Values Screen Fields
Field
Description
Specify compare value, location, and length
Compare Value
Enter 0-9, A-Z, or any other characters for the confirmation value. Up to
250 different values to which the confirmation flag in the input record is
compared.
NOTE: You can use a blank field as the comparison value only if
specified in the top-most field. A blank field in any of the other positions
indicates the end of the list of values.
Position
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location of the input
confirmation mark in your name-and-address file. No default.
Length
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to specify the length(s) of the input
confirmation mark in your name-and-address file. No default.
Release 4.1.0
91
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining List Processor/Mailer Information Screen (C1CPID60)
Defining List Processor/Mailer Information Screen (C1CPID60)
Use the List Processor/Mailer Information screen (C1CPID60) to define the list code and client code
information in your input file. You can also enter the date you received your file. On this screen you
can tell CODE-1 Plus to print the name or ID of your current name-and-address input file in box B4
of the USPS Form 3553 or to print the number of name-and-address lists you used to produce your
current mailing in box B5. You can also tell CODE-1 Plus to print the mailer’s name and address on
the USPS Form 3553 in box D2, specify a client code, and specify the date when you received your
input file.
List Code
The term list code comes from the practice of merging several mailing lists together, using a code
embedded in the records to identify the source list of each record. You can use this screen to
designate any field of 9 bytes or less as your input list code. CODE-1 Plus has three reports that list
information about your job, sorted by these list codes. The most common use of this option is to
identify which original list the records came from. You can then use the list code reports to analyze
the quality of the addresses on each of your original mailing lists.
To access the List Processor/Mailer Information screen (C1CPID60):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the List Processor/Mailer Information screen
(C1CPID60).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the List Processor/Mailer Information screen
(C1CPID60).
List Processor/Mailer Information Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
List Code location and length in N/A record
Position
Optional. Enter a number from 1-999 to specify the location of list code
in your name-and-address file. No default.
Length
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9 to specify the length of list code in
your name-and-address file. No default.
Client Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9 to specify the 1-9 character Client
Code. No default.
Date Received
Optional. Enter the date you received your file in CCYYMMDD format.
No default.
System Date
Optional. Enter the system date when you ran the job in MMDDCCYY
format. No default.
List Processor Name
Optional. Enter up to 20 alpha-numeric characters to specify the 20byte name used to identify the organization that coded the name and
address list(s) and/or performed the ZIP + 4 barcoding using CASScertified software. No default.
List ID
Optional. Enter up to 20 alpha-numeric characters to specify the name
or ID of the current name-and-address list.No default.
Release 4.1.0
92
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Defining Input File Sequence Check Information
List Processor/Mailer Information Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Number of Lists
Optional. Enter a number from 1-5 to specify a 5-digit number indicating
the number of lists used to produce the mailing. Blank is the same as
one. No default.
Mailer Name and Address
Optional. Enter up to 30 alpha-numeric characters to specify the 30byte name and address of the individual whose signature appears in box
D1 of USPS Form 3553. If you leave this field blank, the corresponding
line in box D2 on USPS Form 3553 remains blank. No default.
Defining Input File Sequence Check Information
Use the Input File Sequence Check Information screen (C1CPID70) to specify up to nine fields on
the input record to check the sequence of your input file. CODE-1 Plus indicates sequence errors on
the Execution Log. If a record is bypassed, it does not affect the Control Totals report.

The total length of all the sequence field lengths cannot exceed 255 bytes.
To access the Input File Sequence Check Information screen (C1CPID70):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the Input File Sequence Check Information
screen (C1CPID70).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Input File Sequence Check Information
screen (C1CPID70).
Input File Sequence Check Information Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field
Sequence error treatment
Description
Optional. Code indicating the action CODE-1 Plus should take when a
sequence error is encountered in the input file. Enter one of the following
codes:
• B — (Bypass) Bypass the offending record and continue sequence
checking.
• C — (Continue) Continue processing the offending record and
continue sequence checking.
• E — End of file) Bypass the offending record, and then gracefully end
the process as if the input file had reached an end-of-file.
• I — (Ignore) Continue processing the offending record, but abandon
any further sequence checking.
• blank — Default is B.
NOTE: If there is a sequence error, it is indicated in the Execution Log.
If a record is bypassed, it does not affect the Control Totals report.
Sequence field 1 through Sequence field 9
Position
Release 4.1.0
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location of the field
segment containing the data to be checked for an input file sequence
error. No default.
93
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Delivery Point Validation Processing
Input File Sequence Check Information Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field
Description
Length
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to specify the length of the field
segment. The total number of field segments cannot exceed 255 bytes.
If the field segment is packed (“P” in previous field), the field length
cannot exceed 9. No default.
Packed
Code indicating whether or not field segment is in a packed format that
should be unpacked before checking the sequence:
• P — Field segment is packed.
• Blank — Field segment is not packed.
Defining Delivery Point Validation Processing
Use the Delivery Point Validation screen (C1CPID80) to define and activate Delivery Point Validation
(DPV) and to process options on multiple matches to the ZIP + 4 database. You can use this screen
to specify the types of multiple matches for DPV confirmation. For more information on Delivery
Point Validation, refer to "Using Delivery Point Validation” on page 291.
To access the Delivery Point Validation screen (C1CPID80):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the Delivery Point Validation screen
(C1CPID80).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Delivery Point Validation screen
(C1CPID80).
Delivery Point Validation Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field
Description
Specify DPV confirmation of multiple matches
DPV File Option
Optional. This option allows you to specify the DPV file to match
against.
• S — Process the DPV split file.
• F — Process the DPV flat file.
• H — Process the DPV full (hash) file.
• Blank — Default is S.
DPV Memory Module Size
Indicator
Required. This option allows you to specify size of DPV module.
• Blank — DPV process will be using Medium memory model (default).
• P — Pico memory model (no files in memory).
• U — Micro memory model (no files in memory, only indexes).
• S — Small memory model (HSC and HSF in memory).
• M — Medium memory model (LCD also in memory).
• L — Large memory model (HSX also in memory).
• H — Huge memory model (all files in memory).
• Blank — DPV process uses Medium memory model.
Release 4.1.0
94
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Defining Delivery Point Validation Processing
Delivery Point Validation Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field
ZIP Code and PO Box or
Rural Route/Highway
Contract Address Type
Description
Optional. If your input file contains multiple matches of the ZIP Code
and the PO Box or Rural Route/Highway Contract:
• Y — Yes, attempt to DPV confirm.
• N —No, do not attempt to DPV confirm.
• Blank — Default is Y.
ZIP Code and Street Address
Type
Optional. If your input file contains multiple matches of the ZIP Code
and the street address type:
• Y — Yes, attempt to DPV confirm.
• N —No, do not attempt to DPV confirm.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Carrier Route
Optional. If your input file contains multiple matches of the Carrier Route
in CODE-1 Plus:
• Y — Yes, attempt to DPV confirm.
• N —No, do not attempt to DPV confirm.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Directional
Optional. If your input file contains multiple matches of the directional:
• Y — Yes, attempt to DPV confirm.
• N —No, do not attempt to DPV confirm.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Suffix
Optional. If your input file contains multiple matches of the suffix:
• Y — Yes, attempt to DPV confirm.
• N —No, do not attempt to DPV confirm.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Suffix/Directional Correction
Optional. If your input file contains multiple matches of the suffix/
directional correction:
• Y — Yes, attempt to DPV confirm.
• N —No, do not attempt to DPV confirm.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Multiple Input Secondary
Components with no
Designator
Optional. If your input file contains multiple matches of the secondary
components with no designator:
• Y — Yes, attempt to DPV confirm.
• N —No, do not attempt to DPV confirm.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Below is an example of secondary components with no designator:
John Jones
12 Main St. #12 #5
New York, NY 10012
#12 and #5 have no indication of being an apartment, PO Box or
otherwise.
Unique ZIP Code/Small Town
Default ZIP + 4 Assignment
Option
Optional. If an address has been assigned a ZIP + 4 by CODE-1 Plus
during regular processing, you may select one of the following options
regarding this ZIP + 4 assignment:
• Y — Yes, attempt to DPV confirm.
• N —No, do not attempt to DPV confirm.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Release 4.1.0
95
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Additional Delivery Point Validation Processing
Defining Additional Delivery Point Validation Processing
CODE-1 Plus includes a second Delivery Point Validation screen (C1CPID85) that allows you to
activate and define additional Delivery Point Validation (DPV) options. For more information on
Delivery Point Validation, refer to "Using Delivery Point Validation” on page 291. To access the
second Delivery Point Validation screen (C1CPID85):
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the Delivery Point Validation screen
(C1CPID85).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Delivery Point Validation screen
(C1CPID85).
Delivery Point Validation Screen Fields
Field
Description
Specify input file Firm Name location
Position
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the starting position of
the firm name in the input file. No default.
Perform DPV Validation of
Secondary Address data?
Optional. Just as you can confirm that a primary address is a deliverable
address using DPV, you can confirm the same for secondary address
information. If you have secondary address information in your input file,
select one of the following:
• Y — Yes, perform DPV validation on secondary address information.
• N — No, do not perform DPV validation on secondary address
information.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Perform CMRA Table
lookups?
Optional. This option allows you to determine whether or not an input
address is a Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA). Select one of
the following:
• Y — Perform CMRA lookup.
• N —No, do not perform CMRA lookup.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Perform PBSA Lookup?
Optional. This option allows you to determine whether or not an input
address is a P. O. Box street address (PBSA). Select one of the
following:
• Y — Yes, perform PBSA lookup.
• N —No, do not perform PBSA lookup.
• Blank — Default is N.
CMRA/PMB DPV
Confirmation Flag?
Optional. This option allows you to determine whether or not to convert
input address secondary information to PMB. Select one of the
following:
• Y — Yes, convert input address secondary information to PMB where
appropriate.
• N — No, do not convert input address secondary information to PMB.
• Blank — Default is N.
RDI Processing Option
Optional. If you have the RDI processing option, select from one of the
following codes to indicate whether to perform RDI processing:
• D — Do DPV processing only; no RDI processing.
• R — Do RDI processing only; no DPV processing.
• B — Do both DPV and RDI processing.
• Blank — Default is D.
Release 4.1.0
96
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 5: Defining Input
Reformatting Your Input Records
Reformatting Your Input Records
This feature allows you to rearrange the components of your input records before the record is
processed. The information you identify is copied, but not removed, from its original location in the
input record. This feature is useful for saving data that might otherwise be overwritten by data
returned from CODE-1 Plus. A maximum of 100 MOVE I operations can be defined for a job. The
move operations are processed one at a time, in sequence from top.
Reformat Input Record Screen
Use the Reformat Input Record screen (C1CPMI13) to reformat the components of your input
records before the records are processed. To access the Reformat Input Record screen
(C1CPMI13):
1. From the Work With Jobs screen, use F12 to select the job for defining input. The Define/Submit
CODE-1 Plus Job screen displays.
2. Select Reformat Input Record.
3. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Reformat Input Record screen (C1CPMI13).
Reformat Input Record Screen Fields
Field Name
Source Field
Description
Required. Enter 3-4 alphanumeric characters to specify the location in
the work area of the information to be copied. Optionally, you can enter
one of the following codes to copy one of the following types of generic
information to the target location:
• SPC — Spaces.
• X00 — Binary zeros.
• ZRO — Character zeros.
• Blank — No default.
Length
Required. Enter a number from 1-999 to specify the length of the
information to be copied to the target location. No default.
Target Field
Required. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location in the input
array to which you want the source information copied. No default.
Release 4.1.0
97
User’s Guide - IBM i
Reformat Input Record Screen
Release 4.1.0
98
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Output
In this chapter:






















Defining Your Output File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Defining ZIP Code Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Defining ZIP Code Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Defining Carrier Route Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Defining Carrier Route Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Defining ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Defining ZIP + 4 Add-On Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Defining Standardized Address Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Defining Standardized Address Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Defining Additional Standardized Address Locations . . . . . . . .114
Defining Address Element Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Defining City and State Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Defining City and State Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Defining County and Congressional Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Defining Address Match Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Defining Additional Address Match Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Defining Extra Data Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Defining Normalized/COA Information Locations. . . . . . . . . . . .127
Defining Line of Travel Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Defining Delivery Point Validation Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Defining Additional Address Match Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Reformat Output Record Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
6
Defining Your Output File
Defining Your Output File
This chapter provides information for using the IBM i screens to define information you want to store
in your output file. This chapter includes a detailed description of each field on these screens.
Output Storage
Use the Output Storage screens to define locations and lengths of the information you want to store
in your output file. The Name/Address Record Posting component provides field definitions for all
result values including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ZIP Code
ZIP + 4
Carrier route codes
Vintage date codes
City and state names and abbreviations
Standardized address information
Parsed address information
General return codes
Delivery Point Validation information

CODE-1 Plus requires you to specify at least one output storage field in each of your jobs. If
you do not, CODE-1 Plus processing will fail.
Storage Options
In addition to defining the layout of your output file, the Name/Address Record Posting function
allows you to specify the storage conditions for your processed data. CODE-1 Plus determines a
relative probability of correctness for every record. CODE-1 Plus uses this probability of correctness
to reject records that may contain inaccurate information. During processing, CODE-1 Plus
sometimes drops information from a given address in order to determine a match or more than one
match for a given ZIP Code or address component.
You can use the Storage Options screens of the Name/Address Record Posting component to
specify:
•
•
•
•
The maximum probability of correctness required for CODE-1 Plus to store a record
Whether CODE-1 Plus stores a record if information was dropped during processing
Whether CODE-1 Plus stores a record if there were multiple ZIP Code matches
What to store if, due to one of the above conditions, CODE-1 Plus did not store information
Disposition Indicator
The Storage Options screens contain disposition indicator fields that determine what to store in your
output file when you do not want to store the returned information. Some examples include:
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
What to store when CODE-1 Plus finds multiple matches
What to store when probable correctness codes are too high
What to store when CODE-1 Plus drops information during a match attempt
100
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Your Output File
When you decide not to store the returned information, you may decide to store:
•
•
•
•
Blanks
Nothing
Zeros
Information from your input file
In all cases, the default is for CODE-1 Plus to store blanks in the position you specify in your output
file. For example, you may have decided that you did not want CODE-1 Plus to store the
standardized address if there was information dropped during the matching process. In that case,
CODE-1 Plus looks at the disposition indicator code you specify on the Standardized Address
Storage Options screen to determine whether to store blanks or nothing in the standardized address
location in your output file.
Maximum Address Correctness
During the matching process, CODE-1 Plus assigns a “probable correctness” value to a matched
address. The correctness value indicates how “accurate,” on a scale of 0 to 9, CODE-1 Plus
considers the match. A probable correctness value of 0 means that the standard address has the
highest probability of being correct. A probable correctness value of 9 means that the record has
what CODE-1 Plus considers to be the lowest probability of being correct.

Records with a probable address correctness code of 9 are still likely to be correct.
For each address component, CODE-1 Plus gives you the option to specify the maximum
acceptable address correctness. If you put a value in this field, CODE-1 Plus stores the output
information for a specific record only when the record's probable address correctness value is equal
to or less than your specified maximum. In all cases, the default maximum address correctness is 9.
For example, if you type a maximum address correctness value of 5 on the ZIP Code Locations
Storage Options screen, CODE-1 Plus stores returned ZIP Codes for records with probable address
correctness values of 5 and lower, but does not store returned ZIP Codes for records with probable
address correctness values of 6 and higher.
Maximum Overall Correctness
CODE-1 Plus also assigns an overall probability of correctness value to matched records. The
overall correctness takes into account not just the address, but also the firm-name match, and
whether or not any information was dropped during the matching process. As with address
correctness, the overall correctness value indicates how “accurate,” on a scale of 0-9, CODE-1
Plus™ considers the match.
Each output Storage Options screen allows you to specify a maximum acceptable overall
correctness value. If you specify a value in this field, CODE-1 Plus™ stores the output information
for a specific record only when the record's probable overall correctness value is equal to or less
than your specified maximum value. In all cases, the default maximum overall correctness is 9.
For example, if you type a maximum overall correctness value of 4 on the Standardized Address
Storage Options screen, CODE-1 Plus stores standardized addresses for records with probable
overall correctness values of 4 and lower but does not store standardized addresses for records with
probable correctness values of 5 and higher.
Release 4.1.0
101
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining ZIP Code Location
Function Keys
The following function keys are available on the Name/Address Record Posting screens.
Function Keys
Function Key
Name
Description
F3
Exit
Exit from the Name/Address Record Posting component
without saving data.
F6
Update
Save the data and quit from the Name/Address Record
Posting component.
F24
Field Search
Allows you to display the location and lengths of the fields in
an external file. Type file name and library of external file.
Defining ZIP Code Location
Use the ZIP Code Storage screen to define the location and format of the ZIP Code information to
store in your output file. To access the ZIP Code Storage Screen:
1. From the Work With Jobs screen (C1CPMM03), use F12 to select the job for defining output.
2. The Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (C1CPDS02) displays. Select Name/Address
Record Posting.
3. The ZIP Code Storage screen (C1CPOD010) displays.
4. Use the following table to complete the fields on the ZIP Code Storage screen.
ZIP Code Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field
Description
Specify ZIP Code Storage
Location for the ZIP Code
return code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location in the
output record to store the 1-byte ZIP Code return code listed below.
• A — Apartment number missing or not found in database, and an
apartment-level match was required.
• B — Insufficient (or blank) address match information.
• C — The address probable correctness or overall probable
correctness was too high.
• D — Information was dropped.
• E — External match—auxiliary file processing.
• H — House/box number not found on street.
• L — The standardized address was too long.
• M — Multiple matches of equal quality were found.
• N — The ZIP Code wasn't stored because the processing
requirements specified that it was not to be stored.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• Z — ZIP Code not found in database.
• Blank — The match attempt was successful.
No default.
Location for the ZIP Code
Release 4.1.0
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location in the
output record for the standardized ZIP Code. No default.
102
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining ZIP Code Location
ZIP Code Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field
Format
Description
Required if location on the output record for the ZIP Code is not
zero. Format of the standardized ZIP Code:
• C — Store the ZIP Code as a 5-byte character field.
• P — Store the ZIP Code as a 3-byte packed field.
• Blank — No default.
Location for the source of
final ZIP Code return code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location in the
output record for the 1-digit code reflecting the source of the final ZIP
Code.
• B — ZIP Code was not determined.
• F — Final ZIP Code determined from the finance number.
• L — New address obtained from LACS processing.
• M — Final ZIP Code determined from the ZIPMOVE database.
• Z — Original ZIP Code was retained.
Location for PO Box-only ZIP
Code flag
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location on the
output record for the P. O. Box-only ZIP Code indicator. Addresses
located within a P. O. Box-only delivery zone can only receive postal
delivery through the use of a P. O. Box. No other postal delivery method
is available for these addresses.
• Y — P. O. Box-only ZIP Code.
• Blank — Not a P. O. Box-only ZIP Code.
Location for Valid ZIP Code
flag
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location on the
output record for the Valid ZIP Code flag.
• Y — Input City, State, and ZIP Code correspond.
• N — Input city, state, ZIP Code do not correspond, or is invalid.
• Blank — ZIP Code could not be determined for input address.
Release 4.1.0
103
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining ZIP Code Information
Defining ZIP Code Information
Use the ZIP Code Storage Options screen to define the ZIP Code information to store in your output
file. To access the ZIP Code Storage Options screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the ZIP Code Storage Options
screen (C1CPOD015).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the ZIP Code Storage Options screen.
ZIP Code Storage Options Screen Fields
Field Name
Store ZIP if any information
was dropped during
standardization?
Description
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized ZIP Code should
be stored when information was dropped during the matching process.
• Y — Store the ZIP Code anyway.
• N — Do not store if information was dropped.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Max Correctness for storage
Address
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to specify the maximum acceptable
address probability of correctness to store the standardized ZIP Code.
Type a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case and 9
indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
Overall
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to specify the maximum acceptable
overall probability of correctness to store the standardized ZIP Code.
Type a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case and 9
indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
Store if multiple ZIP Code
matches are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized ZIP Code should
be stored when multiple ZIP Code matches were found.
• Y — Store the standardized ZIP Code anyway.
• N — Do not store the standardized ZIP Code. Instead, store the
information indicated in the Disposition field below.
• Blank — Default is N.
What should be stored if a ZIP
is not matched or is not stored
due to storage options
above?
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored in cases where the
standardized ZIP Code was not stored either because no match was
found, or due to storage conditions.
• B — Store blanks.
• X — Store nothing.
• I — Store input ZIP Code.
• Z — Store zeros.
• Blank — Default is I.
Store input ZIP if it is Unique
and does not correlate with
the input city/state?
Optional. Code indicating whether the Input ZIP Code should be
returned if it is unique and does not correlate with the input city/state.
• Y — Store the information.
• N — Do not store the Input ZIP Code.
• Blank — Default is N.
Note: If Y is chosen, a non-CASS certified configuration will be created.
No PS 3553 Form will be generated.
Release 4.1.0
104
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Carrier Route Location
Defining Carrier Route Location
Use the Carrier Route Storage Screen to define the locations and lengths of the Carrier Route
information to store in your output file. To access the Carrier Route Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Carrier Route Storage screen
(C1CPOD020).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Carrier Route Storage screen.
Carrier Route Storage Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
Location for Carrier Route
Return Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1- 9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte carrier route return code described below.
Blank The match attempt was successful.
A
Apartment number missing or not found in database, and an
apartment-level match was required.
B
Insufficient (or blank) address match information.
H
House/box number not found on street.
M
Multiple matches of equal quality were found.
S
Street name not found in ZIP Code.
Z
ZIP Code not found in database.
No default.
Location for Carrier Route
Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 4-byte carrier route code. No default.
Defining Carrier Route Information
Use the Carrier Route Storage Options Screen to define the Carrier Route information to store in
your output file. To access the Carrier Route Storage Options screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Carrier Route Storage
Options screen (C1CPOD025).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Carrier Route Storage Options screen.
ZIP Code Storage Options Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Store CRRT if any
information was dropped
during standardization?
Description
Optional. Code indicating whether to store the carrier route code if
information was dropped during the matching process.
• Y — Store the carrier route code anyway.
• N — Do not store the carrier route code.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Max Correctness for storage
Address
Release 4.1.0
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to specify the maximum acceptable
address probability of correctness to store the carrier route code. Type
a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case and 9
indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
105
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Carrier Route Information
ZIP Code Storage Options Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Overall
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to specify the maximum acceptable
overall probability of correctness to store the carrier route code. Type a
number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case and 9
indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
Store if multiple CRRT
matches are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized the carrier route
code should be stored when multiple carrier route code matches were
found.
• Y — Store the standardized the carrier route code.
• N — Do not store the standardized the carrier route code. Instead,
store the information indicated in the “What should be stored if a
CRRT is not matched or is not stored due to storage options above?”
field below.
• Blank — Default is N.
Store if multiple ZIP matches
are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized carrier route code
should be stored if multiple matching ZIP Codes were found.
• Y — Store the returned carrier route code.
• N — Do not store the standardized the carrier route code. Instead,
store the information indicated in the “What should be stored if a
CRRT is not matched or is not stored due to storage options above?”
field below.
• Blank — Default is N.
What should be stored if a
CRRT is not matched or is not
stored due to storage options
above?
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored in cases where the
standardized carrier route code was not stored either because no match
was found, or due to storage conditions.
• B — Store blanks.
• I — Store carrier route code from the input record.
• X — Store nothing.
• Blank — Default is B.
Release 4.1.0
106
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations
Defining ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations
Use the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage screen (C1CPOD030) to define the locations and lengths of the
ZIP + 4 add-on information to store in your output file. To access the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage
screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage
screen (C1CPOD030).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage screen.
ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Location for ZIP + 4 Return
Code
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte ZIP + 4 return code described below:
• Blank — The match attempt was successful.
• 7 — The ZIP+4 was suppressed. Record matched to an R777
(phantom) carrier route.
• A — Apartment number missing or not found in database, and an
apartment-level match was required.
• B — Insufficient (or blank) address match information.
• H — House/box number not found on street.
• M — Multiple matches of equal quality were found.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• V — USPS non-deliverable ZIP + 4 Code.
• Z — ZIP Code not found in database.
No default.
Location for ZIP + 4 code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the ZIP + 4 Code. No default.
Format of ZIP + 4 Code
Optional. Format of the ZIP + 4 Code on the output record:
• C — 4-byte EBCDIC number.
• P — 3-byte packed number.
• - — 4-byte EBCDIC number stored with a preceding hyphen (-).
• Blank — No default.
Location for DPBC Add-on,
without check digit
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 2-byte Delivery Point Barcode, without the 1-byte
check digit. No default.
Location for DPBC Add-on,
check digit
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte Delivery Point Barcode check digit. No
default.
Location for DPBC (Delivery
Point Barcode)
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 6-byte Delivery Point Barcode. No default.
Location for DPBC Add-on
with Check-Digit
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 2-byte Delivery Point Barcode add-on with the 1byte check digit. No default.
Release 4.1.0
107
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining ZIP + 4 Add-On Information
ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Suppress DPBC if R777
Carrier Route detected?
Controls whether to suppress ZIP + 4 for addresses assigned a phantom
Carrier Route of R777 (not eligible for street delivery).
• Y — Yes, if R777 Carrier Route is found, add to the ZIP+4
Suppressed Count on the USPS Form 3553. R777 addresses are not
deliverable. Do not store the ZIP+4 (DPBC).
• Blank — If R777 Carrier Route is found, do not add to the ZIP+4
Suppressed Count on the USPS Form 3553. R777 addresses are
deliverable. Store the ZIP+4 (DPBC).
Location for Z4CHANGE
Option return code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Z4CHANGE return code described below:
• 0 — Address matching was not performed for this record.
• 4 — Address matching was performed for this record.
• 8 — A fatal error occurred.
• Blank — No default.
Location for Vintage date of
CODE-1 Plus™ Database
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Master File vintage date. No default.
Format of Vintage Date
Required if Position field is filled in. Format of the Master File vintage
date on the output record (YYMM or YYYYMM).
• B — 2-byte binary number (YYMM).
• C — 4-byte character number (YYMM).
• P — 3-byte packed number (YYMM).
• 3 — 3-byte binary number (YYYYMM).
• 4 — 4-byte packed number (YYYYMM).
• 6 — 6-byte character number (YYYYMM).
Defining ZIP + 4 Add-On Information
Use the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage Options screen to define the ZIP + 4 information to store in your
output file. To access the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage Options screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage
Options screen (C1CPOD035).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage Options screen.
ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage Options Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Store ZIP+4 if any information
was dropped during
standardization?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized ZIP + 4 and DPBC
should be stored when information was dropped during the
standardization process:
• Y — Store the information anyway.
• N — Do not store if information was dropped.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Max Correctness for storage:
Address
Release 4.1.0
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to define the maximum acceptable
address probability of correctness to store the standardized ZIP + 4 and
DPBC. Type a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case
and 9 indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
108
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Standardized Address Locations
ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage Options Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Overall
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to define the maximum acceptable
overall probability of correctness to store the standardized ZIP + 4 and
DPBC. Type a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case
and 9 indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
Store if multiple ZIP+4
matches are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized ZIP + 4 and DPBC
should be stored when multiple ZIP + 4 matches were found:
• Y — Store the standardized ZIP + 4 and DPBC anyway.
• N — Do not store the standardized ZIP + 4 and DPBC. Instead, store
the information indicated in the Disposition field below.
• Blank — Default is N.
If Y, write to NCO file?
Optional. Code indicating whether to write the results to the NCO file, if
multiple ZIP + 4 Codes are found during processing:
• Y — Write the results to the NCO file.
• N — Do not write the results to the NCO file.
• Blank — Default is N.
Store if multiple ZIP Code
matches are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized ZIP + 4 and DPBC
should be stored when multiple ZIP Code matches were found:
• Y — Store the standardized ZIP + 4 and DPBC anyway.
• N — Do not store the standardized ZIP + 4 and DPBC. Instead store
the information indicated in the “What should be stored if a ZIP+4 is
not matched or is not stored due to storage options above?“ field
below.
• Blank — Default is N.
Write to NCO file if ZIP+4 is
'0000' or '9999'
Optional. Code indicating the output file to write the record to when ZIP
+ 4 is zeros or “9999”:
N
Write the record to the NCO file.
Blank Write the record to the COK file.
What should be stored if a
ZIP+4 is not matched or is not
stored due to storage options
above?
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored in cases where the
standardized ZIP + 4 and DPBC were not stored, either because no
match was found, or due to storage conditions:
• B — Store blanks.
• I — Store input ZIP + 4 Code.
• X — Store nothing.
• Z — Store zeros.
• Blank — Default is B.
Defining Standardized Address Locations
Use the Standardized Address Storage screen to define locations and lengths of the standardized
address information to store in your output file. To access the standardized Address Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Standardized Address
Storage screen (C1CPOD040).
Release 4.1.0
109
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Standardized Address Locations
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage Options screen.
Standardized Address Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Location for standardized address with apartment
Replace Input?
Optional. Code indicating whether to replace the input address with the
standardized address (with apartment).
• Y — Replace the input address with the standardized address (with
apartment).
• N — Do not replace the input address with the standardized address
(with apartment). Instead, specify a location on the output record to
store the standardized address (with apartment).
• Blank — No default.
If Y: Blank out unused
address lines?
Optional. This field is only applicable if you specified “Y” in the “Replace
Input?” field.
• Y — When replacing the input address with the standardized address
(with apartment), blank out unused address lines.
• N — When replacing the input address with the standardized address
(with apartment), do not blank out unused address lines.
• Blank — No default.
If N, specify storage
location:Posn
Required. This field is only applicable if you specified “N” in the
“Replace Input?” field.
Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location in the output record
to store the standardized address (with apartment). No default.
If N, specify storage
location:Len
Required. This field is only applicable if you specified “N” in the
“Replace Input?” field.
Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length in the output record for the
standardized address (with apartment). No default.
Store Input Addr if Std Addr
too long or no match?
Optional. This field determines what to store in the output record if the
standardized address (with apartment) is too long or no match was
found for the standardized address (with apartment).
• Y — tore the input address.
• N — Do not store the input address. Store blanks in the output record.
• Blank — Default is N.
Location for standardized address without apartment
Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output file for the standardized address, excluding apartment
information. No default.
Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length on the output
file for the standardized address, excluding apartment information.
Replace even if already
stored?
Optional. Enter Y to store the standard address without apartment even
if it is already stored with apartment.
• Y — Store the standard address.
• N — Do not store the standard address.
• Blank — No default.
Location for Apt/PMB number
Release 4.1.0
110
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Standardized Address Locations
Standardized Address Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output file for the standardized address, excluding apartment
information. No default.
Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length on the output
file for the standardized address, excluding apartment information. No
default.
Treatment if Std Address with
Apt already stored?
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored if the Standardized
Address with Apt is already stored:
• Y — Replace. Do not store apartment information if successfully
stored in standardized address with apartment.
• P — Store input PMB number.
• X — Store apartment information.
• Blank — No default.
Location for Standardized
address return code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte address return code described below:
Blank The address match attempt was successful.
A
Apartment number missing or not found in database, and an
apartment-level match was required.
B
Insufficient (or blank) address information for a match.
C
The record's probable correctness was higher than the
specified maximum.
D
Information was dropped during the address match attempt.
H
House/Box number not found on this street.
L
The returned address was too long to be stored.
M
Multiple matches were found.
S
Street name not found in ZIP Code.
Z
ZIP Code was not found on database.
Location for PMB return code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte code indicating the disposition of the PMB
number:
A
Append to standardized address.
S
Secondary address input.
L
Returned address was too long to be stored.
Location for source of
matched address return code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on output
record for the 1-byte matched address return code.
M
Both address lines.
P
Primary address line only.
S
Secondary address line only.
Location for dropped
information type return code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on output
record for the 1-byte dropped information type return code:
A
Street and address information.
R
RR/Box information.
W
Miscellaneous words and characters.
Location of LACS indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte LACS indicator. No default.
Release 4.1.0
111
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Standardized Address Information
Defining Standardized Address Information
Use the Standardized Address Storage Options Screen to define the standardized address
information to store in your output file.
Base and Alias Street Names
In the USPS database, streets may have more than one name. All streets have one and only one
base street name and may have one or more alias street names. Base and alias street names refer
to a portion of the street, such as a house range or group of ranges. Both are valid, USPS
deliverable addresses.
The USPS identified three types of alias street names:
•
•
•
USPS-preferred street name
Official street name change as a result of a chamber of commerce action
Other
If the alias street name is a “preferred alias,” CODE-1 Plus™ always stores the alias name instead
of the base name.
If the alias street name is an “official street name change,” CODE-1 Plus™ always stores the base
name instead of the alias name.
If the alias street name is of type “other,” CODE-1 Plus™ stores the alias or base, depending on the
option you choose on the Return Base Street Name if Alias is matched? field.
To access the Standardized Address Storage Options screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Standardized Address
Storage Options screen (C1CPOD045).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Standardized Address Storage Options
screen.
Standardized Address Storage Options Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Return Base Street Name if
Alias is matched?
Description
Optional. Code indicating whether to return a base street name if the
input record alias street name matched.
• Y — Store the base street name.
• N — Do not store the alias street name.
• Blank — Default is N.
Location for Alias Return
Code:Position
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record to store the alias/base return code described below:
• Blank — The input address matched a base street.
• A — The input address matched an alias street name.
No default.
Release 4.1.0
112
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Standardized Address Information
Standardized Address Storage Options Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Location for Alias Type
Code:Position
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record to store the alias type code described below:
• P — The alias was a preferred street name.
• C — The alias was an official street name change.
• 0 — The alias was some other type of alias.
• Blank — The address did not match an alias street name or no
match was obtained.
No default.
Store Std Address if any
information was dropped
during standardization?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized address should be
stored when information is dropped during the standardization process:
• Y — Store the information anyway.
• N — Do not store if information is dropped.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Store if multiple Std Addr
matches are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized address should be
stored when multiple address matches were found:
• Y — Store the standardized address anyway.
• N — Do not store the standardized address. Instead, store the
information indicated in the Disposition field below.
• Blank — Default is N.
Store if multiple ZIP matches
are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized address should be
stored when multiple ZIP Code matches were found.
• Y — Store the standardized address anyway.
• N — Do not store the standardized address. Instead, store the
information indicated in the Disposition field below.
• Blank — Default is N.
Max Correctness for storage:
Address
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to define the maximum acceptable
address probability of correctness to store the standardized address.
Type a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case and 9
indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
Overall
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to define the maximum acceptable
overall probability of correctness to store the standardized address.
Type a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case and 9
indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
What should be stored if a Std
Addr is not matched
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored in cases where the
standardized address was not stored, either because no match was
found or because of specified storage conditions.
• B — Store blanks.
• X — Store nothing.
• Blank — Default is B.
Release 4.1.0
113
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Additional Standardized Address Locations
Defining Additional Standardized Address Locations
Use the Standardized Address Storage screen to define locations and lengths of additional
standardized address information to store in your output file. To access the Standardized Address
Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Standardized Address
Storage Options screen (C1CPOD050).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Standardized Address Storage Options
screen.
Standardized Address Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Location for Formatted PMB
Posn
Number from
1-9999
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to
define the location on the output record for the
formatted Private Mail Box (PMB) when
presented in a separately-defined input
address line. No default.
Optional.
Len
Number from
1-99
Required if the location is specified in Posn
field. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the
length of the PMB information on the output
record. No default.
Required if the
location is
specified in
position 8-12.
Should Preferred Alias
Processing be
performed
Y or N
Required for CASS certification. Indicates if
preferred alias processing should be
performed:
• Y — Perform preferred alias processing. A
“Y” in this position is required to generate a
USPS FORM 3553 report.
Required for
CASS
certification
• N — Do not perform preferred alias
processing. “N” generates a non-CASScertified configuration. The USPS FORM
3553 is not generated.
• Blank — Default is N.
Location for Preferred
Alias Processing
Return Code
Number from
1-9999
Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the
location on the output record for the 1-byte
Preferred Alias Processing Return Code
described below:
• Blank — No preferred alias processing
attempted.
• A — Input address matched to an alias
(preferred alias processing is only
attempted for base addresses).
• N — Did not match to preferred alias.
• Y — Matched to preferred alias.
Should Abbreviated
Alias Processing be
performed
Y or N
Indicates if abbreviated alias processing
should be performed:
• Y — Perform abbreviated alias processing.
• N — Do not perform abbreviated alias
processing.
• Blank — Default is N.
Release 4.1.0
114
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Address Element Locations
Standardized Address Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Location for
Abbreviated Alias
Processing Return
Code
Number from
1-9999
Location on the output record for the 1-byte
abbreviated alias processing return code
described below:
Blank No abbreviated alias processing
attempted.
B
Output address set to base address.
L
Original standardized address length
already <= max.
N
Abbreviated alias not found for input
address.
Y
Abbreviated alias found for input
address and used in output
standardized address.
Enhanced Alternate
High Rise Match
Storage Option
A or B
Optional. Code indicating whether the
enhanced alternate high rise match should be
returned:
• B — Return Base Address.
Comments
Optional.
Default is B
• A — Return Alternate Address.
• Blank — Default is B.
NOTE: Selecting A will generate a nonCASS-certified configuration. No USPS
FORM 3553 will be generated.
Location for Seasonal
Delivery Flags
Number from
1-9999
Enter a number form 1-9999 to define the
location of the 12-byte code indicating when
mail can be delivered to a specific address
described below:
• Y — Mail can be delivered.
• N — Mail cannot be delivered.
Defining Address Element Locations
Use the Address Element Storage screen to define the location and length of the address element
information to store in your output file. To access the Address Element Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Address Element Storage
screen (C1CPOD060).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Address Element Storage screen.
Address Element Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
House Number:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the left-justified 10-byte house number. No default.
Leading Directional:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 2-byte leading directional. No default.
Street Name: Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the street name. No default.
Release 4.1.0
115
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Address Element Locations
Address Element Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Street Name: Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length of the street
name on the output record. No default.
Suffix:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 4-byte street suffix. No default.
Trailing Directional:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 2-byte trailing directional. No default.
Apartment Designator:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 4-byte apartment designator. No default.
Apartment Number:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 8-byte left-justified apartment number. No default.
RR/HC Type:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 2-byte rural route/highway contract route type code.
No default.
RR/HC Number:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 3-byte rural route/highway contract route number.
No default.
Box Number:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the left-justified 10-byte box number. No default.
Private Mail Box
Designator:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the left-justified 4-byte Private Mail Box Designator.
• PMB — Standard Private Mailbox Designator.
• # — Nonstandard Private Mailbox Designator.
•
Blank — No default.
Private Mail Box
Number:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Private Mailbox Number. No default.
Private Mail Box Number: Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length of the Private
Mailbox Number on the output record. No default.
Store All Private Mail Box
Numbers?
Optional. You can choose to store all Private Mail Box Numbers or just
standard Private Mail Box Numbers. Default is N.
NOTE: If all Private Mail Box Numbers are stored, a non-CASS certified
configuration will be created. No PS Form 3553 will be generated.
What should be stored when
Standardized Address is not
avail
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored in cases where
standardized elements could not be stored (because no match was
found). Type one of the following codes:
• B — Store blanks.
• M — Store elements from normalized address, merging secondary
address line elements with primary address line elements, but giving
precedence to the primary address line elements.
• N — Store elements from normalized address.
• X — Store nothing.
• Blank — Default is B.
Release 4.1.0
116
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining City and State Locations
Defining City and State Locations
Use the City and State Storage screen to define the location and length of the city and state
information to store in your output file. To access the City and State Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the City and State Storage
screen (C1CPOD070).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the City and State Storage screen.
City and State Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Location for City/State return
code:Posn
Description
Optional. Location on the output record for a 1-byte city/state return
code that indicates why the output city/state was/was not stored. One of
these codes is stored:
• Blank — An output city/state was stored.
• A — Apartment number missing or not found in database, and an
apartment-level match was required.
• B — Insufficient or blank address match information.
• H — House/box number not found on street.
• M — Multiple matches of equal quality were found.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• Z — ZIP Code not found in database.
No default.
Formatted City/State Line
Replace Input?
Optional. Specifies whether to store the standardized city/state in the
same location as the input city/state line.
• Y — Store in the same location as the input city/state.
• N — Do not store in the same location as the input city/state.
• Blank — Default is N.
Replace Input:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the standardized city/state line. No default.
NOTE: If you choose NOT to replace input, you must specify these fields
to store the formatted city/state line.
Replace Input:Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length of the
standardized city/state line. No default.
Format
Optional. Format of the standardized city/state line:
• 9 — City, state, ZIP Code, and ZIP + 4 Code.
• S — City and state only.
• Z — City, state, and 5-digit ZIP Code.
• Blank — No default.
Location for City Name:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the output location for
the returned city name (28-character form if it fits, else short). No default.
Location for City Name:Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length of the returned
city name. No default.
Release 4.1.0
117
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining City and State Information
City and State Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
If no match is found, store city
from Input or ZIP Code?
Description
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored when no address
match is found:
• I — Store the input city name.
• Z — Store the primary city for the valid input ZIP Code. If you specify
“Z”, CODE-1 Plus does not generate a USPS Form 3553 (CASS
Summary Report).
• Blank — Store the information indicated in the Disposition field of
the City and State Storage Options screen (C1CPOD21).
Store input short city name?
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored when the input city
name is the short city name.
• Y — Store input city name.
• N — Store standardized city name.
• Blank — Default is N.
Location for City Name (short
form):Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the output location for
the13-byte short city name. No default.
Location for State
Abbreviation (USPS
Standard):
Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the output location for
the 2-byte state abbreviation.
Store input if no match is
found?
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored when no state match
is found:
• Y — Store the input state abbreviation.
• N — Store the information indicated in the Disposition field of the
City and State Storage Options screen (C1CPOD070).
• Blank — Default is N.
USPS Urbanization
name:Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the output location for
the USPS urbanization name. No default.
Store if multiple Urbanization
names are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether to store the standardized
urbanization name when multiple matches were found on the database.
• Y — Store the standardized urbanization name.
• N — Store nothing.
• Blank — Default is N.
Defining City and State Information
Use the City and State Storage Options screen to define the city and state information to store in
your output file. To access the City and State Storage Options screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the City and State Storage
Options screen (C1CPOD073).
Release 4.1.0
118
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining City and State Information
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the City and State Storage Options screen.
City and State Storage Options Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
Store City/State if any
information is dropped during
standardization?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized city/state line
should be stored when information was dropped during the
standardization process:
• Y — Store the information anyway.
• N — Do not store if information was dropped.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Max Correctness for storage:
Address
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to define the maximum acceptable
address probability of correctness to store the standardized city/state
line. Type a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case
and 9 indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
Overall
Optional. Enter a number from 0-9 to define the maximum acceptable
overall probability of correctness to store the standardized city/state line.
Type a number between 0 and 9, where 0 indicates the best case and 9
indicates the worst case. Default is 9.
Store default City if City not
matched
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored when no city name
match was found:
• Y — Store the default city name.
• N — Store the information indicated in the Disposition field below.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Store if multiple ZIP + 4
matches are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized city/state line
should be stored when multiple ZIP + 4 matches were found:
• Y — Store the standardized city/state line anyway.
• N — Do not store the standardized city/state. Instead, store the
information indicated in the Disposition field below.
• Blank — Default is N.
Store if multiple ZIP Code
matches are found?
Optional. Code indicating whether the standardized city/state line
should be stored when multiple ZIP Code matches were found:
• Y — Store the standardized city/state line anyway.
• N — Do not store the standardized city/state line. Instead, store the
information indicated in the Disposition field below.
• Blank — Default is N.
What should be stored if a
City/State is not matched or is
not stored due to storage
options above?
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored in cases where the
standardized city/state line was not stored, either because no match was
found or due to storage conditions:
• B — Store blanks; removes any old information in the output city and
state field. Ensures you will be able to detect when a record did not
receive a city and state.
• X — Store nothing.
• Blank — Default is B.
Release 4.1.0
119
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining County and Congressional Location
Defining County and Congressional Location
Use the County and Congressional Storage Option screen to define the location and length of the
county and congressional information to store in your output file. To access the County and
Congressional Storage Option screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the County and Congressional
Storage Option screen (C1CPOD076).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the City and State Storage Options screen.
County and Congressional Storage Option Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
Location of County Name
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location of the
county where the address resides. No default.
Location of the FIPS County
Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the county code of the
matched address. No default.
Location for the
Congressional District
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the USPS-assigned, 2digit number representing the address’ congressional district. No
default.
Preferred last line city name
storage option
Optional. Code indicating whether the preferred last line city name
should be stored:
• C — Store the USPS-preferred City Name from USPS City/State File.
NOTE: If you select C, CODE-1 Plus does not generate a CASS
certified configuration and does not generate the USPS 3553 Report.
• P — Store the Primary City Name from the USPS City/State File.
NOTE: If you select P, CODE-1 Plus does not generate a CASS
certified configuration and does not generate the USPS 3553 Report.
• Z — Store the Preferred Last Line City Name from the USPS ZIP+4
File (Override City Name). (See the AM2OUT parameter for a
description of the Override City Name.)
NOTE: If you select Z, CODE-1 Plus generates a CASS certified
configuration and the USPS 3553 Report.
• Blank — Default is Z.
Defining Address Match Locations
Use the Address Match Information Storage screen to define the location and length of the address
matching information to store in your output file.
Return Codes
Address matching return codes provide results of attempts to match input records against the
information in the CODE-1 Plus database. These codes are very useful when you are analyzing
CODE-1 Plus processing results.
Release 4.1.0
120
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Address Match Locations
Match Scores
Match scores for street and firm names indicate the level of similarity between the information
returned as the result of a match and the information extracted from your input file. The comparison
is “scored” on a scale of 0 to 9, with 0 being an exact match.
Other Address Matching Information
You can also use this screen to specify the output location for the USPS standard record type code
and the number of I/O reads CODE-1 Plus had to execute in order to determine a match.
To access the Address Match Information Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Address Match Information
Storage screen (C1CPOD080).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Address Match Information Storage screen.
Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 3)
Field Name
USPS Record Type
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte USPS record type code described below:
• F — Firm.
• G — General delivery.
• H — High-rise (apartment complex).
• P — Post office box.
• R — Rural route or highway contract.
• S — Normal street address.
Blank — No default.
NOTE: CODE-1 Plus will not produce the USPS 3553 form if the USPS
Record Type Code is posted.
General Return Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte general return code:
• Blank — Successful address match attempt.
• A — Apartment number missing or not found in database, and an
apartment-level match required.
• B — Insufficient (or blank) address information.
• F — Input firm does not match.
• H — House/box range not found on street.
• M — Multiple matches found.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• Z — ZIP Code not found in database.
Blank — No default.
Directional Return Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte directional return code described below:
• Blank — No directional match was found on database.
• D — The directional does not match the database.
• F — The complete directional does not match the database, but its
first character does (for example, N vs. NW).
• N — No directional was found on the input address, but a directional
was present on the database.
No default.
Release 4.1.0
121
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Address Match Locations
Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 3)
Field Name
Suffix Return Code
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte suffix return code described below:
• Blank — No suffixed match was found.
• N — No suffix was found on the input address, but a suffix was
present on the database.
• S — The suffix does not match the database.
No default.
Apartment Return Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte apartment return code described below:
• Blank — No address match or apartment (or lack thereof matches
the database.
• A — The apartment does not match the database.
• N — No apartment was found on the input address, but an apartment
was present on the database at the street address.
No default.
Firm-name Return Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte firm-name return code:
• Blank — No address match or firm-name match was found, or no firm
name was indicated in the input record.
• F — The input firm name does not match the database.
• M — A firm name was present in the input record, but there were no
firm names on the database for the matched address.
No default.
Overall Probable Correctness
Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte overall probability of correctness:
• Blank — No match was found.
• 0 — The match is exact.
• 1-8 — The match has an intermediate probability of correctness on a
sliding scale.
• 9 — The match is least likely to be correct.
No default.
Alternate Address Scheme
Indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the type of alternate address scheme to use to obtain
a match:
• Blank — No alternate address scheme used.
• D — Delivery point alternate logic used.
• S — Small town default logic used.
U — Unique ZIP Code.No default.
No default.
Street-name Match Score
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte street-name match score.
• Blank — No match was found.
• 0 — The match is exact.
• 1-8 — The match has an intermediate probability of correctness on a
sliding scale.
• 9 — The match is least likely to be correct.
No default.
Release 4.1.0
122
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Address Match Locations
Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 3)
Field Name
Suffix Return Code
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte suffix return code described below:
• Blank — No suffixed match was found.
• N — No suffix was found on the input address, but a suffix was
present on the database.
• S — The suffix does not match the database.
No default.
Apartment Return Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte apartment return code described below:
• Blank — No address match or apartment (or lack thereof matches
the database.
• A — The apartment does not match the database.
• N — No apartment was found on the input address, but an apartment
was present on the database at the street address.
No default.
Firm-name Return Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte firm-name return code:
• Blank — No address match or firm-name match was found, or no firm
name was indicated in the input record.
• F — The input firm name does not match the database.
• M — A firm name was present in the input record, but there were no
firm names on the database for the matched address.
No default.
Overall Probable Correctness
Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte overall probability of correctness:
• Blank — No match was found.
• 0 — The match is exact.
• 1-8 — The match has an intermediate probability of correctness on a
sliding scale.
• 9 — The match is least likely to be correct.
No default.
Alternate Address Scheme
Indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the type of alternate address scheme to use to obtain
a match:
• Blank — No alternate address scheme used.
• D — Delivery point alternate logic used.
• S — Small town default logic used.
U — Unique ZIP Code.No default.
No default.
Street-name Match Score
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte street-name match score.
• Blank — No match was found.
• 0 — The match is exact.
• 1-8 — The match has an intermediate probability of correctness on a
sliding scale.
• 9 — The match is least likely to be correct.
No default.
Release 4.1.0
123
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Additional Address Match Locations
Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields (Part 3 of 3)
Field Name
Firm-name Match Score
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte firm-name match score.
• Blank — No match was found.
• 0 — The match is exact.
• 1-8 — The match has an intermediate probability of correctness on a
sliding scale.
• 9 — The match is least likely to be correct.
No default.
Address Probable
Correctness Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte address probability of correctness.
• Blank — No match was found.
• 0 — The match is exact.
• 1-8 — The match has an intermediate probability of correctness on a
sliding scale.
• 9 — The match is least likely to be correct.
No default.
ZIP Code Confirmed/Altered/
Original indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte code indicating if the ZIP Code has been
confirmed, altered, or the original ZIP Code was returned:
• A — Altered — the original input ZIP Code was not stored; the ZIP
Code used for a match was determined from the input address.
• B — The ZIP Code was missing from input record; input ZIP Code
field contains blanks.
• C — Confirmed — the original input ZIP Code was stored, no match
attempted was made.
• O — Original — the original input ZIP Code was stored due to a
match.
No default.
VeriMove Universal Field
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for 250 bytes of additional information codes. This field is
designed for use with the Pitney Bowes VeriMove move update product.
No default.
Defining Additional Address Match Locations
Use the Additional Address Match Information Storage screen to define the location and length of
additional address matching information to store in your output file.
Delivery Sequence File (DSF2) footnotes
Delivery Sequence File (DSF2) footnotes are 2-character, USPS-defined codes that represent the
changes that were made to the input address during the matching process. Up to 50 of these codes
may be stored by CODE-1 Plus™ for each record. After CODE-1 Plus™ has finished processing,
you can run your output file through a delivery sequence program (not provided by Pitney Bowes) to
sort your records into delivery sequence. The delivery sequence program uses these footnotes to
sort the records.
Release 4.1.0
124
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Additional Address Match Locations
To access the Additional Address Match Information Storage screen (C1CPOD085):
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Address Match Information
Storage screen (C1CPOD080).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Additional Address Match Information
Storage screen.
Additional Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
ZIP+4 Base/
Alternate record
indicator:Posn
Format
Number from
1-9999
Description
Comments
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the
location on the output record for the 1-byte code
indicating whether the input address matched a ZIP +
4 base record or a ZIP + 4 alternate record described
below.
• A — Input address matched a alternate ZIP + 4
record.
Optional.
No default.
• B — Input address matched a base ZIP + 4 record.
No default.
USPS Last Line
number:Posn
Number from
1-9999
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the
location on the output file for the USPS 6-byte last line
number from the output city. No default.
Optional.
No default.
USPS Finance
number:Posn
Number from
1-9999
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the
location on the output file for the USPS 6-byte finance
number from the output ZIP + 4 Code. No default.
Optional.
No default.
Array of
Footnotes as
required for
USPS DSF2 File
processing
Number from
1-9999
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the
location on the output record for up to 50 2-character
delivery sequence footnotes as listed below:
• AA — Record matched the ZIP + 4 database (the
CODE-1 Plus™ database).
• A1 — No match was found.
• A2 — Alias street name matched to a base street
name on the database.
• A3 — Match was made to an alternate record on
the database.
• BB — Matched to the DSF2 file.
• B1 — No acceptable match was made to the
DSF2 file.
• B2 — Alias street name matched a base street
name on the DSF2 file.
• B3 — Match was made to an alternate record on
the DSF2 file.
• CC — Matched the DSF2 file but is missing
secondary information.
• D — City name or state was changed.
• E — Primary address was changed.
• F — Secondary address was changed.
• H — ZIP Code was changed.
• G — The delivery point is vacant.
• J — City, state, and ZIP Code could not be
validated.
• K — Multiple matches in primary address.
Release 4.1.0
125
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Extra Data Locations
Additional Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Array of
Footnotes as
required for
USPS DSF2 File
processingcontinued
Format
Description
Comments
K1
Multiple matches due to missing or incorrect
directionals.
K2
Multiple matches due to missing or incorrect
suffix.
G
Delivery point is vacant.
H
Input ZIP Code was changed.
I
Input address could not be parsed.
J
Input city, state, and ZIP Code could not be
validated.
K
Multiple matches were found for the primary
address.
K1
Multiple matches due to missing or incorrect
directionals.
K2
Multiple matches due to missing or incorrect
suffixes.
L
Multiple matches were found in the
secondary address.
M1
Input street number was missing.
M2
Address was not found on the database.
M3
No such primary number.
M4
Firm name not matched.
N1
Secondary address number was missing.
N2
Secondary address number was not found
on the database.
P1
Rural route or highway contact box number
was missing.
P2
Rural route or highway contact box number
was not found on the database.
Q1
P.O. Box number was missing.
Q2
P.O. Box number was not found on the
database.
No default.
NOTE: CODE-1 Plus™ uses the entire 100-byte
array, back-filling with spaces as necessary.
Defining Extra Data Locations
Use the Extra Data Storage screen (C1CPOD090) to define the location and length of the additional
input data and unmatched data to store in your output file. To access the Extra Data Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Extra Data Storage screen
(C1CPOD090).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Extra Data Storage screen.
Release 4.1.0
126
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Normalized/COA Information Locations
Extra Data Storage Screen Fields
Field Name
Format of Extra Data
Description
Optional. A1-byte character that defines the format of the extra data in
the output record.
This field defines how two types of extra data display in the output
record.
• Additional input data - Any information that is defined on the input
address lines but is not sent to the matcher for processing is identified
as additional input data.
• Unmatched data - Any information passed to the matcher that is not
used in the matching process is identified as unmatched data.
Enter one of the following codes:
• F - Fixed length format. Extra data will be posted “as is” in eleven
output fields:
–
Six 100-byte length fields will contain additional input data
(information that is defined on the input address lines but is not
sent to the matcher for processing).
– Five 100-byte length fields will contain unmatched data
(information passed to the matcher that was not used in the
matching process).
• C - Concatenated format (separated by the character specified in the
“For C=Concatenated, specify Field Separator” field on this screen):
Additional input data (information that is defined on the input address
lines but is not sent to the matcher for processing) is concatenated
and written into one field.
No Default.
For C=Concatenated, Specify
Field Separator
Optional. If you specified C (Concatenated) in the “Format of Extra
Data” field, specify a character to separate the additional input data or
the extra data from the matcher (unmatched data). Default is semicolon
“;”.
Location to post Additional
Input Data
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for additional input data (information that is defined on the
input address lines but is not sent to the matcher for processing). No
default.
Location to post Unmatched
Data
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for unmatched data (information passed to the matcher
that is not used in the matching process). No default.
Defining Normalized/COA Information Locations
Use the Normalized and COA Information Storage screen to define the location and length of the
normalized and care-of information to store in your output file. To access the Normalized and COA
Information Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Normalized and COA
Information Storage screen (C1CPOD095).
Release 4.1.0
127
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Normalized/COA Information Locations
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Normalized and COA Information Storage
screen.
Normalized and Care-Of Address Information Storage Screen
Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Care-of Information, Address 1
Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the "care-of" characters dropped from the primary
address line. No default.
Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length of the "care-of"
characters dropped from the primary address line. No default.
Care-of Information, Address 2
Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the "care-of" characters dropped from the secondary
address line. No default.
Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length of the "care-of"
characters dropped from the secondary address line. No default.
Normalized Address
Condition
Optional. Condition under which the normalized primary address line
should be stored:
• A — Store for all records.
• X — Store only when standardized address is not stored.
• D — Store dropped dual address from matched address.
• Blank — Default is X.
Posn
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the normalized primary address line. No default.
Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length of the
normalized primary address line. No default.
Normalized Address 2
Condition
Optional. Condition under which the normalized secondary address line
should be stored:
• A — Store for all records.
• X — Store only when standardized address is not stored.
• D — Store dropped dual address from matched address.
• Blank — Default is X.
Posn
Release 4.1.0
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the normalized secondary address line. No default.
128
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Line of Travel Locations
Normalized and Care-Of Address Information Storage Screen
Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Len
Optional. Enter a number from 1-99 to define the length of the
normalized secondary address line. No default.
Normalized All Address
Types
Optional. Code indicating whether all address types or only selected
address types should be normalized. The selected address types are
“GENERAL DELIVERY” keywords, PO BOX keywords, and RR/HC
keywords.
• Y — Normalize specified address line regardless of address type.
• N — Normalize select address types otherwise return input.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Defining Line of Travel Locations
Use the Line of Travel Storage screen to define the location and length of the Line of Travel
information to store in your output file. To access the Line of Travel Storage screen.
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Line of Travel Storage screen
(C1CPOD100).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Line of Travel Storage screen.
Fields on the Line of Travel Storage Screen (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Location for LOT return code
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte LOT return code described below:
• 9 — ZIP + 4 matched the LOT master file.
• C — Call to LOT matcher failed.
• D — Default coded. ZIP + 4 not found in the LOT master file.
• F — Master file access failure.
• V — Incompatible Master file.
• Blank — ZIP Code and/or ZIP + 4 was neither numeric nor zeros.
No default.
Location for Line of Travel
Code (numeric portion)
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 4-byte numeric portion of the Line of Travel Code.
No default.
Location for Line of Travel
Code (alphabetic portion)
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte alphabetic USPS sequence code. No
default.
Location for Alternate
sequence code
(alphanumeric format)
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 2-byte alternate sequence code used for sortation
purposes. No default.
Release 4.1.0
129
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Delivery Point Validation Locations
Fields on the Line of Travel Storage Screen (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Location for Alternate
sequence code (hexadecimal
format)
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-byte alternate sequence code used for sortation
purposes. No default.
What should be stored if LOT
Code is not available?
Optional. Code indicating what should be stored in cases where a LOT
code was not determined.
• B — Store blanks.
• X — Store nothing.
• Blank — Default is B.
Defining Delivery Point Validation Locations
Use the Delivery Point Validation screen to define the location and length of the Delivery Point
Validation (DPV) information to store in your output file. DPV Footnote Codes are 2-character,
USPS-defined codes that represent the changes that were made to the input address during the
matching process. Up to 10 of these codes can be stored by CODE-1 Plus™ for each record. Even
if your address is not presented for DPV processing, CODE-1 Plus will return the footnote codes that
pertain to the match to the ZIP + 4 database.
To access the Delivery Point Validation screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Delivery Point Validation
screen (C1CPOD110).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Delivery Point Validation screen.
Delivery Point Validation Screen Fields (Part 1 of 3)
Field Name
DPV Confirmation Indicator
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-character DPV Return Code:
• N — No Delivery Point Validation.
• Y — Delivery Point validated. Primary number valid and second
number (when present) valid.
• S — Valid primary number; but secondary number (primary for Rural
Route) present and is not confirmed.
• D — Valid primary number; input missing secondary number (primary
Rural Route).
• Blank — Address not presented to DPV table.
DPV CMRA Flag
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-character CMRA Flag. If the DPV confirmation
indicator is Y, S, or D, CODE-1 Plus automatically begins a CMRA lookup.
• Y — Yes, CMRA.
• N — No, CMRA.
• Blank — Not presented.
Release 4.1.0
130
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Delivery Point Validation Locations
Delivery Point Validation Screen Fields (Part 2 of 3)
Field Name
DPV False/Positive Flag
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-character False/Positive Flag. If the DPV
confirmation indicator is N, CODE-1 Plus automatically begins a false/
positive look-up.
• Y — False.
• N — Not false.
• Blank — Not presented.
NOTE: A Y indicates that you have hit a “seed record” in your
processing.
DPV Footnote Codes
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for a 20-character area to accommodate the 2-character
DPV Footnote Codes:
• AA — Input address matched to the ZIP+4 file.
• A1 — Input address not matched to the ZIP+4 file.
• BB — Input address matched to DPV (all components).
• CC — Input address primary number matched to DPV but secondary
number not match (present but not valid).
• F1 — Input address is military; DPV bypassed.
• G1 — Input address is general delivery; DPV
bypassed.
• M1 — Input address primary number missing.
• M3 — Input address primary number invalid.
• N1 — Input address primary number matched to DPV but high rise
address missing secondary number.
• P1 — Input address missing RR or HC Box number.
• P3 — Input address missing PO, RR, or HC Box number.
• PB — Input address is a P. O. Box Street Address (PBSA).
• RR — Input address matched to CMRA.
• R1 — Input address matched to CMRA but secondary number not
present.
• U1 — Input address is unique ZIP; DPV
bypassed.
DPV No Statistics
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for a 1-character code indicating the presence of statistics
for this address. A “Y” indicates that the address is not a valid delivery
address even though it has been validated by DPV.
• Blank — Not presented.
• Y — Found match to ‘No Stat’ DPV hash table.
• N — No match found to “No stat” DPV hash table.
DPV Vacant Table Flag
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for a 1-character code indicating the presence of a DPV
vacant address.
• Blank — Not presented.
• Y — Vacant address.
• N — Not vacant address.
Release 4.1.0
131
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Additional Address Match Locations
Delivery Point Validation Screen Fields (Part 3 of 3)
Field Name
DPV PBSA Flag
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-character PBSA flag indicating whether a PBSA
was found:
• Blank — Not presented.
• Y — PBSA found.
• N — No PBSA found.
No default.
RDI Residential Flag
Optional. Location on the output record for the 1-character RDI
residential flag listed below:
• Blank — Not attempted.
• R — Yes, this address is a residential-only delivery point.
RDI Business Flag
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the 1-character RDI business flag.
Business flag option
Optional. Indicates whether to allow for a mixed return code during RDI
processing.
• Blank — Return B for all Business Delivery Points.
• B — Yes, this address is a business-only delivery point.
• M — Yes, this address is mixed residential and business delivery
point.
NOTE: You can only receive a business flag of M if you have enabled
the business flag option under Allow M=Mixed Return Code.
DPV Shut Down
Optional. Indicates whether to stop processing when DPV encounters
a false-positive (seed record):
• S — Shuts down CODE-1 Plus processing when a false-positive
(seed record) is encountered.
• W — Allows CODE-1 Plus to continue processing to completion of the
entire job, generating form 3553.
NOTE: CODE-1 Plus will output to the execution log the seed record
information necessary to reactivate the DPV license.
Defining Additional Address Match Locations
Use the Additional Address Match Information Storage screen to define the location and length of
additional address matching information to store in your output file. To access the Address Match
Information Storage screen:
To access the Additional Address Match Information Storage screen:
1. From the Name/Address Record Posting screen, page down to the Additional Address Match
Information Storage screen (C1CPOD120).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Additional Address Match Information
Storage screen.
Release 4.1.0
132
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Defining Additional Address Match Locations
Additional Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Default Flag-High Rise
Default
Description
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the High Rise Default.
• H — Record matched to a High Rise Default record.
• Blank — No match was made. Matched record was not a default
record.
Default is blank.
Default Flag-Rural Route
Default
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Rural Route Default. One of the following codes is
stored:
• R — Record matched to a Rural Route Default record.
• Blank — No match was made. Matched record was not a default
record.
Default is blank.
Default Flag-Military Default
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Military Default.
• M — Record matched to a Military Default record.
• Blank — No match was made. Matched record was not a default
record.
Default is blank.
Unique ZIP Code-City/State
Correlation return code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Unique ZIP Code-City/State Correlation Return
Code.
• U — The original ZIP Code was unique and did not correspond to the
input city/state.
• Blank — Input ZIP Code was either not unique or was unique and
corresponded to the input city/state.
Default is blank.
Auxiliary File Match Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Auxiliary File Name Match code. Only one code
option:
• 1 — Early Warning System (EWS) File.
Secondary Component
Processing Indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Secondary Component Processing Indicator.
• Blank — No multiple secondary component logic used.
• E — Exact match.
• S — Multiple Secondary Match logic used.
Override City Name Indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Override City Name indicator. Override City Name
refers to the city name for the Preferred Last Line Key (PLL) from the
USPS ZIP + 4 File. The Default City Name refers to the city name for the
PPL Key on the USPS City/State File.
• Blank — Default City Name stored.
• O — Override City Name stored.
Override City Name Indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the
output record for the Indicator of Input city type.
• P — Primary city.
• S — Secondary city.
• V — Vanity city.
Release 4.1.0
133
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Additional Address Match Locations
Additional Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Military Address Indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location of the
Indicator of military address:
• M — Indicates a military address.
Enhanced Street Matching
Indicator
Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location on the output record
for the Enhanced Street Matching (ESM) indicator.
• Blank — No ESM performed.
• M — Matched using ESM.
• P — ESM performed but no match found.
LACSLink Return Code
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location of the
LACSLink process success indicator:
• Blank — No LACS processing occurred.
• A — LACS record match.
• 00 — No match.
• 01 — Found LACS record but ambiguous; multiple addresses were
available.
• 02 — Found LACS record but new address failed to convert.
• 14 — Match found LACS record but would
not convert.
• 92 — Match with secondary information.
LACSLink Flag
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location of the code
that indicates if a table was matched:
• Blank — No LACS processing occurred.
• F — LACS seed violation has occurred.
• N — No match occurred or a new address would not convert at run
time.
• S — Input address contained both primary and secondary information
but match occurred using only primary information.
• Y — Full match occurred.
Street Default Indicator
Optional. Enter a number from 1-9999 to define the location for the
Street Default flag:
• Blank — Record matched is not a Street Default record.
• S — Record is matched to a Street Default record.
No default.
Release 4.1.0
134
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 6: Defining Output
Reformat Output Record Screen
Reformat Output Record Screen
Use the Reformat Output Record screen (C1CPMO13) to reformat the pieces of your output records
before the record is written to the output file:
1. From the Work With Jobs screen, use F12 to select the job for defining output. The Define/
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen displays.
2. Select Reformat Output Record.
3. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Reformat Output Record screen
(C1CPMO13).
Reformat Output Record Screen Fields
Field Name
Source Field
Description
Required. Enter 3-4 alphanumeric characters to specify the location in
the work area of the information to be copied. Optionally, you can enter
one of the following codes to copy one of the following types of generic
information to the target location:
• SPC — Spaces.
• X00 — Binary zeros.
• ZRO — Character zeros.
• Blank — No default.
Length
Required. Enter a number from 1-999 to specify the length of the
information to be copied to the target location. No default.
Target Field
Required. Enter a number from 1-9999 to specify the location in the input
array to which you want the source information copied. No default.
Release 4.1.0
135
User’s Guide - IBM i
Reformat Output Record Screen
Release 4.1.0
136
User’s Guide - IBM i
Running Jobs
In this chapter:














Component Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Files and File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Exit Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Limiting the Number of Records Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 (C1CPSB02). . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 (C1CPSB03). . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 (C1CPSB04). . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 5 (C1CPSB05). . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 6 (C1CPSB06). . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 7 (C1CPSB07). . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 8 (C1CPSB08). . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 9 (C1CPSB09). . . . . . . . . . . . .160
7
Component Overview
Component Overview
The Submit Batch Job component allows you to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Limit the number of records processed
Specify input and output file details
Identify input or output exit routines
Test the parameter records
Set match configurations and global storage options
Submit the job to run
You will define these items from the following screens:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPSB01)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPSB02)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPSB03)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job: Match Configuration (C1CPSB04)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job: Match Configuration, Continued (C1CPSB05)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job: Limit Input (C1CPSB06)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job: EXITOP (C1CPSB07)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job: CASSA1, CASSA4, CASSA7 (C1CPSB08)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job: AUXIL1 (C1CPSB09)
The following figure shows the relationship among these screens.
Submit
CODE-1 Plus Job
(C1CPSB01)
Submit
CODE-1 Plus Job
(C1CPSB03)
Submit
CODE-1 Plus Job
(C1CPSB02)
Submit Job: Match
Configuration,
Continued
(C1CPSB05)
Submit Job:
Match
Configuration
Submit Job:
EXITOP
(C1CPSB07)
Submit Job:
Limit Input
(C1CPSB06)
Submit Job:
CASSA1, CASSA4,
CASSA7
(C1CPSB08)
The Submit Job Screens
Files and File Names
CODE-1 Plus has six files that you can identify for your job: one input file and five output files. The
program has internal names for each of these files, and these internal names will be printed on the
reports and on the FILEDF parameter record, regardless of the actual file, library, and member
names. For more information on reports, refer to "Generating Reports” on page 211. For more
information on the FILEDF parameter record, refer to “Parameter Reference” in your CODE-1 Plus
Reference Guide.
Release 4.1.0
138
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Exit Routines
You can use the Submit Batch Job component to identify file, library, and member names for the
following files:
File Descriptions
File
Description
C1BMNAM
This required file is your input name-and-address file.
C1BMCOK
This required file is the output file to which CODE-1 Plus writes all of the records that
were verified or corrected.
C1BMZP4
This optional file is the output file to which CODE-1 Plus writes all of the records that
were successfully ZIP + 4 coded. Note that this file is a subset of the C1BMCOK file.
C1BMNCO
This optional file is the output file to which CODE-1 Plus writes all of the records that
had valid input ZIP Codes (i.e., the ZIP Code was valid somewhere in U.S.) but were
not matched for some reason. If you do not identify this file, these records will be
written to the C1BMCOK file along with the records that were successfully matched.
C1BMIZP
This optional file is the output file to which CODE-1 Plus writes all of the records that
had invalid input ZIP Codes. An invalid input ZIP Code is one that is not valid
anywhere in the United States. If you do not identify this file, these records will be
written to the C1BMNCO file (if it is identified) or the C1BMCOK file (if the C1BMNCO
file is not identified).
C1BMSTA
This optional file is the output file to which CODE-1 Plus writes all of the output
statistics. These records are fixed length.
Exit Routines
The Submit Batch Job component allows you to specify the:
•
Input exit routine that CODE-1 Plus should call each time it is ready to read a record from your
input name-and-address file.
and
•
Output exit routines that CODE-1 Plus should call each time it is ready to write a record to one of
your output files.
If you are using an input exit routine, instead of reading the record, CODE-1 Plus calls your exit
routine and waits for the exit routine to pass a record back. If you are using an output exit routine,
instead of writing the record to the file, CODE-1 Plus passes the record to the output exit routine.
For example, you might have an input exit routine named CODEIT that adds a special code to a
record. If you want to add that code to each record before the record is passed to CODE-1 Plus, you
specify CODEIT as the name of the exit routine. Then, every time CODE-1 Plus is ready to accept a
record, it passes control to CODEIT, which reads the record, adds the code to the record, and then
passes the record to CODE-1 Plus so that CODE-1 Plus may process that record.
When you indicate that CODE-1 Plus should call an exit routine, it will call that exit routine with the
following four parameters in the linkage section at each I/O request:
•
Release 4.1.0
PARM1: This parameter is a total of 9 bytes, and has two components, as follows:
• Bytes 1-8: The file name (C1BMNAM, C1BMCOK, C1BMNCO, C1BMIZP, or C1BMZP4).
• Byte 9: Function indicator. This byte will contain one of the following codes to tell your
program what type of processing to perform:
– O — Open the input or output file.
– R — Read a record from the input file.
– W — Write a record to the output file.
– C — Close the input or output file.
139
User’s Guide - IBM i
Limiting the Number of Records Processed
•
PARM2: This parameter is 4-digits long and packed into a 3-byte field (COBOL “PIC S9(5)
COMP-3”). This parameter must be filled in by your exit routine if byte 9 of PARM1 is O or R.
When byte 9 of PARM1 is R, the input exit routine signals the end of the file by setting this to 0.
•
PARM3: This parameter contains the output record to be passed from CODE-1 Plus to your
program (when EXITFC is W), or the input record to be passed from your program to CODE-1
Plus (when EXITFC is R). The length of this parameter will be the length specified by the exit
routine in PARM2 (maximum of 9999).
•
PARM4: This parameter contains the image of your FILEDF parameter record, and is 80 bytes in
length.
Limiting the Number of Records Processed
There are five ways to limit the number of records CODE-1 Plus processes:
1. Restrict processing to records with ZIP Codes that fall in a particular range
2. Skip a portion of the file before any records are selected
3. Type a cross-sectional sampling number to select a portion of the records, evenly spaced
throughout the file
4. Specify a maximum number of records to be processed; in this case, CODE-1 Plus will start at
the beginning of the file and process every record until the maximum number is reached
5. Specify a fraction of records to process or ignore.
You may use these fields in conjunction with each other. For example, you can type a number of
records to skip, and a maximum number of records to read, if you wanted to process the middle of
the file, but not the beginning or the end.
Restricting the ZIP Code Range
If you choose to restrict processing to only those records within a given ZIP Code range, type a low
ZIP Code and a high ZIP Code. Note that CODE-1 Plus assumes that your input file is sorted by ZIP
Code. For this reason, if CODE-1 Plus encounters a record with a ZIP Code that is alphanumerically
lower than the low ZIP Code you typed, that record will not be processed, and CODE-1 Plus will
proceed to the next record. If, however, CODE-1 Plus encounters a record with a ZIP Code
alphanumerically higher than your specified high ZIP Code, it will assume that all of the remaining
records also have higher ZIP Codes, and CODE-1 Plus will treat the record as the end of the file.
Decimal Fraction
The Decimal Fraction feature allows you to sample records throughout the file, from beginning to
end, without processing sequential records. To determine the number to type in this 7-byte field,
divide the number of records you want to process by the number of records in the file. This will give
you a decimal number. Drop the decimal, and type the first 7 digits of the number. For example, you
have a file with 102986 records, and you want to process 2000 records. You would divide 2000 by
102986 and get .0194201153. Dropping the decimal, you would type 0194201 in the Decimal
Fraction field. This will ensure that the 2000 records processed are evenly distributed throughout
the file.
Release 4.1.0
140
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Function Keys
Function Keys
Function Keys
The following function keys are available on the Submit Batch Job screens
Function Keys
Function Key
Name
Description
F3
Exit
Return to the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen
(C1CPDS02) without submitting this job.
F6
Submit
Submit this job and return to the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus
Job screen.
F7
Parm test
Submit this job to only test the parameter records that have
been generated for this job.
F8
Run BUILD Report
Submit the Build Report job.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB01)
The first Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen, shown below, allows you to specify the input name-andaddress file to use for the job. To access this screen, choose the Submit Batch Job function from the
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (C1CPDS02), or choose to submit a job from the Work with
Jobs screen (C1CPMM03).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB01
RXX.XM00
Specify Job details:
[C1BMNAM] Input N/A file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1IVPC1
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G1IVP
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *FIRST
Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDFTJOBD
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QGPL
Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . @@[email protected]
Hold on job queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
Y, N
[PGMNAM] Select Address Matcher memory model . . . . . .
Blank,S,M,L,H
Use RDI Large Memory Module (DPV040L)? . . . . . . . .
Y, N
[DB LIB] CODE-1 Plus Database Library . . . . . . . . . C1PJUL14
[BYPEXP] Override an expired CODE-1 Plus database? . . .
Y, N
More...
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
141
F8=Run BUILD Report
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB01)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 1 Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Input N/A file
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the file that contains your input
name-and-address file.
Required if you do not
use an exit routine.
Default is the file
name you specified on
the Create New Job
screen (C1CPNJ01).
Library (Input
N/A file)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the library that holds the input
name-and-address file.
Required if you don't
use an exit routine.
Default is the library
name you specified on
the Create New Job
screen (C1CPNJ01).
Member
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The member of the file that holds your input
name-and-addresses.
Required if you don't
use an exit routine.
Default is the member
name you specified on
the Create New Job
screen (C1CPNJ01).
Exit Routine
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the input exit routine that
should be used to pass records to CODE-1
Plus.
Required if you don't
type an Input N/A File.
Job description
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the file that contains job
processing details that should be used for
this job.
Required.
Default is the job
description you
specified on the
Create New Job
screen (C1CPNJ01).
Library (Job
description)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the library that holds the job
description named above.
Required.
Default is the library
name you specified on
the Create New Job
screen (C1CPNJ01).
Job name
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The unique name of this job as it is defined
in the system.
Required.
Default is a
combination of the job
ID and the sequence
number based on the
number of times the
job has been
submitted.
Hold on job
queue
Y or N
A code indicating whether or not this job
should be held on the job queue to be
released at a later time. Type one of the
following codes:
Y
Yes, hold the job on the job queue.
N
No, submit the job immediately.
Required.
Default is N.
Release 4.1.0
142
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB01)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 1 Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Select Address
Matcher
memory model
Blank, S, M, L, or
H
You can choose the program with a
memory model appropriate for your site.
Enter one of the following program names
(memory models):
Blank Default memory model (3 MB).
S
Small memory model (1 MB).
M
Medium memory model (6 MB).
L
Large memory model (12 MB).
H
Huge memory model (28 MB).
Required.
Default is blank.
Use RDI Large
Memory
Module
(DPV040L)?
Y or N
If you have the RDI option, you can select
whether or not you want to use the RDI
Large Memory Module for your RDI
processing:
Y
Use the RDI Large Memory
Module.
N
Do not use the RDI Large Memory
Module.
Required if you have
the RDI option.
Default is N.
CODE-1 Plus
Database
Library
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the library that holds the
CODE-1 Plus postal database against
which the records are to be matched.
Required.
Defaults to the library
that was specified
during your CODE-1
Plus installation.
Override an
expired
CODE-1 Plus
database?
Y or N
Select whether or not you would like to
bypass an expired CODE-1 Plus database.
Y
Yes, bypass the expired database.
N
No, do not bypass the expired
database.
NOTE: It is very important to use a current
CODE-1 Plus database. This option is
provided for use in an emergency situation
only and should not be used in “normal”
processing.
Required.
Release 4.1.0
143
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 (C1CPSB02)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 (C1CPSB02)
The second Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen allows you to type the file names, libraries, and
member names of your coded records output file(s). To access this screen, page down from the first
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (C1CPSB01).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB02
RXX.XM00
Select Address Matching output files:
Override output file record length . . . . . . . . . .
[C1BMCOK] Successfully Coded output file
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Req'd Reclen:
Existing File Reclen:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . C1NAMTST1
. . . . . G1IVP
. . . . CODED
. . . .
Delete Existing File?
[C1BMZP4] Produce Coded ZIP+4 output file? N . . . . C1NAMTST1
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G1IVP
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZIP4
Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Req'd Reclen:
Existing File Reclen:
Delete Existing File?
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
F8=Run BUILD Report
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 Fields (Part 1 of 3)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Override Output
File Record Length
Number from 19999
Enter a number from 1-9999 to override
the calculated required record length.
Default is the
calculated output file
record length.
Successfully
Coded output file
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the output file to which the
records that were successfully matched
should be written.
Required if you don't
use an exit routine.
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the library that holds the
Successfully Coded output file.
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The member of the file that holds the
Successfully Coded output file.
Library
(Successfully
Coded output file)
Member
(Successfully
Coded output file)
Release 4.1.0
Default is
“C1NAMjobid”
Required if you don't
use an exit routine.
Defaults to the
“Library for Job
Objects” specified at
job creation.
Required if you don't
use an exit routine.
Default is “CODED”
144
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 (C1CPSB02)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 Fields (Part 2 of 3)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Exit Routine
(Successfully
Coded output file)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the output exit routine to
which your successfully coded records
should be passed.
Required if you don't
type a name in the
Successfully Coded
output file field.
Req'd Reclen
(Successfully
Coded output file)
Number from 19999
Displays the required length of the
Successfully Coded output file. The
value displayed here is based on the
output field lengths that you defined for
the job.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Existing File Reclen
(Successfully
Coded output file)
Number from 19999
This field displays the actual record
length of the Successfully Coded output
file.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Delete Existing
File? (Successfully
Coded output file)
Y or N
If the required length (Req’d Reclen) is
not equal to the actual length (Existing
File Reclen), specify the action to take:
Y
Delete the output file. If the
Req'd Reclen value is not equal
to the Existing File Reclen
value, this field defaults to Y.
N
Do not delete this file. Default is
N.
Optional.
Default is N.
NOTE: If the Req'd Reclen value is not
equal to the Existing File Reclen value
and you specify N for this field, your job
will fail.
Produce Coded ZIP
+ 4 output file
(indicator)
Y or N
A 1-byte code indicating if any records
are to be written to this file. Type one of
the following:
Y
Yes, write all records
successfully ZIP + 4 coded to
this output file.
N
No, write all records
successfully ZIP + 4coded only
to the Successfully Coded
output file.
Required.
Default is N.
Produce Coded ZIP
+ 4 output file
(name)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the output file to which the
records that were successfully ZIP + 4
coded should be written.
Required if you don't
use an exit routine.
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the library that holds the
Coded ZIP + 4 output file.
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The member of the file that holds the
Coded ZIP + 4 output file.
Library (Coded ZIP
+ 4 output file)
Member (Coded
ZIP + 4 output file)
Release 4.1.0
Default is
“C1NAMjobid”
Required if you don't
use an exit routine.
Defaults to the
“Library for Job
Objects” specified at
job creation.
Required if you don't
use an exit routine.
Default is “ZIP4.”
145
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 (C1CPSB02)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 2 Fields (Part 3 of 3)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Exit Routine
(Coded ZIP + 4
output file)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the output exit routine to
which your ZIP + 4 coded records should
be passed.
Required if you don't
type a name in the
Coded ZIP + 4
output file field.
Req'd Reclen
(Coded ZIP + 4
output file)
Number from 19999
Displays the required length of the
Coded ZIP + 4 output file. The value
displayed here is based on the output
field lengths that you defined for the job.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Existing File Reclen
(Coded ZIP + 4
output file)
Number from 19999
This field displays the actual record
length of the Coded ZIP + 4 output file if
the file already exists.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Delete Existing
File? (Coded ZIP +
4 output file)
Y or N
If the required length (Req’d Reclen) is
not equal to the actual length (Existing
File Reclen), specify the action to take:
Y
Delete the output file. If the
Req'd Reclen value is not equal
to the Existing File Reclen
value, this field defaults to Y.
N
Do not delete this file. Default is
N.
Optional.
Default is N.
NOTE: If the Req'd Reclen value is not
equal to the Existing File Reclen value
and you specify N for this field, your job
will fail.
Release 4.1.0
146
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 (C1CPSB03)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 (C1CPSB03)
The third Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen allows you to type the file names, libraries, and member
names of your uncoded records output file(s). To access this screen, page down from the second
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (C1CPSB02).
HH:NMM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB03
RXX.XM00
Select Address Matching output files:
[C1BMIZP] Produce Invalid-ZIP output file? N . . . . C1NAMTST1
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G1IVP
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INVZIP
Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Req'd Reclen:
Existing File Reclen:
Delete Existing File?
[C1BMNCO] Produce Uncoded output
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . .
Req'd Reclen:
Existing File
file? .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Reclen:
. N . . . . C1NAMTST1
. . . . . . .
G1IVP
. . . . . . . UNCODED
. . . . . . .
Delete Existing File?
[C1BMSTA] Produce Statistics output file?. N . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Req'd Reclen:
Existing File Reclen:
Delete
. . C1STATST1
. .
G1IVP
. . STATS
Existing File?
More...
F3=Exit F6=Submit F7=Parm Test F8=Run BUILD Report
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 Fields (Part 1 of 4)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Produce InvalidZIP Code output
file (indicator)
Y or N
A 1-byte code indicating if any records are to
be written to this file. Type one of the
following:
Y
Yes, write all records with invalid
input ZIP Codes to the Invalid-ZIP
Code output file.
N
No, write all records with invalid
input ZIP Codes to the Uncoded
output file (if one is define) or the
Successfully Coded output file (if no
Uncoded Records File is defined).
Required.
Default is N.
Invalid-ZIP Code
Output File
(name)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the output file to which the
records with invalid input ZIP Codes should
be written.
Optional.
Default is
“C1NAMjobid.”
Library (InvalidZIP Code Output
File)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the library that holds the InvalidZIP Code Output File.
Required if you
indicated that this
file is to be created,
and you don't use
an exit routine.
Defaults to the
“Library for Job
Objects” specified
at job creation.
Release 4.1.0
147
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 (C1CPSB03)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 Fields (Part 2 of 4)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Member
(Invalid-ZIP
Code Output
File)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The member of the file that holds the InvalidZIP Code Output File.
Required if you
indicated that this
file is to be created,
and you don't use
an exit routine.
Default is “INVZIP.”
Exit Routine
(Invalid-ZIP
Code Output
File)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the output exit routine to which
the records with invalid input ZIP Codes
should be passed.
Required if you
indicated that this
file is to be created,
and you didn't type
an Invalid-ZIP
Output File name.
Req'd Reclen
(Invalid-ZIP
Code Output
File)
Number from 19999
Displays the required length of the InvalidZIP Code output file. The value displayed
here is based on the output field lengths that
you defined for the job.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Existing File
Reclen (InvalidZIP Code Output
File)
Number from 19999
This field displays the actual record length of
the Invalid-ZIP Code output file if the file
already exists.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Delete Existing
File? (InvalidZIP Code Output
File)
Y or N
If the required length (Req’d Reclen) is not
equal to the actual length (Existing File
Reclen), specify the action to take:
Y
Delete the output file. If the Req'd
Reclen value is not equal to the
Existing File Reclen value, this field
defaults to Y.
N
Do not delete this file. Default is N.
Optional.
Default is N.
NOTE: If the Req'd Reclen value is not
equal to the Existing File Reclen value and
you specify N for this field, your job will fail.
Produce
Uncoded Output
File (indicator)
Y or N
A 1-byte code indicating if any records are to
be written to this file. Type one of the
following:
Y
Yes, write all records that could not
be matched to this file.
N
No, write all records that could not
be matched to the Successfully
Coded output file.
Optional.
Default is N.
Uncoded Output
File (name)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the output file to which the
records that could not be matched should be
written.
Required if you
don't use an exit
routine and you
select “Y” to
produce an
uncoded file.
Default is
“C1NAMjobid.”
Library
(Uncoded
Output File)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the library that holds the
Uncoded Records output file.
Required if you
don't use an exit
routine.
Defaults to the
“Library for Job
Objects” specified
at job creation.
Release 4.1.0
148
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 (C1CPSB03)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 Fields (Part 3 of 4)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Member
(Uncoded
Output File)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The member of the file that holds the
Uncoded Records output file.
Required if you
don't use an exit
routine.
Default is
“UNCODED.”
Exit Routine
(Uncoded
Output File)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the output exit routine to which
your uncoded records should be passed.
Required if you
indicated that this
file is to be created,
and you didn't type
an Uncoded
Records File name.
Req'd Reclen
(Uncoded
Output File)
Number from 19999
Displays the required length of the Uncoded
output file. The value displayed here is based
on the output field lengths that you defined
for the job.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Existing File
Reclen
(Uncoded
Output File)
Number from 19999
This field displays the actual record length of
the Uncoded output file if the file already
exists.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Delete Existing
File? (Uncoded
Output File)
Y or N
If the required length (Req’d Reclen) is not
equal to the actual length (Existing File
Reclen), specify the action to take:
Y
Delete the output file. If the Req'd
Reclen value is not equal to the
Existing File Reclen value, this field
defaults to Y.
N
Do not delete this file. Default is N.
Optional.
Default is N.
NOTE: If the Req'd Reclen value is not
equal to the Existing File Reclen value and
you specify N for this field, your job will fail.
Produce
Statistics Output
File? (indicator)
Y or N
A 1-byte code indicating if the Output
Statistics file should be produced. Type one
of the following:
Y
Yes, produce this file.
N
No, do not produce file.
Optional.
Default is N.
Library
(Statistics
Output File)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The name of the library that holds the Output
Statistics file.
Required if you
don't use an exit
routine.
Defaults to the
“Library for Job
Objects” specified
at job creation.
Member
(Statistics
Output File)
1 to 10
characters (A-Z,
0-9, $, @, or #).
First character
must not be 0-9.
The member of the file that holds the Output
Statistics file.
Required if you
don't use an exit
routine.
Default is “STATS.”
Req'd Reclen
(Statistics
Output File)
Number from 19999
Displays the required length of the Statistics
output file. The value displayed here is based
on the output field lengths that you defined
for the job.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Release 4.1.0
149
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 (C1CPSB03)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 3 Fields (Part 4 of 4)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Existing File
Reclen
(Statistics
Output File)
Number from 19999
This field displays the actual record length of
the Statistics output file if the file already
exists.
Display only. Does
not accept entry.
Delete Existing
File? (Statistics
Output File)
Y or N
If the required length (Req’d Reclen) is not
equal to the actual length (Existing File
Reclen), specify the action to take:
Y
Delete the output file. If the Req'd
Reclen value is not equal to the
Existing File Reclen value, this field
defaults to Y.
N
Do not delete this file. Default is N.
Optional.
Default is N.
NOTE: If the Req'd Reclen value is not
equal to the Existing File Reclen value and
you specify N for this field, your job will fail.
Release 4.1.0
150
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 (C1CPSB04)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 (C1CPSB04)
The fourth Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen is the Match Configuration screen. Use this screen to
specify the degree of closeness compared elements must have for CODE-1 Plus to determine an
address match. You can also indicate other storage options for multiple matches and probability of
correctness that apply globally to all elements of a match. To access this screen, page down from
the third Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen.

The match configuration values have to be specified each time a job is submitted. These
values are not saved.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[JOB]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB04
RXX.XM00
[CONFIG] Specify Match Configuration elements, if desired:
Street Name Match Code . . . . . . . . . . .
E = Equal, T=Tight,
Firm Name Match Code . . . . . . . . . . . .
M = Medium (default)
Directional/Suffix Match Code . . . . . . .
L=Loose
Return Vanity City Name when best match?
Accept Multiple Matches? . . . . . . . .
Dual Address Match Logic . . . . . . . .
N = Normal, S = Return Street match, P
Output Case Option . . . . . . . . . . .
Blank = Uppercase, C = Mixed Case, L =
. .
N, Y (default N)
. .
N, Y (default N)
. .
N, S, P (default N)
= Return PO Box match
. .
Blank, C, L
Lowercase
Return ZIP when not correlated to city/st?
Store non-standard PMB numbers?. . . . . .
Max Address Correctness for storage. . . .
Max Overall Correctness for storage. . . .
User-controlled CASS Configuration suffix.
Terminate If Non-CASS Certified? . . . . .
F3=Exit

Release 4.1.0
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
.
.
.
.
.
.
N, Y (default
N, Y (default
0-9 (default
0-9 (default
00-99
N, Y (default
N)
N)
9)
9)
N)
More...
F8=Run BUILD Report
The storage options for multiple matches and probability of correctness defined this screen
override the individual storage setting for the 5-digit ZIP Code, carrier route code, ZIP + 4
Code, standardized address, and city/state.
151
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 (C1CPSB04)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 Fields (Part 1 of 3)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Street Name
Comparison
E, L, M, or T
Controls the tolerance with which CODE-1 Plus
determines matches for input street names:
E
Only exact equal matches are accepted.
L
The margin of error accepted is
somewhat relaxed to allow marginal
addresses to match.
M
The margin of error accepted is adequate
to allow most reasonable addresses to
match.
T
The margin of error accepted is more
demanding so that the address matches
need to be close to equal.
Optional.
Default is M.
Firm Name
Comparison
E, L, M, or T
Controls the tolerance with which CODE-1 Plus
determines matches for input firm names:
E
Only exact equal matches are accepted.
L
The margin of error accepted is
somewhat relaxed to allow marginal
addresses to match.
M
The margin of error accepted is adequate
to allow most reasonable addresses to
match.
T
The margin of error accepted is more
demanding so that the address matches
need to be close to equal.
Optional.
Default is M.
Directional/Suffix
Comparison
E, L, M, or T
Controls the tolerance with which CODE-1 Plus
determines matches for input directionals and
suffixes:
E
Only exact equal matches are accepted.
L
The margin of error accepted is
somewhat relaxed to allow marginal
addresses to match.
M
The margin of error accepted is adequate
to allow most reasonable addresses to
match.
T
The margin of error accepted is more
demanding so that the address matches
need to be close to equal.
Optional.
Default is M.
Return a Vanity
City Name
Y or N
Indicates whether or not CODE-1 Plus should
return vanity-type city names when they are
encountered in the input:
Y
Yes, store vanity city names.
N
No, do not store vanity city names.
Optional.
Default is N.
Accept Multiple
Matches
Y or N
Specifies whether to accept multiple matches:
Y
Yes, store multiple matches.
N
No, do not store multiple matches.
If “Y”, this value overrides individual storage
settings for the 5-digit ZIP Code, carrier route
code, ZIP + 4 Code, standardized address, and
city/state.
NOTE: A Y in this position will result in a nonCASS certified configuration. No CASS report will
be generated.
Optional.
Default is N.
Release 4.1.0
152
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 (C1CPSB04)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 Fields (Part 2 of 3)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Dual Address
Match Logic
blank, S, or P
Indicates how to handle addresses with multiple
non-blank address lines or multiple address types
on the same address line:
Blank Normal match scoring for street address
elements, input ZIP Code, matching
address line, and so on.
S
Return a street match, regardless of the
address line.
P
Return a PO Box match, regardless of the
address line.
NOTE: Under normal conditions, a PO Box
cannot match if the city name and input ZIP Code
are both changed.
NOTE: If S or P is selected, a non-CASS-certified
configuration will be generated.
DMM 708 states to match to a PO Box first when
on the same address line or the PO Box address
is the primary address line.
Optional.
Default is
blank.
Mixed Case Option
blank, C, or L
Indicating whether to return mixed case in all
address components:
Blank Matched output will be returned in all
uppercase.
C
All address components that contain text
will be returned in mixed case.
L
All address components that contain text
will be returned in lower case.
Optional.
Default is
blank.
Return ZIP Code
when not
correlated to city/
state
Y or N
Indicating whether the Input ZIP Code should be
returned when there is no correlation between the
input city/state and ZIP Code:
Y
Store the Input ZIP Code.
N
Do NOT store the Input ZIP Code.
NOTE: If Y is chosen, a non-CASS certified
configuration is created. No PS Form 3553 will be
generated.
Optional.
Default is N.
Store non-standard
PMB numbers
Y or N
Indicates whether to store non-standard private
mailbox numbers:
Y
Store ALL private mailbox numbers.
N
Store ONLY standard private mailbox
numbers.
NOTE: If Y is chosen, a non-CASS certified
configuration will be created. No USPS Form 3553
is generated.
Optional.
Default is N.
Max Address
Correctness for
storage
1 numeric
character
A one character code indicating the (relative)
probable correctness of the address match:
0
The address is most likely to be correct.
1-8
Intermediate values.
9
The address is least likely to be correct.
The value typed here overrides the individual
Maximum Address Correctness storage settings
for the 5-digit ZIP Code, carrier route code, ZIP +
4 Code, standardized address, and city/state.
Optional.
Default is 9.
Release 4.1.0
153
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 5 (C1CPSB05)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 4 Fields (Part 3 of 3)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Maximum Overall
Correctness for
storage
1 numeric
character
A one character code indicating the (relative)
probable correctness of the overall match:
0
The match is most likely to be correct.
1-8
Intermediate values.
9
The overall match is least likely to correct.
The value typed here overrides individual
Maximum Overall Correctness storage settings for
the 5-digit ZIP Code, carrier route code, ZIP + 4
Code, standardized address, and city/state.
Optional.
Default is 9.
User-controlled
CASS
Configuration suffix
1 or 2 numeric
characters
Specifies a configuration number (00-99) to be
used when a “Configuration ID” for the Postal
Form 3553 cannot be determined. The
configuration number typed here will be appended
to a “Z” for use.
Optional.
No Default.
Terminate If NonCASS Certified
Y or N
An option indicating whether to continue
processing a job if the job is not CASS certified.
Y
Continue running the job.
N
Do not continue running the job.
Default is N.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 5 (C1CPSB05)
The fifth Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen allows you to continue match configuration. On this
screen you can attempt Enhanced Highrise Alternate matching and Multiple Secondary Component
processing. Additionally, you may start an Execution Log Counter, use enhanced street matching,
and limit your address match to a certain ZIP Code locality. To access this screen, page down from
the fourth Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB05
RXX.XM00
[CONFIG] Specify Match Configuration elements, if desired:
Enhanced Highrise Alternate Matching . . . .
Y, N
Y=Attempt match to the base record when an alternate match is made and the
input address contains secondary address information
N=Do not attempt to match to the base record
Multiple Secondary Component Processing. . .
Y=Attempt exact secondary match
N=Assign default ZIP+4 code
Y, N
Execution Log Counter . . . . . . . . . .
Use Enhanced Street Matching? . . . . . .
Limit Address Match to ZIP Locality? . . .
Split Indicia Processing? . . . . . . . .
Write to NCO file if ZIP+4 is 0000 or 9999
Append C/O Data Flag . . . . . . . . . . .
x/1000
S, A or Blank
Y, N
Y, N
N or Blank
Y or Blank
.
.
.
.
.
.
More...
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
154
F8=Run BUILD Report
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 5 (C1CPSB05)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 5 Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Enhanced Highrise
Alternate Matching
Y or N
Enhanced High Rise Alternate Matching
allows you to convert a building name used
as a street address to the correct, USPSpreferred address street name associated
with that building. Select one of the
following:
Y
Yes, attempt to match to the base
record when an alternate match is
made and the input address
contains secondary address
information.
N
No, do not attempt to match to the
base record.
NOTE: Selecting N will create a Non-CASScertified configuration.
Optional
Default is Y.
Multiple Secondary
Component
Processing
Y or N
Select one of the following options:
Y
Attempt secondary match.
N
Assign default ZIP + 4 Code.
NOTE: Selecting N will create a Non-CASScertified configuration.
Optional
Default is Y.
Execution Log
Counter
Numeric
(100=100,00
0)
Number of records (in thousands) to trigger
progress reporting in execution log.
Optional.
Default is 10,000
(100 for VAX).
Use Enhanced Street
Matching?
Blank, A, or
S
Controls whether to do enhanced street
matching (ESM) or All Street Matching
(ASM).
Blank Do not use enhanced street
matching (default).
A
Attempt match to all streets in
locality (matches to misspelled first
letter in street name).
S
Use enhanced street matching.
Optional.
Limit Address Match to
ZIP Code Locality?
Y or N
Select one of the following options:
Y
Yes, limit address match to ZIP
Code locality.
N
No, do not limit address match to
ZIP Code locality.
Optional.
Split Indicia
Y or N
Code indicating whether to perform Split
Indicia processing:
Y
Perform split indicia processing.
N
Do not perform split indicia
processing.
NOTE: Setting this option to N will produce
a non-CASS-certified configuration. No
USPS Form 3553 will be generated.
Optional.
Default is Y.
Write to NCO File if
ZIP + 4 is 0000 or
9999
N or blank
Indicator that specifies which output file to
write the record when ZIP + 4 is zeros or
“9999.”
Blank Write the record to the COK file.
N
Write the record to the NCO file.
Default is blank.
Release 4.1.0
155
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 6 (C1CPSB06)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 6 (C1CPSB06)
The sixth Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen allows you to define a portion of the input name-andaddress file to process.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB06
RXX.XM00
[HEADER] Restrict input to Range of ZIPs, if desired:
Low ZIP Code . . . .
(records with lower ZIPs will be bypassed)
High ZIP Code . . .
(record with higher ZIP will be treated as EOF)
[FILEDF] Skip records at beginning of file, if desired:
Records to skip . .
[FILEDF] Limit processing to a fraction of the input records, if desired:
Decimal fraction . .
[FILEDF] Stop processing after a number of records, if desired:
Record Limit . . . .
[NTHSEL] Process Nth number of records, if desired:
NTH number of records to process . . . . . . . .
Include/Exclude option . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INC = include Nth number of records
EXC = exclude Nth number of records
Fraction of records . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
F8=Run BUILD Report
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 6 Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Low ZIP Code
5 alphanumeric
digits
The lowest ZIP Code that should be
processed. Records with lower ZIP Codes
will be bypassed.
Optional.
No default.
High ZIP Code
5 alphanumeric
digits
The highest ZIP Code that should be
processed. The first record with a higher
ZIP Code will be treated as the End of File
record.
Optional.
No default.
Records to Skip
1 to 7 numeric
digits
The number of records that should be
ignored at the beginning of the input nameand-address file before any records are
processed.
Optional.
No default.
Decimal fraction
1 decimal point
followed by 1 to 7
numeric digits
A decimal number indicating the portion of
the records in the file that should be
processed. CODE-1 Plus will multiply this
decimal number by the total number of
records in the file to obtain the number of
records that should be processed. Those
records selected for processing will be
evenly distributed throughout the input file.
Optional.
No default.
Record limit
1 to 7 numeric
digits
The maximum total number of records that
may be processed for this job.
Optional.
No default.
Sampling Method 1 — Including or Excluding Nth Number of Input Records
Release 4.1.0
156
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 7 (C1CPSB07)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 6 Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Nth number of
records to process
Numeric digits
from 002 to 999.
The nth number of records the you want to
either include or exclude from the input
records to be read.
Required if you do
not use Sampling
Method 2.
No default.
Include/Exclude
Option
INC or EXC
A code indicating whether to include or
exclude the specified nth number of input
records for processing:
INC
Include the nth number of input
records.
EXC
Exclude the nth number of input
records.
Required if you do
not use Sampling
Method 2.
No default.
Sampling Method 2 — Selecting a Fraction of Input Records
Fraction of
Records
A 7-byte numeric
digit
A 7-digit positive number specifying the
fraction of total input records to process. A
decimal point is implied before the first digit.
Required if you do
not use Sampling
Method 1.
No default.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 7 (C1CPSB07)
The seventh Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen allows you to specify a user exit routine for CODE-1
Plus to call before writing each record to an output file.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB07
RXX.XM00
[EXITOP] Specify operating exit routine, if desired:
Exit routine name . .
CODE-1 Plus Identifier . .
Blank, P
User-defined data:
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
1...5....0....5....0....5....0....5....0....5....0....5....0...
More...
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
157
F8=Run BUILD Report
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 8 (C1CPSB08)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 7 Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Exit routine name
8 characters
Name of the exit routine that you want
CODE-1 Plus to call before writing each
record to an output file (or before calling an
output exit routine).
Required.
No default.
CODE-1 Plus identifier
1 character,
blank, or P
If you are going to use this program with the
Pitney Bowes Barcoding Option, or the
Geocoder, you must enter “P” in this position
and then use the 2-byte file identifiers as
parameter 2.
Optional.
User-defined data
64 characters
Enter any information that you need CODE-1
Plus to pass to your exit routine.
Optional.
No default.
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 8 (C1CPSB08)
The eighth Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen allows you to override CASS certification data.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB08
RXX.XM00
[CASSA1] Override CASS certification data, if desired:
CASS-Certified Company Name . . . . . . .
CASS-Certified Software Name . . . . . . .
CASS-Certified Software Version Number . .
Version:
Release:
Modification:
[CASSA4]
Z4CHANGE-Certified Company Name. . . . . .
Z4CHANGE-Certified Software Name . . . . .
[CASSA7]
ELOT-Certified Company Name. . . . . . . .
ELOT-Certified Software Name . . . . . . .
More...
F3=Exit F6=Submit F7=Parm Test F8=Run BUILD Report
Release 4.1.0
158
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 7: Running Jobs
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 8 (C1CPSB08)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 8 Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
CASS-Certified
Company Name
25 characters
CASS-certified company name as it
appears on your CASS certificate (up to 25
bytes).
CASS-Certified
Software Name
30 characters
CASS-certified software name as it
appears on your CASS certificate (up to 30
bytes).
CASS-Certified
Software Version
Number:
Optional.
You must fill in at
least one field.
Any field not filled in
retains its current
value.
CASS-certified software version number
as it appears on your CASS certificate.
CASS-Certified
Software Version:
1 character
CASS-certified software version number.
CASS-Certified
Software Release:
2 characters
CASS-certified release number.
CASS-Certified
Software
Modification:
2 characters
CASS-certified modification number.
Z4CHANGECertified Company
Name
25 characters
Z4CHANGE-certified company name as it
is to appear on your USPS certificate.
Z4CHANGECertified Software
Name
34 characters
Z4CHANGE-certified software name as it
is to appear on your USPS certificate.
ELOT-Certified
Company Name
25 characters
ELOT-certified company name as is to
appear on your USPS certificate.
ELOT-Certified
Software Name
34 characters
ELOT-certified software name as it is to
appear on your USPS certificate.
Release 4.1.0
Comments
159
These two fields are
optional. However,
you must fill in at
least one field, or an
error will occur. Any
field not filled in will
retain its current
Pitney Bowes value.
These two fields are
optional. However,
you must fill in at
least one field, or an
error will occur. Any
field not filled in will
retain its current
Pitney Bowes value.
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 9 (C1CPSB09)
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 9 (C1CPSB09)
The ninth Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen allows you to define your Auxiliary File. For more
information on Auxiliary File Processing, refer to "Auxiliary File Processing” on page 349.
HH:PMM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB09
RXX.XM00
[AUXIL1] Enter auxiliary reference file information, if desired:
Use Auxiliary reference file?
Auxiliary reference file . . .
Library. . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y
Y, N
. . . . . . . . . . . . . G1C1AUX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1PAPR02
. . . . . . . . . . . . . G1C1AUX
File Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N=Write to NCO file
C=Write to COK file
N, C
Bottom
F3=Exit F6=Submit F7=Parm Test F8=Run BUILD Report
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen 9 Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Use Auxiliary
Reference File?
Y or N
Choose one of the following:
Y
Yes, you would like to use your Auxiliary
Reference File.
N
No, you would not like to use your Auxiliary
Reference File.
Required.
Default is Y.
File Location
N or C
Code indicating where to write the auxiliary file in the
output:
N
Write record to the NCO file.
C
Write record to the COK file.
Optional
Default is N.
Release 4.1.0
160
User’s Guide - IBM i
Geographic Coding
Definition Screens
In this chapter:






Using the Geographic Coding Definition Screens . . . . . . . . . . .162
Accessing the Geographic Coding Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations Screen (C1CPG910). .164
Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG911) . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG912) . .168
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG913) . .169
8
Using the Geographic Coding Definition Screens
Using the Geographic Coding Definition Screens
This chapter describes the Geographic Coding Definition screens that define input and output
locations for geographic data. This component is only available if the Geographic Coding Plus
software is licensed and installed on your system.
To interface with the Geographic Coding Plus, CODE-1 Plus™ provides the Geographic Coding
Definition screens.
Geographic Coding Definition Screens
Screen
Description
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-On
Locations screen (C1CPG910)
Defines locations and formats of your ZIP and ZIP + 4 Codes on
your output record.
Geographic Coding Storage screen
(C1CPG911)
Defines storage locations of match level and census information.
Additional Geographic Coding
Storage screen (C1CPG912)
Defines storage locations of USPS state abbreviations, county
names, Metropolitan Statistical Area (MSA) information, and
latitude/longitude information.
The only input data that the Geographic Coding Plus requires to obtain the geographic match is the
ZIP Code. The location of the ZIP Code in your CODE-1 Plus™ output record is specified in the ZIP
Code and ZIP + 4 Add-on Locations screen. Optionally, you may provide a ZIP + 4 Code for more
precise results. Match result information from a Geographic Coding match attempt will be stored on
your CODE-1 Plus™ output records according to your specification on the Geographic Coding
Storage screens.

Release 4.1.0
Geographic Coding is performed after CODE-1 Plus™ completes output posting.
162
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 8: Geographic Coding Definition Screens
Accessing the Geographic Coding Function
The following figure shows the relationship between the Geographic Coding screens in CODE-1
Plus™.
Define/Submit
CODE-1 Plus Job
(C1CPDS02)
Update Job
Information
(C1CPOP10)
ZIP Code and
ZIP+4 Add-on
Locations
(C1CPG910)
Geographic Coding
Storage
(C1CPG911)
Addtional
Geographic Coding
Storage
(C1CPG912)
Additional
Geographic Coding
Storage
(C1CPG913)
G eo g rap h ic C o d in g P lu s
(O p en S ystem s S eries O n ly)
Geographic Coding Definition Component Overview
Accessing the Geographic Coding Function
You can access the Geographic Coding Definition screens from the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus
Job Menu. If you have installed Geographic Coding Plus, an additional option, “Geographic Coding
Definition,” appears in the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job Menu.

Release 4.1.0
If you have not installed the Geographic Coding Plus, this option does not display.
163
User’s Guide - IBM i
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations Screen (C1CPG910)
To define geographic coding information, type the appropriate option number in the Geographic
Coding Definition option field of the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (option 2 to edit existing
information or option 6 to create new geographic coding specifications).
HH:MM:SS
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
C1CPDS00
MM/DD/YYYY
MySample Job
C1CPDS02
[JOB]
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job
RXX.XM00
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit
6=Create
———— Last Activity ————
Opt Function
Date
Time
User
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
Submit Batch Job
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This option displays only if the
Geographic Coding System or Geographic
Coding Plus is installed.
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations Screen (C1CPG910)
The ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-on Locations screen asks for information relating to your input ZIP
and ZIP + 4 Code locations and formats.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[JOB]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
MySample Job
Geographic Coding Definition
ZIP Code and ZIP+4 Add-on Locations
[G9ZIP9] Specify ZIP Code and ZIP+4 Add-on location:
ZIP Code (output from CODE-1 Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of ZIP Code . . . . . . .
C = Character
P = Packed
C1CPG900
C1CPG910
RXX.XM00
Posn
10
ZIP+4 Add-on (output from CODE-1 Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of ZIP+4 Add-on . . . . .
C = Character
P = Packed
Len
3/5
3/4
Rooftop Access Method . . . . . . P
Blank, M, P, B
blank = None, M = ZIP+4 DB, P = Fields below, B = ZIP+4 DB then fields below
Delivery Point Bar Code (DPBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
House Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10
More...
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Update
164
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 8: Geographic Coding Definition Screens
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations Screen (C1CPG910)
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
ZIP Code: Position on
the output record
Number from
1-9999
Specifies where in the CODE-1 Plus™
output record to extract a ZIP Code to pass
on to Geographic Coding Plus. This can be
the position of the original ZIP Code or the
resulting ZIP Code (from a CODE-1 Plus™
match) in your output record.
Required if any
fields to post are
defined.
No Default.
Format of ZIP Code
C or P
Indicates one of the following formats for
the ZIP Code:
C
ZIP Code in EBCDIC character
format.CODE-1 Plus™ assumes
a field length of 5 bytes.
P
ZIP Code in packed decimal
format. The assumed length of
the packed field is 3.
The appropriate field length automatically
corresponds to the specification typed
here.
Required if a ZIP
Code position is
defined.
Default is C.
ZIP + 4 Add-on: Position
on the output record
Number from
1-9999
Specifies where in the CODE-1 Plus™
output record to extract a ZIP + 4 Code to
pass on to Geographic Coding Plus. This
can be the position of the original ZIP + 4
Code, or the resulting ZIP + 4 (from a
CODE-1 Plus™ match) in your output
record.
Optional.
No Default.
Format of ZIP + 4 Addon
C or P
Indicates one of the following formats for
the ZIP + 4 Code:
C
ZIP + 4 Code in EBCDIC
character format. CODE-1 Plus™
assumes a field length of 4 bytes.
P
ZIP + 4 Code in packed decimal
format. The assumed length of
the packed field is 3.
The appropriate field length automatically
corresponds to the specification typed
here.
Required if a ZIP
+ 4 Add-on
position is
defined.
Default is C.
Rooftop Access Method
blank, M, P,
or B
The optional Rooftop function adds
another level of accuracy to your location
and distance calculation by using longitude
and latitude coordinates for a particular
address. Type one of the following codes:
Blank No rooftop access is to be
attempted.
M
Use the DPBC and house number
that matched to the ZIP + 4
database to determine the rooftop
answer.
P
Use the input DPBC and house
number to determine the rooftop
answer.
B
First, use the DPBC and house
number from the ZIP + 4 database
match, and then, if there is no ZIP
+ 4 database match, use the input
DPBC and house number to
determine the rooftop answer.
Optional.
Default is blank.
Release 4.1.0
165
User’s Guide - IBM i
Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG911)
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-On Locations Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Location of Delivery
Point Bar Code (DPBC)
Number from
1-9999
Location of input DPBC used for Rooftop
Matching.
Required if P or B
is selected for
Rooftop Access
Method.
Location for House
Number
Number from
1-9999
Location of input House Number used for
Rooftop Matching.
Required if P or B
is selected for
Rooftop Access
Method.
Length of House
Number
Number from
1-99
Length of input House Number used for
Rooftop Matching.
Required if P or B
is selected for
Rooftop Access
Method.
Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG911)
The Geographic Coding Storage screen specifies the location in your output record to place the
match results from the geographic coding attempt.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
MySample Job
Geographic Coding Definition
Geographic Coding Storage
C1CPG900
C1CPG911
RXX.XM00
[G9 OUT] Specify storage locations for Census information:
Return Code for level of ZIP Code match. . . . . . . . . . . .
Census GEOCODE . . . .
(State Code, County
FIPS State Code. . .
FIPS County Code . .
Census Tract . . . .
Census Block Group .
. . . . . .
Code, Census
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Tract, and Block Group)
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Posn
Len
1
. .
.
.
.
.
12
.
.
.
.
2
3
6
1
More...
F3=Exit

Release 4.1.0
F6=Update
Census information can be stored in two ways: you can store the four results for state code,
county code, census tract, and census block group as a single 12-byte field or you can define
each field's storage position separately. You can use these options alternately or in
conjunction with one another.
166
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 8: Geographic Coding Definition Screens
Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG911)
Geographic Coding Storage Screen Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Return Code for level
of
ZIP Code match
Number from
1-9999
Instructs CODE-1 Plus™ to place a level of
match return code at that position in the
output record. One of the following values
will be posted:
Blank The input ZIP Code did not match.
9
Both the input ZIP Code and the
ZIP + 4 Code matched the Master
File.
5
The input ZIP Code matched, but
the ZIP + 4 Code did not or was not
present.
X
The Geographic Coding System or
Geographic Coding Plus Master
File data has expired.
Optional.
No Default.
Census GEOCODE
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the output location of the Census
GEOCODE. The Census GEOCODE is a
12-byte field comprised of the following 4
fields:
1.
State Code
2 bytes
2.
County Code 3 bytes
3.
Census Tract 6 bytes
4.
Block Group 1 byte
Total
12 bytes
Optional.
No Default.
FIPS State Code
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the location in the CODE-1 Plus
output record where you want to store the 2byte FIPS state code.
Optional.
No Default.
FIPS County Code
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the location in the CODE-1 Plus™
output record where you want to store the 3byte FIPS county code.
Optional.
No Default.
Census Tract
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the location in the CODE-1 Plus
output record where you want to store the 6byte census tract.
Optional.
No Default.
Census Block Group
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the location in the CODE-1 Plus
output record where you want to store the 1byte census block group.
Optional.
No Default.
Release 4.1.0
167
User’s Guide - IBM i
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG912)
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG912)
The first Additional Geographic Coding Storage screen defines the location in your CODE-1 Plus
output record to place additional match results from a geographic coding attempt.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
MySample Job
Geographic Coding Definition
Additional Geographic Coding Storage
C1CPG900
C1CPG912
RXX.XM00
[G9 OUT] Specify storage locations for Geographic Coding information:
Posn Len
USPS State Abbreviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
County Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
MSA Code (Metropolitan Statistical Area) . . . . . . . . . . .
MSA Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
50
Latitude and Longitude Level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latitude and Longitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
16
Latitude and Longitude Coordinate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 20
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
USPS State
Abbreviation
Number from 19999
Location in the output record to store the 2-byte
USPS state abbreviation.
Optional.
No Default.
County Name
Number from 19999
Specifies the location in the output record
where you want to store the 20-byte county
name.
Optional.
No Default.
MSA Code
Number from 19999
Location in the output record to store the 4-byte
Metropolitan Statistical Area (MSA) code.
Optional.
No Default.
MSA Name
Number from 19999
Location in the output record to store the 50byte Metropolitan Statistical Area (MSA) name.
Optional.
No Default.
Latitude and
Longitude
Level indicator
Number from 19999
Level of latitude and longitude determined for
the input ZIP Code. Contains one of the
following codes:
Z
Latitude and longitude represent the
area type of the input ZIP Code.
T
Latitude and longitude represent the
population center of the census tract
determined for the input ZIP Code/ZIP
+ 4 Code.
B
Latitude and longitude represent the
population center of the census block
group determined for the input ZIP
Code/ZIP + 4 Code.
Optional.
No Default.
Release 4.1.0
168
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 8: Geographic Coding Definition Screens
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG913)
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Latitude and
Longitude
Number from 19999
Location in the output record to store the 16byte latitude and longitude string.
Latitude is a 7-digit number (with four decimal
places implied) followed by a 1-byte directional
(N or S) and occupies the first 8 bytes of this
area.
Longitude is a 7-digit number (with four
decimal places implied) followed by a 1-byte
directional (E or W) and occupies the last 8
bytes of this area.
Latitude and
Longitude
Coordinate
20 bytes
Latitude/longitude coordinates with 6 degree
precision. Coordinate consists of 9 digits, 1
directional, 9 digits, and 1 directional. A 6-digit
decimal is implied.
Optional.
No Default.
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG913)
The second Additional Geographic Coding Storage screen specifies the location in your output
record to place match results from a geographic coding attempt.

This screen is available only if you are a Geographic Coding Plus or GeoTAX customer.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
MySample Job
Geographic Coding Definition
Additional Geographic Coding Storage
[G9XOUT] Specify storage locations for Advanced information:
Place Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Place Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Place Class Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Place Class Incorporated/Unincorporated Flag . . . . . . . .
MCD/CCD (minor civil division/census civil division) . . . .
Confidence Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIZM Cluster Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIZM Cluster Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIZM Social Group Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIZM Social Group Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Annexed Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Updated Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Verified Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GeoTAX Output Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GeoTAX Return Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit

Release 4.1.0
C1CPG900
C1CPG913
RXX.XM00
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Posn Len
5
60
2
1
5
4
2
0
2
0
1
7
2
7
3
7
4
9
5
1
Bottom
F6=Update
The GeoTAX Output Key and the GeoTAX Return Code in the above screen are only
available to GeoTAX customers who are also licensed users of the Vertex Quantum or
ComTax21 products. Additional information on this subject can be found in the GeoTAX
User’s Guide.
169
User’s Guide - IBM i
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG913)
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
Place Code
Number from
1-9999
Location in the CODE-1 Plus™ output record
to store the 5-byte FIPS place code returned
by GeoTAX.
Optional.
No Default.
Place Name
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the location in the output record to
store the 60-byte FIPS place name returned
by GeoTAX.
Optional.
No Default.
Place Class Code
Number from
1-9999
A 5-byte FIPS placed code and 60-byte name
returned by GeoTAX.
Optional.
No default.
Place Class
Incorporated/
Unincorporated Flag
Number from
1-9999
A 1-byte code indicating whether a place is
incorporated or unincorporated as stored in
the U.S. Department of Commerce FIPS
Place Code Roster. One of the following
codes is stored:
Blank Not in the roster.
I
Incorporated.
O
Unincorporated.
NOTE: This option is available for GeoTAX
customers only.
Optional.
No default.
MCD/CCD (minor
civil division/census
county division)
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the location in the
CODE-1 Plus™ output record where you want
to store the 5-byte Minor Civil Division/Census
County Division (MCD/CCD) returned by
Geographic Coding Plus.
MCDs Indicates the primary political or
administrative divisions of a county
representing many kinds of legal
entities with a variety of
governmental and administrative
functions.
CCDs Are established in states where there
are no legally established MCDs.
Optional.
No Default.
Confidence Code
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the location in the
CODE-1 Plus™ output record where you want
to store the 3-digit confidence code returned
by Geographic Coding Plus.
Confidence codes represent a percentage of
coverage by a source within a postal
geography.
Optional.
No Default.
PRIZM Cluster Code
Number from
1-9999
Specifies the location in the
CODE-1 Plus™ output record where you want
to store the 2-byte PRIZM cluster code
returned by Geographic Coding Plus.
PRIZM codes are lifestyle segment codes and
definitions allowing for more precise
information about the lifestyle and
demographic features of a population.
Optional.
No Default.
PRIZM Cluster Name
Number from
1-9999
Location in the output record to store the 20byte PRIZM cluster name returned by
Geographic Coding Plus.
Optional.
No Default.
PRIZM Social Group
Code
Number from
1-9999
Location in the output record to store the 2byte PRIZM cluster social group code
returned by Geographic Coding Plus.
Optional.
No Default.
Release 4.1.0
170
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 8: Geographic Coding Definition Screens
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG913)
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
PRIZM Social Group
Name
Number from
1-9999
Location in the output record to store the 20byte PRIZM cluster social group name
returned by Geographic Coding Plus.
Last Annexed Date
Number of up
to 4 digits
Output location for last annexed date.
Last Updated Date
Number of up
to 4 digits
Output location for last updated date.
Last Verified Date
Number of up
to 4 digits
Output location for last verified date.
GeoTAX Output Key
Number of up
to 4 digits
Output location for GeoTAX output key.
GeoTAX Return
Code
Number of up
to 4 digits
Output location for GeoTAX return code:
Blank No matching GTMASTR GeoTAX
Record found.
E
Exact match using state/county/
place/ZIP Code/place name.
P
Partial match using state/county/
place.
A
Alternate match using ZIP Code and
place name.
N
Record is default coded based on
valid state code.
Release 4.1.0
171
Comments
Optional.
No Default.
User’s Guide - IBM i
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen (C1CPG913)
Release 4.1.0
172
User’s Guide - IBM i
Getting Started With Your
Batch Job
In this chapter:











Introduction to Batch Jobs in CODE-1 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Finding Your Sample Name and Address File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Analyzing the Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
What Will Be Covered in This Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Creating the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Defining Your Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Specifying the Input Name/Address File Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Defining Your Output Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Selecting Reports to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Submitting The Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Reading Your Output Files and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
9
Introduction to Batch Jobs in CODE-1 Plus
Introduction to Batch Jobs in CODE-1 Plus
In this chapter we will lead you through a basic CODE-1 Plus job using the sample name-andaddress file that came with your installation media. We will only be covering a few of the options
available to you when setting up and running a CODE-1 Plus job. For any basic CODE-1 Plus job,
you must:
•
•
•
•
Define the contents of your input file
Specify the layout of your input file
Define the contents of your output file
Specify the layout of your output file
On the following pages, we will create a sample job that uses CODE-1 Plus™ functions to
standardize addresses, correct ZIP Codes, and add ZIP + 4 and carrier route codes to input records.
This sample job goes beyond what CODE-1 Plus requires for the most basic job and allows you to
experiment with a few options.
Finding Your Sample Name and Address File
The input file for this tutorial, C1TUTOR. is included on your installation tape. Before starting the
tutorial, create a “demo” library where you can copy C1TUTOR and store the output files as well.
Analyzing the Job
Before you begin defining your sample job, you need to analyze the following job requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Sample input file contents and output files
Sample input file layout
Output file contents
Reports to generate
Headers and footers you want on your reports
174
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Analyzing the Job
Name/Address File Layout
The input file we will use for this job is called C1TUTOR. The following represents the complete input
file:
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8....+....9....+....0....+....1....+
TM129
SAM GERSHWIN
MUSICIANS AND OTHERS
RT 1 BOX 108
PEN ARGYL
PA 18072
TM049
DONALD DUCK
5303 SHERRER PL NW
WASHINGTON
DC 20016
TM059
PEEWEE HERMAN
4205 VAN BUREN ST
UNIVERSITY PARK
MD 20782
TM019
PETER RABBIT
UNITED JUNIOR HIGH
9001 LAUREL GROVE TER
GERMANTOWN
MD 20874
TM059
MINNEY MOUSE
22 S FREDERICK AVE APT 205
GAITHERSBURG
MD 20877
TM059
ALAN QUARTERMAIN
GENERAL HOSPITAL
240 GOLDKETTLE DR
GAITHERSBURG
MD 20878
TM019
MASON WILLIAMS
CLASSICAL GASSERS
9003 TURTLE DOVE LN
GAITHERSBURG
MD 20879
TM129
JOHN WILLIAMS
BOSTON POPS
3514 DUKE ST
COLLEGE PARK
MD 20740
TM049
JOHN WATSON
216 WINCHESTER CT
ANNAPOLIS
MD 21401
TM059
ELLEN BERMAN
9207 SPRUCEWOOD DR
BURKE
VA 22015
TM059
ROBERT E LEE
LEE HISTORICAL SOCIETY
12126 WEDGEWAY CT
FAIRFAX
VA 22033
TM019
BUGS BUNNY
QUEENS COLLEGE
1004 WOODSMANS REACH RD
CHESAPEAKE
VA 23320
TM019
ELMER FUDD
SCHOOL FOR THE DEAF
516 WATERS EDG DR APT F
NEWPORT NEWS
VA 23606
TM059
PAM FLANARY
14 BICKFIELD DR
HAMPTON
VA 23666
TM049
MARTIN FINCH
ST BRIDES COLLEGE
14231 JIB ST APT 22
LAUREL
MD 28989
TM129
MARY ELLEN EPPS
CALVIN COOLIDGE HIGH
2516 BANDER HILL RD
COLUMBIA
SC 29209
TM059
WALT DISNEY
6201 CHARLOTTE HWY
YORK
SC 29745
TM059
JOHN LENNON
JOHN LENNON FAN CLUB
10573 GULF SHORES DR
NAPLES
FL 33963
TM129
JOHN PAUL
ROMAN CATHOLIC SCHOOL BRD 2080 SE MADISON ST
STUART
FL 34997
TM019
JIMMY BUFFET
PIRATES OVER FORTY
5525 GRANNY WHITE PK
NASHVILLE
TN 35589
TM059
BOZ SCAGGS
BOX 8181 STATION B
NASHVILLE
TN 37202
TM049
AL STEWART
2615 HICKORY VALLEY RD
NASHVILLE
TN 37205
TM059
PETER WHITE
1443 CELINA DR
NASHVILLE
TN 37207
TM019
RANDY HOLMBERG
3922 S MISSION OAKS DR
CHATTANOOGA
TN 37412
TM059
YOKO ONO
PO BOX 167
HUDSON
IL 61748
TM059
OLIVE OIL
OLIVE GROWERS OF AMERICA 1003 JUSTIN LN APT 3069
AUSTIN
TX 78757
TM049
JEB STEWART
REBELS FOR A CAUSE
816 W BALBOA BLVD
NEWPORT BEACH
CA 92661
TM049
KEN MURRAY
ASPENITE CORPORATION
770 MAHOGANY LN
SUNNYVALE
CA 94086
TM059
PETER PAN
NEWFOUNDLAND PUBLIC LIBR 2226 BOXWOOD DR
SAN JOSE
CA 95128
TM129
GEORGE HARRISON
TRAVELING WILBURIES
1113 NE BURKE PL
CORVALIS
OR 97330
TM059
MICKEY MOUSE
12106 SE 31ST ST APT D102
BELLEVUE
WA 98005
TM059
PAUL MCCARTNEY
JOHN LENNON FAN CLUB
15433 COUNTRY CLUB DR
MILL CREEK
WA 98012
TM059
PADDY O'NEILL
ST PATRICKS MERCY HOME
5055 8TH AVE NE
SEATTLE
WA 98105
TM049
ROBERT MONDAVI
4225 BROOKLYN AVE NE APT 12
SEATTLE
WA 98105
TM019
POPEYE T SAILOR
716 N 150TH ST
SEATTLE
WA 98133
TM059
RINGO STAR
JOHN LENNON FAN CLUB
8001 SANDPOINT WAY NE
SEATTLE
WA 98155
This mailing list contains name-and-address records that are laid out as follows:
Position
Data Element
1-5
List Code
9-28
Name
30-54
Secondary Address Line
56-85
Primary Address Line
87-106
City Name
108-109
State
111-115
ZIP Code
Output Record Posting Requirements
As stated before, in this tutorial we are going to do the following things:
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Standardize the input addresses
Correct the original ZIP Codes (if necessary)
Add ZIP + 4 and carrier route codes to the records
175
User’s Guide - IBM i
Analyzing the Job
•
Store the output records in the same format as the input records, with the ZIP + 4 Code and
carrier route code added as follows:
Position
Data Element
116-120
ZIP + 4 Code (stored with preceding hyphen)
122-125
Carrier Route Code
In addition, we want CODE-1 Plus™ to:
•
•
•
Store the normalized address (if no match was found).
Store the individual standardized address elements.
Store return codes.
In your job, you will tell CODE-1 Plus to store these components as follows:
Position
Data Element
131-181
Address Elements
183-212
Normalized Address Line 1
214-238
Normalized Address Line 2
240-274
Return Codes
Generated Reports
CODE-1 Plus produces four kinds of reports:
•
•
•
•
ZIP + 4 Coding
Carrier Coding
Line of Travel Coding
Summary
These reports can be generated by state, list code, or 3-digit ZIP Code. For our sample job, we only
want the state reports to print.
When running a job, CODE-1 Plus automatically generates two report files: PRNTXLG and
PRNTRPT. These report files contain all of the CODE-1 Plus reports that were created as the result
of a job execution:
•
•
Release 4.1.0
PRNTXLG—This report file contains only one report, the Execution Log Report. This report is
always printed.
PRNTRPT—This report file can contain up to 15 different reports. Four reports are output to this
file automatically:
• Parameter Record List Report
• Control Totals Report
• Address-Match Execution Statistics Report
• USPS Form 3553 (This will only be generated for jobs run with a valid CASS configuration)
176
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
What Will Be Covered in This Tutorial
The following reports are output to this file by default. If you do not want to generate one of these
reports, you must tell CODE-1 Plus which reports not to print:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Analysis of Matched Records Report
ZIP + 4 Coding by State Report
Carrier Coding by State Report
Line of Travel Coding by State Report
ZIP + 4 Coding by List Code Report
Carrier Coding by List Code Report
Line of Travel Coding by List Code Report
ZIP + 4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Report
Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Report
Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Report
Delivery Point Validation by List Code Report
Delivery Point Validation Processing Summary Report
Residential Delivery File Build Report
Residential Delivery File Execution Log
Processing Summary by State Report
Processing Summary by 3-Digit ZIP Code
The National Delivery Index (NDI) Report is not generated by default. To generate the report,
you must tell CODE-1 Plus to do so.
Report Headers and Footers
Using the Defaults for Print Output component, you define the information you want printed on your
reports:
•
•
•
Headers
Footers
Number of lines to print on a page
For this batch job, we will have all reports print at 60 lines per page and the headers and footers will
be the following:
Main Header
Sample Job
Secondary Header
Footer
CODE-1 Plus™ Tutorial
CODE-1 Plus™ User's Guide
Performance Considerations
In order for your CODE-1 Plus job to run more efficiently, the following steps are recommended:
•
•
Sort your input address file by ZIP Code.
Use the memory module appropriate for your site capability.
What Will Be Covered in This Tutorial
You will perform the tasks listed below in this tutorial:
1. Create a job.
Release 4.1.0
177
User’s Guide - IBM i
What Will Be Covered in This Tutorial
2. Define the headers and footers of your reports.
3. Define your input and output files.
4. Specify your input name-and-address record layout.
5. Specify your name-and-address record posting requirements.
6. Specify the reports you wish to generate.
7. Submit the job for processing.
8. Read the output.
Submit Batch Job
The Submit Batch component of CODE-1 Plus is where we specify the names of our input and
output files. Create a demo library where C1TUTOR and your output files will be sent:
•
•
File C1TUTOR
Library DEMO
•
Member *FIRST.
For this tutorial, we will write output for up to 3 different files—one for successfully matched and
coded records, one for records with valid ZIP Codes for which an address match could not be made,
and one for records with invalid ZIP Codes. For this example, we will produce three out of the four
available output files (we are not printing the ZIP + 4 Coded File).
By default, CODE-1 Plus will assign the following name to the file for successfully coded records:
•
•
•
File C1NAMTUTOR
Library DEMO
Member CODED
CODE-1 Plus will assign the name of the uncoded records file as follows:
•
•
•
File C1NAMTUTOR
Library DEMO
Member UNCODED
Finally, CODE-1 Plus will assign the name of the invalid ZIP Code output file as follows:
•
•
•
File C1NAMTUTOR
Library DEMO
Member INVZIP
The Submit Batch component also allows you several ways to limit processing. For demonstration
purposes, we will limit processing to only those records with ZIP Codes between 20000 and 39999.
Release 4.1.0
178
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Creating the Job
Creating the Job
Before you do any other steps, you must first create your job. Follow the steps listed below to create
a job with the job ID, TUTOR. Start from the Main Menu.
1. Type 5 in the Option field to select CODE-1 Plus, and press Enter.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Pitney Bowes Application Selection
My Sample Job
Select one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
G1MM01
G1MM0001
RXX.XM00
MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System
List Conversion System
Label Printing System
Merge/Purge System
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
Generalized Selection System
EZ-CASE Casing and Punctuation
GEOGRAPHIC CODING Plus
I/O-JET Plus
Business Merge/Purge Plus
GeoTAX
VeriMove
60. Canadian Products/International Products
Option:
5
F3=Exit
F10=Command Entry
The CODE-1 Plus™ Work with Jobs screen (C1CPMM03) displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
C1CPMM00
My Sample Job
C1CPMM03
Work with Jobs
RXX.XM00
Type options, press Enter.
3=Copy
4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 12=Work with
16=Submit 99=Release job lock
Position to job
OPT
JobID
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Release 4.1.0
Creation
Date
*- - - - - - -Last Activity- - - - -* Work
Date
User
Function
Library
F5=Refresh
F19=Reclaim space
F6=Create
F11=Display Descriptions
F21=Print Summary F24=More keys
179
User’s Guide - IBM i
Creating the Job
2. Press F6 to create your new job.
You are prompted to type the new job ID. Keep in mind that the job ID typed on this screen
cannot already exist in the CODE-1 Plus™ system.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Work with Jobs
New Job ID
OPT
JobID
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
C1CPMM00
C1CPMM03
RXX.XM00
TUTOR
Creation
Date
*- - - - - - -Last Activity- - - - - -*
Date
User
Function
F5=Refresh
F19=Reclaim space
Work
Library
F6=Create
F11=Display Descriptions
F21=Print Summary F24=More keys
3. Type TUTOR in the New Job ID field, and press Enter. The Create New Job screen
(C1CPNJ01) appears.
4. Fill in the fields as shown below.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Create New Job
C1CPNJ00
C1CPNJ01
RXX.XM00
Specify Library to hold job objects.
Library for job objects: DEMO
Provide job details as required:
Input N/A file . . . . . . . . . . C1TUTOR
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEMO
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *FIRST
Exit Routine
or
Job description. . . . . . . . . . QDFTJOBD
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . .
QGPL
F3=Exit

Release 4.1.0
More...
F6=Create Job
In this tutorial, you will be using a work library called DEMO. Either create this library
before starting the tutorial, or specify a different library name (one that already exists on
your system). If you do not know a valid library to use, see your company's system
administrator for help. You cannot specify a Pitney Bowes product library.
180
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Creating the Job
5. Page down to view the fields on the next screen.
CODE-1 Plus verifies that you have filled in all of the fields correctly. The second Create New
Job screen (C1CPNJ02) appears. You want to accept all default values on this screen, so you do
not have to do anything.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Create New Job
C1CPNJ00
C1CPNJ02
RXX.XM00
Select Address Matching output files.
Successfully coded file. . . . . C1NAMTUTOR
Library. . . . . . . . . . . .
*LIBWK
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . CODED
*LIBWK
ZIP+4 coded file . . . . . . . .
Library. . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C1NAMTUTOR
*LIBWK
ZIP4
*LIBWK
Unsuccessfully coded file. . . . C1NAMTUTOR
Library. . . . . . . . . . . .
*LIBWK
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNCODED
*LIBWK
Invalid ZIP(s) file. . . . . . .
Library. . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*LIBWK
F3=Exit
C1NAMTUTOR
*LIBWK
INVZIP
Bottom
F6=Create job
6. Press F6 to create the new job. The job is created, and the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
screen (C1CPDS02) displays. Your job ID displays in the upper left corner, just below the date.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
Opt
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
———— Last Activity ————
Date
Time
User
Submit Batch Job
F3=Exit
F12=PrevScrn
You have now finished creating the job.
Release 4.1.0
181
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Your Headers and Footers
Defining Your Headers and Footers
Your second task is to define the headers and footers that will print on your reports. Your main
header will be “Sample Job” and the current system date (*CURRENT). You will also add an
additional header of “CODE-1 Plus Tutorial” and a footer line of “CODE-1 Plus User's Guide.” You
want all reports to be printed with 60 lines per page. To do this, follow the steps below:
1. Type 2 in the Opt field next to Defaults for Print Output, and press Enter.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
Opt
2
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
———— Last Activity ————
Date
Time
User
Submit Batch Job
The first Defaults for Print Output screen (C1CPPX01) displays.
Release 4.1.0
182
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Defining Your Headers and Footers
2. Fill in the fields as shown below.

60 is the default page size for all reports. You may leave these fields blank if desired.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Defaults for Print Output
C1CPPX00
C1CPPX01
RXX.XM00
[HEADER] Specify appearance for all reports:
Heading for all Reports. . . . .
Date for all Reports . . . . . .
Sample Job
*CURRENT
[UHDxx/UFTxx] Specify user-defined Headers/Footers, press F11.
[PAGESZ] Override print file page size if required:
Reports (file PRNTRPT) . . . . .
Execution Log (file PRNTXLG) . .
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Update
60
60
25-225 (Default 60)
25-225 (Default 60)
F11=Headers/Footers
183
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Your Headers and Footers
3. Press F11 to define the additional header and the footer.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Defaults for Print Output
C1CPPX00
C1CPPX01
RXX.XM00
[HEADER] Specify appearance for all reports:
Heading for all Reports. . . . .
Date for all Reports . . . . . .
Sample Job
*CURRENT
[UHDxx/UFTxx] Specify user-defined Headers/Footers, press F11.
[PAGESZ] Override print file page size if required:
Reports (file PRNTRPT) . . . . .
Execution Log (file PRNTXLG) . .
F3=Exit
F6=Update
60
60
25-225 (Default 60)
25-225 (Default 60)
F11=Headers/Footers
The second Defaults for Print Output screen (C1CPPX03) appears.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Defaults for Print Output
C1CPPX00
C1CPPX03
RXX.XM00
Specify lines to surround all reports:
[UHDxx] Header Lines:
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50...55...60...65...70...75....
[UFTxx] Footer Lines:
CODE-1 Plus User's Guide
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50...55...60...65...70...75....
F12=PrevScrn
F13=Remove all
F20=Scroll right
4. Fill in the header and footer as shown.
5. Press F12 to return to the first Defaults for Print Output screen.
The first Defaults for Print Output screen (C1CPPX01) appears.
6. Press F6 to save your Defaults for Print Output data.
The data is saved, and the C1CPOP10 screen appears, asking whether you want to save your
data to an external file.
Release 4.1.0
184
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Specifying the Input Name/Address File Layout
7. Press F12.
The Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPDS02) displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
PX
MI
ID
OD
MO
RP
GC
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
SB
Submit Batch Job
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
You have now specified the headers and footer for your print output. Note that under “Last Activity,”
the date, time, and user reflects your current date, time, and user ID.
Specifying the Input Name/Address File Layout
In this step of the tutorial, you will specify the layout of your input file. For your sample job you will be
defining the following information:
•
•
•
•
Street address
City
State
ZIP Code
Remember the format of your input name-and-address file is as follows:
Position
Street Address
Information
Release 4.1.0
Data Element
1-5
List Code
9-28
Name
30-54
Secondary Address Line
56-85
Primary Address Line
87-106
City Name
108-109
State
111-115
ZIP Code
185
User’s Guide - IBM i
Specifying the Input Name/Address File Layout
To define your input file, complete the steps on the following pages. Beginning from where we left off,
we must first access the Name/Address File Layout component from the Define/Submit CODE-1
Plus Job screen.
1. Type 2 in the Opt field next to Name/Address File Layout, and press Enter.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
PX
MI
ID
OD
MO
RP
GC
_
_
2
_
_
_
_
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
SB _ Submit Batch Job
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
2. The Name/Address File Layout screen (C1CPID10) appears.
Release 4.1.0
186
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Specifying the Input Name/Address File Layout
Defining Street Address Input
The address fields on your input file are arranged to correspond to lines on an address label. You
must define both address fields in order for CODE-1 Plus™ to locate the primary address
information. Primary address information is found in either positions 30 to 54 or positions 56 to 85 of
your input record.
1. Start at the Address and ZIP Code Locations screen.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address File Layout
Address and ZIP Code Locations
[ADDRDF] Specify input file Street Address location:
Location method . . . . . . . . . . . . L
M = Move street address from single field
F = Format (string) multiple fields together
L = Locate address in multiple address lines
C1CPID00
C1CPID10
RXX.XM00
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
Position
30
56
Len
25
30
[CS ZIP] Specify input file City/State/ZIP location:
Location Method . . . . . . . . . . . . S
Pos Len
A = City/ST/ZIP in above multiple lines
City or City/ST . 87
20
C = City/ST in above multiple lines, sep ZIP Separate State . 108
2
M = City/ST in single field, ZIP in another
S = City, ST, and ZIP in separate fields
X = City/ST/ZIP in single field
ZIP Code Position . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Format . . C
9, B, C, P
9=4-byte binary, B=3-byte binary, C=5-byte character, P=3-byte packed
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
F24=Field Search
2. In your sample file, the street address information is contained in two lines. Type L in the
Location Method field under “Specify input file Street Address Location” to tell CODE-1 Plus
that the address information is contained in 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 lines with or without a city name.
3. Now, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where the first address line starts. Looking at your sample
input file in the table on page 185, you see that the first line of address information starts in
position 30. Type 30 in the first street address Position field.
4. After telling CODE-1 Plus where the first line of address information begins, you need to tell
CODE-1 Plus the length of this information in your sample input file. Returning once again to the
table on page 185, you see that your first line of address information ends in position 54. This
means that the length of the first address line is 25 characters long. Type 25 in the first street
address Length field.
5. Now, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where the second line of address information starts and its
length, just like in steps 4 and 5. Once again, looking at the table on page 185, you see that the
second line of address information starts in position 56. Type 56 in the second street address
Position field.
6. In the table, the second line of address information is 30 characters long. Type 30 in the second
street address Length field.
You have completed specifying the street address information for your sample job.
Release 4.1.0
187
User’s Guide - IBM i
Specifying the Input Name/Address File Layout
Defining the City/State/ZIP Code Layout
The city, state, and ZIP Code information in your sample input file is located in separate fields. You
must specify the location, length, and format of each of these three data elements.
Looking at the table on page 185, you can see that the city information is located in positions 87 to
106, the state information is located in positions 108 to 109, and the ZIP Code information is located
in positions 111 to 115 in your sample input file. You will need to define all of this information for
CODE-1 Plus.
1. Start at the Address and ZIP Code Locations screen.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address File Layout
Address and ZIP Code Locations
[ADDRDF] Specify input file Street Address location:
Location method . . . . . . . . . . . . L
M = Move street address from single field
F = Format (string) multiple fields together
L = Locate address in multiple address lines
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
C1CPID00
C1CPID10
RXX.XM00
Position
30
56
Len
25
30
[CS ZIP] Specify input file City/State/ZIP location:
Location Method . . . . . . . . . . . . S
Pos Len
A = City/ST/ZIP in above multiple lines
City or City/ST . 87
20
C = City/ST in above multiple lines, sep ZIP Separate State . 108
2
M = City/ST in single field, ZIP in another
S = City, ST, and ZIP in separate fields
X = City/ST/ZIP in single field
ZIP Code Position . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Format . . C
9, B, C, P
9=4-byte binary, B=3-byte binary, C=5-byte character, P=3-byte packed
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
F24=Field Search
2. First you need to define how the city, state, and ZIP Code information resides in your sample
input file. In your file, the city, state, and ZIP Code are in three separate fields. Type S in the
Location Method field under “Specify input file City/State/ZIP Code Location.”
3. Now, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where the ZIP Code information is located in your input file.
Looking at the table on page 185, you see that this information starts in position 111. Type 111 in
the ZIP Code Position field.
4. In this next step, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus that your ZIP Code is in a 5-byte character format
by using the code C. Type C in the ZIP Code Format field.
5. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location of your city information in the input file. Looking
at the table on page 185 once again, you can see that the city information starts in position 87.
Type 87 in the City or City/ST Position field.
6. Now, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the length of your city information. According to our table, the
length of the city information is 20 characters. Type 20 in the City or City/ST Length field.
7. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location of your state information in your input file.
Looking at the table on page 185, you see that your state information starts in position 108. Type
108 in the Separate State Position field.
8. Now, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the length of your state information. According to our table,
the length of the state information is 2 characters long. Type 2 in the Separate State Length
field.
Release 4.1.0
188
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Defining Your Output Information
Exiting the Name/Address File Layout Component
You have now defined all of the input file data for your sample job. To exit this component and save
the information you have defined, follow the steps below.
1. Press F6 to exit and save the updated Name/Address File Layout component. The data is
saved, and the C1CPOP10 screen appears asking if you want to save your data to an external
file.
2. Press F12. The Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPDS02) appears.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
PX
MI
ID
OD
MO
RP
GC
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
SB _ Submit Batch Job
F3=Exit
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
F12=PrevScrn
You have specified the input file layout of your input name-and-address file.
Defining Your Output Information
Now that you have defined your input information, you will need to define your output information. In
this part of the tutorial, you will define how to store the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
5-digit ZIP Code
Standardized address
Individual address elements
Normalized address lines
Standardized city and state information
ZIP + 4 Code
Carrier route code
Return codes
Default indicators
Information returned from the Line of Travel master file
189
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Your Output Information
Before you begin defining this information, you need to determine how you want your output
information to appear in the output record. For your sample job, you want CODE-1 Plus to store the
output records in the same format as the input records, with the ZIP + 4 Code and carrier route code
added as follows.
Position
Data Element
116-120
ZIP + 4 Code (stored with preceding hyphen)
122-125
Carrier route code
126-130
LOT Code (numeric and alphabetic)
Remember, on page 185 your ZIP Code information ended in position 115—that is why the ZIP + 4
Code starts in position 116.
In addition, you want CODE-1 Plus™ to store the normalized address (if no match was found), the
individual standardized address elements, and return codes. You want these components stored as
follows:
Position
Data Element
131-181
Address Elements:
House Number (10 characters in length)
Leading Directional (2 characters in length)
Street Name (15 characters in length)
Street Suffix (4 characters in length)
Apartment Designator (1 character in length)
Apartment Number (1 character in length)
183-212
Normalized Address Line 1
214-238
Normalized Address Line 2
240-282
Return Codes
You are now ready to define your output information.
Release 4.1.0
190
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Defining Your Output Information
1. Type 2 in the Opt field next to Name/Address File Layout, and press Enter.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
Accesses the
Name/Address
Record Posting
component.
Opt
2
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ERIC
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ERIC
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ERIC
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ERIC
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ERIC
Submit Batch Job
The ZIP Code Storage screen (C1CPOD010) appears, as follows. This is the first screen in the
Name/Address Record Posting component.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus™ Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
ZIP Code Storage
Specify ZIP Code storage, if desired.
Return Code for ZIP Code storage . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrected or confirmed ZIP Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format for ZIP storage . . . .
C P
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD010
RXX.XM00
Posn
Len
1
5/3
More...
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Update
F24=Field Search
191
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Your Output Information
ZIP Code Storage
In this part of the tutorial, you want to tell CODE-1 Plus where to store the ZIP Code return code in
the output file. The ZIP Code return code tells you why the ZIP Code information was not stored in
your output file.
1. Start at the ZIP Code Storage screen (C1CPOD010).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
ZIP Code Storage
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD010
RXX.XM00
[Z5 OUT] Specify ZIP Code storage, if desired:
Posn
257
Len
1
Location for the ZIP Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format . . C
C, P
C = Character, P = Packed
111
5/3
Location for the Source of Final ZIP Code return code
50
Location for the ZIP Code return code
. . . . . . . . .
. .
Location for PO Box-only ZIP Code flagCode return code
. .
Location for Valid ZIP Code Flag . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
1
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
F24=Field Search
2. For your sample job, you want CODE-1 Plus to store the ZIP Code return code in position 257 on
the output file. Type 257 in the Return Code for ZIP Code storage field.
3. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where you would like the standardized ZIP Code stored in
your output file. For your sample job, you want the standardized ZIP Code to be stored in
position 111. Type 111 in the Corrected or confirmed ZIP Code field.
4. Finally, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the format of your output ZIP Code. You want the ZIP Code
to be stored as a 5-byte character number, so type C in the Format for ZIP storage field.
5. When you finish filling in the fields, page down to the Carrier Route Storage screen
(C1CPOD020).
Release 4.1.0
192
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Defining Your Output Information
Carrier Route Storage
In this next step, you want to specify where to store the carrier route code and in what type of format.
1. Start at the Carrier Route Storage screen (C1CPOD020).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
Carrier Route Storage
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD020
RXX.XM00
[CR OUT] Specify Carrier Route storage, if desired:
Posn
Location for Carrier Route return code . . . . . . . 259
Location for Carrier Route code . . . . . . . . . . 122
Len
1
4
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
F24=Field Search
2. First, tell CODE-1 Plus where you want the carrier route return code stored on your output file.
Type 259 in the Return Code for Carrier Route storage field.
3. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where you want the carrier route code stored in your output
file. Type 122 in the Carrier Route Code field.
4. When you finish filling in the fields, page down to the ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage screen
(C1CPOD030).
ZIP + 4 Add-On Storage
In this section, you are going to tell CODE-1 Plus what to do with the ZIP + 4 information in your
output file. For your sample job, you want to store the ZIP + 4 Code in character format with a
preceding hyphen in positions 116 to 120 of the output record. You also want to store the return code
for ZIP + 4 storage in the next available position (position 261) of your designated area for return
codes.
Release 4.1.0
193
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Your Output Information
1. Start at the ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage (C1CPOD030) screen.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
ZIP+4 Add-on Storage
[Z4 OUT] Specify ZIP+4 Add-on storage, if desired:
Location for ZIP+4 return code . . . . . . . .
Location for ZIP+4 code . . . . . . . . . . .
Format . . C, -, P
C = Character, - = Hyphen before character,
Location for DPBC Add-on, without check-digit.
Location for DPBC Add-on check-digit . . . . .
Location for Delivery Point Bar Code (DPBC). .
Location for DPBC Add-on, with check-digit . .
Location for
Location for
Format . .
YYMM: C =
YYYYMM: 6
F3=Exit
. .
. .
P
.
.
.
.
=
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD030
RXX.XM00
Posn
261
116
3-byte packed number
. . . . . . .
2
. . . . . . .
1
. . . . . . .
6
. . . . . . .
3
Z4CHANGE return code . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Vintage Date of CODE-1 Plus Database . . . . 112
6
Character, P = Packed, B = Binary
= Character, 4 = Packed, 3 = Binary
F6=Update
Len
1
4/5/3
1
4/6/3/2
More...
F24=Field Search
2. First, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to store the ZIP + 4 return code in your output file.
Type 261 in the Return Code for ZIP + 4 storage field.
3. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to store the standardized ZIP + 4 Code in your output
file. Type 116 in the ZIP + 4 Add-on field.
4. Now, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the format of your ZIP + 4 Code information. You want the
ZIP + 4 Code to be stored as a 4-byte character number with a preceding hyphen, so type - in
the Format of ZIP + 4 Code field.
5. When you finish filling in the fields, page down to the Standardized Address Storage screen
(C1CPOD040).
Standardized Address Storage
In this step, you will specify how you want to store the standardized address in your output
information. For this example, you want to store your address and apartment information together.
You want this information stored in the same place as in the input record (positions 56 to 85), and
will specify “Replace Input” instead of defining an output position. You also want to store the return
code for standardized address storage in the next available position (position 263) of the designated
area for return codes.
Release 4.1.0
194
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Defining Your Output Information
1. Start at the Standardized Address Storage (C1CPOD040) screen.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
Standardized Address Storage
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD040
RXX.XM00
[SA OUT] Specify Standardized Address storage, if desired:
Posn Len
Location for Std Address WITH Apt
Replace Input? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y
Y, N
If Y: Blank out unused address lines? . . . . . . . . Y
Y, N
If N: Specify storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store Input if Std Address too long or not matched? . . Y
Y, N
Location for Std Address WITHOUT Apt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace even if already stored with Apt? . . .. .. . . Y
Y, N
Location for Apt/PMB number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treatment if Std Address with Apt already stored . . . Y
Y, P, X
Y = Replace, P = Store Input PMB, X = Store Apt Info
Location for Std Address return code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 1
Location for PMB return code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Location for Source of Matched Address return code . . . . . . . .
1
Location for Dropped Information Type return code . . . . . . . .
1
Location for LACS indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
More...
2. The next available location on the output record for information is position 240. You want the
Standardized Address Return Code to be placed in position 240 on the output record, so type
240 in the Return Code for Standardized Address storage field.
3. Next, you need to decide if you want to replace your input information on the output record with
the new standardized address. For your example job, you want to replace it with the new
information, so type Y in the Replace Input field.
4. When you finish filling in the fields, page down to the Address Elements Storage screen
(C1CPOD060).
Address Elements Storage
In this section, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus how you want to store each address element. Address
elements include the house number, leading directional, trailing directional, street name, suffix, and
other information included in a normal street address line. You are going to store each address
element in its own field in positions 121 to 183. This allows for a 10-character Street Name field and
a blank field between each of the other address element fields.
Release 4.1.0
195
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Your Output Information
1. Start at the Address Elements Storage screen (C1CPOD060).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[JOB]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
Address Element Storage
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD060
RXX.XM00
[AE OUT] Specify storage of individual Address Elements:
Posn
Len
House Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10
Leading Directional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
2
Street Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
15
Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4
Trailing Directional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2
Apartment Designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4
Apartment Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8
RR/HC Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
RR/HC Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Box Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Private Mail Box Designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
20
Private Mail Box Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Store All Private Mail Box Numbers? . . . . . . . . . . .
Y
What should be stored when Standardized Address is not avail N
B = Blanks (default) N = Elements from primary address line
X = Nothing
M = Elements from 2 lines of normalized addr More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
F24=Field Search
2. First, you need to enter the location for the house number in your output file. Type 131 in the
House Number Position field.
3. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to place the leading directional information in your
output file. Type 142 in the Leading Directional Position field.
4. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to place the street name information in your output
file. Type 145 in the Street Name Position field.
5. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus how long the street name information is. Type 15 in the
Street Name Length field.
6. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to place the suffix information in your output file. Type
161 in the Suffix Position field.
7. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where the trailing directional information should be placed in
your output file. Type 166 in the Trailing Directional Position field.
8. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to place the apartment designator information in your
output file. Type 169 in the Apartment Designator Position field.
9. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to place the apartment number information in your
output file. Type 174 in the Apartment Number Position field.
10. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to place the private mailbox designator in your output
file. Type 201 in the Private Mailbox Designator Position field.
11. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to place the private mailbox number in your output
file. Type 204 in the Private Mailbox Number Position field.
12. When you finish filling in the fields, page down to the City and State Storage screen
(C1CPOD070).
Release 4.1.0
196
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Defining Your Output Information
City/State Storage
In this next section, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus how to store the city name and state abbreviation.
For your sample job, you want to store the city name and state abbreviation in separate fields, as
they appear in the input file. CODE-1 Plus™ gives you the options of storing the standard 28character form of the city name or the short (13-character) form of the city name. A short city name
is the USPS-accepted abbreviation of a city. For example, the short city name for Macomb
Township, MI is Macom Twp.
You only store want to the short form of a city name if the full city name exceeds the length of your
city name field. In your sample file, your city name field is 20 characters long. Additionally, you want
to tell CODE-1 Plus to store the return code for city/state storage in the next available position
(position 255) of the return code area of your output file.
1. Start at the City and State Storage screen (C1CPOD070).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
City and State Storage
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD070
RXX.XM00
[CS OUT] Specify City and State storage, if desired:
Posn
Location for City/State return code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ____
Formatted City/State line:
Replace Input? . . _
Y, N
If N, specify storage location. ____
Format . . . . . . _
S, Z, 9
S = City/State, Z = City/State/ZIP, 9 = City/State/ZIP+4
Location for City Name(28-character form if it fits, else
If no match is found, store city from Input or ZIP? _
Store Input short city name? . . . . . . . . . . . _
Location for City Name (short form) . . . . . . . . . . .
short)____
I, Z
Y, N
. . . ____
Len
1
25
20
13
Location for State Abbreviation (USPS Standard) . . . . . . . . ____
108
Store Input if no match is found? . . . . .
_
Y, N
USPS Urbanization name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ____
Store if multiple Urbanization names are found? . . _
Y, N
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
F24=Field Search
2. First, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where you would like the city/state return code stored in your
output file. Type 242 in the Location for City/State Return Code storage field.
3. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to put the city name in your output file. Type 87 in the
Location for City Name position field.
4. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the length of your city name information. Type 20 in the City
Name Length field.
5. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location for the state abbreviation in your output file.
Type 108 in the State Abbreviation (USPS Standard) field.
6. When you finish filling in the fields, page down. The City and State Storage Options screen
(C1CPOD073) displays.
7. Page down. The County and Congressional Storage Option screen (C1CPOD076) displays.
8. Page down. The Address Match Information Storage screen (C1CPOD080) displays.
Release 4.1.0
197
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Your Output Information
Address Match Information Storage
The Address Match Information Storage screen allows you to specify storage locations for each of
the return codes, match scores, and other qualitative and quantitative data available through CODE1 Plus™. For your sample job, you want to store all of the information in the remaining positions
designated for return codes in your output record. You are going to separate each field by a blank
position.
1. Start at the Address Match Information Storage screen (C1CPOD080).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
Address Match Information Storage
[AM OUT] Specify storage of Address Match result information:
USPS Record Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Return Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directional Return Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Return Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apartment Return Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firm-name Return Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Probable Correctness Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternate Address Scheme Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Street-name Match Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firm-name Match Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Probable Correctness Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZIP Code Confirmed/Altered/Original indicator . . . . . . .
VeriMove Universal Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD080
RXX.XM00
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Posn
250
253
255
244
246
248
268
270
272
274
Len
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
250
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Update
F24=Field Search
2. First, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location for the USPS Record Type Code in your output
file. Type 250 in the USPS Record Type field.
3. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location for the General Return Code in your output file.
Type 253 in the General Return Code field.
4. Then, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location for the Directional Return Code in your output
file. Type 255 in the Directional Return Code field.
5. Then, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location for the Suffix Return Code in your output file.
Type 244 in the Suffix Return Code field.
6. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location for the Apartment Return Code in your output
file. Type 246 in the Apartment Return Code field.
7. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location for the overall probable correctness number for
your addresses. Type 248 in the Overall Probable Correctness field.
8. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to store the street-name match score in your output
file. Type 268 in the Street-name Match Score field.
9. Then, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location for the firm-name match score in your output
file. Type 270 in the Firm-name Match Score field.
Release 4.1.0
198
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Defining Your Output Information
10. Finally, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the location in your output file fort the Address Probable
Correctness code and the ZIP Code Confirmed/Altered/Original Indicator. Type 272 in the
Address Probable Correctness field and 274 in the ZIP Code Confirmed/Altered/Original
indicator field.
11. When you finish filling in the fields, page down to the Normalized Address Information screen
(C1CPOD095).
Normalized Address and “Care Of” Information Storage
The Normalized Address Information Storage screen allows you to specify storage locations for the
normalized address lines and information that was dropped during matching. You only want to store
normalized address lines when the standardized address could not be stored for any reason in your
sample job.
1. Start at the Normalized Address Information Storage screen (C1CPOD095).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Name/Address Record Posting
Normalized and Care-of Address Information Storage
C1CPOD00
C1CPOD095
RXX.XM00
[AP OUT] Specify storage of Normalized and Care-of Address:
Posn
Care-of Information, Address 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Len
Normalized Address 1 . . . . Condition X . . . . . . . . .
Normalized Address 2 . . . . Condition X . . . . . . . . .
Conditions for storage of normalized addresses:
A = All records
X = Only records for which a Standardized (default)
Address was not stored
D = Store dropped dual address from matched address
Normalized all address types . . . . . .
Y, N
Y = Normalize all address types (default)
N = Selective normalization
General Delivery, PO Box, RR/HC address types only
30
25
F3=Exit
F6=Update
183
214
More...
F24=Field Search
2. First, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus how you want the normalized primary address stored in the
output file. You want CODE-1 Plus to store the normalized address only when the standardized
address is not stored, so type X in the Normalized Address 1 Condition field.
3. Now, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus where to place the normalized primary address in your
output file. Type 183 in the Normalized Address 1 Position field.
4. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the length of the normalized primary address information in
your output file. Type 30 in the Normalized Address 1 Length field.
5. Now, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus how you want the normalized secondary address stored in
the output file. Once again, you want CODE-1 Plus to stored the normalized secondary address
only when the standardized address is not stored, so type X in the Normalized Address 2
Condition field.
6. Next, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the length of the normalized secondary address in your
output file. Type 214 in the Normalized Address 2 Position field.
Release 4.1.0
199
User’s Guide - IBM i
Selecting Reports to be Printed
7. Finally, you need to tell CODE-1 Plus the length of the normalized secondary address
information in your output file. Type 25 in the Normalized Address 2 Length field.
8. When you finish filling in the fields, page down to the Line of Travel Storage screen
(C1CPOD100).
Exiting the Name/Address Record Posting Component
You have now given CODE-1 Plus all of your output requirements. To exit the Name/Address Record
Posting component and save the new information:
1. Press F6. The data is saved, and the C1CPOP10 screen displays asking if you want to save
your data to an external file.
2. Press F12. The Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPDS02) displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
PX
MI
ID
OD
MO
RP
GC
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
SB _ Submit Batch Job
F3=Exit
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
F12=PrevScrn
You have specified the output file record posting requirements.
Selecting Reports to be Printed
In this step, you will simply select the reports that you want CODE-1 Plus™ to print. Remember that
you only want the reports by state to print. These include the following reports:
•
•
•
•
ZIP + 4 Coding by State Report
Carrier Coding by State Report
Line of Travel Coding by State Report
Summary by State Report
These reports will be printed automatically, by default, unless otherwise specified. Additionally, you
do not want the following reports to be printed:
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
ZIP + 4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Report
Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Report
Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Report
Summary by 3-Digit ZIP Report
200
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Selecting Reports to be Printed
To suppress these reports from printing, follow the steps below.
1. Start at the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen. Type 2 in the Opt field next to Report
Selection, and press Enter.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
Accesses the Report
Selection
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
PX
MI
ID
OD
MO
RP
GC
_
_
_
_
_
2
_
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
Geographic Coding Definition
SB _ Submit Batch Job
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS02
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
.
2. The Report Selection screen (C1CPRP10) appears.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Report Selection
[REPORT] Specify the desired reports for
Analysis of Matched Records. . . . . .
ZIP+4 Coding by State. . . . . . . . .
Carrier Coding by State. . . . . . . .
ZIP+4 Coding by List Code. . . . . . .
Carrier Coding by List Code. . . . . .
ZIP+4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code . . .
Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code . .
Processing Summary by State. . . . . .
Processing Summary by List Code. . . .
Processing Summary by 3-Digit ZIP Code
Line of Travel Coding by State . . . .
Line of Travel Coding by List Code . .
Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit Code.
National Deliverability Index (NDI). .
Produce Separate USPS Form 3553. . . .
RDI Processing Summary Counts. . . . .
RDI Processing Counts by List Code . .
F3=Exit
F6=Update
printing:
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
.
_
C1CPRP00
C1CPRP10
RXX.XM00
Casing Option . . _
Y = All Upper
N = Mixed Case
3. Type N in the ZIP + 4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP field to suppress this report from printing.
4. Type N in the Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP field to suppress this report from printing.
5. Type N in the Summary by 3-Digit ZIP field to suppress this report from printing.
6. Type N in the Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit ZIP field to suppress this report from printing.
Release 4.1.0
201
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submitting The Job
7. Continue typing N next to the reports you do not want printed. You may leave the fields blank for
the reports that you want to print. These reports are printed automatically when the job is
executed.
8. To exit this component and save the updated information, press F6. The data is saved, and the
C1CPOP10 screen appears asking you if you want to save your data to an external file.
9. Press F12. The Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPDS02) appears.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
PX
MI
ID
OD
MO
RP
_
_
_
_
_
_
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
SB _ Submit Batch Job
F3=Exit
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS01
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ZA003ME
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ZA003ME
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
F12=PrevScrn
You have selected the reports you want to be printed at job completion.
Submitting The Job
Your final task is to submit the job. To do this, you have to verify your input and output files. Your
input and output files should be defined as follows:
•
•
Input File
• C1TUTOR in library DEMO, member *FIRST.
Output Files
• C1NAMTUTOR in library DEMO, member CODED
• C1NAMTUTOR in library DEMO, member UNCODED
• C1NAMTUTOR in library DEMO, member INVZIP
For demonstration purposes, you will also limit processing to only those records with ZIP Codes
between 20000 and 39999. To access the Submit Batch Job component, follow the steps below.
Release 4.1.0
202
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Submitting The Job
1. Start at the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job Tutor
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
Accesses the
Submit Batch Job
Type options, press Enter.
2=Edit 6=Create
PX
MI
ID
OD
MO
RP
_
_
_
_
_
_
Function
Defaults for Print Output
Reformat Input Record
Name/Address File Layout
Name/Address Record Posting
Reformat Output Record
Report Selection
SB 2 Submit Batch Job
C1CPDS00
C1CPDS01
RXX.XM00
*------- Last Activity ----------*
Date
Time
User
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ZA003ME
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
ZA003ME
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS
D1ZMETZ
2. In order to access the Submit Batch Job screen, type 2 in the Opt field next to Submit Batch Job,
and press Enter. The first Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPSB01) appears, with the
fields filled in as entered on the Create New Job screen (C1CPNJ01).
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
Specify Job details:
[C1BMNAM] Input N/A file
Library . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . .
Exit Routine . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB01
RXX.XM00
C1TUTOR
.
DEMO
. *FIRST
. ________
Job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDFTJOBD
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QGPL
Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . @TUTOR0001
Hold on job queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _
Y, N
Extended List Code (more than 200) support required?. ._
Y, N
[PGMNAM] Select Address Matcher memory model . . . . . _ Blank, S, M, L, H
Use DPV Large Memory Module (DPV010L)? . . . . . . . . _ Y, N
Use RDI Large Memory Module (DPV040L)? . . . . . . . . _ Y, N
[DB LIB] CODE-1 Plus Database Library . . . . . . . . . C1PMAY230
[BYPEXP] Override an expired CODE-1 Plus database? . . . _ Y, N
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
3. Verify that the information is correct.
Release 4.1.0
203
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submitting The Job
4. Page down. The second Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPSB02) displays the fields
filled in with default values. The record length defaults to whatever is required by your output
definitions. All library fields default to the library being used for job objects and all member fields
default as shown below.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB02
RXX.XM00
Select Address Matching output files:
Record length for output files . . . . . . .
[C1BMCOK] Successfully
Library . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . .
Exit Routine . . . . .
Coded
. . .
. . .
. . .
output file
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
[C1BMZP4] Produce Coded ZIP+4 output
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
274
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. C1NAMTUTOR
.
DEMO
. CODED
.
file? N .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. C1NAMTUTOR
.
DEMO
. ZIP4
.
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
5. Verify that the output files are correctly defined.
6. Because you do not want to produce a coded ZIP + 4 file, type N in the Produce Coded ZIP + 4
output file field.
7. Page down. The third Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPSB03) displays with the fields
filled in with default values.
8. Verify that all of the output files are correctly defined.
9. Type Y in the Produce Invalid-ZIP output field.
10. Type Y in the Produce Uncoded output file field.
Release 4.1.0
204
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Submitting The Job
11. Type Y in the Produce Statistics output file field.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB03
RXX.XM00
Select Address Matching output files:
[C1BMIZP] Produce Invalid-ZIP output file?
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
[C1BMNCO] Produce Uncoded output file? . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
[C1BMSTA] Produce Statistics output file?.
Y . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
12. When you complete this screen as shown above, press page down twice.
The sixth Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPSB06) displays with several options for
limiting the amount of input from a given input file. We want to restrict processing to only those
records with ZIP Codes between 20000 and 39999.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
C1CPSB00
C1CPSB90
RXX.XM00
[HEADER] Restrict input to Range of ZIPs, if desired:
Low ZIP Code . . . 20000 (records with lower ZIPs will be bypassed)
High ZIP Code . . 39999 (record with higher ZIP will be treated as EOF)
[FILEDF] Skip records at beginning of file, if desired:
Records to skip . .
[FILEDF] Limit processing to a fraction of the input records, if desired:
Decimal fraction . .
[FILEDF] Stop processing after a number of records, if desired:
Record Limit . . . .
[NTHSEL] Process Nth number of records, if desired:
NTH number of records to process . . . . . . . .
Include/Exclude option . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INC = include Nth number of records EXC = exclude Nth number of records
Fraction of records . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More...
F3=Exit
F6=Submit
F7=Parm Test
13. Type 20000 in the Low ZIP Code field.
14. Type 39999 in the High ZIP Code field.
15. To submit your job, press F6.
Release 4.1.0
205
User’s Guide - IBM i
Reading Your Output Files and Reports
16. CODE-1 Plus processes the input file according to our job definition and writes the output data to
the specified output files. The Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job screen (C1CPDS02) displays.
You have completed the sample job. Continue reading to see the output files and output reports. You
may want to compare these with your own results.
Reading Your Output Files and Reports
When running a job, CODE-1 Plus™ automatically generates two report files: PRNTXLG and
PRNTRPT. These report files contain all of the CODE-1 Plus™ reports that were created as the
result of a job execution, as follows.
•
•
PRNTXLG—contains only one report, the Execution Log Report. This report will always be
printed.
PRNTRPT—contains up to 15 different reports (all of which are described in detail in Chapter
10). Four reports will be output to this file automatically:
• Parameter Record List Report
• Control Totals Report
• Address-Match Execution Statistics Report
• USPS Form 3553 (this will only be generated for jobs run with a valid CASS configuration)
The other reports that are located in this file are the reports you defined earlier in this tutorial. So,
your sample job will produce the four reports listed above and the following report you chose:
•
Processing Summary by State Report
You will also generate the following output files:
•
•
•
Coded Output File—Look at the member called CODED in the file C1NAMTUTOR located in
the library called DEMO. This is the output file of successfully coded addresses.
Uncoded Output File—Look at the member called UNCODED in the file C1NAMTUTOR
located in the library called DEMO. This is the output file of unsuccessfully coded addresses.
Invalid ZIP Output File—Look at the member called INVZIP in the file C1NAMTUTOR located
in the library called DEMO. This is the output file of unsuccessfully coded addresses.
The following pages show the output files generated by this sample job. Please see Chapter 14 for
more information on CODE-1 Plus reports.
.Coded Output File, Positions 1 through 135
Release 4.1.0
206
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Reading Your Output Files and Reports
Record Positions 1 through 135
Corrected
this city
name
Corrected
these street
addresses
Corrected
this ZIP
Code
Added
ZIP+4 Codes
and Carrier
Routes
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8....+....9....+....0....+....1....+....2....+....3....+
TM049
DONALD DUCK
5303 SHERRIER PL NW
WASHINGTON
DC 20016-2507 C0180024A5303
TM129
JOHN WILLIAMS
BOSTON POPS
3514 DUKE ST
COLLEGE PARK
MD 20740-4016 C0210034A3514
TM059
PEEWEE HERMAN
4205 VAN BUREN ST
HYATTSVILLE
MD 20782-1188 C0240040A4205
TM019
PETER RABBIT
UNITED JUNIOR HIGH
19001 LAUREL GROVE TER
GERMANTOWN
MD 20874-5364 C0130057A1900
TM059
MINNEY MOUSE
22 S FREDERICK AVE APT 205
GAITHERSBURG
MD 20877-2355 C0050038A22
TM059
ALAN QUARTERMAIN
GENERAL HOSPITAL
240 GOLD KETTLE DR
GAITHERSBURG
MD 20878-2713 C0010029D240
TM019
MASON WILLIAMS
CLASSICAL GASSERS
9003 TURTLE DOVE LN
GAITHERSBURG
MD 20879-1854 C0250018D9003
TM049
JOHN WATSON
216 WINCHESTER CT
ANNAPOLIS
MD 21401-5847 C0150083A216
TM059
ELLEN BERMAN
9207 SPRUCEWOOD RD
BURKE
VA 22015-3558 C0310056A9207
TM059
ROBERT E LEE
LEE HISTORICAL SOCIETY
12126 WEDGEWAY CT
FAIRFAX
VA 22033-2512 C0410070A1212
TM019
BUGS BUNNY
QUEENS COLLEGE
1004 WOODSMANS REACH
CHESAPEAKE
VA 23320-8503 C0360081D1004
TM019
ELMER FUDD
SCHOOL FOR THE DEAF
516 WATERS EDGE DR APT F
NEWPORT NEWS
VA 23606-4124 C0190019A516
TM059
PAM FLANARY
14 BICKFIELD DR
HAMPTON
VA 23666-2608 C0070077A14
TM049
MARTIN FINCH
ST BRIDES COLLEGE
14231 JIB ST APT 22
LAUREL
MD 20707-6163 C0390103A1423
TM059
WALT DISNEY
6201 CHARLOTTE HWY
YORK
SC 29745-8646 R0020025A6201
TM059
JOHN LENNON
JOHN LENNON FAN CLUB
10573 GULFSHORE DR
NAPLES
FL 34108-4017 C0320099A1057
TM129
JOHN PAUL
ROMAN CATHOLIC SCHOOL BRD 2080 SE MADISON ST
STUART
FL 34997-5858 C0220114A2080
TM019
RANDY HOLMBERG
3922 S MISSION OAKS DR
CHATTANOOGA
TN 37412-1922 C0110033A3922
Release 4.1.0
207
User’s Guide - IBM i
Reading Your Output Files and Reports
Coded Output File, Positions 136 through 274
ZIP
Confirmation
Indicator
Record Positions 136 through 274
Street Name
Street Name
Trailing
Directional
Apartment
Number
Suffix
LOT Return
Code
....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8....+....9....+....0....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
SHERRIER
PL
NW
2 S
9
2
DUKE
ST
2 S
9
0
VAN BUREN
ST
0 S
9
0
LAUREL GROVE
TER
2 S
9
0
S FREDERICK
AVE
APT 205
0 H
9
0
GOLD KETTLE
DR
2 S
9
0
TURTLE DOVE
LN
2 S
9
0
WINCHESTER
CT
0 S
9
0
SPRUCEWOOD
RD
S
2 S
9
0
WEDGEWAY
CT
2 S
9
0
Return
WOODSMANS REACH
S
3 S
9
0
WATERS EDGE
DR
APT F
2 H
9
0
Codes
BICKFIELD
DR
0 S
9
0
JIB
ST
APT 22
2 H
9
0
CHARLOTTE
HWY
0 S
9
0
GULFSHORE
DR
N 2 H
9
1
SE MADISON
ST
2 S
9
0
S MISSION OAKS
DR
0 S
9
0
Leading
Directional
Release 4.1.0
Suffix
Apartment
Apartment
Designator
Overall
Probable
Correctness
208
USPS
Record
Type
Addr
Prob
Correc
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 9: Getting Started With Your Batch Job
Reading Your Output Files and Reports
Uncoded Output File
Record Positions 1 through 115
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8....+....9....+....0....+....1....+
TM059
BOZ SCAGGS
BOX 8181 STATION B
37202
TM049
AL STEWART
2615 HICKORY VALLEY RD
37205
TM059
PETER WHITE
1443 CELINA DR
37207
Return Codes
indicating that
CODE-1 Plus™
could not code
these addresses
Record Positions 216 through 274
....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+...6....+....7....+....8....+....9....+....0
M
4
0
M
2
0
M
2
0
Uncoded Output File
Record Positions 1 through 125
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8....+....9....+....0....+....1....+....2....+
TM019
JIMMY BUFFET
PIRATES OVER FORTY
5525 GRANNY WHITE PK
35589
Return Codes
indicating an
invalid ZIP Code
Record Positions 180 through 274
8....+....9....+....0....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.
PIRATES OVER FORTY
S
2
O
Release 4.1.0
209
User’s Guide - IBM i
Reading Your Output Files and Reports
Release 4.1.0
210
User’s Guide - IBM i
Generating Reports
In this chapter:

















Understanding the CODE-1 Plus Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Address-Match Execution Statistics Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Control Totals Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Execution Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Parameter Record Listing Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Analysis of Matched Records Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Build Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Coding by State Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Coding by List Code Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Processing Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Delivery Point Validation Processing Summary Report . . . . . . .230
Delivery Point Validation Processing by List Code Report . . . .230
Residential Delivery File Build Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Residential Delivery File Build Execution Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
National Deliverability Index (NDI) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
USPS Form 3553. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
10
Understanding the CODE-1 Plus Reports
Understanding the CODE-1 Plus Reports
Required Reports
CODE-1 Plus automatically generates the following reports for all jobs:
•
•
•
•
Address-Match Execution Statistics
Control Totals Report
Execution Log
Parameter Record Listing
Optional Reports
In addition to the automatically generated required reports, you can generate the following optional
reports.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analysis of Matched Records
Build Report
Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP
Carrier Coding by List Code
Carrier Coding by State
Database Print Report
Delivery Point Validation Processing Summary.
Delivery Point Validation by List Code
Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit ZIP
Line of Travel Coding by List Code
Line of Travel Coding by State
National Delivery Index (NDI)
Processing Summary by 3-Digit ZIP
Processing Summary by List Code
Processing Summary by State
Residential Delivery File Build Execution Log
Residential Delivery File Build Report
USPS Form 3553
ZIP + 4 Coding by State
ZIP + 4 Coding by List Code
ZIP + 4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP
Report Parameter
You can use the REPORT parameter to define the reports to generate when you submit a batch job.
For more information on the REPORT parameter, please refer to the section “REPORT” in
“Parameter Reference” in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Release 4.1.0
212
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Build Parameter
Build Parameter
You can use the BUILD parameter to generate the BUILD report. For more information on the BUILD
parameter, please refer to the section “BUILD” in “Parameter Reference” in your CODE-1 Plus
Reference Guide.
Using the IBM i Screens to Generate Reports
You can use the Report Selection (C1CPRP10) screen to specify the reports to print at the end of
your CODE-1 Plus™ job. To access the Report Selection (C1CPRP10) screen:
1. From the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (C1CPDS02), select Report Selection.
2. The Report Selection screen (C1CPRP10) displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Report Selection
C1CPRP00
C1CPRP10
RXX.XM00
[REPORT] Specify the desired reports for printing:
Analysis of Matched Records. . . . . . . Y
Casing Option . . Y
ZIP+4 Coding by State. . . . . . . . . . Y
Y = All Upper
Carrier Coding by State. . . . . . . . . N
N = Mixed Case
ZIP+4 Coding by List Code. . . . . . . . N
Carrier Coding by List Code. . . . . . . N
ZIP+4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code . . . . Y
Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code . . . Y
Processing Summary by State. . . . . . . Y
Processing Summary by List Code. . . . . N
Processing Summary by 3-Digit ZIP Code . Y
Line of Travel Coding by State . . . . . Y
Line of Travel Coding by List Code . . . Y
Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit Code. . Y
National Deliverability Index (NDI). . . Y
Produce Separate USPS Form 3553. . . . . Y
DPV Processing Summary . . . . . . . . . Y
DPV Processing by List Code. . . . . . . Y
More...
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Update
213
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using the IBM i Screens to Generate Reports
3. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Report Selection screen (C1CPRP10).
Report Selection Screen Fields (Part 1 of 3)
Field Name
Analysis of Matched Records
Description
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
ZIP + 4 Coding by State
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Carrier Coding by State
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
ZIP + 4 Coding by List Code
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Carrier Coding by List Code
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
ZIP + 4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP
Code
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP
Code
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Processing Summary by
State
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Release 4.1.0
214
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Using the IBM i Screens to Generate Reports
Report Selection Screen Fields (Part 2 of 3)
Field Name
Processing Summary by List
Code
Description
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Processing Summary by 3Digit ZIP Code
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Line of Travel Coding by
State
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Line of Travel Coding by List
Code
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Line of Travel Coding by 3Digit Code
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
National Deliverability Index
(NDI)
Optional. Code indication whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is N.
Produce Separate USPS
Form 3553
Optional. Code indicating whether or not to print the USPS CASS Form
3553 in a separate print file. Enter one of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is N.
Release 4.1.0
215
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using the IBM i Screens to Generate Reports
Report Selection Screen Fields (Part 3 of 3)
Field Name
Description
DPV Processing Summary
Optional. Code indicating whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
DPV Processing by List Code
Optional. Code indication whether this report is to be printed. Enter one
of the following codes:
• Y — Print the report.
• N — Do not print the report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Function Keys
Report Selection Screen Function Keys
Function Key
Name
Description
F3
Exit
Exit from the Report Selection screen without saving any
entered data.
F6
Update
Save the data and quit from the Report Selection screen.
You can use the Report Selection (C1CPRP11) screen to specify the Residential Delivery Indicator
(RDI) reports to print at the end of your CODE-1 Plus™ job. To access the Report Selection screen
(C1CPRP11):
1. From the Report Selection screen (C1CPRP10), page down to the Report Selection screen
(C1CPRP11).
2. The Report Selection screen (C1CPRP11) displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YY
[Job]
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Report Selection
C1CPRP00
C1CPRP11
RXX.XM00
[REPORT] Specify the desired reports for printing:
RDI Processing Summary Counts. . . . . .
RDI Processing Counts by List Code . . .
Y
Y
Bottom.
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Update
216
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Defining Defaults for Print Output
3. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Report Selection screen (C1CPRP11).
Additional Address Match Information Storage Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
RDI Processing Summary
Counts
Optional. Code indicating whether the RDI counts are to be printed on
the DPV/RDI Summary Report:
• Y — Print RDI counts.
• N — Do not print RDI counts.
• Blank — Default is Y.
RDI Processing Counts by
List Code
Code indicating whether or not to print this report. Enter one of the
following codes:
• Y — Print the RDI List Code Report.
• N — Do not print the RDI List Code Report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
Function Keys
Report Selection Screen Function Keys
Function Key
Name
Description
F3
Exit
Exit from the Report Selection screen without saving any
entered data.
F6
Update
Save the data and quit from the Report Selection screen.
Defining Defaults for Print Output
The Defaults for Print Output is one of the least complex components of CODE-1 Plus™. This
component allows you to define four items on your reports and the Execution log.
•
•
•
•
Main header
Date
Number of lines per page
Additional headers and footers
You define the following items from two screens.
•
•
Defaults for Print Output (C1CPPX01)
Define Headers and Footers (C1CPPX03)
Headers and Footers
The Defaults for Print Output component has five types of headers and footers.
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
System header
Main header
Additional header
System footer
Additional footer
217
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Defaults for Print Output
The system header always consists of a blank line, followed by the phrase “C1BM00 — CODE-1
Plus™ Name/Address Record Coding” and the name of the report. You cannot control the text of this
header, nor can you suppress it from being printed at the top of each page of your reports.
The single line main header, which you define on the first Defaults for Print Output screen, is printed
under the system header. The date prints on the far left side of the main header line.
The additional header, which can be up to four lines long, is printed as the very top line(s), above the
blank line above the system header.
The system footer is identical to the system header, except that it is printed at the bottom of the
report page, instead of the top. Like the system header, you cannot control the text, nor can you
suppress it from being printed at the bottom of each page of each report.
The additional footer, which can be up to four lines long, is printed as the very last line(s), below the
system heading.
Defining Report Format Defaults
Use the Defaults for Print Output screen to define defaults for generated reports. To access the
Defaults for Print Output screen (C1CPPX01):
1. From the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (C1CPDS02), select Defaults for Print Output.
2. The Defaults for Print Output screen (C1CPPX01) displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Defaults for Print Output
C1CPPX00
C1CPPX01
RXX.XM00
[HEADER] Specify appearance for all reports:
Heading for all Reports. . . . .
Date for all Reports . . . . . .
Sample Job
*CURRENT
[UHDxx/UFTxx] Specify user-defined Headers/Footers, press F11.
[PAGESZ] Override print file page size if required:
Reports (file PRNTRPT) . . . . .
Execution Log (file PRNTXLG) . .
F3=Exit
Release 4.1.0
F6=Update
60
60
25-225 (Default 60)
25-225 (Default 60)
F11=Headers/Footers
218
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Defining Defaults for Print Output
3. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Defaults for Print Output screen
(C1CPPX01).
Fields on the Defaults for Print Output Screen (C1CPPX01)
Field Name
Description
Heading for all Reports
Optional. Enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters to define the main
header to print with the date at the top of your reports. No default.
Date for all Reports
Optional. Enter from 1 to 10 alphanumeric characters for the date to
print with the main header at the top of your reports. Type either a date,
or *CURRENT to print the system date. Default is *CURRENT.
Reports (file PRNTRPT)
Optional. Enter from 2 to 3 numeric digits for the number of lines to print
on each page of all of the reports except the Execution Log. Minimum is
25. Maximum is 225. Default is 60.
Execution Log
(file PRNTXLG)
Optional. Enter from 2 to 3 numeric digits for the number of lines to print
on each page of the Execution Log. Minimum is 25. Maximum is 225.
Default is 60.
Function Keys
Defaults for Print Output Screen Function Keys
Function Key
Name
Description
F3
Exit
Exit from the Defaults for Print Output screen without saving
any entered data.
F6
Update
Save the data and quit from the Defaults for Print Output
screen.
F11
Headers/Footers
Go to the Defaults for Print Output — Define Headers and
Footers screen (C1CPPX03).
Release 4.1.0
219
User’s Guide - IBM i
Defining Defaults for Print Output
Defining Headers and Footers
Use the Define Headers and Footers screen to define the text to print on the headers and footers for
your reports. To access the Define Headers and Footers screen (C1CPPX03):
1. From the Defaults for Print Output screen (C1CPPX01), press F11.
2. The Define Headers and Footers screen (C1CPPX03) displays.
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Job TUTOR
CODE-1 Plus Name/Address Coding System
My Sample Job
Defaults for Print Output
C1CPPX00
C1CPPX03
RXX.XM00
Specify lines to surround all reports:
[UHDxx] Header Lines:
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50...55...60...65...70...75..
CODE-1 Plus Tutorial
[UFTxx] Footer Lines:
CODE-1 Plus User's Guide
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50...55...60...65...70...75..
F12=PrevScrn
F13=Remove all
F20=Scroll right
Press F20 to scroll to the right and displays screen C1CPPX04, which is a continuation of the
numbered positions that are available for your header and footer information. Press F19 to scroll
back to the left and display the screen above.
3. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Define Headers and Footers screen
(C1CPPX03).
Fields on the Define Headers and Footers Screen
Field Name
Description
Header Lines
Optional. Enter up to 4 lines of up to 132 alphanumeric characters each
for the additional header lines that you want to print at the top of your
reports. No default.
Footer Lines
Optional. Enter up to 4 lines of up to 132 alphanumeric characters each
for the additional footer lines that you want to print at the bottom of your
reports. No default.
Release 4.1.0
220
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Address-Match Execution Statistics Report
Function Keys
Define Headers and Footers Screen Function Keys
Function Key
Name
Description
F3
Exit
Exit from the Defaults for Print Output screen without saving
any entered data.
F6
Update
Save the data and quit from the Defaults for Print Output
screen.
F11
Headers/Footers
Go to the Defaults for Print Output — Define Headers and
Footers screen (C1CPPX03).
F12
PrevScrn
Save the additional headers and footers and go to the
Defaults for Print Output screen (C1CPPX01).
F13
Remove All
Remove all of the data in the Header Lines and Footer Lines
fields.
F19
Scroll Left
Scroll to the left on the screen to display columns 1-79 of the
header and footer lines (screen C1CPPX03). This function
key is only valid when columns 54-135 are displayed.
F20
Scroll Right
Scroll to the right on the screen to display columns 54-132 of
the header and footer lines (screen C1CPPX03). This
function key is only valid when columns 1-79 are displayed.
Address-Match Execution Statistics Report
The Address-Match Execution Statistics Report provides information on the reads and calls CODE-1
Plus makes to the various database files and program modules during job execution. This report
prints automatically when your job runs and cannot be suppressed. This report includes the
following information:
Address-Match Execution Statistics Report (Part 1 of 2)
Field
Description
Number of CODE-1 Plus
Database Reads
Number of database reads CODE-1 Plus did to each logical file in the
database.
Total CODE-1 Plus
Database Reads
Total number of database reads CODE-1 Plus did to the entire CODE-1
Plus database.
Number of Database
Read Requests
Number of database read requests CODE-1 Plus did to each logical file.
Total CODE-1 Plus
Database Read Requests
Total number of database read requests CODE-1 Plus did to the entire
CODE-1 Plus database.
Address-Match Calls
Number of records requiring address match calls, broken down by the
number of records requiring 1 call, 2 calls, 3 calls, and 4 calls.
Total analyzer invocations
Number of times the CODE-1 Plus driver program called the C1ANZADR
module.
Release 4.1.0
221
User’s Guide - IBM i
Control Totals Report
Address-Match Execution Statistics Report (Part 2 of 2)
Field
Description
ZIP Code setup
operations
Number of times CODE-1 Plus determined a locality.
Match Attempts and
Matches Obtained
Statistics for the different types of matches attempted and maintained
(Original ZIP, city-based locality, Finance-NR-based locality, etc.).

A database read request is a request for data that can be satisfied either with information on
disk or information already in memory. A database read cannot be satisfied with the
information in memory. CODE-1 Plus must access the database on disk to satisfy the read
request.
Control Totals Report
The Control Totals Report provides statistics on processed, matched, and unmatched records for a
job. The top of the Control Totals Report displays the CODE-1 Plus release and the vintage dates of
the installed databases. This report prints automatically when your job is run and cannot be
suppressed. Counts and percentages print for the following fields.
Control Totals Report (Part 1 of 2)
Field
Description
Input Name/Address
Records Read
Number of records read from the input name-and-address file C1BMNAM.
Name/Address Records
Processed
Number of records processed. If you used the Z4CHANGE option, the
Bypassed by Z4CHANGE Option entry appears after the Input Name/
Address Records Read, File C1BMNAM entry. The Z4CHANGE entry
shows how many input records did not have to be processed based on the
Z4CHANGE Master File.
Total Records for Which
Address Match Attempted
Number of records for which a record match was attempted against the
database. The subcategories for this field are the following:
• Original ZIP Code Confirmed—the input ZIP Code matched the
database.
• New ZIP Code Determined—the ZIP Code was changed from the input
as the result of a database match.
• Multiple New ZIP Codes Determined—these records were not
matched because the input ZIP Code was not correct and there were
multiple possible new ZIP Codes.
• Original ZIP Code Retained—(No Address Match Possible)—these
records were not matched, but since the input ZIP Code was a valid
USPS ZIP Code, it was retained.
• No ZIP Code Available—these records were not coded and the input
ZIP Code could not be retained because it was invalid.
Total Unmatched Records
Statistics for the records that could not be matched against the USPS
database, broken down by result code. This category is a breakdown of the
records indicated in the last three sub-categories listed above.
Total Records
Successfully Matched
Total number of records that were successfully matched and stored on the
output file.
Release 4.1.0
222
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Execution Log
Control Totals Report (Part 2 of 2)
Field
Description
ZIP + 4 Code Stored
Successfully
Number of records that were stored with valid ZIP + 4 Codes.
Carrier Route Code
Stored Successfully
Number of records that were stored with valid carrier route codes.
Standard Address Stored
Successfully
Number of records that were stored with valid standardized addresses.
Line of Travel Coding
Attempts
Number of records for which an attempt was made to retrieve a LOT Code.
Address Match Yielding
Street Alias
Number of records that were matched, and which contained a street alias.
Records Matching USPS
Record Types
Number of records that were matched, broken down by USPS Record type.
Records Receiving Bnnn,
Cnnn, Hnnn, and Rnnn
Number of records receiving each type of carrier route code.
Execution Log
The Execution Log provides information on the steps that CODE-1 Plus executes when processing
your name-and-address file. This report generates automatically while your job is running and
cannot be suppressed. The Execution Log is helpful if your job ends by providing details on how far
CODE-1 Plus processed the job got before terminating the job. If you call Technical Support, please
have this report available for reference.
Parameter Record Listing Report
The Parameter Record Listing shows all of the parameters that are used to define a particular job.
The Parameter Record Listing prints automatically when a job is run and cannot be suppressed. If
you need to call Pitney Bowes Technical Support about a problem with any of your jobs, please have
this report available for reference.
Analysis of Matched Records Report
The Analysis of Matched Records Report provides information on:
•
•
•
•
•
Total number of records that were processed
Number of processed records successfully matched
Match details on input directionals, suffixes, and apartment numbers
Quality of the input file using “Probable Correctness” values
Combined probable correctness percentage for the entire input file
If any report field contains 0, the field does not print on the report.
Release 4.1.0
223
User’s Guide - IBM i
Build Report
Build Report
The Build Report displays the release version information for major batch programs. To generate the
Build Report, define the BUILD parameter for your batch job. For more information on the BUILD
parameter, please refer to the section “BUILD” in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Coding by State Reports
This section provides information for the coding by state reports:
ZIP + 4 Coding by State Report
The ZIP + 4 Coding by State Report shows the results of ZIP + 4 coding for each state and provides
the following information.:
Field
Description
ZIP Code Mismatch
ZIP Code could not be determined.
Insufficient Address
Not enough address information was provided.
Street Mismatch
Street name could not be determined.
House Number Mismatch
House number could not be determined.
Apartment Number Mismatch
Apartment number could not be determined.
Matched
Number of records matched with ZIP + 4 Codes or carrier route
codes (depending on the report).
Multiple Matches
Number of records for which multiple matches were found for ZIP
+ 4 Codes or carrier route codes (depending on the report).
Address Information Dropped
Number of records that had address information dropped.
Probable Correctness Too High
Number of records that exceeded the maximum probable
correctness values you specified for the job.
Stored
Number of records stored with ZIP + 4 Codes.
Percent Stored
Percentage of the input file stored that was ZIP + 4 coded.
Carrier Coding by State Report
The Carrier Coding by State Report shows the results of carrier route coding for each state and
provides the following information:
Field
Description
ZIP Code Mismatch
ZIP Code could not be determined.
Insufficient Address
Not enough address information was provided.
Street Mismatch
Street name could not be determined.
Release 4.1.0
224
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Coding by State Reports
Field
Description
House Number Mismatch
House number could not be determined.
Apartment Number Mismatch
Apartment number could not be determined.
Matched
Number of records matched with carrier route codes (depending
on the report).
Multiple Matches
Number of records for which multiple matches were found for
carrier route codes (depending on the report).
Address Information Dropped
Number of records that had address information dropped.
Probable Correctness Too High
Number of records that exceeded the maximum probable
correctness values you specified for the job.
Stored
Number of records stored with carrier route codes.
Percent Stored
Percentage of the input file stored that was carrier route coded.
Line of Travel Coding by State Report
The Line of Travel Coding by State Report is broken down differently. After the number of records
processed for each state, the report is broken down as follows:
Field
Description
State
State for which Line of Travel coding statistics are listed.
Number Processed
Number of records processed for the state.
ZIP + 4 Level LOT Coded
Number of records for which a LOT code was assigned at the ZIP
+ 4 level.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records that were LOT coded at the ZIP + 4 level.
Default LOT Coded
Number of records coded with a default LOT code.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records that were default LOT coded.
Uncoded
Number of records that were not LOT coded.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records that were not LOT coded.
Total
Total for each field on report.
Release 4.1.0
225
User’s Guide - IBM i
Coding by List Code Reports
Coding by List Code Reports
This section provides information for the coding by list code reports:
ZIP + 4 Coding by List Code Report
The ZIP + 4 Coding by List Code Report lists the input list code, followed by the number of input
records for that code and provides the following information.
Field
Description
ZIP Code Mismatch
ZIP Code could not be determined.
Insufficient Address
Not enough address information was provided.
Street Mismatch
Street name could not be determined.
House Number Mismatch
House number could not be determined.
Apartment Number Mismatch
Apartment number could not be determined.
Matched
Number of records matched with ZIP + 4 Codes (depending on
the report).
Multiple Matches
Number of records for which multiple matches were found for
ZIP + 4 Codes.
Address Information Dropped
Number of records that had address information dropped.
Probable Correctness Too High
Number of records that were not stored because they exceeded
the maximum probable correctness values you specified for the
job.
Stored
Number of records stored with ZIP + 4 Codes or carrier route
codes,
Percent Stored
Percentage of the input file stored that was ZIP + 4 coded or
carrier route coded.
Carrier Route Coding by List Code Report
The Carrier Route Coding by List Code Report lists the input list code, followed by the number of
input records for that code and provides the following information.
Field
Description
ZIP Code Mismatch
ZIP Code could not be determined.
Insufficient Address
Not enough address information was provided.
Street Mismatch
Street name could not be determined.
House Number Mismatch
House number could not be determined.
Apartment Number Mismatch
Apartment number could not be determined.
Matched
Number of records matched with carrier route codes (depending
on the report).
Release 4.1.0
226
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Coding by List Code Reports
Field
Description
Multiple Matches
Number of records for which multiple matches were found for
carrier routes.
Address Information Dropped
Number of records that had address information dropped.
Probable Correctness Too High
Number of records that were not stored because they exceeded
the maximum probable correctness values you specified for the
job.
Stored
Number of records stored with carrier route codes.
Percent Stored
Percentage of the input file stored that was carrier route coded.
Line of Travel Coding by List Code Report
The Line of Travel Coding by List Code Report is broken down differently. After the number of
records processed for each state, the report is broken down as follows
Field
Description
List Code
List code for which Line of Travel coding statistics are listed.
Number Processed
Number of records processed for the list code.
ZIP + 4 Level LOT Coded
Number of records for which a LOT code was assigned at the ZIP
+ 4 level.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records that were LOT coded at the ZIP + 4 level.
Default LOT Coded
Number of records coded with a default LOT code.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records that were default LOT coded.
Uncoded
Number of records that were not LOT coded.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records that were not LOT coded.
Total
Total for each field on report.
Release 4.1.0
227
User’s Guide - IBM i
Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Reports
Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Reports
This section provides information for the Coding by 3-Digit reports:
ZIP + 4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Reports
The ZIP + 4 Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Report provides the following information.
Field
Description
ZIP Code Mismatch
ZIP Code could not be determined.
Insufficient Address
Not enough address information was provided.
Street Mismatch
Street name could not be determined.
House Number Mismatch
House number could not be determined.
Apartment Number Mismatch
Apartment number could not be determined.
Matched
Number of records matched with ZIP + 4 Codes.
Multiple Matches
Number of records for which multiple matches were found for
ZIP + 4 Codes.
Address Information Dropped
Number of records that had address information dropped.
Probable Correctness Too High
Number of records that were not stored because the records
exceeded the maximum probable correctness values specified
for the job.
Stored
Number of records stored with ZIP + 4 Codes.
Percent Stored
Percentage of the input file stored that was ZIP + 4 coded.
Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Reports
The Carrier Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Report provides the following information.
Field
Description
ZIP Code Mismatch
ZIP Code could not be determined.
Insufficient Address
Not enough address information was provided.
Street Mismatch
Street name could not be determined.
House Number Mismatch
House number could not be determined.
Apartment Number Mismatch
Apartment number could not be determined.
Matched
Number of records matched with carrier route codes.
Multiple Matches
Number of records for which multiple matches were found for
carrier route codes.
Address Information Dropped
Number of records that had address information dropped.
Release 4.1.0
228
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
Processing Summary Reports
Field
Description
Probable Correctness Too High
Number of records that were not stored because the records
exceeded the maximum probable correctness values specified
for the job.
Stored
Number of records stored with carrier route codes.
Percent Stored
Percentage of the input file stored that was ZIP + 4 coded or
carrier route coded.
Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Report
The Line of Travel Coding by 3-Digit ZIP Code Report provides the following information.
Field
Description
3-Digit
3-Digit code for which Line of Travel coding statistics are listed.
Number Processed
Number of records processed for the 3-Digit ZIP Code.
ZIP + 4 Level LOT Coded
Number of records for which a LOT code was assigned at the ZIP
+ 4 level.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records that were LOT coded at the ZIP + 4 level.
Default LOT Coded
Number of records coded with a default LOT code.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records coded with a default LOT code.
Uncoded
Number of records that were not LOT coded.
Pct of Nr Processed
Percentage of records that were not LOT coded.
Total
Total for each field on report.
Processing Summary Reports
The Processing Summary reports show—by state, list code, or 3-digit ZIP Code—totals for the
following categories:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Records Processed—number of records processed for this job
Address Mismatches—number of records for which no address could be determined
Multiple Matches—number of records for which multiple matches were found
Unique Matches—number of records for which there was only a single, unique match
determined
Number of ZIP Codes Stored—number of records that were stored with ZIP Codes
Percentage of ZIP Codes Stored
Number of Records Stored with ZIP + 4 Codes
Percentage of Records Stored with ZIP + 4 Codes—Percentage of total number of records
stored with ZIP + 4 Codes
Number of Records Stored with Carrier Route Codes
Percentage of Records Stored with Carrier Route Codes
Number of Records Stored with Standardized Addresses
229
User’s Guide - IBM i
Delivery Point Validation Processing Summary Report
•
•
•
Percentage of Records Stored with Standardized Addresses
Number of Records Stored with City and State—Number of records stored with matched city and
state information
Percentage of Records Stored with City and State
Delivery Point Validation Processing Summary Report
This report shows you statistics about processed, matched, and unmatched records for a job. This
report is printed automatically when your job is run. You cannot turn this feature off.
Delivery Point Validation Processing by List Code Report
This report shows you statistics about processed, matched, and unmatched records for a job. This
report is printed automatically when your job is run; you cannot turn this feature off.
Residential Delivery File Build Report
You will find the following information on this report:
•
•
Parameter given
Control totals for your RDI File build job
Residential Delivery File Build Execution Log
You will find the following information on the execution log:
•
•
•
Date and time of the RDI File build
Number of 9-digit input records
Number of 11-digit input records
National Deliverability Index (NDI) Report
The National Deliverability Index System (NDI) measures and improves address quality through
seven quality indicators. The NDI Report shows how many records fulfill each criteria required for
each quality indicator. The categories are represented by the number of addresses:
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Matched and standardized against the ZIP + 4 file
Containing apartment numbers
Containing rural route and box number information
Containing correct 5-digit ZIP Codes
Containing carrier route codes
230
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 10: Generating Reports
USPS Form 3553
USPS Form 3553
The USPS Form 3553 is a facsimile of the Postal Form 3553. This form is produced automatically
when you are using a CASS-certified configuration in CODE-1 Plus and is required by the Postal
Service.
•
•
•
•
•
Section A of the form contains the name of the CASS-certified vendor (Pitney Bowes), the name
of the software, the release number, and the configuration used. For Z4CHANGE and LOT
processing, the form contains the Z4CHANGE and LOT vendor name, the name of the
Z4CHANGE or LOT software, the release number, and the configuration used.
Section B of the form contains information about your name-and-address list, including the date
you processed your list against the Master file, Z4CHANGE option, or LOT database. It also
contains the date (month and year) of the ZIP + 4 (Master file), Z4CHANGE, and LOT
databases. Additional list information is also provided, including the total number of records
processed.
Section C of the form contains information about your output file, including information about the
number of records ZIP + 4 Coded, delivery point coded, 5-digit ZIP Coded, carrier route coded,
LOT coded, and processed by the Z4CHANGE option, and the dates through which the file is
valid.
Section D of the form contains information about the mailer.
Section E of the form contains the Qualitative Statistical Summary and information regarding
high rise, military, and rural route defaults, LACS data, DPV, and EWS.

Pages 2 and 3 of the USPS Form 3553 contain detailed descriptions of each field on the
form.
For more information, please see http://about.usps.com/forms/ps3553.pdf.
Release 4.1.0
231
User’s Guide - IBM i
USPS Form 3553
Release 4.1.0
232
User’s Guide - IBM i
Getting Started With
Interactive Processing
In this chapter:















Getting Started With the Interactive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
CODE-1 Plus Interactive System Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Address Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Database Inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
An Example Work Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Interactive Screen Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Address Matching Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Database Inquiry Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Screens that Support Site Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Database Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Screens that Support Site Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Database Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Customization File Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Batch Uncoded Records Interface (G1CPBNC). . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
11
Getting Started With the Interactive System
Getting Started With the Interactive System
This chapter describes the CODE-1 Plus interactive address matching and database inquiry
functions. The CODE-1 Plus Interactive System is an environment where you can match and correct
addresses online through one easy-to-use screen. This screen enables you to use the two main
functions, Address Matching and Database Inquiry, and a secondary function that enables you to
correct uncoded records. (You must implement the user-exit G1CPBNC to correct uncoded records
interactively.) To implement the user-exit G1CPBNC, refer to "Correcting Uncoded Records” on
page 245.


To minimize maintenance, the interactive screens in this chapter do not display the database
version and the date stamp. We also use “__ of __” to represent the screen currently
displayed, instead of “1 of 62,381,” for example.
The CODE-1 Plus Interactive System does not support Auxiliary File/EWS processing.
Address Matching Function
The interactive address matching function enables you to:
•
•
•
•
Match a single input address against the master file
Analyze return codes to determine actions that were taken to attempt a match
Detect the types and quantities of problems encountered in an input address
Control the closeness (“tightness” or “looseness”) of address matches
For each match attempt, CODE-1 Plus displays return codes that indicate the success or reason for
failure of the attempt. You can view these return codes in code or expanded English format.
In addition to the return codes, CODE-1 Plus shows you, for each match attempt, parsed address
elements and Delivery Sequence Footnotes (DSF2 codes).
Geographic Coding
The address matching function provides access to the Geographic Coding Information screens.
Please refer to the User’s Guide that you received with your Geographic Coding software for details
about Geographic Coding Plus.

To access the Geographic Coding Information screens, you must purchase and install the
Pitney Bowes Geographic Coding Plus software.
Database Inquiry Function
The database inquiry function lets you browse the contents of the CODE-1 Plus database. Using this
feature, you can look up houses, apartments, and firms on a given street, in a particular city. You can
display and analyze the following information for each city in the CODE-1 Plus database:
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
City name
Cities within a state
Cities within a ZIP Code
ZIP Codes in a city
234
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Getting Started With the Interactive System
•
•
•
•
•
•
Streets within a city
Streets within a locality
Streets within a ZIP Code
House ranges on a street
Apartment ranges on a street range
Firm names within a street range
Database Expiration and Incompatibility
The interactive matcher ceases to function in accordance with the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM)
A960 matrix. The interactive system inquiry area, however, remains available even after the
interactive matcher expires. In this case, the following message will be displayed on the prompt line
above the function key descriptions:
CODE-1 Plus DATABASE IS EXPIRED
Alternatively, if the CASS cycle date has passed, the following message displays at the prompt:
CODE-1 Plus DATABASE CASS CYCLE IS EXPIRED
The interactive system validates the release of the database against the release of the software. If
the releases are incompatible, the following message will appear when you enter the CODE-1 Plus
interactive transaction code:
CODE-1 Plus PROGRAM ERROR, RETURN CODE=ICPT INCOMPATIBLE
DATABASE FOUND
In this case, neither the inquiry nor the match process will be accessible.
Expiration of Delivery Point Validation (DPV) Processing
The DPV option will stop working at the end of the fourth month from the release of the database.
If you have an expired DPV database, this message will appear:
DELIVERY POINT VALIDATION SUPPRESSED DUE TO DATABASE
EXPIRATION DATE CHECK
Correcting Uncoded Records Function
When you run a batch job in CODE-1 Plus, you can generate an uncoded records output file
(C1BMNCO). This file contains records with valid ZIP Codes, but for some reason, the records did
not match against the database. With a supplied user-exit, you can correct these records in the
CODE-1 Plus Interactive screen. You display an uncoded record in the input area, correct the
record, write the corrected record to a corrected output file, and then display the next uncoded
record. For more information, refer to "Correcting Uncoded Records” on page 245.
Navigation Function
The navigation function coordinates the match and inquiry functions to position the inquiry portion of
the split screen format as close as possible to the point of match failure on a non-matched address.
Navigation does not change the display on a matched address; it is geared to react to the matcher’s
non-space return codes to drill down into the database as far as possible.
Release 4.1.0
235
User’s Guide - IBM i
CODE-1 Plus Interactive System Screen
For example, a house range mismatch generally will result in the inquiry half of the screen being
positioned at the house range on the street entered on the top half of the screen. If the street is
misspelled, however, the position will be at the same street name entered on the match portion of
the screen. The purpose of this process is to get as close as possible to a correct address without
having to drill through apparently correct levels of the database.
The Navigate (Nav) toggle command turns navigation on or off. Navigation is only available in split
screen processing (since a non-matched address is required to activate the function) and can be
used in concert with the UR (batch not coded) function. For more information on the commands
available in interactive processing, refer to "Command Field” on page 246.
CODE-1 Plus Interactive System Screen
The Interactive CODE-1 Plus System screen includes the address matching function on top and the
database inquiry function on the bottom.
Function
Keys
Database
Command
Field
Input
Match Fields
Results
CODE-1 Plus Coding System
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Firm Name:
Firm: M D/Suf: M
Secondary Addr:
St: M Vcity: S
Primary Addr:
Correct ZIP Y
City, ST:
Mixed Case: Y
ZIP Code:
Urb Name:
Mult Secondary: Y
Override City: Z
Matched Addr:
CRRT:
City,State ZIP:
DPBC:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Command:
Nav DPV
__ of __
City Information
LN City
State
ZIP Range
Type
URB Unique-ZIP
1 A A R P
CA
90848
V
2 A A R P INS
PA
19187
V
Y
3 A A R P PHARMACY
CA
90848
V
Y
4 A A R P PHARMACY
CT
06167
V
Y
5 A C NIELSEN
TX
79966-79974
V
Y
6 A H MCCOY FEDERAL BLDG
MS
39269
V
7 A M F GREENSBORO
NC
27425
V
8 A M O R C
CA
95191
V
Y
The match settings have been changed.
1=Help
2=ZC
3=Quit
4=SC
5=CZ
8=Down
9=Mat
10=Flip
Interactive CODE-1 Plus System Screen Components
You can enter an address and attempt a match, or display database information.
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Input Fields—Enter the address that you want to match.
Match Results—CODE-1 Plus returns the standardized address.
Command Field—Enter screen commands.
Database Inquiry—The first database inquiry screen displays an alphabetical list of cities in the
database.
Function Keys—Access other functions for address matching or database inquiry components.
236
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching
Online Help Facility
The CODE-1 Plus Interactive System has an extensive help facility. Help is available on three levels:
•
•
•
Context sensitive help
System Tutorial
List of Commands
To access the online help facility from any screen in the Interactive CODE-1 Plus System:
1. Enter Help in the Command field or press function key F1 or the Help key.
2. The online help facility displays a menu, and you can choose to see the tutorial, a list of all valid
commands, or context sensitive help on the screen that was displayed when you accessed the
online help facility.
3. To exit the help facility, press function key F10 or enter X in the Selection field.
Address Matching
To match an address, follow the steps below.
1. Move your cursor to the top of the screen using the Tab key, arrow keys, or
Field Exit key.
2. Enter any firm name, primary and secondary address lines, city, state, and/or ZIP Code.
3. Press Enter.
4. CODE-1 Plus searches the database to find an address that matches the one you entered.
5. If a match is found, the standardized address line and the standardized city/state/ZIP Code line
appear for you on the top half of the screen.
6. You can display other match result information by entering RC (return codes) or MAT in the
Command field, or pressing F9.
Scrolling Through the Match Results Screens
There are six screens of match results in the CODE-1 Plus Interactive System. Each screen shows
you different information about your match attempt. These screens are the following:
•
RC—Return Codes screen
•
•
•
•
•
DS—Delivery Sequence Footnotes2 screen
PE—Parsed Elements screen
ME—Multiple Elements screen
ST—Statistics screen
DI—Miscellaneous Information/Base Address screen.
Release 4.1.0
237
User’s Guide - IBM i
Database Inquiry
You can access these screens from anywhere in the system by typing the screen’s 2-character code
in the Command field. You can display these screens sequentially in the order shown below with the
DOWN command or F8 or ROLL UP keys and the UP command or the F7 or ROLL DOWN keys.
Sequential Order of CODE-1 Plus Interactive System Screens
In addition to the six match results screens, there are three other screens that support the address
matching function. These screens follow:
•
•
•
•
ER—Expanded Return Codes screen shows you English descriptions of the return codes.
MS—Match Settings screen enables you to change the settings for the match algorithms to
control the strictness of the match attempt.
GC—Geographic Codes screen enables you to see Geographic Coding Results for your address
(if the Geographic Coding System is installed).
DB—Database Commands displays the information for your database, including software
release and the expiration date of your databases.
To view one of the above screens, type its 2-character code in the Command field and press the
Enter key.

If you change to one of these match results screens, and attempt another match, the Return
Codes screen is not re-displayed; the screen that is currently shown remains until you move
to another screen. To return to the Return Codes screen, enter RC in the Command field.
Database Inquiry
The bottom half of the Interactive CODE-1 Plus screen contains the first database inquiry screen.
The database inquiry function supports the following screens:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AH—Apartments at a House Range
CS—Cities in a State
CZ—Cities in a ZIP Code
CI—City Information
FM—Firms on a Street
HS—Houses on a Street
SC—Streets in a City
SL—Streets in a Locality
SZ—Streets in a ZIP Code
GEO—Geographic Coding Interface
ZC—ZIP Codes in a City.
To make any database inquiry screen take up all of the space on the screen:
1. Type FLIP in the Command field or press function key F10.
More lines are available to display additional information stored in the database.
2. To restore the screen to the original display, enter FLIP again in the Command field.
Release 4.1.0
238
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Database Inquiry
Navigating Through the Screens
You can access the CI, CS, CZ, and SZ database inquiry screens from anywhere in the system by
typing the screen’s 2-character code in the Command field. Note that to access:
•
•
•
The Cities in a State screen, type CS followed by a 2-character state code in the Command field.
The Cities in a ZIP Code screen, type CZ followed by a 5-digit ZIP Code (or 2-digit line number if
you are on Cities in a State or database screens).
The Streets in a ZIP Code screen, type SZ followed by a 5-digit ZIP Code (or 2-digit line number
if you are on Cities in a ZIP Code screen).
You can scroll through data on a specific screen as shown in the figure below with the DOWN
command or F8 or ROLL UP keys and the UP command or the F7 or ROLL DOWN keys.
Screen Order in CODE-1 Plus Interactive System
Moving to a Line on a Screen
To position the data on the screen to a specific spot alphabetically:
1. Type an L (short for locate) in the Command field.
2. Then type the search string and press the Enter key.
For example, if you wanted to position the list to Lanham while displaying a Cities screen, you
would enter L LANHAM in the Command field. The first city that starts with the letters L-A-N-HA-M would become the first city displayed.
Release 4.1.0
239
User’s Guide - IBM i
Database Inquiry
Displaying Data about a Database Entry
To display data for any database line on the screen, use one of the following methods. All methods
produce the same result.
•
First, in the Command field, you can type the 2-character command and the appropriate line
number. For example, if the city of Lanham, MD is the second city displayed, and we want to
display all of the streets in Lanham, MD, we would:
Type SC 2 (streets in the city on line 2) in the Command field.
•
Most 2-character screen abbreviations (like SC above) are assigned to function keys on the
current screen. Refer to the display line on the bottom of the screen for the corresponding
function keys. If you want to use a function key to access data instead of typing the 2-character
code, you can use one of the two methods described below. To display the streets in Lanham,
Maryland again:
Type 2 in the Command field and press the function key F4.
All the streets in the city of Lanham appear.
or
Position the cursor on the second line of the display (the line with Lanham, MD) and press F4.
Querying the Database
The following steps clarify the concepts presented above.
1. Start at the first database inquiry screen.
2. Enter FLIP in the Command field and press Enter.
3. Enter L LANHAM in the Command field. The screen changes to display only database inquiry
without address matching.
4. Enter SC 2 in the Command field and press Enter.

You could also enter just SC. The line number defaults to 1, if no line number is entered
in the Command field.
The cursor moves to the Streets in a City screen for the city on the first line of the display (in this
case, Lanham MD).
5. Enter DOWN in the Command field and press Enter or press F8 to see the next display of
streets in Lanham, MD. The screen appears with all the streets in Lanham, Maryland.

Release 4.1.0
To combine a display command and a locate command, you can enter the display command,
followed by the line number for the display command, followed by the locate string. For
example, if your screen displayed the cities in the database, positioned with LANHAM, MD as
line 4, and you wanted to see all of the streets in LANHAM starting with PARLIAMENT PL,
you would enter SC 4 PARLIAMENT. The Streets in a City screen would be displayed, and
PARLIAMENT PL would be the second street displayed.
240
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
An Example Work Session
An Example Work Session
The remainder of this chapter is devoted to an example of how to use the interactive functions to
correct problem addresses. The first step is to access the interactive matching function and enter an
address. The address will not match, so we use the database inquiry to see if our “detective” skills
enable us to find the address. Once we find an address, we return to the address matching function
to look at the results of a match.
The following address is used as input:
LOCUS INC
2560 HUNT
JEFFERSON VA
You will follow the steps below to correct your input address:
1. Access the CODE-1 Plus Interactive System.
2. Attempt to match a questionable address using different matching algorithms.
3. Browse the postal database to determine the correct address.
4. Successfully match the corrected input address, thereby producing a ZIP + 4 Code, parsed
address elements, and output return codes.
5. Display geographic codes for the address.

To access the Geographic Coding System screen, you must have purchased and
installed the Pitney Bowes Geographic Coding Plus.
Step 1. Accessing the Interactive System
To start the CODE-1 Plus Interactive system:
1. Enter command CALL [email protected]@pgms/G1mm01.
2. Select 5 for CODE-1 Plus.
3. Press F8 from the Work With Jobs screen.
OR
Add the global, product, and database libraries to your library list and type CALL G1CP on the
IBM i command line.
The CODE-1 Plus™ Interactive System appears on your screen.
Release 4.1.0
241
User’s Guide - IBM i
An Example Work Session
Step 2. Matching an Address
At this point, you can enter an address for a match or search the database for specific information.
For the example, we enter an address match attempt.
1. Type the address in question and press Enter.
CODE-1 Plus Coding System
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Firm Name: LOCUS INC
Firm: M D/Suf: M
Secondary Addr:
St: M Vcity: S
Primary Addr: 2650 HUNT
Correct ZIP: Y
City, ST: JEFFERSON VA
Mixed Case: Y
ZIP Code:
Urb Name:
Mult Secondary: Y
Override City: Z
Matched Addr:
CRRT:
City,State ZIP:
DPBC:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Command:
Nav DPV
__ of __
City Information
LN City
State
ZIP Range
Type
URB Unique-ZIP
1 A A R P
CA
90848
V
2 A A R P INS
PA
19187
V
Y
3 A A R P PHARMACY
CA
90848
V
Y
4 A A R P PHARMACY
CT
06167
V
Y
5 A C NIELSEN
TX
79966-79974
V
Y
6 A H MCCOY FEDERAL BLDG
MS
39269
V
7 A M F GREENSBORO
NC
27425
V
8 A M O R C
CA
95191
V
Y
The match settings have been changed.
1=Help
2=ZC
3=Quit
4=SC
5=CZ
8=Down
9=Mat
10=Flip
2. CODE-1 Plus attempts to match the address, but is unsuccessful (no match address or City/
State/ZIP Code line is displayed). Next, review why a match was not found.
3. To display the Return Codes screen, type RC in the Command field and press Enter. CODE-1
Plus codes the example address. Return codes appear on the screen.
4. To change to the database inquiry function, type INQ in the Command field and press Enter.
Release 4.1.0
242
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
An Example Work Session
Step 3. Querying the Database
The lower half of the screen changes and displays the list of cities in the database.
1. In the Command field, type CS VA JEFFERSON and press Enter. The list of cities in Virginia is
repositioned with Jefferson Manor, ZIP Code 22303 at the top of the list. This seems close
enough to our original address that it bears further investigation. At this point, Jefferson Manor is
a secondary city name. The primary city (i.e., the USPS-preferred city name) is obtained through
the ZIP Code.
CODE-1 Plus Coding System
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Firm Name: LOCUS INC
Firm: M D/Suf:M
Secondary Addr:
St: M Vcity:S
Primary Addr: 2560 HUNT
Correct ZIP Y
City, ST: JEFFERSON VA
Mixed Case: Y
ZIP Code:
Urb Name:
Mult Secondary: Y
Override City: Y
Matched Addr:
CRRT:
City,State ZIP:
DPBC:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Command: cz
Nav Off
__ of __
Cities in Virginia
LN City
State
ZIP Range
Type
URB Unique-ZIP
1 JEFFERSON MANOR
VA
22303
S
2 JEFFERSONTON
VA
22724
P
3 JENKINS BRG
VA
23399
P
4 JENKINS BRIDGE
VA
23399
P
5 JERSEY
VA
22481
P
6 JETERSVILLE
VA
23083
P
7 JEWELL RIDGE
VA
24622
P
8 JEWELL VALLEY
VA
24622
S
1=Help
2=ZC
3=Quit
4=SC
5=CZ
6=Back
7=Up
8=Down
9=Mat
10=Flip
2. In the Command field, type CZ and press Enter.The Cities in ZIP Code screen appears. Notice
that there are two cities for this ZIP Code. Alexandria has a city type of “Primary,” and Jefferson
Manor has a city type of “Secondary.” Alexandria is the USPS-preferred city name for the ZIP
Code 22303.
3. Now, see if there is a street called Hunt in this ZIP Code. To display all of the streets in the ZIP
Code range for the first city (Alexandria), in the Command field type SZ HUNT and press Enter.
4. The Streets in ZIP Code screen appears so that “HUNT” would have been the first street on the
screen if it existed. Notice that there is no Hunt Street, but there is a Huntington Avenue. This
bears further investigation.
5. In the Command field, type HS 3 2560 and press Enter.
6. The list is positioned so that the house range containing 2560 is at the top of the list. Notice that
2560 Huntington Avenue is a high rise house type.
7. In the Command field, type FM 3 and press Enter.
8. The Firms on a Street screen appears. The screen displays Locus Inc. located at 2560
Huntington Avenue, apartment number 302. The search is complete.
Release 4.1.0
243
User’s Guide - IBM i
An Example Work Session
Step 4. Matching an Address—Second Attempt
Now that there is an accurate address, enter it interactively and look at the match return codes. The
first thing to do is change the matching algorithm settings to “tight” from the default of medium.
1. In the Command field, type MS and press Enter.
2. The Match Settings screen appears. Type T for each of the matching algorithms and press
Enter. The Match Settings screen disappears, and the Firms in a Street screen appears again. A
message appears at the bottom of the screen telling you that the settings were changed.
3. Type the correct address matching fields and press Enter.
4. CODE-1 Plus matches the address and shows the matched address.
5. To review the return codes for the match, in the Command field, type RC and press Enter.
6. The Return Codes screen appears. Scroll through to see the other match results screens. In the
Command field, type DOWN or press F8.
The Delivery Sequence Footnotes screen displays, showing DSF codes that applied to this
match attempt.
7. Continue to type DOWN in the Command field, or press F8.
The Parsed Elements screen appears.
8. Type DOWN in the Command field, or press F8.
The Multiple Elements screen appears.
9. Type DOWN in the Command field, or press F8.
The Statistics screen appears.
10. Type DOWN in the Command field, or press F8.
The Miscellaneous Address Values screen appears.
11. To exit from the Interactive System, type QUIT in the Command field or press F3.
Step 5. Geographic Coding
In addition to address matching, you can return geographic coding information about the address. If
you enter a match attempt, and then access the Geographic Coding Interface screen, the
geographic match results appears for the ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Code from the match attempt. If you
do not enter a match attempt before accessing the Geographic Coding Interface, enter the ZIP Code
and ZIP + 4 Codes directly on the screen.

To access the Geographic Coding interface screen, you must have purchased and installed
Pitney Bowes's Geographic Coding Plus.
1. In the Command field, type GEO and press Enter. The first Geographic Coding Interface screen
appears.
2. To display the second Geographic Coding Interface screen, press F8. The second Geographic
Coding Interface screen appears.
3.
Release 4.1.0
Press F7 once to return to the top of the Geographic Coding Interface screen, and then press
F10 in the Command field.
244
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Correcting Uncoded Records
Correcting Uncoded Records
If you implement the G1CPBNC user-exit program, you can correct uncoded records from the
G1CPBNC output file. To correct uncoded records using the CODE-1 Plus Interactive system, use
two commands: UR (User Read) and UW (User Write). These commands are described below:
To correct uncoded records from the C1BMNCO output file, follow the steps below:
1. Start at the CODE-1 Plus Interactive System screen.
2. Type UR in the Command field.
An uncoded address appears in the input area.
3. You can use any address matching or database inquiry functions necessary to find a match for
this address.
4. Once the uncoded address is matched to the database and corrected, type UW in the
Command field. The corrected address is written to an output file.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all the records in the uncoded records output file are corrected.

Release 4.1.0
For information on the G1CPBNC program, refer to "Batch Uncoded Records Interface
(G1CPBNC)” on page 281.
245
User’s Guide - IBM i
Interactive Screen Reference
Interactive Screen Reference
This section provides a reference for the CODE-1 Plus interactive screens. Each screen is
presented, along with its fields and function keys.
Command Field
There is one field that appears on every screen in the Interactive CODE-1 Plus System: the
Command field. This field enables you to move gracefully through address match attempt results as
well as database inquiry data. The following table lists all of the commands that you can enter in the
Command field. In addition, the table lists alternate actions you can take to accomplish the same
results as the command. For each command listed, the underlined portion is all that is required for
entry (you can enter the entire command string, however).
Valid Entries in the Command Field (Part 1 of 5)
Command
Description
Alternate Method
General Commands
BOTTOM
Move to the bottom of the data. In the address
match function, this command brings you to the
Base Address/Dropped Information screen. In
the database inquiry function this command
repositions the list of data to the last entry.
None.
DOWN
Move down one display of data. In the address
match function this command moves you to the
next match results screen. In the database
inquiry function this command repositions the list
of data down one display.
NOTE: If the cursor is placed on a specific line,
“DOWN” will result in that line appearing as the
first displayed line on the screen.
Press F8
F8 with a number between
1 and 9998 on the
command line will scroll
down that number of lines.
EXTEND
Allows you to override database expiration, so
you can match interactively with an expired
database.
NOTE: You must use the “EXTEND” command
each time an expired database is identified by
the software initialization.
None.
FLIP
Flip the screen from the combined functions to
the zoomed database inquiry function or from
the zoomed database inquiry function to the
combined functions, whichever is appropriate.
Press F10.
HELP
Access the online help system.
Press F1.
Right
Scroll right to see more of the firm/alias name on
the Houses on a Street screen.
None.
LEft
Scroll left to see first part of firm/alias name on
the Houses on a Street screen.
None.
QUIT
Exit from the Interactive CODE-1 Plus System.
Press F3.
TOP
Move to the top of the data. In the address match
function this command brings you to the Return
Code screen. In the database inquiry function,
this command repositions the list of data to the
first entry.
None.
Release 4.1.0
246
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Interactive Screen Reference
Valid Entries in the Command Field (Part 2 of 5)
Command
UP
Description
Alternate Method
Move up one display of data. In the address
match function this command moves you to the
previous match results screen. In the database
inquiry function this command repositions the list
of data up one display.
NOTE: If the cursor is placed on a specific line,
“UP” will result in that line appearing as the last
displayed line on the screen.
Press F7
F7 with a number between
1 and 9998 on the
command line will scroll up
that number of lines.
Customizing Interface Commands
ADMIN
Go to the Administration Sign-on screen. Can
be called from the split match/inquiry or full (flip)
screens.
None.
NAVIGATE
Toggle navigation mode on and off. Positions
inquiry screen as close as possible to the lowest
level of match success on a non-matched
address.
None.
DPV
Toggle DPV mode on and off. When turned on
you will be able to do Delivery Point Validation
processing.
On the Interactive
Customization Screen, you
can enter blank or x under
Perform DPV Process.
DPVKEY
Displays the Seed Code of the DPV seed record
encountered which disabled DPV
processing.You will need to be provide this Seed
Code to Pitney Bowes before you can receive
another permanent License Management key to
continue your DPV processing.
None.
DPVZAP
Initializes the customization area that contains
the Seed Code. This does NOT inhibit DPV
processing.
None.
LOT
Toggle LOT mode on and off. When turned on
you will be able to do Line of Travel matching.
LTO
LTO
Toggle LOT mode on and off. When turned on
you will be able to do Line of Travel matching.
LOT
RDI
Toggle RDI mode on and off. When turned on
you will be able to do Residential Delivery File
matching
RDI
Database Inquiry Command
AH <line number>
Move to the Apartments at a House Range
screen for the house range displayed on line
<line number>.
This command is only valid from the Houses on
a Street screen.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F4.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F4.
ALIAS <line number>
Display the base street name for the alias street
listed on line <line number>.
For the Apartments at a House Range screen
and Firms on a Street screen only.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F2.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F2.
Release 4.1.0
247
User’s Guide - IBM i
Interactive Screen Reference
Valid Entries in the Command Field (Part 3 of 5)
Command
Description
Alternate Method
BACK
Return to the previous database inquiry level.
(For example, if you were at the Streets in a City
screen, this command would take you back to
the Cities in the Database screen.)
Press F6.
CI <city>
Go to the City Information screen.
None.
CS <state abr.>
Go to the Cities in a State screen for the two
character state abbreviation that is entered as
<state abr.>.
None.
CZ <line number>
or
CZ <ZIP Code>
Move to the Cities in a ZIP Code screen for the
ZIP Code that is displayed on line <line
number>.
or
Move to the Cities in a ZIP Code screen for the
ZIP Code entered as <ZIP Code>.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F5.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F5.
DB
Display the information for your database,
including software release and the expiration
date of your databases.
None.
FM <line number>
Move to the Firms on a Street screen for the
street name or house range displayed on line
<line number>.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F5.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F5.
This command is only valid from the Houses on
a Street, or Apartments at a House Range
screens.
HS <line number>
Move to the Houses on a Street screen for the
street name that is displayed on line
<line number>.
This command is only valid from the Streets in a
City or Streets in a ZIP Code screens.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F4.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F4.
LOCATE <string>
Generally positions the database inquiry to the
first entry that starts with <string>.
NOTE: If there are multiple cities with the same
name, they will be listed by finance number,
highest to lowest.
None.
MATCH
Go to the address match function. (The match
results screen that appears when you access
the database inquiry function re-appears.)
Press F9.
SC <line number>
Move to the Streets in a City screen for the city
name that is displayed on line <line number>.
This command is only valid from the Cities in the
Database screen.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F4.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F4.
SL <line number>
Display all streets in the city locality displayed on
line <line number> on the Streets in a City
screen.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F4.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F4.
Release 4.1.0
248
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Interactive Screen Reference
Valid Entries in the Command Field (Part 4 of 5)
Command
Description
Alternate Method
SZ <line number>
Move to the Streets in a ZIP Code screen for the
ZIP Code that is displayed on line <line
number>.
This command is only valid from the Cities in a
ZIP Code screen.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F4.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F4.
SZ <ZIP Code>
Move to the Streets in a ZIP Code screen for the
ZIP Code entered as <ZIP Code>
None.
ZC <line number>
Display all ZIP Codes for the city locality
displayed on line <line number> on the City
Information and Cities in a State screens.
Type the desired line
number in the Command
field and press F2.
or
Position your cursor on the
desired line and press F2.
Address Match Commands
INQUIRY
Go to the database inquiry function. If you had
previously used the database inquiry function
during this session, the screen that appeared
when you left the database inquiry function
reappears.
Press F9.
AS
Display address stack entries for the address
you entered.
None.
ASM
Turn on or off All Street Matching function.
DB
Display current CODE-1 Plus database vintage
and expiration date.
None.
ESM
Turn on or off Enhanced Street Matching
function.
None
SUITE
Invokes SuiteLink processing.
None
LACS
Invokes LACSLink processing.
None
LTO
Invoke Line of Travel processing.
None
RC
Go to the Return Codes screen.
None.
DS
Go to the Delivery Sequence Footnotes screen.
None.
PE
Go to the Parsed Elements screen.
None.
ME
Go to the Multiple Elements screen.
None.
ST
Go to the Statistics screen.
None.
DI
Go to the Miscellaneous Address Values screen.
None.
ER
Go to the Expanded Return Codes screen.
None.
GC
Go to the Geographic Coding Information
screen.
This command is only valid if you have
Geographic Coding Plus installed.
None.
Release 4.1.0
249
User’s Guide - IBM i
Function Keys
Valid Entries in the Command Field (Part 5 of 5)
Command
Description
Alternate Method
MS
Go to the Match Settings screen, and unprotect
the match control fields on the Address Match
screen.
Press F4.
REFRESH
Clear all fields on all address match function
screens.
Press F5.
Using Concatenated Commands
You can concatenate commands at the command line or the initial G1CP transaction in CICS. A
combination of the primary screen commands CI, CS, CZ, or SZ; a locate command; and “FLIP” can
be concatenated, or delimited by the semicolon (;) character. From a blank CICS screen, the
following string would produce a full screen display positioned at “Baltimore” on a “cities in state”
screen (with the state of Maryland):
G1CP, CS MD;L BALTIMORE;FLIP
This command is separated from the transid by a comma, and semicolons delimit the portions of the
command string. From the command line on any split screen, the same result would be achieved by
the following command:
CS MD;L BALTIMORE;FLIP
If this command were entered on a full inquiry screen display, the final result would be a split screen
(match and inquiry) display.
Function Keys
There are certain environmental considerations for the function keys that appear on the screens in
this chapter. These screens are shown as they appear under CICS, IMS, or Unix.
Function Keys (Part 1 of 2)
Function Key
Name
Description
F1
HELP
Obtain online help.
F2
ZC
List ZIP Codes in City screen.
ALIAS
Show the base street name for the house range shown.
F3
QUIT
Exit from the Interactive CODE-1 Plus System.
F4
SC
Go to the Streets in a City screen.
MS
Go to the Match Settings screen.
SZ
Go to the Streets in a ZIP Code screen.
AH
Go to the Apartments on a Street screen.
HS
Go to the Houses on a Street screen.
CZ
Go to the Cities in a ZIP Code screen.
F5
Release 4.1.0
250
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Function Keys
Function Keys (Part 2 of 2)
Function Key
Name
Description
RE
Refresh (erase) all of the input and output data from the
screen.
FM
Go to the Firms on a Street screen.
SAVE
Save current entries after validation. Remain on screen after
save.
GEO
Go to the Geographic Coding Interface (you must have
purchased and installed Geographic Coding Plus
separately).
BACK
Return to the previous screen.
F7
UP
If the top of the list of DSF2 codes is displayed, return to the
previous match results screen. If the top of the list of DSF2
codes is not currently displayed, page up the list of codes.
F8
DOWN
Go to the next screen.
F9
MAT
Go to the Return Codes screen.
INQ
Go to the database inquiry function.
RESET
Restore screen values to current database entries (at last
update to customization file).
FLIP
Expand the database inquiry function to fill the entire screen.
EXIT
Return to the previous screen without modifying the match
settings.
VERIFY
Validate the fields. If the validation is unsuccessful, the
screen is redisplayed, an error message is displayed, and
the first field in error is indicated.
F6
F10
Enter
If you are a Unix user with a terminal that does not have function keys, you must select a function
using three key strokes, as follows:
1. Press the ESCAPE key.
On some terminals, you must combine the CNTRL key with the left bracket [ key.
2. Press the numeric digit of the function.
For example, for function key 10, you must type 1-0.
3. Press the Enter or RETURN key.
On some terminals, you must combine the CONTROL key with the M key.
Release 4.1.0
251
User’s Guide - IBM i
Address Matching Screens
Address Matching Screens
The screens shown in this section support the address matching function. The screens are listed in
alphabetical order.
Entering the name of a key in the Command field is the same as pressing the function key (for
example, to access online help, you could either press F1 or, in the Command field, type Help and
press Enter.)
Address Match Screen
The Address Match screen occupies the top half of the physical screen in the Interactive CODE-1
Plus System, unless you have entered the FLIP command to cause the database inquiry function to
be displayed on the entire physical screen. Use this screen to enter an input address for CODE-1
Plus to match against the database. CODE-1 Plus returns the matched, standardized address.

If you attempt to use the DPV option without having a license to do so, the following message
will appear at the bottom of this screen:
or
DPV UNAVAILABLE - NO LICENSE FOUND
DPV UNAVAILABLE - LICENSE INVALID.
Address Match Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
Firm Name
Optional. Name of the firm for the record you want to match.
Secondary Addr
Optional. Secondary address line for the record you want to match.
Primary Addr
Required. Primary address for the record you want to match.
City, ST
Required. Optional if ZIP Code is entered. City and state for the record
you want to match. You can enter the state name or abbreviation.
ZIP Code
Required. Optional if City, St is entered. ZIP Code for the record you
want to match.
USPS County Name or Urb.
Name
If the address matches to a Puerto Rican address that has an
urbanization name associated with it, this field contains that urbanization
name. Otherwise, the field contains the USPS county name where the
matched address is located. If Geographic Coding Plus is installed, you
can optionally display the Geographic Coding county name.
Matched Addr.
Matched standardized address, including apartment number.
City, State ZIP
Matched standardized city/state/ZIP Code line.
CRRT (Carrier Route)
Matched standardized Carrier Route Code. If the CRRT field displays
“R777”, the ZIP+4 was suppressed because the record matched to an
R777 (phantom) carrier route. For more information, refer to"Z4OUT" in
your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
DPBC + Check
Matched delivery point barcode (DPBC) and check digit.
Release 4.1.0
252
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching Screens
Delivery Sequence Footnotes Screen
Use the Delivery Sequence Footnotes screen to view the Delivery Sequence Footnotes (DSF2
codes) that applied to your match attempt. To access this screen:
•
•
•
Enter DS in the Command field
Press F8 from the Return Codes screen
Press F7 from the Parsed Elements screen.
Delivery Sequence Footnotes Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
DSF2 Code
Description
AA
Record matched the ZIP+4 database (the CODE-1 Plus database).
A1
No match was found.
A2
Alias street name was matched to a base street name on the database.
A3
A match was made to an alternate record on the database.
BB
Record was matched to the DSF2 file.
B1
No acceptable match was made to the DSF2 file.
B2
An alias street name matched a base street name on the DSF2 file.
B3
A match was made to an alternate record on the DSF2 file.
CC
Record matched the DSF2 file, but is missing secondary information.
C1
Input record matched but is missing secondary information.
D
City name or state was changed.
E
Primary address was changed.
F
Secondary address was changed.
G
The delivery point is vacant.
H
ZIP Code was changed.
I
Input address could not be parsed.
J
City, state, and ZIP Code could not be validated.
K
Multiple matches in primary address.
K1
Multiple matches due to missing or incorrect directionals.
K2
Multiple matches due to missing or incorrect suffix.
L
Multiple matches in secondary address.
M1
Missing street number.
M2
Address not found.
M3
No such primary number.
Release 4.1.0
253
User’s Guide - IBM i
Address Matching Screens
Delivery Sequence Footnotes Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
DSF2 Code
Description
M4
Firm name not matched.
N1
Missing secondary address number.
N2
Secondary address number not found on file.
P1
Missing rural route/highway contract box number.
P2
Rural route/highway contract box number not found on file.
PB
Input address matched to a PBSA address.
Q1
Missing PO Box number.
Q2
PO Box number not found on file.
Miscellaneous Information/Base Address Screen
Use the Miscellaneous Information/Base Address screen to view the base address for the street that
was matched (if applicable) and additional information about the matched address. To access this
screen, enter the DI command or press F8 from the Statistics screen.
Miscellaneous Information/Base Address Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Base Address
Base street address for the alias street that the input record matched.
Preferred Alias
Preferred Alias Processing Indicator.
Abbreviated Alias
Abbreviated Alias Processing Indicator.
Line of Travel Results
5-character sequence code plus 2-character alternate sequence code.
Finance Number
USPS finance number.
Last Line Number
Alphanumeric, cross-reference value between the CODE-1 Plus City/
State file and the ZIP Code file.
Standardized Firm Name
Firm name that was returned during the matching process.
USPS County Name
County where the address resides.
USPS County Number
USPS-assigned number for the county name.
Congressional District
USPS-assigned, 2-digit number representing the address congressional
district.
Season
12-byte code indicating when mail can be delivered to a specific
address.
Release 4.1.0
254
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching Screens
Miscellaneous Information/Base Address Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
LACS
Location for the Locatable Address Correction Service indicator on the
output record. This indicator flags any rural addresses that changed to
urban addresses, such as RR 4 BOX 1 changing to 2200 MAIN ST. The
next time you process the file, you can identify and process only those
records on the ZIP+4 database with rural address changes. One of the
following codes is stored:
• Blank — Address was not LACS converted (no change).
• L — Address was LACS converted (changed to an urban address).
Matching Primary
Range Low
Low house range used for the matching process.
Range High
High house range used for the matching process.
Parity
Even or odd numbers in range.
Matching Secondary
(If present)
Range Low
Low unit range used for the matching process.
Range High
High unit range used for the matching process.
Parity
Even or odd numbers in range.
Expanded Return Codes
Use the Expanded Return Codes screen to view text descriptions of each return code that displays
on the Return Codes screen. To access this screen, enter the ER command in the Command Field.
There are no entry fields on the Expanded Return Codes screen.
Geographic Coding Information
Use the Geographic Coding Information screen to view the geographic coding data for your matched
address. To access this screen, enter the GC command in the Command Field.
Geographic Coding Information Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Match Level
Description
Level of match obtained against the Geographic Coding Master File:
• 9 — ZIP Code and ZIP+4 Code matched the Master File.
• 5 — Input ZIP Code matched. ZIP+4 Code did not match.
• X — Geographic Coding Master File data has expired.
State
FIPS state code of the matched address.
County
FIPS county number and name of the matched address.
MSA
Metropolitan Statistical Area that encompasses this address.
Census Tract
6-digit number representing the census tract division within the county.
Release 4.1.0
255
User’s Guide - IBM i
Address Matching Screens
Geographic Coding Information Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Census Block Group
Single-digit numeric code indicating the block group division of the
census tract.
Lat/Long Level
Level of latitude and longitude determined for the matched address:
• Z — Latitude and longitude represent the area center of the matched
address.
• T — Latitude and longitude represent the population center of the
census tract determined for the matched address.
• B — Latitude and longitude represent the population center of the
census block group determined for the matched address.
Latitude
Latitude of the standardized address.
Longitude
Longitude of the standardized address.
Match Settings Screen
Use the Match Settings screen to tailor your processing requirements and specify whether CODE-1
Plus should perform ZIP Code correction. For each of the matching algorithms, you can change the
default tightness/looseness settings. These settings indicate how close the data on the database
must be to the input address in order for a match to occur. The tighter the setting, the more closely
the input address must match the database information. To access this screen, enter MS in the
Command field or press F4 from any match results screen.
You can modify the fields on the top half of the physical screen, along with the address matching
fields. When the Match Settings screen displays, you can only enter data in the settings fields on the
upper right portion of the screen. To save your new settings and return to the previous screen, press
Enter. Once changed, the settings stay changed for subsequent matches until you change the
settings again or exit.

Although this screen allows you to change the default matching algorithm settings, we
suggest that you maintain the default settings: (M)edium for all matching, and Y(es) for ZIP
correction.
Match Settings Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Algorithms
Description
1-character code indicating the tightness/looseness of the firm name,
directional and suffix, and street name match:
• E — Only equal matches are accepted.
• T — Only tight matches are accepted.
• M — Medium Matches are accepted (default).
• L — Loose matches are accepted.
(V)anity City
1-character code indicating whether or not a vanity city name should be
returned if it is the best match (i.e., it most closely matches the input).
Type one of the following codes:
• X — Yes, return the vanity city name if it is the best match.
• S — No, return the standard city name (default).
Release 4.1.0
256
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching Screens
Match Settings Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Correct ZIP
1-character code indicating whether or not you want CODE-1 Plus to
attempt to correct incorrect ZIP Codes (optional). Type one of the
following codes:
• Y — Attempt ZIP Code correction, if necessary (default).
• N — No, don't attempt ZIP Code Correction.
Output Case
1-character code indicating whether or not the matched address should
be presented in mixed case or upper case:
• C — Mixed case
• L — Lower case
• U — Upper case
Mult Secondary
1-character code indicating whether to attempt multiple secondary
component processing:
• Y — Attempt secondary match.
• N — Assign default ZIP+4 Code.
Override City
1-character code indicating whether the preferred last line city name
should be stored:
• C — Store the city name from USPS City/State File (default city
name)
• P — Store the Primary City Name from the USPS City/State File.
• Z — Store the ZIP+4 File Preferred Last Line City Name (override city
name).
Multiple Elements Screen
Use the Multiple Elements screen to determine whether multiple match elements were found during
the match attempt. To access this screen:
•
•
•
Enter the ME command
Press F8 from the Parsed Elements screen
Press F7 from the Statistics screen
Multiple Elements Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Was the city standardized?
Description
Code indicating whether or not the input city name was standardized:
• Blank — No match was found, or the input city name was the same
as either the long or short city name on the database.
• C — The input city name was standardized to either the long or short
city name.
Was the state standardized?
Code indicating whether or not the input state was standardized:
• Blank — No match was found, or the input state was the same as the
state abbreviation on the database.
• S — The input state was standardized to the appropriate
abbreviation.
Was apartment detected in
input?
1-character code indicating whether or not CODE-1 Plus detected an
apartment (or unit) in the input record:
• Y — An apartment was detected in the input.
• N — No apartment was detected in the input.
Release 4.1.0
257
User’s Guide - IBM i
Address Matching Screens
Multiple Elements Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Was “default record”
matched?
Description
Code indicating whether or not the default record was matched:
• Blank — The record matched was not the default record, or no match
was obtained.
• H — Highrise default.
• R — Rural Route default.
• M — Military default.
Were multiple input elements
found?
Code indicating whether multiple input elements were found for the
leading directional segment of the standardized address:
• Blank — Only one value was found.
• M — Multiple values were found.
Alternate addressing scheme
Code indicating the type of alternate address scheme to use to obtain a
match:
• Blank — No alternate address scheme used.
• D — Delivery point alternate logic used.
• S — Small town default logic used.
• U — Unique ZIP Code logic used.
Leading dir
Code indicating whether or not multiple leading directional matches
were found:
• Blank — Only one leading directional was found.
• M — Multiple leading directionals were found.
Street name
Code indicating whether or not multiple street name matches were
found:
• Blank — Only one street name was found.
• M — Multiple street names were found.
Suffix
Code indicating whether or not multiple suffix matches were found:
• Blank — Only one suffix was found.
• M — Multiple suffixes were found.
Trailing dir
Code indicating whether or not multiple trailing directional matches were
found:
• Blank — Only one leading directional was found.
• M — Multiple trailing directionals were found.
Parsed Elements Screen
Use the Parsed Elements screen to view the individual elements that make up the standardized
address. If no address match was found, the fields on this screen are blank. To access this screen:
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Enter the PE command
Press F8 from the Delivery Sequence Footnotes screen
Press F7 from the Multiple Elements screen
258
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching Screens
Parsed Elements Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
Lead Dir
Returned leading directional
House
Returned house number
Street
Returned street name
Suffix
Returned suffix
Trail Dir
Returned trailing directional
RR/HC #
Returned rural route or highway contract route number
RR/HC Box
Returned rural route or highway contract box number
PO Box
Returned post office box number
Apt. Information
Returned apartment designator (i.e., STE, APT) and number
Short City
Returned short city name
ZIP Code
Returned 9-digit ZIP Code
Private Mail Box
Returned Private Mailbox information
Return Codes Screen
Use the Return Codes screen to view the return codes that correspond to your match attempt. To
access this screen, enter the RC command in the Command field or press the F7 function key from
the Delivery Sequence Footnotes screen.

If you hit a “seed record” during DPV processing, a message displays similar to:
DPV KEY IS: S06430475462316207
To continue DPV processing, contact Pitney Bowes Technical Support for a new permanent
key. For more information on DPV processing, “seed records,” and license keys, refer to
"Getting Started With Interactive Processing” on page 233.
Release 4.1.0
259
User’s Guide - IBM i
Address Matching Screens
Return Codes Screen Fields (Part 1 of 5)
Field Name
General RC
Description
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
match attempt:
• Blank — The address match attempt was successful.
• A — Unit number missing or not found on database.
• B — Insufficient (or blank) address in formation for a match.
• E — External match—auxiliary file processing.
• H — House/box number not found on street.
• M — Multiple matches were found.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• X — The CODE-1 Plus Master File has expired.
• Z — ZIP Code not found on database.
City RC
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
city match attempt:
• Blank — No address match was found, or the input city was correct.
• B — No input city and state were found.
• C — Mismatched city for valid input state/ZIP.
• I — The input city was used; no cities available for the ZIP Code.
• N — The input city name was not used.
• S — Spelling errors in the input were corrected.
Firm RC
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
firm name match attempt:
• Blank — The firm name match was successful, or no firm name was
indicated in the input record.
• F — The input firm name does not match the firm name on the
database.
• M — A firm name was in the input, but there were no firm names on
the database for the matched address.
Address Prob
Single digit that indicates the probable correctness of the address
match:
• Blank — No address match was found.
• 0 — The address match is most likely to be correct.
• 1-8 — These values represent intermediate values on a sliding scale.
• 9 — The address match is least likely to be correct.
Overall Prob
Single digit that indicates the probable correctness of the address and
firm name match:
• Blank — No match was found.
• 0 — The match is most likely to be correct.
• 1-8 — These values represent intermediate values on a sliding scale.
• 9 — The match is least likely to be correct.
Release 4.1.0
260
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching Screens
Return Codes Screen Fields (Part 2 of 5)
Field Name
USPS Rec. Type
Description
USPS-defined type code of the ZIP+4 record used for matching:
• Blank — No match was obtained.
• F — Firm record
• G — General delivery record
• H — High rise (apartment complex) record
• P — PO Box record
• R — Rural route or highway contract record
• S — Normal street address record.
City Type
1-character code describing the input city type:
• P — Primary city
• S — Secondary city
• V — Vanity city.
Dir. RC
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
directional match attempt:
• Blank — No address match was found, or the directional was correct.
• D — The directional does not match the database.
• F — The directional was correct, but was in the wrong location (i.e.,
trailing directional should have been a leading directional).
• N — No directional was found on the input address, but a directional
was present on the database.
Suffix RC
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
suffix match attempt:
• Blank — No address match was found, or the suffix was correct.
• S — The suffix does not match the database.
• N — No suffix was found on the input address, but a suffix was
present on the database.
Unit RC
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
unit (or apartment) match attempt:
• Blank — No address match was found, or the input unit was correct.
• A — The unit does not match the database.
• N — No unit was found on the input address, but a unit was present
on the database.
• F — Suite number appended due to a firm name match.
Firm Score
Single digit that indicates the probable correctness of the firm name
match:
• Blank — No match was obtained.
• 0 — The input firm name matched the output firm name exactly.
• 1-9 — These represent intermediate values on a sliding scale.
Street Score
Single digit that indicates the probable correctness of the street name
match:
• Blank — No match was obtained.
• 0 — The input street name matched the output street name exactly.
• 1-9 — These represent intermediate values on a sliding scale.
Release 4.1.0
261
User’s Guide - IBM i
Address Matching Screens
Return Codes Screen Fields (Part 3 of 5)
Field Name
Source of Addr.
Description
1-character code indicating whether the output street address was
matched from the primary address line or the secondary address line:
• M — A combination of information from the two lines.
• P — Primary line
• S — Secondary line
Alias RC
1-character return code indicating whether or not the input address
matched an alias street name, as follows:
• Blank — The address matched a base street, or no match was found.
• A — The address matched an alias street.
ZIP Status
1-character code specifying the status of the output ZIP Code:
• A — The output ZIP Code is different from the original ZIP Code.
• B — The output ZIP Code is blank.
• C — The original ZIP Code is the output ZIP Code.
• I — Invalid -- No match could be obtained; the output ZIP code
contains blanks because the input ZIP code was invalid.
• O — The original ZIP Code is in the output location because no match
was obtained.
• U — Blank—A unique address match could not be obtained and there
was no correlation between the input unique ZIP Code and the city/
state. The original ZIP Code was blanked.
Source of ZIP
1-character code indicating the source of the final ZIP Code:
• B — No ZIP Code was determined.
• C — The final ZIP Code was determined from the city-based locality.
• F — The final ZIP Code was determined from the ZIP-based locality.
• M — The final ZIP Code was determined from the ZIPMOVE file.
• Z — The original ZIP Code was retained.
POB ZIP Code
1-character code indicating whether the address is located in a P. O.
Box-only delivery zone. P. O. Box-only delivery zone addresses can only
receive postal delivery through the use of a P. O. Box. No other postal
delivery method is available for these addresses.
• Y — P. O. Box-only ZIP Code.
• N — Not a P. O. Box-only ZIP Code.
“best fit” ZIPs
Number of “best fit” ZIP Codes found during the match attempt.
PBSA Ind
1-character code indicating whether this address was found in the PBSA
Table. DPV processing uses the PBSA Table to identify P. O. Box™
Street Addresses (PBSA). PBSA addresses are street addresses that
really represent a USPS P. O. Box™.
• Blank — Not presented
• Y — Found in the DPV PBSA Table.
• N — Not found in the DPV PBSA Table.
Release 4.1.0
262
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching Screens
Return Codes Screen Fields (Part 4 of 5)
Field Name
Alt. Adr. Scheme
Description
1-character code indicating the type of alternate address scheme that
was used to obtain a match:
• Blank — No alternate address scheme used.
• D — Delivery point alternate logic used.
• E — Enhanced high rise alternate match logic
used.
• S — Small town default logic used.
• U — Unique ZIP Code logic used.
Alias Type
1-character code indicating the alias type:
• Blank — Street record matched was not an alias street.
• A — Abbreviation street name. This USPS abbreviation is for streets
that are over 30 characters long.
• C — Official street name change (Chamber of Commerce action.
• O — Street record matched was a USPS “other” alias.
• P — Street record matched was a USPS “preferred” alias.
Line of Travel RC
1-character code describing the Line of Travel match obtained:
• Blank — Invalid data passed to matcher
• 9 — 9-digit ZIP+4 match was successful
• C — Call to LOT matcher failed.
• F — Master file access failure.
• V — Incompatible Master file.
• D — 9-digit ZIP+4 match was unsuccessful (default coded).
DPV Flag
1-character return code indicating the result of your DPV processing:
• D — Valid primary number; input missing secondary number (primary
RR).
• M — Unable to resolve the Multiple Condition.
• N — No Delivery Point Validation.
• S — Valid primary number; but secondary number (primary for RR)
present and is not confirmed.
• Y — Delivery Point validated. Primary number valid and second
number (when present) valid.
• Blank — Address not presented to DPV table.
NoStat Flag
1-character code indicating the presence of statistics for this address. A
“Y” indicates that the address is not a valid delivery address even though
it has been validated by DPV.
• Blank — Not presented.
• Y — Found match to ‘No Stat’ DPV hash table.
• N — No match found to “No stat” DPV hash table.
Vacant Table Flag
1-character code indicating that this address was found in the Vacant
table.
• Blank — Not presented.
• Y — Indicates that the address has been vacant for at least last 90
days.
• N — Indicates that the address is not vacant.
Release 4.1.0
263
User’s Guide - IBM i
Address Matching Screens
Return Codes Screen Fields (Part 5 of 5)
Field Name
CMRA Flag
Description
1-character code indicating whether a CMRA look-up has occurred:
• Y — Yes, this is a CMRA.
• N — No, this is not a CMRA.
• Blank — Not presented.
NOTE: This code will only be presented if the DPV flag is Y, S, or D.
RDI Flag
1-character code describing the Residential Delivery File (RDI) match
obtained:
Blank — RDI match not attempted or not found.
B — Business confirmed.
M — Address is mixed business and residential.
R — Residence confirmed.
First Four Additional ZIPs
The first four additional ZIP Codes that matched the input record but
were not used as the output ZIP Code.
Dropped Information Type
1-character code indicating the type of information, if any, that was
dropped by the matcher during the match attempt:
• Blank — Either no match was obtained, or no information was
dropped.
• A — A street address was dropped in order to obtain an RR/HC or PO
Box match.
• R — An RR/HC or PO Box address was dropped in order to obtain a
street address match.
• W — One or more characters were dropped during the address
parsing process.
Data

Any miscellaneous characters that were dropped during the address
matching process.
The Dropped Information Type code refers to the type of information that was dropped by the
matcher during the match attempt. The Data field contains characters dropped during the
address analysis process, before the matcher even attempts a match. Therefore, it is
possible to have a Dropped Information Type that is not blank, but a blank Data field.
Statistics Screen
Use the Statistics screen to view execution statistics about the number of calls made to the matcher
while processing an address. This screen is particularly useful if you are encountering a problem
with Interactive CODE-1 Plus. These statistics can help Pitney Bowes Technical Support
Representatives solve your problem. To access this screen:
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Enter the ST command
Press F8 from the Multiple Elements screen
Press F7 from the Dropped Information/Base Address screen
264
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching Screens
Statistics Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
City-based locality match
results
Description
1-character code indicating the results of the match attempt in the citybased locality:
• Blank — Not attempted.
• I — Attempted, improved (a match was found).
• N — Attempted, no match found.
Finance number-based
locality match results
1-character code indicating the results of the match attempt in the
finance number-based locality:
• Blank — Not attempted.
• I — Attempted, improved (a match was found).
• N — Attempted, no match found.
Original ZIP-based match
results
1-character code indicating the results of the match attempt in the
original ZIP Code-based locality:
• Blank — Not attempted.
• I — Attempted, improved (a match was found).
• N — Attempted, no match found.
Number of match attempts
The number of attempts that were made to obtain the match results.
Std. Address RC
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
standardized address match attempt:
• Blank — The address match attempt was successful.
• A — Unit number missing or not found on database.
• B — Insufficient (or blank) address information for a match.
• H — House/Box number not found on street.
• M — Multiple matches were found.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• Z — ZIP Code not found on database.
ZIP RC
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
14-digit ZIP Coding attempt (i.e., was an output ZIP Code returned? If
not, why not):
• Blank — The match attempt was successful.
• A — Unit number missing or not found on database.
• B — Insufficient (or blank) address information for a match.
• H — House/Box number not found on street.
• M — Multiple matches were found.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• Z — ZIP Code not found on database.
Release 4.1.0
265
User’s Guide - IBM i
Address Matching Screens
Statistics Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
ZIP+4 RC
Description
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
ZIP+4 Coding attempt (i.e., was an output ZIP+4 Code returned? If not,
why not):
• Blank — The match attempt was successful.
• A — Unit number missing or not found on database.
• B — Insufficient (or blank) address information for a match.
• H — House/Box number not found on street.
• M — Multiple matches were found.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• V — The input matched a non-deliverable street address.
NOTE: A non-deliverable ZIP+4 Range is typically a new ZIP range
where the USPS has not finalized assignments of ZIP+4 codes, thus
not permitting assignment of postal code information at this time.
• Z — ZIP Code not found on database.
CR-RT RC
1-character return code indicating the success or reason for failure of the
Carrier Route coding attempt:
• Blank — The match attempt was successful.
• A — Unit number missing or not found on database.
• B — Insufficient (or blank) address information for a match.
• H — House/Box number not found on street.
• M — Multiple matches were found.
• S — Street name not found in ZIP Code.
• Z — ZIP Code not found on database.
ZIP Index
Number of database reads done on the ZIP Index file in order to obtain
the match.
City Details
Number of database reads performed on the City Details file in order to
obtain the match.
Locality
Number of database reads performed on the Locality file in order to
obtain the match.
Street Details
Number of database reads performed on the Street Details file in order
to obtain the match.
County
Number of database reads performed on the County file in order to
obtain the match.
Address Stack Screen
Use the Address Stack screen to view information related to as many as 10 addresses that have
been identified by the matcher as multiples for the address entered on the match portion of the
screen. The displayed data and headers are variable in length. Up to three screens of information
can be accessed by the Left and Right commands (showing additional information) and up to two
screens with the Up and Down commands (showing additional addresses).
Release 4.1.0
266
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Address Matching Screens
Address Stack Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
Address
Street name along with directionals, prefix/suffix, and house number
City
City name
St
State name
ZIP
ZIP Code and ZIP+4
DPC
Delivery point code and check digit
C-Rt
Carrier Route Code (Cnnn, blank if none)
RTP
Three-digit combination of codes:
• USPS record type of record matched:
– F — Firm
– G — General delivery
– H — High rise (apartment complex)
– P — PO Box
– R — Rural route/Highway contract
– S — Normal Street Address
• “Default” match:
– H — High Rise Default
– R — Rural Route Default
– M — Military Default
– blank — Not a default record.
• Overall probability of match correctness:
–
0-9 — 0 is most probably correct
Cnty/CD
County number
Primary
Primary range information (and parity)
Secondary
Secondary range information (and parity)
LL#
Last line number
Fin-Nr
Finance number
Urbanization
Puerto Rican urbanization
Firm
Firm name

Release 4.1.0
By typing SELECT and the appropriate line number in the Command field, you can choose
which record of the displayed multiple addresses you would like in the input address field.
267
User’s Guide - IBM i
Database Inquiry Screens
Database Inquiry Screens
This section describes screens that support the database inquiry function.
Apartments at a House Range
The Apartments at a House Range screen shows you all of the apartments at a particular house
number. For each number (house), CODE-1 Plus displays the address, ZIP Code range, apartment
number ranges, ZIP Codes, ZIP+4 Code ranges, carrier route codes, USPS record types (indicating
the type of apartment), and number of firms.
To access this screen, enter the AH <line number> command or press F4 from the Houses on a
Street screen.
Apartments at a House Range Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
LN
Line number assigned to this apartment range.
Apt Range
Apartment number range.
ZIP
ZIP Code for the apartments in this range.
Z+4 Range
Range of ZIP+4 Codes that are valid for this apartment range.
Rte
Carrier or rural route number for the apartments in this range.
Record Type
USPS record type for the ZIP+4 records in this apartment range.
Apt Type
Unit designator for the apartments in this range (i.e., APT, STE).
Firms
Number of firms in this apartment range.
Cities in a State Screen
Use the City Information screen to view an alphabetical listing of all of the city names in a particular
state. For each city, this screen also displays the valid state abbreviation and the ZIP Code (or range
of ZIP Codes). To access this screen, enter the CS <state abbr.> command. You can enter this
command from any screen in the system.

As a short cut to entering a Locate command after the CS command, you can enter CS
<state abbr.> <location string> as a single command
Cities in a State Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
LN
Line number of the city.
City
City name.
State
Abbreviations for the state in which the city is located.
Release 4.1.0
268
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Database Inquiry Screens
Cities in a State Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
ZIP Range
Range of ZIP Codes that are valid for the city.
Type
Code indicating the type of city. One of the following codes appear:
• P — Primary city.
• S — Secondary city.
• V — Vanity city.
Urb
Code indicating whether the city is a Puerto Rican urbanization area.
One of the following codes appear:
• Blank — The city is not a Puerto Rican urbanization area.
• Y — The city is a Puerto Rican urbanization area.
Unique ZIP
Code indicating whether the ZIP Code for the city is unique to that city
or resides in multiple cities. One of the following codes appear:
• Blank — The ZIP Code is not unique to the city.
• Y — The ZIP Code is unique to the city.
Cities in a ZIP Code Screen
Use the Cities in a ZIP Code screen to view all cities in a given ZIP Code. For each city, CODE-1
Plus displays the long city names, short city names, and city type. To access this screen:
•
•
•
Enter the CZ <line number> or the CZ <ZIP Code> command
Press F5 from the Cities in the Database screen
Press F5 from the Cities in a State screen
The USPS allows city names to be up to 28 characters long. However, if a city name is longer than
13 characters, a USPS short city name is provided. Typically, long city names are shortened by
removing vowels.
In cases where a ZIP Code has more than one city name, the screen shows these city names, and
their accompanying city type. These city types indicate the USPS-preferred city name, and any
alternate city names associated with the same ZIP Code. Preferred city names have a city type of
“primary;” alternate city names have city types of “secondary” or “vanity.”
For example, ZIP Code 70510 is associated with the three city names Abbeville, Cow Island, and
Meaux. Abbeville is preferred and has a city type of primary. All other city names have a city type of
secondary.
Cities in a ZIP Code Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
LN
Line number for this city name.
Long City Name
Full name for the city.
State
Two-character state abbreviation for the city.
Short City Name
USPS shortened city name.
City Type
USPS designated city type. One of the following city types appears:
Primary, Secondary, Vanity.
Release 4.1.0
269
User’s Guide - IBM i
Database Inquiry Screens
City Information Screen
Use the City Information screen to view an alphabetical listing of all city names in the CODE-1 Plus
database. For each city, this screen also displays the state abbreviation and the ZIP Code (or range
of ZIP Codes), the type urbanization name, and the unique ZIP Code that applies to the city.
The City Information screen displays when you first access the CODE-1 Plus Interactive System. If
you switch to any of the address match results screens, you can return to this screen by typing CI in
the Command field.

As a short cut to entering a Locate command after the CI command, you can enter CI
<location string> as a single command. <location string> on this screen may be either a city
name or a city state combination.
City Information Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
LN
Line number of the city.
City
City name.
State
Abbreviations for the state in which the city is located.
ZIP Range
Range of ZIP Codes that are valid for the city.
Type
Code indicating the type of city. One of the following codes appear:
• P — Primary city.
• S — Secondary city.
• V — Vanity city.
URB
Code indicating whether the city is a Puerto Rican urbanization area.
One of the following codes appear:
• Blank — The city is not a Puerto Rican urbanization area.
• Y — The city is a Puerto Rican urbanization area.
Unique ZIP
Code indicating whether the ZIP Code for the city is unique to that city
or resides in multiple cities. One of the following codes appear:
• Blank — The ZIP Code is not unique to the city.
• Y — The ZIP Code is unique to the city.
Firms in a House Range Screen
Use the Firms in a House Range screen to view all firms located on a particular house range on a
street. The firm information includes the house number ranges, apartment number ranges within a
dwelling, the name of the firm located at each apartment/suite, ZIP Codes, ZIP + 4 Codes, and
carrier route codes. To access this screen, enter the command FM <line number> (or by pressing
F5) from the Streets in a City or Streets in a ZIP Code, Houses on a Street, or Apartments at a House
Range screens.
Release 4.1.0
270
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Database Inquiry Screens
Firms on a House Range Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
LN
Line number for this firm.
House Range
House number ranges that are valid for this firm.
Apt Range
Apartment number ranges that are valid for this firm.
Firm Name
Firm name.
ZIP Code
9-digit ZIP Code assigned to this firm.
C-Rt
Carrier route number for this firm.
Houses on a Street Screen
Use the Houses on a Street screen to view a listing of all of the house number ranges on a particular
street. In addition to even/odd house number ranges, CODE-1 Plus displays ZIP and ZIP+4 Code
ranges, carrier routes, and firm/alias name. To access this screen, enter the command HS <line
number> (or press F4) from the Streets in a City or Streets in a ZIP Code screens.


As a short cut to entering a Locate command after the HS command, you can enter HS <line
number> <location string> as a single command.To view more lines of data, in the Command
field, type FLIP and press Enter, or press F10.
House ranges that are on an alias portion of the street appear with an “A” in the left-most
column next to the house range. To see the base name for the house range, position your
cursor on the alias house range and press F2, or enter the ALIAS <line number> command.
The base street name appears on the bottom line of the screen.
The ZIPMove Record Indicator appears in the example above as a “Z” and uses the same
field location as the alias street range indicator. The ZIPMove Record Indicator supersedes
the alias indicator.
Houses on a Street Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
LN
The line number of the house range.
House Range
The house number range.
E/O
An E or an O indicating whether this is a range of only even- numbered
or only odd-numbered houses.
ZIP
The ZIP Code for the houses in this range.
Z+4 Range
The range of ZIP+4 Codes that are valid for this house range.
Release 4.1.0
271
User’s Guide - IBM i
Database Inquiry Screens
Houses on a Street Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
Rte
The carrier or rural route number for the houses in this range.
Typ
The USPS record type for the ZIP+4 records in this house range.
Firm/Alias Name
Firm name or range street alias name.
Streets in a City or Streets in a ZIP Code Screen
Use the Streets in a City or Streets in a ZIP Code screen to view an alphabetical listing of all street
names in a given city or ZIP Code. For each street listed, CODE-1 Plus displays directionals, such
as NE and SW, and suffixes, such as ST and BLVD.
To access this screen:
•
Enter the SC or SL command (or press F4) from the Cities in the Database screen, or Cities in a
State screen.
Press F4 from the Cities in a ZIP Code screen.
Enter the SZ command from any database inquiry screen.
•
•

As a short cut to entering a Locate command after the SC, SZ, or SL command, you can
enter SC <line number> <location string> as a single command.
Streets in a City or Streets in a ZIP Code Screen Fields
Field Name
Description
LN
Line number of the street.
Dir
Leading directional for the street.
Street Name
Name of the street.
Sfx
Suffix for the street.
Dir
Trailing directional for the street.
ZIP Codes
Valid ZIP Code(s) for this street. This field only displays if you accessed
this screen from the Cities in the Database screen (not the Cities in a ZIP
Code screen).
Geographic Coding Plus Interface
If you have purchased Geographic Coding Plus from Pitney Bowes, you can access that product
directly from CODE-1 Plus by typing the command GEO in the Command field on any CODE-1 Plus
screen. The Geographic Coding Interface screen displays. If you do a match attempt before you
enter the GEO command, your matched ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Code appear in ZIP Code fields on
the Geographic Coding Interface screen. This is the first screen of geographic coding data for your
matched address. Please refer to your Geographic Coding Plus User's Guide for further reference
on the fields and function keys on this screen.
Release 4.1.0
272
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Database Inquiry Screens

In a Unix environment, you must source the Geographic Coding Plus setup file before you
access the Geographic Coding Interface. This procedure sets up the environment variables
for the Geographic Coding Plus database.
First Geographic Coding Interface Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
ZIP Code
5-digit ZIP Code for the entered address.
ZIP+4 Code
4-digit ZIP+4 Code for the entered address.
DPBC
Delivery Point Barcode for the entered address.
House#
House Number for the entered address.
Match Level
Code indicating the level of match obtained against the Geographic
Coding Master File. One of the following codes appears:
• 5 — The input ZIP Code matched, but the ZIP+4 Code did not.
• 9 — Both the ZIP Code and ZIP +4 Code matched the Master File.
• X — The Geographic Coding Master File data has expired.
State Code
2-character FIPS state code of the matched address.
FIPS County Code
2-character FIPS county number and 20-character county name of the
matched address.
Census Tract
6-digit number representing the census tract division within the county.
Block Group
1-digit numeric code indicating the block group division of the census
tract.
MSA Code
The 4-character Metropolitan Statistical Area that encompasses this
address.
MSA Name
The 50-character Metropolitan Statistical Area name.
Lat/Long Level
Code indicating the level of latitude and longitude determined for the
matched address. One of the following codes displays.
• B — Latitude and longitude represent the population center of the
census block group determined for the matched address.
• T — Latitude and longitude represent the population center of the
census tract determined for the matched address.
• Z — Latitude and longitude represent the area center of the matched
address.
Latitude
9-digit number (with six decimal places implied) followed by a 1character directional (N or S) that occupy the first eight bytes of this area.
Longitude
9-digit number (with six decimal places implied) followed by a 1character directional (E or W) that occupy the last eight bytes of this
area.
Software Vintage
Indicates the version of Geographic Coding you are using.
Release 4.1.0
273
User’s Guide - IBM i
Database Inquiry Screens
First Geographic Coding Interface Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
File
Indicates the expiration date of the Geographic Coding File that you are
using.
Distance in Miles
Number of miles between the two specified addresses, if necessary.
The following table describes the fields on the second and last screen of geographic coding data for
your matched address.
Second Geographic Coding Interface Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Description
ZIP Code
5-digit ZIP Code for the entered address.
ZIP+4 Code
4-digit ZIP+4 Code for the entered address.
DPBC
Delivery Point Barcode for the entered address.
House#
House Number for the entered address.
MCD/CCD Code
MCDs (Minor Civil Divisions) are the primary political or administrative
divisions of a county, representing many kinds of legal entities with a
variety of governmental and administrative functions. CCDs (Census
County Divisions) are established in states where there are no legally
established MCDs.
Confidence
1-character code that indicates the confidence code source. One of the
following codes appears:
• Z — ZIP level.
• 0 — ZIP default.
• 1 — ZIP sector method.
• 2 — 5-digit household default method.
• 3 — 5-digit boundary method.
PRIZM Cluster
2-character PRIZM cluster code and a 20-character PRIZM cluster
name. PRIZM codes are lifestyle segment codes and definitions
enabling for more precise information about the lifestyle and
demographic features of a population.
Cluster Group
2-character PRIZM cluster social group code and a 20-character group
name.
Place Code
5-character FIPS place code.
Incorporated
1-character code indicating whether the entered address is in an
incorporated area.
• Y — Incorporated.
• N — Not incorporated.
Class Code
2-character class code.
Place Name
30-character place name.
Release 4.1.0
274
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Screens that Support Site Customization
Second Geographic Coding Interface Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
GeoTAX Key
NOTE: This field is only available to GeoTAX customers who are also
licensed users of the Vertex Quantum or ComTax21 products.
Up to 9 digits can be displayed in this field. The first 2 digits of this
number represent the Vertex state code, the next 3 digits are the FIPS
county code, and the next 4 digits, a Vertex city code.
This information will only be displayed for those GeoTAX customers who
have a subscription to the MATCHMST file from Vertex. Additional
information on this subject can be found in the GeoTAX User’s Guide.
GeoTAX Key Return Code
1-character code indicating the match results for the GeoTAX Key:
• Blank — No matching GTMASTR GeoTAX record found.
• E — Exact match using state/county/place/ZIP Code/place name.
• P — Partial match using state/county/place.
• A — Alternate match using ZIP Code and place name.
• N — Record is default coded based on valid state code.
Date Annexed
Place last annexed date.
Updated
Place last updated date.
Verified
Place last verified date.
Screens that Support Site Customization
The screens shown in this section all support the interactive site customization function.
Administration Sign-on Screen
Use the Administration Sign-on screen to type in, and optionally update, the password required to
access the site default update screens. You can access this screen by typing “ADMIN” on the
Command: line from any match or database inquiry screen. If a new password is typed in, the
screen returns with an area to “Confirm New Password.” If you do not have your initial password,
contact Pitney Bowes Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.
Release 4.1.0
275
User’s Guide - IBM i
Screens that Support Site Customization
The password change process can be stopped by pressing the space bar through both new
password fields, or by selecting Quit or Cancel.
CODE-1 Plus Coding System
------------------------------------------------------------------------Command:
CODE-1 Plus Administration Sign-on Screen
Password:
New Password:
G1M01I Enter Current Password and optional New Password
1=Help
3=Quit
10=Exit
Fields on the Administration Sign-On Screen
Field Name
Description
Password
Area to type in current password
New Password
Area to type in a new password. The new password must be 1-8
alphanumeric characters with no leading or embedded spaces.
Confirm New Password
Area to re-type the new password for confirmation. This field will only be
displayed if a new password has been entered.
Interactive Customization Screens
Use the Interactive Customization screens to view, and optionally update, the site-specific values
you choose for your system. You can access these screens by successfully entering the existing
system password on the Administration Sign-on screen (accessed by the “ADMIN” command).
Values on these screens are not updated unless F5 is pressed (or “Save” on the command line is
selected), and the changed values are not validated until either the Enter key or “Save” are pressed.
Release 4.1.0
276
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Screens that Support Site Customization
First Interactive Customization Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Initial Screen
Description
Indicates Split or Full Screen display on entry to system
• S — Split screen display
• F — Full screen display
Expiration Warning
Display or suppress database warning
• D — Display database warning
• S — Suppress database warning
Firm
Firm Match Setting Value. Refer to the “Match Settings Screen” section
earlier in this chapter for an explanation of these values.
• T — Tight
• M — Medium
• L — Loose
• E — Equal
Dir/Suffix
Directional/Suffix Match Setting Value. Refer to the “Match Settings
Screen” section earlier in this chapter for an explanation of these values.
• T — Tight
• M — Medium
• L — Loose
• E — Equal
Street
Street Match Setting Value. Refer to the “Match Settings Screen” section
earlier in this chapter for an explanation of these values.
• T — Tight
• M — Medium
• L — Loose
• E — Equal
Vanity City
Match Setting for Vanity Cities. Refer to the “Match Settings Screen”
section earlier in this chapter for an explanation of these values.
• X — Allow vanity city names in standardized output.
• S — Only allow primary/secondary city names in standardized output.
Correct Input ZIP
Match Setting for ZIP correction. Refer to the “Match Settings Screen”
section earlier in this chapter for an explanation of these values.
• Y — Correct input ZIP Codes.
• N — Do not correct input ZIP Codes.
Output Case
Returned address settings. Refer to the “Match Settings Screen” section
earlier in this chapter for an explanation of these values.
• C — Display matched address in mixed case.
• L — Display matched address in lower case only.
• U — Display matched address in upper case only.
Multiple Secondary
Match Setting for Multiple Secondary Components. Refer to “Match
Settings Screen” section earlier in this chapter for an explanation of
these values.
• Y — Attempt secondary match.
• N — Assign default ZIP+4 Code.
Release 4.1.0
277
User’s Guide - IBM i
Screens that Support Site Customization
First Interactive Customization Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Description
Preferred City Name
Match Setting for Preferred City Name. Refer to Override City Name in
the table from the “Match Settings Screen” section earlier in this chapter
for an explanation of these values.
• C — Store the city name from USPS City/State File (default city
name).
• Z — Store the ZIP+4 File Preferred Last Line City Name (override city
name).
Perform DPV Process
Here you can select whether or not you wish to perform DPV processing:
• X — Perform DPV processing.
• Blank — Do not perform DPV processing.
NOTE: This can also be selected by entering DPV on the command line
of the Address Match screen.
Perform LTO Process
Here you can select whether or not you wish to perform Line of Travel
Option (LOT) processing:
• X — Perform LTO processing.
• Blank — Do not perform LTO processing.
NOTE: This can also be selected by entering LTO or LOT on the
command line of the Address Match screen.
Perform RDI Process
Here you can select whether or not you wish to perform Residential
Delivery File (RDI) processing:
• X — Perform RDI processing.
Blank — Do not perform RDI processing.
NOTE: This can also be selected by entering RDI on the command line
of the Address Match screen.
Initial Command
Command to be invoked upon entry of the system. Can be a
combination of screen (CI, CS, CZ, or SZ) and locate commands
separated by a semicolon. If ‘FLIP’ is entered, ‘Initial Screen’ is set to ‘F’.
The following table describes the fields on the second Interactive Customization screen.
Second Interactive Customization Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Geographic Coding Available
Description
Indicates whether Geographic Coding Plus is installed on the system or
whether the legacy Geographic Coding System is installed.
• N — Geographic Coding Plus is not installed on the system.
• Y — Geographic Coding Plus is installed on the system.
• L — Legacy Geographic Coding System is installed.
GEO Lat/Long Data source
Indicates which GEO file to use.
• B — Use base master file.
• A — Use advanced file.
• F — Get finest granularity available on either base or advanced file.
Use GEO County
Indicates whether to return the Geographic Coding county on the
CODE-1 Plus Match screen on a successful match.
• Y — Use Geographic Coding county.
• N — Use USPS county.
Release 4.1.0
278
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Screens that Support Site Customization
Second Interactive Customization Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
ZIP Match Centroid
Description
Indicates centroid to return on a ZIP Code match.
• C — Census tract centroid
• Z — ZIP Centroid
Return Alias Base on Match
Indicates whether to change an alias street name displayed on a match
to the base street name.
• Y — Display base street name.
• N — Retain alias street name.
Seed Violation Bypass
You can determine if the system should bypass any seed record
violations during processing. To activate this option, enter
“STOPBYPASS” on the command line of the admin function screen.
Once you have entered “STOPBYPASS” on the command line, the
following text will appear on that line: SEED STOP BYPASS IS ON.
Enter “STOPBYPASS” to disable the option.
NOTE: You will be required to have knowledge of the ADMIN
password to access this process. If you enter “STOPBYPASS” on the
command line on other screens you will receive an error message.
Custom Page Title
The interactive system page title (for all screens) can be customized
using this option.
Use Navigation
The default setting for Intelligent Navigation can be set here.
• Y — Navigation on.
• N — Navigation off.
Enhanced/All Street Matching
Enhanced/All Street Matching Indicator
Preferred Alias Processing
Abbreviated Alias Processing Indicator
Abbreviated Alias Processing
Abbreviated Alias Processing Indicator
Return Transid
Indicates Transid to be invoked upon exit from system (CICS only)
TS Queue Utilization
Indicates whether Auxiliary or Main Storage is to be used for TS Queues
(CICS only).
• A — Auxiliary storage is to be used.
• M — Main storage is to be used.
Definition of PFKEYS
The third and last customization screen allows you to define your program function keys (PFKEYS)
to maintain any in-house standards for PFKEY usage within the CODE-1 Plus system.
Working within this third screen, you can change the assigned PFKEY of a certain function or the
text associated with a particular PFKEY. For example, you can tab down to PFKEY 01 and change
the text from “Help” to “Info.”

Release 4.1.0
You CANNOT assign one PFKEY to have several functions. If you do, a message displays
that “Key designation conflicts with a Multi-Screen Key.” Any errors in defining PFKEYS
displays in red when you hit the Enter key after making your changes.
279
User’s Guide - IBM i
Database Information Screen
Database Information Screen
The Database Information screen shows information related to the software and database installed
for CODE-1 Plus. Specific fields included in the screen are the software release and modification
numbers, the CASS expiration date of the software, the database vintage date and expiration date
(after which inquiry but not matching is permitted) and the days remaining until expiration.

The DPV database vintage date displays only if you have performed a match with DPV
turned on.
Customization File Administration
The site customization file (G1CPFDF) is an updateable indexed file for the interactive system. If you
plan on modifying default initialization and processing values for your site, you need to install the
customization file. Otherwise, the interactive system will function with the default match settings and
processing on entry to and exit from the CODE-1 Plus software.

The customization file is required for accessing the Geographic Coding Interface screen. If
the customization file is not available, the Geographic Coding Interface is not available.
File Backup and Security
Because the site customization file can be modified any time the interactive system is available, it is
critical to perform regular backups of the file at your site. This ensures ease of recovery of the
current site settings in case the file is accidentally lost.
You should limit update access to the interactive system, because the settings in this file apply to all
users. Online access to this file is controlled through a password screen; however, security
precautions may be appropriate.
File Repair, Re-Initialization, and Password Display
If a backup copy of the customization file is not available and recovery is required, the following
options exist using program G1CPDFL.
1. The first option is to physically delete the file and re-run the initialization job, DEFCUSTM.
2. A second option involves the same customization utility, but using job CUSTMUTL. In this case
the utility can be used to repair the G1CPFDF file or display the encrypted password. This job
performs the following tasks:
a. If an error is detected on the open to the customization file, the program attempts to create
the file.
b. If the attempt is not successful, the program issues an error message and terminates.
c. If the file is opened successfully, a read is attempted for the control record.
d. If the read for the control record fails, the customization utility adds the control record to the
file.
e. If the read for the control record is successful, the customization utility searches for the
admin (password) record.
Release 4.1.0
280
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Batch Uncoded Records Interface (G1CPBNC)
f. If the admin (password) record is found, the customization utility displays the encrypted
password stored on the record.
g. If the admin record is not found, the initial install password is written to the file.
If required, a decrypting of the password can be obtained by calling Pitney Bowes Technical
Support. The Technical Support Representative can use the 16-character hexadecimal
representation of the password to provide you with the current text value of the password.
Batch Uncoded Records Interface (G1CPBNC)
The Interactive CODE-1 Plus System includes a user exit that you can use to correct records that
were not coded by the batch product. The interface, G1CPBNC, reads an encoded records file
produced by batch CODE-1 Plus (C1BMNCO).The user exit is designed so that you can pull one
record at a time into the screen input area, correct the record, and then write the corrected record
out to a corrected file.

To take advantage of the batch non-coded records interface to Interactive CODE-1 Plus, you
or someone at your site must have modified the sample program, called G1CPBNC, to read
records from the C1BMNCO file, pass them to Interactive CODE-1 Plus, wait for the user to
correct the record, receive the records back from Interactive CODE-1 Plus, and then write the
corrected records to an output file. This is discussed later in this section.
Once you modify a G1CPBNC user exit program, refer to "How it Works” on page 281 to use the UR
and UW commands from the CODE-1 Plus Interactive screen.
Type the UR (User Read) command in the Command field. An address is pulled from the input file
and placed in the address input area.
How it Works
When you enter the UR command, the user exit program G1CPBNC is invoked and the functionality
supplied by the UR command is contained within this program. The same situation applies to the
UW command. You must customize the G1CPBNC to suit the need of your specific environment. A
sample user exit program that you can customize is supplied as part of the product.
In addition to the input and output addresses, the complete Command field containing the UR or
UW command is passed to the user exit so that additional command parameters can be required as
part of the UR or UW commands (for example, record number of the address being corrected). You
can specify several screen presentation options to control how the screen appears upon command
completion. These screen presentation options control:
•
•
•
•
•
Message that appears
Clearing of the Command field to blanks
Sounding of an audible alarm
Clearing of the address area to blanks
Cursor position upon the completion of the UR and UW commands
A sample program, G1CPBNC, is supplied with the CODE-1 Plus software. The program is written
to read the supplied IVPFILE and write the coded records to a user-defined output file. Your input file
may have different attributes (for example, record length or address element location) and will need
to be modified accordingly.
Release 4.1.0
281
User’s Guide - IBM i
Batch Uncoded Records Interface (G1CPBNC)
In the following section, the required functionality for both the UR and UW commands is described,
the calling interface for G1CPBNC is explained, and excerpts from the sample G1CPBNC program
are shown. The UR and UW commands are enabled simply by making G1CPBNC available in the
run-time environment.

The remaining sections in this chapter are intended for programmers writing the G1CPBNC
user-exit program.
UR COMMAND
When you enter a UR (User Read) command, the G1CPBNC user exit program is invoked with
UXIT-FUNCTION set to UXIT-READ-FILE. The available functionality includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select and read a record from a user file containing addresses which are to be supplied when
the UR command is entered. The selected address is passed to the calling program through the
UXIT-P9IN field. The user exit must enable for multiple terminal operators working at the same
time.
The entire Command field containing the UR command is available to the G1CPBNC program
so that additional user-defined parameters can be defined as part of the UR command. The
Command field is passed from the calling program through the UXIT-COMMAND-LINE field.
Specify the message that appears on the terminal screen at the completion of the UR command
in the UXIT-PROMPT-MESSAGE field.
Specify whether or not the Command field on the terminal screen is to be blanked-out upon
completion of execution for the UR command. This is specified via the UXIT-COMMAND field.
Specify whether or not an audible alarm is to sound at the completion of execution for the UR
command. This is specified via the UXIT-ALARM field.
Specify whether the cursor on the terminal screen is to be positioned on the address input lines
or the Command field at the completion of execution for the UR command. Since CODE-1 Plus
automatically performs an attempted match subsequent to a UR command, UXIT-CURSORCMD-ON-MTCH can be used to position the cursor on the command line (for an anticipated UW
command) on a match or in the address area on a non-match or multiple. This is specified via
the UXIT-CURSOR field.
In order to coordinate the execution of UR and UW commands, an area of statically allocated
memory is made available that is specific to one individual terminal user. This area is UXITSAVE-AREA.
UW COMMAND
When you enter a UW (User Write) command, the G1CPBNC user exit program is invoked with
UXIT-FUNCTION set to UXIT-WRITE-FILE.
The results from attempting to match the address currently on the terminal screen are passed to the
user exit in the UXIT-P9OUT and UXIT-P9AUDT fields. The user exit should determine whether to
accept the address and write it to a user file containing corrected addresses or reject the address
and display an error message on the terminal screen. The user exit must enable for multiple terminal
operators working at the same time.
•
•
Release 4.1.0
The entire Command field containing the UW command is available to the G1CPBNC program
so that additional user-defined parameters can be defined as part of the UW command. The
Command field is passed from the calling program through the UXIT-COMMAND-LINE field.
Specify the message which appears on the terminal screen at the completion of the UW
command in the UXIT-PROMPT-MESSAGE field.
282
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 11: Getting Started With Interactive Processing
Batch Uncoded Records Interface (G1CPBNC)
•
•
•
•
•
Specify whether or not the Command field on the terminal screen is to be blanked out upon
completion of execution for the UW command. This is specified via the UXIT-COMMAND field.
Specify whether or not an audible alarm is to sound at the completion of execution for the UW
command. This is specified via the UXIT-ALARM field.
Specify whether or not to clear the address input fields on the terminal screen at the completion
of execution for the UW command. This is specified via the UXIT-ADDRESS field.
Specify whether the cursor on the terminal screen is to be positioned on the address input lines
or the Command field at the completion of execution for the UW command. This is specified via
the UXIT-CURSOR field.
In order to coordinate the execution of UR and UW commands, an area of statically allocated
memory is made available that is specific to one individual terminal user and common to both the
UR and UW commands. This area is UXIT-SAVE-AREA.
Program Parameters
Eleven logical parameters are passed in a single 01 level. These eleven parameters are as follows:
The G1CPBNC Option Call Areas (Part 1 of 2)
Position
1-2
Name
EXITFUNCTION
Length
in Bytes
2
Contents
Function code for this call. Your program must pass one
of the following function codes:
• CL — Close the file.
• OP — Open the file.
• UR — Perform a read.
• UW — Perform a write.
3-42
UXITCOMMANDLINE
40
Command line from the Interactive CODE-1 Plus
Command field.
43-121
UXIT-PROMPTMESSAGE
79
Message prompt that appears on the online screen after
the return from this program.
122
UXITCOMMAND
1
Indicates whether or not to clear the command after
completion of the UR or UW command.
• Y — Clear the Command field after completion of the
UR or UW command.
• N — Do not clear the Command field.
123
UXIT-ALARM
1
Indicates whether or not to sound an audible alarm at the
completion of the UR or UW command.
• Y — Sound an audible alarm at the completion of the
UR or UW command.
• N — Do not sound an alarm.
124
UXIT-ADDRESS
1
Indicates whether or not to clear the address upon
completion of the UW command. Not used during the
processing for a UR command.
• Y — Clear the address area upon completion of the UR
or UW command.
• N — Do not clear the address area.
Release 4.1.0
283
User’s Guide - IBM i
Batch Uncoded Records Interface (G1CPBNC)
The G1CPBNC Option Call Areas (Part 2 of 2)
Position
Name
125
UXIT-CURSOR
Length
in Bytes
1
Contents
Indicates whether or not to place the cursor in the address
fields at the completion of the UR or UW command.
• Y — Place the cursor in the address area.
• N — Place the cursor at the Command field.
• M — Place the cursor at the Command field on a
match, or in the address area on a non-match or
multiple.
126-221
UXITRESERVED
96
Reserved.
222-721
UXIT-P9IN
500
During the processing for a UR command, this program
should place the address which it is preparing to enter
onto the online screen into this area. This field is not used
during the processing of a UW command.
722-5721
UXIT-P9OUT
5,000
During the processing for a UW command, this area
contains the P9OUT area for the current address at the
time the UW command was invoked. Not used during the
processing of a UW command.
5722-6121
UXIT-P9AUDT
400
During the processing for a UW command, this area
contains the P9AUDT area for the current address at the
time the UW command was invoked. Not used during the
processing of a UR command.
6122-6621
UXIT-SAVEAREA
500
Memory that is statically allocated and preserved
between invocations of the user exit.
Description of Supplied Sample G1CPBNC
When the UR command is invoked, this sample program sequentially reads an address record from
the G1CPIVP file. As each address is displayed in response to each UR command, the Command
field on the terminal screen is cleared to blanks, a message is displayed on the terminal screen
indicating a successful read, no audible alarm is given, and the cursor is positioned to the address
input area on the terminal screen. If at the end of the file (“end of file”), the Command field is not
cleared to blanks, an error message is displayed on the terminal screen, an audible alarm is
sounded, and the cursor is positioned to the Command field on the terminal screen.
When the UW command is invoked, the program first checks to ensure that a UR command
preceded the UW command. If it did, then it next checks to see if an address match was successful
for the current address. The corrected address could then be written to an user file. If the UW
command was successful, then the Command field on the terminal screen is cleared to blanks, a
message is displayed on the terminal screen indicating a successful write, and no audible alarm is
given. If the UW command was not successful, then the Command field is not cleared to blanks, an
error message is displayed on the terminal screen, and an audible alarm is sounded. In either case,
the cursor is positioned to the Command field on the terminal screen.

Release 4.1.0
The delivered version of G1CPBNC is set up to perform file I/O against the IVP output
unmatched records file C1BMNCO. In CICS, the program reads and writes to extra partition
datasets. The transient data queues are “G1IV” (read) and “G1OV” (write). On all other
platforms, the input sequential dataset is “G1CPIVP,” and the output is to “G1CPOVP”. All
datasets have LRECL=256, and BLKSIZE is determined by the job control language.
284
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using Z4CHANGE
In this chapter:




What is the Z4CHANGE Option?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Using Z4CHANGE Option Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Calling Z4CHANGE From Your Own Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Generating Reports for Z4CHANGE Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
12
What is the Z4CHANGE Option?
What is the Z4CHANGE Option?
The Z4CHANGE Option is a product provided by the USPS that can save you a considerable
amount of processing time. The Z4CHANGE Option is extremely useful if you have large name-andaddress files that you use frequently. The Z4CHANGE Option enables you to run that file through
CODE-1 Plus and attempt to match:
•
•
Only those records with ZIP + 4 Codes changed by the USPS since the file was last processed
Records that were not successfully coded on previous CODE-1 Plus runs.
In other words, if you have a list that you already processed using CODE-1 Plus, you can run the list
each month using the Z4CHANGE Option processing, and attempt to match those records with new
ZIP + 4 Codes.

Before you use the Z4CHANGE Option, you must run your entire file through CODE-1 Plus
one time without using Z4CHANGE Option. Then, each time you want to mail records from
your file, run the file again using Z4CHANGE Option processing. Your list stays current, but
you do not expend processing time confirming records that were already correct.
Z4CHANGE Option Database
Included with your CODE-1 Plus software is a Z4CHANGE Option database. The database is
published by the USPS every month and contains all of the ZIP+4 Codes that the USPS changed in
the previous 12-month period.
Rules for Using the Z4CHANGE Option
The USPS instituted the following rules regarding Z4CHANGE Option processing:
•
•
•
You must initially run your entire mailing list through CASS-certified software.
Subsequently, it is sufficient to use Z4CHANGE Option processing on that list to maintain its
compliance with CASS rules.
You must run the entire file again at the end of the third year following initial Z4CHANGE Option
certification. (This means that you do not need to run the file through CASS-certified software
every year, as long as you are using Z4CHANGE Option processing.)

If the USPS determines that significant changes were made to the CASS requirements, you
must reprocess your entire list using recently-certified software.
Activating the Z4CHANGE Option
To activate and use Z4CHANGE (C1P430), you can either pass, as parameters, the names of predefined call areas, or use the CS ZIP parameter and the Z4 OUT parameter to provide all the
information necessary to perform the function accurately and return the appropriate information. For
complete parameter record reference material, Appendix E, “Using the Database Functions.”
The call areas and the procedures for filling in the screens are described later in this chapter.
Release 4.1.0
286
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 12: Using Z4CHANGE
Using Z4CHANGE Option Processing
Using Z4CHANGE Option Processing
This section describes the changes to make to your CODE-1 Plus jobs to use Z4CHANGE Option
processing (C1P430).
Parameters
To use Z4CHANGE Option processing, add fields to the CS ZIP and Z4 OUT parameters from a
standard job. Follow the instructions below to perform Z4CHANGE Option processing in your batch
job.
Process Your Entire List Through CODE-1 Plus
If you want to have CODE-1 Plus write the database vintage date in the output records, do the
following:
1. In position 26-28 of the Z4 OUT parameter, specify the location for the database vintage date.
2. In position 30 of the Z4 OUT parameter, specify one of the following codes to indicate the format
of the vintage date:
•
•
•
•
•
•
C — 4-byte character format (YYMM) (default)
P — 3-byte packed decimal format (YYMM)
B — 2-byte binary format (YYMM)
3 — 3-byte binary format (YYYYMM)
6 — 6-byte character format (YYYYMM)
4 — 4-byte packed decimal format (YYYYMM)
Each Month, Process Your File Again
If the vintage date is stored in your input records:
1. In positions 44-46 of the CS ZIP parameter, write the location of the master file vintage date in
the input records.
2. In position 48 of the CS ZIP parameter, write one of the following format codes to tell CODE-1
Plus the format of the vintage date in the input records:
•
•
•
•
•
•
C — 4-byte character format (YYMM) (this is the default)
P — 3-byte packed decimal format (YYMM)
B — 2-byte binary format (YYMM)
3 — 3-byte binary format (YYYYMM)
6 — 6-byte character format (YYYYMM)
4 — 4-byte packed decimal format (YYYYMM)
3. In positions 32-34 of the Z4 OUT parameter, write the location for the output Z4CHANGE Option
Return Code. One of the following codes will be stored in the position you specify:
•
•
•
0 — Address matching was not required for this record (the USPS has not changed this ZIP
+ 4 Code since the database vintage date).
4 — Address matching was required for this record (the USPS has changed this ZIP + 4
Code since the database vintage date).
8 — A fatal error occurred during processing.
If the vintage date is not stored in your input records:
1. In positions 50-55 of the CS ZIP parameter, specify the vintage date of the master file that was
used to process this list the last time the list was processed. Write the date in YYYYMM format.
Release 4.1.0
287
User’s Guide - IBM i
Calling Z4CHANGE From Your Own Driver
2. In positions 32-34 of the Z4 OUT parameter, write the location for the output Z4CHANGE Option
return code. One of the following codes is stored in the position you specify:
•
•
•
0 — Address matching was not required for this record (the USPS has not changed this
ZIP+4 Code since the database vintage date).
4 — Address matching was required for this record (the USPS has changed this ZIP+4 Code
since the database vintage date).
8 — A fatal error occurred during processing.
Calling Z4CHANGE From Your Own Driver
If you are using your own batch driver for CODE-1 Plus and you want to use the Z4CHANGE
processing, use the following call area to invoke C1P430. A COBOL copy book of this area is
included on your software distribution media as Z4CPARM.

The C1PRPT callable report program does not print a USPS Form 3553 that reflects
Z4CHANGE Option processing. If you want an automated Form 3553 facsimile, you must
use the C1BM00 batch driver to run CODE-1 Plus.
The following table describes the Z4CHANGE Option call area layout:
Z4CHANGE Call Areas (Part 1 of 2)
Position
1
Name
PARM-FUNCTION
Length
Contents
1
Function code for this call. Your program must pass
one of the following function codes:
• O — Open the Z4CHANGE Option database and
(optionally) check dates.
• P — Process ZIP check request.
• C — Close the Z4CHANGE Option database.
2-6
PARM-5-DIGIT ZIP
5
5-digit ZIP Code.
7-10
PARM-4-DIGIT ZIP
4
4-digit ZIP+4 Code.
11-16
PARM-DATECODED-VINTAGE
YYYYMM format
6
If PARM-FUNCTION is set to O, your program must
pass the date of the CODE-1 Plus database being used
for this CODE-1 Plus run. This date will be compared to
the date of the Z4CHANGE Option database to ensure
that they are the same. CODE-1 Plus will then pass the
vintage date on the Z4CHANGE Option database back
to your calling program through this field.
If PARM-FUNCTION is set to P, your program must
pass the date (in YYYYMM format) of the master file
that was last used to match the record whose ZIP Code
is now being checked.
If PARM-FUNCTION is set to C, this field is ignored.
NOTE: This field uses a four-digit year in YYYY format.
If leading zeroes are passed in lieu of century, century
will be calculated using the 80/20 rule. That is, YY less
than 80 will assume century=20, otherwise will assume
century=19.
17-29
N/A
13
Reserved.
30-39
PARM-DBLIB
10
Name of the library that holds the Z4CHANGE Option
master file. Used for AS/400 only.
Release 4.1.0
288
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 12: Using Z4CHANGE
Generating Reports for Z4CHANGE Processing
Z4CHANGE Call Areas (Part 2 of 2)
Position
40
Name
PARM-RETURNCODE
Length
Contents
1
This 1-character field is filled by C1P430 after the ZIP
Code is checked. One of the following codes will be
placed in this field:
• 0 — If PARM-FUNCTION is O, this means the file
has been successfully opened and the dates match.
If PARM-FUNCTION is P, this means the 9-digit ZIP
Code has not been changed by the USPS since the
last time the record was checked.
If PARM-FUNCTION is C, this means the file has
been closed.
• 4 — If PARM-FUNCTION is O, this means the
database was already opened.
If PARM-FUNCTION is P, this means either the 9digit ZIP Code has changed since the last time the
record was checked, or the ZIP Code was not
numeric.
If PARM-FUNCTION is C, this means the file wasn't
open, and therefore could not be closed.
• 8 — If PARM-FUNCTION is O, this means the
database could not be opened successfully, or the
dates don't match.
If PARM-FUNCTION is P, this means that the
database was not open.
If PARM-FUNCTION is C, this code is never
returned.
41-65
Reserved
25
Reserved.
Generating Reports for Z4CHANGE Processing
When you run a Z4CHANGE job, you can also generate reports about the Z4CHANGE job run.
These reports contain important processing information and include a Parameter Record Listing,
CASS Form, Control Totals, Analysis of Matched Records, and Address Execution Statistics
Reports. For more information on each of these reports, refer to "Generating Reports” on
page 211.
Release 4.1.0
289
User’s Guide - IBM i
Generating Reports for Z4CHANGE Processing
Release 4.1.0
290
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using Delivery Point
Validation
In this chapter:







What is Delivery Point Validation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Using the Delivery Point Validation Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Activating Delivery Point Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Understanding DPV Return Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
DPV Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
DPV Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation? . . . . . . . . . . . .298
13
What is Delivery Point Validation?
What is Delivery Point Validation?
The USPS introduced Delivery Point Validation (DPV) to validate the accuracy of address data to the
physical delivery point.

The USPS regulations require Delivery Point Validation (DPV) processing for CASS
certification.
CODE-1 Plus does not validate addresses at the specific delivery-point level. CODE-1 Plus only
confirms whether an address falls within the low-to-high address range encoded for the named
street. CODE-1 Plus uses the DPV option to determine whether the actual address exists to the
apartment or suite information level. The DPV option reduces your undeliverable-as-addressed
(UAA) mail volume that results from inaccurate addresses to reduce postage costs and costs
associated with the handling of inaccurate address information.
Delivery Point Validation processing also confirms whether an address is a commercial mail
receiving agency (CMRA) that uses private mail boxes (PMB). You can use DPV to determine the
potential validity of PMB information on an input address.
Although DPV can validate the accuracy of an existing address, it cannot be used to create address
lists. The DPV product is a secure dataset of USPS addresses and does NOT contain addresses
that are not delivered by the USPS.
Resolving Multiple Matches
Delivery Point Validation processing can also resolve multiple matches from the ZIP + 4 database to
increase the number of ZIP + 4 coded records in your address list.
The DPV option processes every ZIP + 4 coded record against the DPV files to resolve multiple
matches to the ZIP + 4 database. Resolving ZIP + 4 multiple matches increases your ZIP + 4 match
rate, but also increases processing time. For this reason, you may wish to turn off some of these
options.
Use the DPVIN parameter to define the options for multiple match conditions. When verifying proper
candidates for DPV processing, the multiple match condition is first checked at the ZIP Code level,
carrier route, directional, and then suffix. Multiple match conditions can occur in multiple categories.
The DPVIN parameter includes options for unique ZIP Code and small town default assignments
and multiple secondary components. The following figure provides examples of multiple matches
that can be Delivery Point Validated.
For more information on setting up multiple match options, refer to the DPVIN in Chapter 1,
Parameters in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Release 4.1.0
292
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 13: Using Delivery Point Validation
Using the Delivery Point Validation Database
Figure 1: Multiple Match Examples
Using the Delivery Point Validation Database
Delivery Point Validation requires a separate database. Pitney Bowes provides an updated DPV
database every month. The DPV database must be kept in synch with the USPS ZIP + 4 data. To
use DPV processing, you must license the DPV option from Pitney Bowes and install a License
Management key as required by the USPS. Please refer to your License Management Guide for
more information on obtaining your permanent license key for DPV.
The following table describes the DPV database 120-day expiration cycle.
DPV Database Expiry Cycle (Part 1 of 2)
Database Month
Release 4.1.0
Expiration
January
April 30
February
May 31
March
June 30
April
July 31
293
User’s Guide - IBM i
Activating Delivery Point Validation
DPV Database Expiry Cycle (Part 2 of 2)
Database Month
Expiration
May
August 31
June
September 30
July
October 31
August
November 30
September
December 31
October
January 31
November
February 28
December
March 31
Installing the DPV Database
To install the DPV database in an IBM i environment, complete the following steps:
1. From the Work With Jobs screen, press F20 to access Database Functions.
2. From the Database Functions screen, select option 2: Install Database.
3. On the Install CODE-1 Plus Databases screen (shown below), enter Y in “Install DPV
Database?”.
4. Specify an install source of C for CD/DVD or I for IDS (downloaded). DPV should be installed into
the same library as your US Postal Database.
Activating Delivery Point Validation
Activating DPV in Batch Mode
To activate DPV in batch mode, you must define:
•
•
•
DPVIN parameter
DPVOUT parameter
Five MAILER parameters

To process DPV on mainframe, the JCL must have DD statements for the DPV DB you
intend to use. CODE-1 Plus customers should be aware that batch jobs running with DPV
Split, LACSLink, and SuiteLink may require up to 377M of GETVIS.
DPVIN Parameter
The DPVIN parameter activates DPV processing and provides processing options based on
matches to the ZIP + 4 database. For more information on the DPVIN parameter, refer to Chapter 1,
Parameters in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Release 4.1.0
294
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 13: Using Delivery Point Validation
Understanding DPV Return Information
DPVOUT Parameter
Use the DPVOUT parameter to define your DPV processing output requirements. For more
information on the DPVOUT parameter, refer to Chapter 1, Parameters in your CODE-1 Plus
Reference Guide.
Activating DPV in Callable Mode
To use DPV when calling C1MATCHx from your own driver, pass an X to the P9IDPV field in the
P9IN call area.
Understanding DPV Return Information
Use the DPVOUT parameter to define the options and location in the output record for the following
Delivery Point Validation processing return information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Return Codes
Footnote Codes
CMRA Flags
False/Positive Flag
Footnote Codes
No Stat Flag
Vacant Table Flag
PBSA Flag
For more information on the DPVOUT parameter, refer to Chapter 1, Parameters in your CODE-1
Plus Reference Guide.
DPV Reports
This section describes the reports generated by DPV processing.
DPV by List Code Report
The DPV by List Code Report shows you the results of your DPV processing by list code. This report
prints automatically when your job is run, unless you have an N in column 40 of the REPORT
parameter. If you need to call Technical Support, please have this report available. This report
includes the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
All of the list codes used in DPV processing
Total number of records presented for DPV processing
Total number of DPV validated records
Total number of streets DPV validated
Total number of high rises DPV validated
Total number of PO Boxes DPV validated
Total number of Rural Routes/Highway Contractors DPV validated
Total number of Firms DPV validated
Total number of General Delivery DPV validated
Total number of primary number errors
Total number of secondary number errors
295
User’s Guide - IBM i
DPV Error Messages
DPV Processing Summary Report
The DPV Processing Summary Report prints automatically when your job is run, unless you have an
N in column 38 of the REPORT parameter. If you need to call Technical Support, please have this
report available. This report includes the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Delivery Point Validation attempts with percentages
Multiple attempts confirmed
Unique/Small Town Default ZIP + 4 confirmed
Number of ZIP+4 coded records
Street records validated
High Rise records validated
PO Box records validated
Rural Route/Highway Contract records validated
Firm records validated
Primary Number errors
Secondary Number errors
False Positives
Total Residential/Business (RDI) attempts

A zero in the false-positive (seed violation) section indicates that you did not hit any seed
records during your DPV processing. A one indicates that you hit a seed record, which halted
your DPV processing.
DPV Error Messages
This section describes the error messages you may receive during DPV processing.

Although DPV processing may cease during an execution of CODE-1 Plus, processing will
continue to end-of-file. Any DPV errors you encounter will NOT affect your CODE-1 Plus
processing.
Expiration of DPV Processing
The DPV option stops working the fourth month from the release of the database.
If you have an expired DPV database, this message displays:
****************************************************************************
*DELIVERY POINT VALIDATION SUPPRESSED DUE TO DATABASE EXPIRATION DATE CHECK*
****************************************************************************
Another example is:
****************************************************************************
*Database error on DHFDPV -> EXPIRED
*
****************************************************************************
Release 4.1.0
296
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 13: Using Delivery Point Validation
DPV Error Messages
Open/Read Failure
If you have an open/read failure on the DPV database, this message displays:
****************************************************************************
*OPEN/READ FAILURE ON DPV DATABASE
*
****************************************************************************
Seed Records and Stop DPV Processing
Seed records are artificially manufactured addresses provided as part of the DPV option. There are
approximately 5 million seed records residing in a false-positive (seed violation) table to prevent list
creation. For each negative response that occurs during DPV processing, a query must be made to
the false-positive (seed violation) table. A match to this table stops DPV processing with the
following error message:
****************************************************************************************
*DPV PROCESSING WAS TERMINATED DUE TO THE DETECTION OF WHAT IS DETERMINED
*
*TO BE AN ARTIFICIALLY CREATED ADDRESS. NO ADDRESS BEYOND THIS POINT HAS
*
*BEEN DPV VALIDATED. IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BETWEEN USPS
*
*AND PITNEY BOWES, DPV SHALL BE USED TO VALIDATE LEGITIMATELY OBTAINED
*
*ADDRESSES ONLY, AND SHALL NOT BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF ARTIFICIALLY
*
*CREATING ADDRESS LISTS. THE WRITTEN AGREEMENT BETWEEN PITNEY BOWES AND
*
*ANY CUSTOMER OF PITNEY BOWES SHALL ALSO INCLUDE THIS SAME RESTRICTION
*
*AGAINST USING DPV TO ARTIFICIALLY CREATE ADDRESS LISTS. CONTINUING USE OF
*
*DPV REQUIRES COMPLIANCE WITH ALL TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU
*
*BELIEVE THIS ADDRESS WAS IDENTIFIED IN ERROR, PLEASE CONTACT PITNEY BOWES.
*
*DPV LICENSE UPDATE URL:HTTP://WWW.G1.COM/SUPPORT/LICENSE/DPV.ASP THE FOLLOWING
*
*CODE IS NEEDED WHEN ACCESSING THE ABOVE-NOTED PITNEY BOWES WEBSITE TO OBTAIN YOUR NEW *
*DPV LICENSE KEY.S9999999999999999
*
****************************************************************************************

To continue DPV processing, you must provide the Seed Code listed in the error message to
Pitney Bowes Technical Support to receive a new license key that allows you to continue
DPV processing.
Software Incompatibility
If your software is not compatible with ZIP + 4 database (or masterfile), this error message displays:
************************************************************************
*DPV MASTER FILE IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE DPV SOFTWARE. DPV DISABLED.*
************************************************************************
DPV File Load or Location Definition
If your DPV database has not been loaded or the location definition for the DPV database has been
improperly defined, this type of error message displays:
*************************************************************************************
*SPLIT DPV ERROR# 00005, ON FUNCTION: INIT, ERROR DESC: Problem opening dph.hsc file
--------|
|
|
Error number
DPV Data Base Type
*************************************************************************************
Release 4.1.0
297
User’s Guide - IBM i
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
Seed records are artificially manufactured addresses provided as part of the DPV option. There are
a number of seed records residing in a false-positive (seed violation) table to prevent list creation.
For each negative response that occurs in a DPV query, a query must be made to the false-positive
(seed violation) table. A match to this table will stop DPV processing, but CODE-1 Plus processing
will continue to the end of your job.
Testing Your File Using Seed Records
If you wish to test your file using seed records, go to the Rapid Information Bulletin Board System
(RIBBS) Web site at http://ribbs.usps.gov/:
1. Click Address Quality Products.
2. Click DPV.
3. Under Important Links, click DPV Page.
4. Click How to Obtain Public Seed Records and DPV Known False Positive Files for more
information.
Required Action When Encountering a Seed Record
When you encounter a seed record during processing (i.e., a false-positive match (seed violation)),
you are required to report the seed record match to Pitney Bowes Technical Support to receive a
new license key that allows you to continue DPV processing.
Reporting a Seed Record Match
If you get a match to the false-positive (seed violation) table, you have matched a seed record, and
you are required to report it to Pitney Bowes per your DPV license agreement. Pitney Bowes is then
required to report it to the USPS. Seed record matches are identified by individual codes, which you
provide to Pitney Bowes when you report a seed match. The seed code can be found in your
execution log, as well as in the DPV Processing Summary report. Your execution log might say, for
example:
THE FOLLOWING CODE IS NEEDED WHEN ACCESSING THE ABOVE-NOTED
PITNEY BOWES WEBSITE TO OBTAIN YOUR NEW DPV LICENSE KEY.
S0000000000000000
The alphanumeric in bold above is the code you need to report to Pitney Bowes.
As of the September 2004 CASS Cycle, all customers using DPV must keep information and
statistics on the use of the DPV data and report on this data upon encountering a false-positive
(seed violation) seed record. The following information must be maintained:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Mailer’s Company Name
Mailer’s Address
Mailer’s’ City Name
Mailer’s State Name
Mailer’s ZIP Code
Total Records Processed
Total Records DPV Matched
298
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 13: Using Delivery Point Validation
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
Batch
CODE-1 Plus Batch DPV customers must use the MAILER parameter records in each batch
(C1BM00) job to indicate the mailer’s Company Name, Address, City Name, State Name, and ZIP
Code. Total Records Processed, Total Records DPV Matched, and other statistical information will
be maintained and reported to the DPVSEED file.
The DPVSEED — DSF False-Positive File contains all of the necessary information for reporting a
false-positive (seed violation) record. The layout of the header and detail records of that file are
shown in Tables 6-1 and 6-2. The header record contains the mailer’s information from the MAILER
Parameter Record and statistics gathered by CODE-1 Plus. The detail record contains DPV falsepositive (seed violation) record information.
DPVSEED Header Record
Position
Length
Description
Format
1-40
40
Mailer’s company name
alphanumeric
41-98
58
Mailer’s address line
alphanumeric
99-126
28
Mailer’s city name
alphanumeric
127-128
2
Mailer’s state abbreviation
alphabetical
129-137
9
Mailer’s 9-digit ZIP code
numeric
138-146
9
Total records processed
numeric
147-155
9
Total records DPV matched
numeric
156-164
9
% match rate to DSF
numeric
165-173
9
% match rate to ZIP+4
numeric
174-178
5
Number of ZIP codes on file
numeric
179-180
2
Number of false positives
numeric
DPVSEED Detail Record
Position
Release 4.1.0
Length
Description
Format
1-2
2
Street pre-directional
alphanumeric
3-30
28
Street name
alphanumeric
31-34
4
Street suffix abbreviation
alphanumeric
35-36
2
Street post-directional
alphanumeric
37-46
10
Address primary number
alphanumeric
47-50
4
Address secondary abbreviation
alphanumeric
51-58
8
Address secondary number
numeric
59-63
5
Matched ZIP code
numeric
299
User’s Guide - IBM i
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
DPVSEED Detail Record
Position
Length
Description
64-67
4
Matched ZIP+4
68-180
113
Filler
Format
numeric
Interactive
CODE-1 Plus Interactive DPV customers who use the CODE-1 Plus Interactive screens must run
the G1CPDPS job to create the required DPVSEED file after a DPV Seed Record is encountered.
CODE-1 Plus will automatically log the information needed to create the DPVSEED file if a DPV
Seed Record is encountered while invoking DPV from the CODE-1 Plus Interactive screens. This
information will be stored in the Customization File. Users must then run the batch job G1CPDPS in
order to extract the seed information from the Customization File and create the DPVSEED file. The
Interactive Screens will prompt the user when a DPV Seed Record has been encountered. Because
the Interactive Screens do not have the ability to record the mailer name and address data, the user
will need to manually insert this information into the DPVSEED file header record after the file has
been created. Please refer to the CODE-1 Plus batch section for detailed information on the
DPVSEED header record.
Callable
CODE-1 Plus Callable DPV customers who call CODE-1 Plus from their own application must
capture the information above in their application interfacing with the API and write this information
to a file.
DPV customers who call CODE-1 Plus from their own application must record certain information to
report to the USPS when a seed record is encountered; this information must be tracked within the
customer’s calling application. This information includes the house number, street name, and ZIP
Code, among others. Table 3 indicates which fields on the P9OUT call area need to be used in order
to properly create the Detail Record of the DPVSEED file.
In order to determine if a DPV Seed Record has been encountered, customers should examine the
field P9ODPVF (P9OUT position 46). If the value in this field is a ‘Y’, a DPV Seed Record has been
encountered and the DPVSEED file will be generated.
DPVSEED/P9OUT Map
DPVSEED
DPVSEED
P9OUT
P9OUT
Position
Description
Position
Field Name
1-2
Street pre-directional
813-814
P9ODI1
3-30
Street name
815-842
P9OSTR
31-34
Street suffix abbreviation
843-846
P9OSFX
35-36
Street post-directional
847-848
P9OD12
37-46
Address primary number
803-812
P9OHS-LB
47-50
Address secondary abbreviation
938-941
P9OATP
51-58
Address secondary number
942-949
P9OAP-LB
Release 4.1.0
300
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 13: Using Delivery Point Validation
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
DPVSEED/P9OUT Map
DPVSEED
DPVSEED
P9OUT
P9OUT
Position
Description
Position
Field Name
59-63
Matched ZIP code
1720-1724
P9OCZP
64-67
Matched ZIP+4
29-32
P9ODPBC
68-180
Filler
N/A
N/A
DPV Seed Record Reporting
If you encounter a DPV seed, you must report it to the USPS. Follow these steps to report seed
violations to the USPS and obtain a reactivation license key.
1. Login to the Pitney Bowes Support site at http://www.g1.com/support.
2. Select “DPV and LACSLink False-Positive”.
3. The DPV™ and LACSLink™ False-Positive (Seed Violation) Recovery screen displays.
4. Scroll down to your processing platform. Under your processing platform, click the “Get Delivery
Point Validation Database” link.
5. The Get DPV License/Report Seed Violation screen displays.
6. Click “Seed Violation Restart”.
7. Under Seed/Contact Information:
a. Use Browse to locate and attach your DPV Seed File.
b. Enter your email address.
8. Contact Pitney Bowes Technical Support to receive a new license file. For example:
G1LicensePBDPV.txt
9. Open the file provided by Pitney Bowes Technical Support to retrieve your new DPV key.
10. Replace your existing DPV key with the new DPV key provided in the license file. In some cases,
there may be more than one key in the downloaded license file. All keys in the downloaded
license file are functionally identical. You only need to enter one key. Do not enter more than one
key.
Release 4.1.0
301
User’s Guide - IBM i
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
Release 4.1.0
302
User’s Guide - IBM i
Link
Using LACS
In this chapter:




What is LACSLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
How Does LACSLink Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
How Do I Install the LACSLink Option? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
How Do I Activate LACSLink?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306



Understanding LACSLink Return Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
LACSLink Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation? . . . . . . . . . . . .311
14
What is LACSLink?
What is LACSLink?
You can use LACSLink to implement the USPS Locatable Address Conversion System (LACS)
service. LACS is used to provide computerized address list correction for addresses in areas
affected by rural route and box numbers to city-style address conversion, and city-style to city-style
address conversions.
LACS provides mailers an automated method of obtaining new addresses when a 911 emergency
system has been implemented. The 911 address conversions normally involve changing rural-style
addresses to city-style addresses. In some instances, conversions may result in the renaming or
renumbering of existing city-style addresses.

USPS regulations require LACSLink processing for CASS certification.
What are the Benefits of LACSLink?
LACSLink provides the following benefits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Complies with USPS CASS regulations. LACSLink processing is a USPS CASS requirement.
Prepares you for future USPS CASS regulations. In future CASS cycles, the USPS may expand
LACSLink processing requirements.
Reduces undeliverable mail by providing the most current address information for matches
made to the LACS file.
Prevents the need for duplicate mailpieces or re-mailings after address corrections are received
since the address correction is applied prior to the mailing.
Lowers your costs by reducing the number of undeliverable and/or duplicate mailpieces by using
the most current address information.
Provides the opportunity for faster marketing through accurate mail delivery.
Who is Eligible to Use LACSLink?
All CODE-1 Plus customers operating in the United States are eligible to use LACSLink.

The USPS has specific export rules that regulate the distribution of postal databases. At this
time, DPV, LACSLink, and SuiteLink databases are not available to customers operating
outside of the United States. For more information on the USPS rules, go to http://
ribbs.usps.gov.
How Does LACSLink Work?
The following steps describe the sequence of CODE-1 Plus LACSLink processing:
1. Standardizes input address information to conform with USPS requirements including the
ZIP + 4 Code,
2. Matches the address against the LACS file.
Release 4.1.0
304
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 14: Using LACSLink
How Do I Install the LACSLink Option?
3. If an exact match is made with the old address information on the LACS file, processing updates
the address.
4. If a match is found, CODE-1 Plus returns the following information:
•
•
•
•
Original input address from the mailer
Input address as standardized and appended with the ZIP + 4 Code (if possible)
Standardized new address when the standardized input address matches the old address on
the LACS file
National Delivery Index (NDI) report that includes a breakdown of deliverable address
information
5. If no match is found, CODE-1 Plus returns the following information:
•
•
•
•
Original input address
Standardized ZIP + 4 coded version of the input address
USPS Form 3553
NDI report
How Do I Install the LACSLink Option?
The LACSLink Option is installed as part of your standard CODE-1 Plus installation. The distribution
media sent to you in your release package contains all data needed to perform LACSLink processing
(e.g., the security key and the security file). After installing CODE-1 Plus, you must activate the
LACSLink Option to perform LACSLink processing.
How Do I Install the LACS Database?
In this section, we provide platform-specific instructions for installing your LACSLink database. The
LACSLink data must be kept in synch with the USPS ZIP + 4 data. Please note that the LACSLink
database has a 120-day expiration cycle. Databases expire on the following schedule.
LACSLink Database Expiry Cycle
Database Month
Release 4.1.0
Expiration
January
April 30
February
May 31
March
June 30
April
July 31
May
August 31
June
September 30
July
October 31
August
November 30
September
December 31
October
January 31
305
User’s Guide - IBM i
How Do I Activate LACSLink?
LACSLink Database Expiry Cycle
Database Month
Expiration
November
February 28
December
March 31
To install the LACS database in an IBM i environment:
1. From the Work With Jobs screen, press F20 to access Database Functions.
2. From the Database Functions screen, select option 2: Install Database.
3. On the Install CODE-1 Plus Databases screen, enter Y "Install LACSLink database?"
4. Specify an install source of C for CD/DVD or I for IDS (downloaded). LACS should be installed
into the same library as your US Postal Database.
How Do I Activate LACSLink?
This section describes methods available for activating LACSLink processing.
Using the Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing Screen to Activate
LACSLink
You can use the Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing screen (C1CPID50) to activate
LACSLink processing.
Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing Screen Fields (Part 1 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
Comments
LACSLink Processing
Type
Blank or Z
The type of LACSLink processing to be
performed:
Z
Perform the ZIP + 4 coding process
and only call LACSLink if the ZIP +
4 process returns a LACS
indicator.
Required.
No default.
LACSLink Seed
Record treatment
S or W
This option allows LACSLink to stop batch
jobs when a false-positive (seed record) has
been encountered:
S
Shuts down CODE-1 Plus
processing when a false-positive
(seed record) is encountered.
W
Allows CODE-1 Plus to continue
processing to completion of the
entire job, generating Form 3553.
Required.
Default is W.
Release 4.1.0
306
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 14: Using LACSLink
How Do I Activate LACSLink?
Confirmation Options/LACSLink Processing Screen Fields (Part 2 of 2)
Field Name
Format
Description
LACSLink Alternate
Option
L or F
This field allows you to specify if you want to
perform alternated LACSLink processing.
R
Perform LACSLink processing.
L
Invoke limited LACSLink subsystem
processing. Provides the CODE-1
Plus non-LACS converted street
address, city, and state data to the
output standardized address and
parsed elements fields.
LACSLink Suppress
99 Return Code
Y or N
This option allows you to specify whether to
produce a “99” return code for LACS seed
record processing.
Y
Do not produce “99” return code for
LACS seed record processing.
N
LACS seed record processing
results in “99” return code.
Comments
NOTE: An “S” in “LACSLink Seed Record
treatment” overrides this option.
Memory Model
P, U, S, M,
L, or H
This option allows you to specify size of
LACSLink module.
Blank LACS process will be using
Medium memory model (default).
P
Pico memory model (no files in
memory).
U
Micro memory model (no files in
memory, only indexes).
S
Small memory model (Rv9
expansion in memory).
M
Medium memory model.
L
Large memory model.
H
Huge memory model (all files in
memory).
Required
Activating LACSLink in Batch Mode
To activate LACSLink in batch mode, define the LACS parameter record. For more information on the
LACS parameter, please refer to "Parameter Reference" in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Activating LACSLink in Interactive Mode
To activate LACSLink processing, be sure the LACSLink databases are in your database library and
enter “LACS” in the command line.
Release 4.1.0
307
User’s Guide - IBM i
How Do I Activate LACSLink?
Activating LACSLink in Callable Mode
To use LACSLink when calling C1MATCHI from your own driver, one of three conditions must be
returned from C1MATCHI:
•
•
•
The matched P9O output address has a LACS indicator from the database (P9OLACS)
The P9O General Return Code is not set to blank, B, or X in the output area (P9OGRC)
The P9O default record indicator and the USPS record type are returning a value of “R” in the
output area (P9ODFR and P9ORTP).
To activate LACSLink in callable mode, call the CODE-1 Plus matcher and set the LACSLink indicator
as shown below.
P9IN Input Call Area for LACSLInk
Position
Name
Length
Contents
40
P9I-ZLACS
1
This field allows you to specify if you want to perform LACSLink
processing.
Blank Do not attempt to perform LACSLink processing
(default)
Y
Perform LACSLink processing
L
Invoke limited LACSLink subsystem processing.
Provides the CODE-1 Plus non-LACS converted
street address, city, and state data to the output
standardized address and parsed elements fields
491-500
P9IDBL
10
Database library name.
491-500
N/A
10
These bytes are reserved for the Midrange environment.
491-500
P9IDBL
10
Database library name.
Release 4.1.0
308
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 14: Using LACSLink
How Do I Activate LACSLink?
The following field has been added to the P9OUT call area structure.
P9OUT Output Call Area
Position
Field Name
Length
Comments
1215
P9OLACSLINK-IND
1
Indicates if a table was matched:
Blank No LACS processing occurred.
F
LACS seed violation has occurred.
N
No match occurred or a new address would
not convert at run time.
S
Input address contained both primary and
secondary information but match occurred
using only primary information.
Y
Full match occurred.
1216-1217
P9OLACSLINK-RC
2
Indicates the success of the LACSLink process:
Blank No LACS processing occurred.
A
LACS record match.
00
No match.
0
Address was passed to LACS process, but
could not be coded by LACS.
1
Address was successfully coded through the
LACS process.
2
A LACS False/Positive record was
encountered, but software is operating in a
NCOA/No Stop Capacity. As such, NCOA/No
Stop Capacity allows for the LACS function to
continue processing when a seed record is
encountered.
09
LACSLink was able to find the input address
on its internal tables but for some reason did
not return the new (converted) address.
14
Match found LACS record but would not
convert.
92
Match with secondary information.
1218-1226
P9OLACSLINK-DBINFO
9
Indicates the date of the database in YYYYMM format.
Also contains error codes for LACSLink. If the value of
P9OERR is “K” then the first five bytes of this field
contain the error code.
20120: LACS DB EXPIRATION
20121: CAN'T OPEN SECURITY FILE
20122: CORRUPTED SECURITY FILE
20123: CHECK DIGIT VIOLATION ON SECURITY
KEY
20124: PREVIOUS SEED VIOLATION, SYSTEM
LOCKED
20126: RESTART KEY OR SECURITY FILE NOT
CORRECT
20127: UNKNOWN
30000: LACS SEED VIOLATION
31000: LACS SYSTEM ERROR
32000: UNKNOWN as due to missing or corrupted
LACSLink security file or key file.
1227-1239
P9OLACSLINKVERSION
13
Version number of the LACSLink database.
Release 4.1.0
309
User’s Guide - IBM i
Understanding LACSLink Return Information
Understanding LACSLink Return Information
This section describes the LACSLink generated return information.
LACSLink Processing Codes
The following return codes indicate the success of LACS processing:
LACS API Return Codes
Return Code
Description
LACS_SEED_NCOA
2
Seed, but NCOA
LACS_SUCCESS
1
Successfully coded
LACS_FAIL
0
Failed to code
LACS_ERROR
-1
System error
LACS_SEED_VIOLATION
-2
LACS False/Positive record was encountered, LACS
function was stopped.
LACS_DB_EXPIRED
-3
LACS database expired.
LACS_KEY_ERROR
-4
User defined LACSKEY is invalid.
LACS_ERROR_DATA
-5
Data file read error
LACS_ERROR_HINT
-6
Error in set table
LACS_ERROR_DBASE0
-70
Database open error
LACS_ERROR_DBASE1
-71
Database open error
LACS_ERROR_DBASE2
-72
Database open error
LACS_ERROR_DBASE3
-73
Database open error
LACS_ERROR_DBASE4
-74
Database open error
LACS_ERROR_DBASE5
-75
Database open error
LACS_ERROR_PLAT
-8
Error in platform detection
LACS_ERROR_INFO
-9
Error in LACS information
LACS_ERROR_INIT
-10
Error in LACS initialization
LACS_ERROR_STATS
-11
Error in LACS statistics
LACS_ERROR_SECDE
-12
Error in LACS Secde
LACS_ERROR_SECIN
-13
Error in LACS Sedin
LACS_ERROR_PARSE
-14
Error in LLPARSE
LACS_ERROR_RV9
-15
Error in rv9esd
Release 4.1.0
310
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 14: Using LACSLink
LACSLink Reports
LACS API Return Codes
Return Code
Description
LACS_ERROR_STMEM
-16
Error getting st. member
LACS_TEST_BREAK
-17
Break for test
LACS Return Codes
Return Code
Description
LACSRTN_MATCH
A
LACS record match
LACSRTN_NOMATCH
00
No match
LACSRTN_NOCONV
14
Match found LACS record but would not convert.
LACSRTN_UNIT
92
Match with secondary information.
LACSRTN_HRD
09
LACSLink was able to find the input address on its
internal tables but for some reason did not return the
new (converted) address.
LACSLink Reports
This section describes the reports generated by LACSLink processing.
LACSLink Information on USPS Form 3553
The Qualitative Statistical Summary (QSS) section of the USPS Form 3553 (CASS Summary
Report) displays as shown below if you are processing with the LACSLink Option.
: HIGH RISE :HIGH RISE :RURAL RTE :RURAL RTE : LACS/
:
EWS
:SUITELINK :
: DEFAULT : EXACT
: DEFAULT : EXACT
: LACSLINK :
:
:
:___________:__________:__________:__________:__________:__________:________:
: 2 :
17 :
0 :
0 :
0 :
0 :
0 :
:___________________________________________________________________________:
PS FORM 3553, FEBRUARY 2013
See DMM Sec 708 for more information
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
If your mailing generates a false-positive result during CODE-1 Plus processing, you are required to:
1. Report the seed record match to Pitney Bowes.
2. Get a new license key to turn LACS back on.
Release 4.1.0
311
User’s Guide - IBM i
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
Batch
1. If you encounter a LACSLink Seed Violation with your CODE-1 Plus batch job, you must enter the
current LACSLink Key and attach the Seed File to be issued a reactivation key.
a. The LACSLink Key can be obtained from your LACSKEY file, which is defined to CODE-1
Plus using the LACSKEY DD statement that exists in the JCL for Mainframe platforms. The
table below details the location LACSKEY file by platform.
Locations of LACS File by Platform
Platform
Location
Required Name
Windows
The directory where your environment variable LACSKEY is
set. The default is%G1C1P%/data.
lacslk
Unix/Linux
The directory where your environment variable LACSKEY is
set. The default is $G1C1P/data.
lacslk
IMS & z/OS
DD Statement within flat file:
//LACSKEY DD DSN=yourhlq.LACSKEY,DISP=SHR
NOTE: Replace “yourhlq” with your own high-level qualifier.
LACSKEY

The LACSLink Key file can be opened with any text editor, and contains only the 16-byte
alpha-numeric LACSLink Key (not including hyphens) used by CODE-1 Plus.
b. The Seed File is defined to CODE-1 Plus using the DPVSEED DD statement that also exists
in the JCL, Job Script or Batch file that is used to submit the batch job.
Interactive
1. If you encounter a LACSLink Seed Violation using the Matcher-Inquiry/G1CP Transaction, you
must enter the current LACSLink Key and attach the Seed File to be issued a reactivation key.
a. The LACSLink Key can be obtained from your LACSKEY file, which is defined to CODE-1
Plus using the LACSKEY DD statement that exists in the JCL for Mainframe platforms.
b. The Seed File contains all of the necessary information for reporting a false-positive record.
You must create this file using any text editor, reporting the following information in the
specified record position.
Release 4.1.0
312
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 14: Using LACSLink
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
LACSLink SEED File Detail Record
Position
Length
Description
Format
1-2
2
Street pre-directional
alphanumeric
3-30
28
Street name
alphanumeric
31-34
4
Street suffix abbreviation
alphanumeric
35-36
2
Street post-directional
alphanumeric
37-46
10
Address primary number
alphanumeric
47-50
4
Address secondary abbreviation
alphanumeric
51-58
8
Address secondary number
numeric
59-63
5
Matched ZIP code
numeric
64-67
4
Matched ZIP+4
numeric
68-180
113
Filler
Reserved
Once the key and Seed File have been entered, you can select the Download License button
to acquire your LACSLink reactivation key. To apply your reactivation key, edit your
LACSKEY file and replace the existing key with the reactivation key.

LACSLink does not have a New License option for processing, as the initial license
key is packaged and delivered with the installation of the CODE-1 Plus software
application.
LACSLink Seed Record Reporting
If you encounter a LACSLink seed, you must report it to the USPS. Follow these steps to report seed
violations to the USPS and obtain a reactivation license key.
1. Login to the Pitney Bowes Support site at http://www.g1.com/support.
2. Select “DPV and LACSLink False-Positive”.
3. The DPV™ & LACSLink™ False-Positive (Seed Violation) Recovery screen displays.
4. Scroll down to your processing platform. Under your processing platform, click the “Get LACSLink
Database” link.
5. The Get LACSLink License/Report Seed Violation screen displays.
6. Click the appropriate processing method.
Release 4.1.0
313
User’s Guide - IBM i
What If My Mailing Generates a Seed Violation?
7. Under Seed/Contact Information:
a. Enter your old LACSLink license key
b. Use Browse to locate and attach your Seed File.
c. Enter your email address.
8. Click on the “Download License File” button.
9. A new license file is downloaded. For example:
G1LicensePBLL.txt
10. Open the file to retrieve your new key.
11. Replace your existing LACSLink key with the new LACSLink key provided in the downloaded
license file. In some cases, there may be more than one key in the downloaded license file. All
keys in the downloaded license file are functionally identical. You only need to enter one key. Do
not enter more than one key.
Release 4.1.0
314
User’s Guide - IBM i
Link
Using Suite
In this chapter:





What is SuiteLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
How Does SuiteLink Work?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
How do I Install the SuiteLink Option?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
How Do I Activate SuiteLink? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
SuiteLink Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
15
What is SuiteLink?
What is SuiteLink?
According to the USPS, 26% of all mail addressed to high-rise addresses (business and residential)
ZIP+4 Code to a high-rise default code. The purpose of SuiteLink is to improve business addressing
by adding known secondary (suite) numbers to allow delivery sequencing where it would otherwise
not be possible.
The USPS defines SuiteLink as: “a data-only product containing business addressing information
specifically identified as high-rise default records as a result of CASS processing. This product
provided by the USPS allows developers to create a software interface that will have the capability of
appending the secondary (suite) information to a business address, providing the input address is
determined to be a highrise default record.”

SuiteLink cannot be used as part of a standalone process; it must be used in conjunction with
CODE-1 Plus.

The USPS regulations require SuiteLink processing for CASS certification.

The FIRMNM parameter is required when you use the STELNK parameter for SuiteLink®
processing.
What are the Benefits of SuiteLink?
SuiteLink enables customers to provide improved business addressing information by adding known
suite information to business addresses, which will allow USPS delivery sequencing where it would
not otherwise be possible.
The SuiteLink Option provides you with the ability to improve deliverability for the business addresses
in your mailing list. SuiteLink improves business address information by adding accurate secondary
(suite) information to the business addresses in your mailing list. Adding this additional information
makes USPS delivery sequencing available for addresses in your mailing list that previously were
not eligible.
Some of the benefits available to CODE-1 Plus customers through SuiteLink processing are
described below.
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Improves the business address information in your mailing list by appending secondary (suite)
information to business addresses.
Ensures USPS delivery sequencing for the business addresses in your mailing list.
SuiteLink processing provides another method to ensure postal coding accuracy resulting in less
undeliverable mail.
316
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 15: Using SuiteLink
How Does SuiteLink Work?
Who is Eligible to Use SuiteLink?
SuiteLink is available to all CODE-1 Plus customers operating in the United States. Records that
have been processed through CASS-Certified ZIP+4 address-matching software and identified as
high-rise defaults are potential candidates for SuiteLink processing.

The USPS has specific export rules that regulate the distribution of postal databases. At this
time, DPV, LACSLink, and SuiteLink databases are not available to customers operating
outside of the United States. For more information on the USPS rules, go to http://
ribbs.usps.gov.
How Does SuiteLink Work?
CODE-1 Plus performs SuiteLink processing in the situations described below.
1. CODE-1 Plus calls SuiteLink when the following conditions are met:
•
•
SuiteLink has been activated via either batch mode, interactive mode, or callable mode and
all required SuiteLink parameters are defined with valid values.
CODE-1 Plus successfully coded the address and the following information exists in the
address record:
– Firm name
– Valid ZIP code
– Valid ZIP+4 code
– Primary number exists
A match has been made to a high-rise default record.
The CODE-1 Plus database is current.
•
The SuiteLink database is current.
•
•
2. If SuiteLink returns secondary data, CODE-1 Plus performs another match attempt using the
corrected data.
3. CODE-1 Plus prints statistics at end of job.
How do I Install the SuiteLink Option?
The SuiteLink Option is installed as part of your standard CODE-1 Plus installation. The distribution
media sent to you in your release package contains all data needed to perform SuiteLink processing.
After installing CODE-1 Plus and the SuiteLink database, you must activate the SuiteLink Option to
perform SuiteLink processing.
Release 4.1.0
317
User’s Guide - IBM i
How Do I Activate SuiteLink?
How do I Install the SuiteLink Database?
In this section, we provide platform-specific instructions for installing your SLKDB database. The
SuiteLink data must be kept in synch with the USPS ZIP + 4 data. Please note that the SLKDB
database has a 120-day expiration cycle. Databases expire on the following schedule.
SuiteLink Database Expiry Cycle
Database Month
Expiration
January
April 30
February
May 31
March
June 30
April
July 31
May
August 31
June
September 30
July
October 31
August
November 30
September
December 31
October
January 31
November
February 28
December
March 31
To install the SuiteLink database in an IBM i environment, do the following steps.
1. From the Work With Jobs screen, press F20 to access Database Functions.
2. From the Database Functions screen, select 2. Install Database.
3. On the Install CODE-1 Plus Databases screen, enter Y in the "Install SuiteLink Database?” field.
4. Specify an install source of C for CD/DVD or I for IDS (downloaded). SuiteLink should be installed
into the same library as your US Postal Database.
How Do I Activate SuiteLink?
This section describes the methods available for activating SuiteLink processing.
Using the SuiteLink Processing Definition Screen to Activate SuiteLink
Use the SuiteLink Processing screen (C1CPID45) to define SuiteLink processing options. To access
the SuiteLink Processing screen (C1CPID45):
Release 4.1.0
318
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 15: Using SuiteLink
How Do I Activate SuiteLink?
1. From the Name/Address File Layout, page down to the SuiteLink Processing screen
(C1CPID45).
2. Use the following table to complete the fields on the SuiteLink Processing screen (C1CPID45).
SuiteLink Processing Screen Fields
Field
Description
Specify SuiteLink Process
SuiteLink Error Shutdown
Indicator
Optional. Code indicating how to proceed if SuiteLink reports an error:
• I — Ignore error and continue to attempt SuiteLink processing. CODE1 Plus does not generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report) if you specify the value “I”.
• S — Shutdown when SuiteLink reports an error (default). Specify the
value “S” if you want to generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report).
• W — Issue warning message and turn off SuiteLink processing.
CODE-1 Plus does not generate a USPS Form 3553 (USPS CASS
Summary Report) if you specify the value “W”.
• blank — Default is S.
Location of SuiteLink Return
Code
Optional. Location for SuiteLink return code. One of the following codes
is stored:
• A — Business name matched.
• 00 — Business name not matched.
• Blank — No default.
Location of SuiteLink Match
Code
Optional. Location for SuiteLink match code. One of the following codes
is stored:
• A — Matched.
• B — Not matched.
• C — Business name was all noise.
• D — Highrise default record not found.
• E — Database expired.
• Blank — No default.
Location of SuiteLink Fidelity
Code
Optional. Location for SuiteLink match fidelity. One of the following
codes is stored:
• 1 — Exact match.
• 2 — Acceptable match (one word not matched).
• 3 — Unacceptable match (more than one word not matched).
• Blank — No default.
NOTE: You should ignore the Fidelity Code if the Match Code is not
'A'. The Fidelity Code is '0' if the Match Code is B (no match), C
(business name consisted entirely of "noise" words), or D (9-digit zip
not recognized as a high rise default).
Release 4.1.0
319
User’s Guide - IBM i
How Do I Activate SuiteLink?
SuiteLink Processing Screen Fields
Field
Memory Model
Description
Optional. This option allows you to specify size of SuiteLink memory
module.
• P — Pico memory model (no files in memory).
• U — Micro memory model (no files in memory, only indexes).
• S — Small memory model (slkhdr, slknormal, slknoise in memory).
• M — Medium memory model (slknine file also in memory).
• L — Large memory model (lcd file also in memory).
• H — Huge memory model (slk file also in memory).
• Blank — Default is M.
Exclude Secondary from
Output Address Line
Optional. Specify a code to indicate whether to call SuiteLink without
appending the secondary information to the output address line. All
other fields, ZIP + 4 value, DPC code, are determined using the
secondary information returned by SuiteLink.
• I — Include secondary information from SuiteLink on the output
address line.
• E — Exclude secondary information from SuiteLink from the output
address line.
• Blank — Defaults to I.
Exclude any Invalid/
Extraneous Secondary
Information from Output
Address Line
Optional. Specify a code to include or exclude any invalid (extraneous)
input secondary information.
• I — Include the invalid input secondary information.
• E — Exclude the invalid input secondary information.
• Blank — Defaults to I.
Activating SuiteLink in Batch Mode
To activate SuiteLink in batch mode, define the STELNK parameter record. For more information on
the STELNK parameter, please refer to "STELNK " in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide.
Activating SuiteLink in Interactive Mode
To activate SuiteLink in Interactive mode, verify that the SuiteLink databases are defined in your
database library and enter “SUITE” on the command line.
Activating SuiteLink in Callable Mode
To use SuiteLink when calling C1MATCHI from your own driver, the following five conditions must be
returned from C1MATCHI.
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
There must be a firm name in the P9I input area (P9IFRM).
There must be a house number in the P9O output area (P9OHS-LB).
The default record indicator must be returning a value of “H” in the P9O output area (P9ODFR).
The USPS record type must be returning a value of “H” in the P9O output area (P9ORTP).
There must be spaces in both the P9O General Return Code and the 9-digit Return Code in the
output area (P9OGRC and P9O9RC).
320
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 15: Using SuiteLink
How Do I Activate SuiteLink?
If you get a match back from SuiteLink, you need to re-invoke the matcher with the new data.
However, do not use the firm name that is returned; just use the secondary information.

You can find the P9COMM copybook (a combination of P9IN, P9OUT, and P9AUDIT) with
other copybooks delivered.
You can also optionally perform the following.
•
Determine the action to take for SuiteLink errors.
•
•
Determine whether an expired SuiteLink database can cause a job to terminate.
Set the Small Memory Model flag.
.
P9IN Input Call Area for SuiteLInk
Position
29
Name
P9ISTE
Length
1
Contents
This field allows you to specify how SuiteLink errors will be
treated.
• I — Ignore error and continue to attempt SuiteLink
processing. CODE-1 Plus does not generate a USPS Form
3553 (USPS CASS Summary Report) if you specify the
value “I”.
• S — Shutdown when SuiteLink reports an error (default).
Specify the value “S” if you want to generate a USPS
Form 3553 (USPS CASS Summary Report).
• W — Issue warning message and turn off SuiteLink
processing. CODE-1 Plus does not generate a USPS Form
3553 (USPS CASS Summary Report) if you specify the
value “W”.
30
P9ISTE-BYP
1
This field allows you to specify if an expired SuiteLink database
will cause the job to terminate.
N
Do not bypass SuiteLink database expiration date
processing (default).
Y
Bypass SuiteLink database expiration processing.
31
P9ISTE-SMM
1
This field allows the small memory model version of SuiteLink to
be used.
N
Do not use the Small Memory Model (default).
Y
Use the Small Memory Model.
491-500
P9IDBL
10
Database library name.
491-500
N/A
10
These bytes are reserved for the Midrange environment.
491-500
P9IDBL
10
Database library name.

Release 4.1.0
See positions 1863-1878 and 2121-2170 of the P9OUT callable area for SuiteLink output.
321
User’s Guide - IBM i
SuiteLink Output
SuiteLink Output
The output from the SuiteLink job posts as follows in the P9OUT call area:
P9OUT Output Call Area for SuiteLInk
Position
Name
Length
Contents
1863
P9OSTELNK-RC
2
SuiteLink return code:
A
Business name matched.
00
Business name not matched.
1864
P9OSTELNKMATCH-RC
1
SuiteLink match code:
A
Matched.
B
Not matched.
C
Business name was all noise.
D
Highrise default record not found.
E
Database is expired.
1865
P9OSTELNKMATCH-FID
1
SuiteLink match fidelity:
1
Exact match.
2
Acceptable match (one word not matched).
3
Unacceptable match (more than one word not
matched).
1866
P9OSTELNK-RLSNUM
12
SuiteLink release number.
491-500
P9IDBL
10
Database library name.
491-500
N/A
10
These bytes are reserved for the Midrange environment.
491-500
P9IDBL
10
Database library name.
DD Name
The DD name for SuiteLink is BSLKD.
SuiteLink Return Codes
The following return codes indicate the success of SuiteLink processing:
SuiteLink Return Codes
Return Code
Release 4.1.0
Description
00
No SuiteLink record match found.
A
SuiteLink record match found.
322
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 15: Using SuiteLink
SuiteLink Output
Input and Output Examples
The following examples show examples of potential input and output with SuiteLink.
Input:
1
2
3
4
5
6
----+----0----+----0----+----0----+----0----+----0----+---2070618524200
Pitney Bowes
009269786300
RAMALLO BROS PKG
Output:
1
2
3
4
5
6
----+----0----+----0----+----0----+----0----+----0----+---STE 600
A 1Pitney Bowes
STE 1
A 2BROTHERS PKG RAMALLO
SuiteLink Reporting
The CASS 3553 report and the Control Reports include SuiteLink information.
CASS 3553 Report
SuiteLink information has been added to the Qualitative Statistical Summary section of the CASS
3553 report:
Control Reports
Line items for SuiteLink are on the Control Reports as follows:
SuiteLink Database version: March 2013, Product Version: 0650
Total Number of SuiteLink Match Attempts
xxxxxxxxx
nn.nn%
Total Number of Successful SuiteLink Match Attempts
xxxxxxxxx
nn.nn%
Total Number of Successful SuiteLink Matches with Corrected Suites xxxxxxxxx
nn.nn%
Release 4.1.0
323
User’s Guide - IBM i
SuiteLink Output
Release 4.1.0
324
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using Line of Travel
In this chapter:









What is Line of Travel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Why Use Line of Travel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Accessing Line of Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Getting Started with Line of Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Sorting Your LOT Coded Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Calling the LTO10 Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Line of Travel Exit Routine (LTO60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Control Totals Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Alternate Sequence Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
16
What is Line of Travel?
What is Line of Travel?
Line of Travel (LOT) is a feature that assigns a code to your address records, allowing you to qualify
your Standard letters and flats for USPS Enhanced Carrier Route rates. LOT is also referred to as
eLOT or Enhanced Line Of Travel. If you use Line of Travel, your mailing is eligible for the USPS
non-automation Basic Rate. To qualify for this rate, your mail must be in LOT sequence. Assigning a
LOT Code to your mailings saves you mailing time and money.
The Line of Travel code indicates the order in which delivery will be made within a given ZIP + 4
carrier route and whether delivery will be made in ascending or descending sequence. Line of Travel
appends a four digit number and a sequence code to all name and address records with a ZIP + 4
Code. This LOT code is then used for sortation purposes to simulate walk sequence mailing within
the number range associated with the ZIP + 4 Code. After the ZIP + 4 file is LOT-coded, the file is
then sorted sequentially by 5-byte ZIP Code, 4-byte carrier route, 4-byte LOT number, and a 2- or 1character sequence code.
The LOT-coded record includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
ZIP + 4 Code
Delivery Point Code (DPC)
Carrier Route
Line of Travel number
Ascending/descending sequence code
Optional sequence codes used for sortation provided by the Line of Travel software

Per USPS regulations, records with missing (blank) or invalid (0000) LOT information are to
be sorted to the end of the CRRT.
Why Use Line of Travel?
Sorting your Standard letters and flats in line-of-travel sequence is the only way to qualify your
mailings for USPS Enhanced Carrier Route rates when your mail does not meet the non-automation
saturation and high-density rate requirements. The saturation and high-density categories require
that your mail be sorted in walk-sequence. Line of Travel simulates walk-sequence, but only for ten
or more pieces per carrier route.
Accessing Line of Travel
The following methods can be used to invoke Line of Travel:
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Matcher (C1MATCHB)—Line of Travel information can be returned by setting a switch in the
matcher.
LOTOUT parameter—Line of Travel information can be returned via the CODE-1 Plus batch
driver using the LOTOUT parameter.
Callable subroutine (LTO10)—You can call LTO10 as a subroutine from any program, as long
as you use the parameters defined in this chapter. The LTO10 callable subroutine determines a
4-digit number and a 1-character sequence code for a record. These parameters accept your
input and return a LOT code. Based on your output parameter, LTO10 returns the LOT code to
your executable program.
326
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Getting Started with Line of Travel
•
Exit Routine (LTO60)—The LTO60 exit routine posts Line of Travel information onto your nameand-address record when passed from any Pitney Bowes EXEC- level program. Batch driver
processing requirements are passed via the EXITOP parameter.

CODE-1 Plus does not use LTO60. LTO60 is used from other Pitney Bowes applications.
Getting Started with Line of Travel
Line of Travel derives a Line of Travel (LOT) code, which is comprised of a 4-digit Line of Travel
sequence number and a 1-character Line of Travel sequence code. The Line of Travel sequence
code is either “A” for ascending, or “D” for descending. Line of Travel then appends the LOT code to
all name and address records with a Delivery Point Barcode and a Carrier Route that matches the
Line of Travel Master File.
Sorting Your LOT Coded Records
To use Line of Travel to obtain the maximum discount, the USPS Line of Travel Technical Guide
requires you to sort your LOT-coded records in ascending order in the following sequence:
1. 5-digit ZIP Code
2. 4-byte Carrier Route Code
3. 4-digit Line of Travel Code

This includes only the numeric portion of the LOT code. It does not include the sequence
code.
4. 4-digit ZIP + 4 Code
5. 2-digit Delivery Point Barcode in ascending AND descending order depending on the Line of
Travel sequence code that is appended to each record

The Line of Travel sequence code (either “A” or “D”) is essential for this step.
Since sorting in ascending and descending order can be unwieldy, Line of Travel returns two types
of alternate codes that can be used for sortation. Rather than sorting your output file using the 2-digit
Delivery Point Barcode, you should sort it using either the alternate sequence code or the
hexadecimal sequence code.
The alternate sequence code is a two-byte code used for final sortation in place of the DPC add-on.
It consists of an uppercase letter followed by a digit 0 through 9. Values range from “A0” (99
descending) through “J9” (00 descending), and “K0” (00 ascending) through “T9” (99 ascending).
The hexadecimal sequence code is a single-byte code, and it also allows you to sort your file in
ascending order only. The hexadecimal values range from 0 to FF ascending, then FF through 0
descending.
Release 4.1.0
327
User’s Guide - IBM i
Calling the LTO10 Subroutine
Both the hexadecimal and alternate sequence codes are determined from the DPC add-on and the
LOT sequence code. For more information on these codes, please refer to "Alternate Sequence
Codes” on page 334.

You must sort your output file as discussed above prior to presorting your mailing when using
the Pitney Bowes MailStream Plus software.
Calling the LTO10 Subroutine
The LTO10 callable subroutine determines a 4-digit sequence number and a
sequence code for a record. In order to call LTO10, you must pass two parameters:
•
•
1-character
Input Parameter — A 50-byte input area containing user-provided data passed from your
executable program to LTO10.
Output Parameter — A 100-byte output area containing information returned from LTO10.
Using the input parameter, you must pass a 5-digit ZIP Code, a 4-digit ZIP+4 Code, a 2-digit DPC,
and a 4-byte Carrier Route as input.
LTO10 then derives a Line of Travel (LOT) code, which is comprised of a 4-digit Line of Travel
sequence number and a 1-character Line of Travel sequence code. Based on your output
parameter, LTO10 returns the LOT code to your executable program.
The Line of Travel sequence code is either “A” for ascending, or “D” for descending. Since sorting in
ascending and descending order can be unwieldy, Line of Travel returns two types of alternate
codes that can be sorted in ascending order only.
The alternate sequence code is a two-byte code used for final sortation in place of the DPC add-on.
It consists of an uppercase letter followed by a digit 0 through 9. Values range from “A0” (99
descending) through “J9” (00 descending), and “K0” (00 ascending) through “T9” (99 ascending).
The hexadecimal sequence code is a single-byte code, and it also allows you to sort your file in
ascending order only. There are 200 values ranging from 99 descending through 00 descending,
then 00 ascending through 99 ascending. Both the hexadecimal and alternate sequence codes are
determined from the DPC add-on and the LOT sequence code. For more information on these
codes, please refer to "Alternate Sequence Codes” on page 334.
Input Area — Parameter 1
The following table maps the positions in input area Parameter 1.
Parameter 1 Input Area Positions
Position
1
Name
FUNCTION TO
PERFORM
Length
1
Description
Enter one of the following codes:
• E — Perform end-of-job functions, for example,
closing the Line of Travel Master File and any
platform-specific functions.
This option will not free memory.
• Other — Perform match to the Master File.
Release 4.1.0
328
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Calling the LTO10 Subroutine
Parameter 1 Input Area Positions
Position
Name
Length
Description
2-10
RESERVED
9
Reserved.
11-15
ZIP CODE
5
Input ZIP Code to be matched against the Line of Travel
Master File.
16-19
ZIP+4 CODE
4
Input ZIP+4 Code to be matched against the Line of
Travel Master File.
20-21
DELIVERY POINT
CODE
2
Input Delivery Point Code (DPC) add-on.
22-25
CARRIER ROUTE
CODE
4
Input Carrier Route Code to be matched against the Line
of Travel Master File.
26-50
RESERVED
25
Reserved.
Output Area — Parameter 2
The following table maps the positions in output area Parameter 2.
Parameter 2 Output Area Positions
Position
1
Name
MATCH LEVEL
Length
1
Description
Indicates the level of match obtained against the Line of
Travel Master File.
• Blank — Invalid input was presented. Records with
invalid input contain zeroes or non-numeric data in the
ZIP and/or ZIP+4 Code field or non-numeric DPC or
invalid Carrier Route Code.
• 9 — Match against the Master File was successful.
• C — Call to matcher failed.
• D — Valid input was presented, but no match was
successful with the Master File. Records with valid
input contain numeric, non-zero data in the ZIP and
ZIP+4 Code fields, plus a numeric DPC, and a valid
formatted Carrier Route Code.
• F — Master file open/read failure.
• V — Master file not compatible with Line of Travel
software.
2-5
Release 4.1.0
LINE OF TRAVEL
(LOT) SEQUENCE
NUMBER
4
Four-digit Line of Travel (LOT) sequence number
generated from the input data defined in Parameter 1.
If valid input was presented, but no match was
successful with the Master File, the record is default
coded, and this field contains zeroes. Please note that
default-coded records are eligible for the basic enhanced
carrier route rate.
If invalid input was presented, this field is blank.
329
User’s Guide - IBM i
Line of Travel Exit Routine (LTO60)
Parameter 2 Output Area Positions
Position
6
Name
LINE OF TRAVEL
(LOT) SEQUENCE
CODE
Length
1
Description
One-character Line of Travel (LOT) sequence code
generated from the input data defined in Parameter 1.
• Blank — No LOT number could be determined, due
to invalid input.
• A — Ascending.
• D — Descending.
NOTE: If valid input was presented, but no match was
successful with the Master File, the record will be
default coded, and this code will be returned.
7-8
ALTERNATE
SEQUENCE CODE
2
Two-character code used for final sortation in place of
the DPC add-on, which allows you to sort your file in
ascending sequence only, instead of both ascending and
descending. This code is determined from the DPC addon field and the LOT sequence code. It consists of an
uppercase letter followed by a digit 0 through 9. Values
range from "A0" (99 descending) through "J9" (00
descending), and "K0" (00 ascending) through "T9" (99
ascending).
9
HEXADECIMAL
SEQUENCE CODE
1
Single-character code used for final sortation in place of
the DPC add-on, which allows you to sort your file in
ascending sequence only, instead of both ascending and
descending. This hexadecimal value is determined from
the DPC add-on field and the LOT sequence code. There
are 200 values ranging from 99 descending through 00
descending, then 00 ascending through 99 ascending.
NOTE: LTO10 returns both an alternate sequence code and a hexadecimal sequence code.
10-13
RESERVED
4
Reserved.
14-17
SOFTWARE
RELEASE NUMBER
4
Line of Travel release number, shown as nn.n.
18-19
SOFTWARE
MODIFICATION
NUMBER
2
Line of Travel modification number, shown as nn.
20-39
MASTER FILE
IDENTIFICATION
20
Line of Travel Master File version identification string.
40-79
MASTER FILE
CREATION
SOFTWARE
IDENTIFICATION
STRING
40
Identifies the version of Line of Travel software that
created the Master File.
80-100
RESERVED
21
Line of Travel Exit Routine (LTO60)
If you want to post the Line of Travel code to your output file, use the LTO60 exit routine. You have
access to this exit routine via the EXITOP parameter. The EXITOP parameter is available from most
Pitney Bowes EXEC-level programs.
Release 4.1.0
330
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Line of Travel Exit Routine (LTO60)
The EXITOP parameter defines your input and locations for your output. You must pass a 5-digit ZIP
Code, a 4-digit ZIP+4 Code, a 2-digit DPC, and a 4-byte Carrier Route Code as input.
LTO10 then derives a Line of Travel (LOT) code, which is comprised of a 4-digit Line of Travel
sequence number and a 1-character Line of Travel sequence code, and returns it to the LTO60 exit
routine.
The Line of Travel sequence code is either “A” for ascending, or “D” for descending. Since sorting in
ascending and descending order can be unwieldy, Line of Travel returns two types of alternate
codes that can be sorted in ascending order only.
The alternate sequence code is a two-byte code used for final sortation in place of the DPC add-on.
It consists of an uppercase letter followed by a digit 0 through 9. Values range from “A0” (99
descending) through “J9” (00 descending), and “K0” (00 ascending) through “T9” (99 ascending).
The hexadecimal sequence code is a single-byte code, and it also allows you to sort your file in
ascending order only. There are 200 values ranging from 99 ascending through 00 descending, then
00 ascending through 99 ascending. Both the hexadecimal and alternate sequence codes are
determined from the DPC add-on and the LOT sequence code.
The LTO60 exit routine subsequently returns the information to your Pitney Bowes EXEC-level
program.
EXITOP Parameter for the LTO60 Exit Routine
The EXITOP parameter allows you to call the LTO60 exit routine. The following table provides an
overview of the EXITOP parameter fields used to access the LTO60 exit routine.
Fields on the EXITOP Parameter (Part 1 of 2)
Position
Field Name
Description
Comments
1-6
KEYWORD
EXITOP is the only acceptable entry.
Required.
8-15
EXIT ROUTINE
NAME
LTO60 is the only acceptable entry.
LTO60 is dynamically loaded when you enter
this parameter.
Required.
19-22
Location of
ZIP CODE
Location of the input record ZIP Code.
Required.
23
Format of
ZIP CODE
Code indicating the format of your input record
ZIP Code.
• C — 5-digit ZIP Code in character format.
Required.
• P — 5-digit ZIP Code stored in a 3-byte
packed field.
• R — 9-digit ZIP+4 Code stored in a 5-byte
packed field.
• B — 5-digit ZIP Code stored in a 3- byte
binary field.
• 9 — 9-digit ZIP+4 Code stored in a 4-byte
binary field.
24-27
Release 4.1.0
Location of
ZIP+4 Code
Location of the input record ZIP+4 Code.
331
Required.
User’s Guide - IBM i
Line of Travel Exit Routine (LTO60)
Fields on the EXITOP Parameter (Part 2 of 2)
Position
28
Field Name
Format of
ZIP+4 Code
Description
Format of the input record ZIP+4 Code. Enter
one of the following:
• C — Character format
Comments
Required.
• P — 3-byte packed field
• B — 2-byte binary field.
29-32
Location of
DELIVERY POINT
CODE
Location of the input record Delivery Point
Code.
Required.
33-36
Location for
LOT CODE
Location for the 5-character Line of Travel
(LOT) code on the output record.
NOTE: If invalid input was presented, this field
will be left blank on the output record.
If valid input was presented, but no match was
successful with the Master File, the record is
default coded. This field will contain four zeroes
followed by a descending flag (0000D). Defaultcoded records are eligible for the basic
enhanced carrier route rate.
Required.
37-40
Location for
ALTERNATE
SEQUENCE CODE
Location for the 2-character Alternate
Sequence code on the output record.
41-44
Location for
HEXADECIMAL
SEQUENCE CODE
Location for the 1-character Hexadecimal
Sequence code on the output record.
Optional.
One of these
fields are required
if you want the
program to help
you sort your
records in the
sequence
required by the
USPS to obtain
the basic
enhanced carrier
route rate.
45-48
Location for
CARRIER ROUTE
CODE
Location for the input record Carrier Route
Code on the output record.
Required.
50
REPORT
SUPPRESSION
CODE
Determines whether the Control Totals Report
will be printed. Enter one of the following codes:
• Blank — The report will be printed (default).
Optional.
• X — The report will not be printed.
51-66
Release 4.1.0
RESERVED
These fields are reserved for future use.
332
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Control Totals Report
Example
For this example, the following is the input record for Line of Travel.
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....
JOSEPH.BELL...18684.BLUE.BIRD.DRIVE.......GAITHERSBURG..MD20879-123084C001
The parameter below shows you how to define the EXITOP parameter for this input record.
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7..
EXITOP.LTO60.......059C.065C.069.256.261.263.072.X......................
Value
Description
EXITOP
Parameter name.
LTO60
Name of the exit routine to be called.
059
Columns 19-22 define the location of the input record ZIP Code. C in column 23
specifies a character ZIP Code format.
065
Columns 24-27 define the location of the input record ZIP+4 Code. C in column 28
specifies a character ZIP+4 Code format.
069
Columns 29-32 define the location of the Delivery Point Code.
256
Columns 33-36 define the location for the Line of Travel code on the output record.
261
Columns 37-40 define the location for the Alternate Sequence Code.
263
Columns 41-44 defines the location for the Hexadecimal Sequence Code.
072
Columns 46-48 defines the location of the Carrier Route Code.
X
Column 50 indicates that the Control Totals Report will not be printed.
Control Totals Report
The Control Totals Report shows you statistics about processed, matched, and unmatched records
for a job. This report is printed automatically when your job is run, unless you type an “X” in position
50 of the EXITOP parameter. If you need to call Pitney Bowes Technical Support about a problem
with any of your jobs, please have this report handy for reference. Numbers and percentages are
listed for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Records Processed — The number of records that were processed from your input file.
Valid Format ZIP Code Presented — The number of records processed that contained 5-digit
ZIP Codes in valid format. 5-digit ZIP Codes in valid format consist of numeric, non-zero data.
Zero Or Non-numeric ZIP+4 Codes Presented — The number of records processed that
contained zeros or non-numeric data in the ZIP+4 field.
Valid Format ZIP+4 Code Presented — The number of records processed that contained 9digit ZIP+4 Codes in valid format. 9-digit ZIP Codes in valid format consist of numeric, non-zero
data.
Valid Format DPC Values Presented — The number of records processed that contained 2digit DPC add-on codes in valid format.
Invalid Carrier Route Codes Presented — The number of records processed that contained a
4-digit Carrier Route Code in invalid format.
333
User’s Guide - IBM i
Alternate Sequence Codes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Valid Carrier Route Codes Presented — The number of records processed that contained a 4digit Carrier Route Code in valid format.
Records Not Matching Master File, Invalid Input — The number of records that were not
successfully matched against the Line of Travel Master File, due to invalid input. Records with
invalid input contain zeroes or non-numeric data in the ZIP and/or ZIP+4 Code field, or a nonnumeric DPC or invalid Carrier Route Code format.
Records Not Matching Master File, Default Coded — The number of records processed that
did not match the Line of Travel Master file, but contained valid input. These records were default
coded, which means the LOT code is four zeroes followed by a descending flag (0000D). Please
note that default-coded records do qualify for the basic enhanced carrier route rate.
Records Matching LOT Master File — The number of records processed that contained valid
input and were successfully matched against the Line of Travel Master File.
Line of Travel Codes Determined — The number of records processed that were LOT coded.
This number is equal to number of records matching at the ZIP+4 Code level plus the number of
records that were default coded.
LOT Numbers with Ascending Sequence Codes — The number of LOT numbers that are
followed by an ascending (A) flag.
LOT Numbers with Descending Sequence Codes — The number of LOT numbers returned
that are followed by a descending (D) flag.
Alternate DPC Sequence Codes Determined — The number of records processed for which
alternate DPC sequence codes were determined. Please note that LTO60 returns an alternate
sequence code only if positions 37-44 of the EXITOP parameter are not blank.
The following is an example of the Control Totals Report.
Line of Travel Option
LTO60: Control Totals
Line of Travel Option Master File Version:
February 2013
Total Records Presented To Processing Logic
Records Processed
Valid Format ZIP Code Presented
Zero Or Non-numeric ZIP+4 Codes Presented
Valid Format ZIP+4 Code Presented
Non-numeric DPC Values Presented
Valid Format DPC Values Presented
Invalid Carrier Route Codes Presented
Valid Carrier Route Codes Presented
5,890
5,890
5,890
884
5,006
884
5,006
868
5,022
Line of Travel Matching Attempts
5,890
Records Not Matching Master File, Invalid Input
Records Not Matching Master File, Default Coded
Records Matching Line of Travel Master File
Line Of Travel Codes Determined
5,022
LOT Numbers with Ascending Sequence Codes 3,308
LOT Numbers with Descending Sequence Codes 4,703
Alternate DPC Sequence Codes Determined
Line of Travel Option
2/13/2013
5,022
LTO60: Control Totals
100.00%
100.00%
10.11%
84.99%
15.01%
84.99%
14.74%
85.26%
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
Total Records
Records Processed
Records Processed
Records Processed
Records Processed
Records Processed
Records Processed
Records Processed
868
319
4,703
14.74% of Matching Attempts
5.42% of Matching Attempts
79.85% of Matching Attempts
65.87% of LOT Numbers
34.13% of LOT Numbers
100.00% of LOT Coded Records
2/13/2013
Alternate Sequence Codes
This section describes how to sort your output records using the two types of alternate sequence
codes generated by the Line of Travel Option. It also provides a reference table for all potential
sequence codes.
Release 4.1.0
334
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sorting LOT Records Using Alternate Sequence Codes
Line of Travel can help you sort your output records in the sequence required by the USPS to obtain
the basic enhanced carrier route rate. Line of Travel returns two kinds of alternate sequence codes
that you can use when sorting your records prior to presorting your mailing using, for example, the
Pitney Bowes MailStream Plus software.
The Alternate Sequence Code(s) are normally obtained by using the LOTOUT parameter. If you are
using a call or EXITOP to get the Alternate Sequence Code(s), note that in order for Line of Travel to
return the alternate sequence codes, you must present a 2-character DPC add-on as input. If you
are accessing the program via the EXITOP parameter, you must also specify the location of the input
record DPC add-on by completing positions 29-32 on the EXITOP parameter, and you must specify
a location on the output record for one of the alternate sequence codes by completing positions 3740 or 41-44 on the EXITOP parameter.
Line of Travel uses the DPC add-on and the eLOT sequence code, which is either “A” for ascending
or “D” for descending, to determine the two alternate codes.
The alternate sequence code is a two-character code used to sort your file in ascending order only.
It consists of an uppercase letter followed by a digit 0 through 9. Values range from “A0” (99
descending) through “J9” (00 descending), and “K0” (00 ascending) through “T9” (99 ascending).
The hexadecimal sequence code is a single-character code, and it also allows you to sort your file in
ascending order only. There are 200 values ranging from 99 descending through 00 descending,
then 00 ascending through 99 ascending.
If you choose to use one of these codes to sort your file, you must sort your eLOT-coded records in
ascending order in the following sequence:
1. 5-digit ZIP Code
2. 4-byte Carrier Route Code
3. 4-digit Line of Travel Code

This includes only the numeric portion of the eLOT code. It does not include the eLOT
sequence code.
4. 4-byte ZIP + 4 Code
5. 2-byte Alternate Sequence Code or 1-character Hexadecimal Sequence Code

Release 4.1.0
Per USPS regulations, records with missing (blank) or invalid (0000) LOT information are to
be sorted to the end of the CRRT.
335
User’s Guide - IBM i
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sequence Code Table
This table provides a reference for potential sequence codes that correspond to a combination of the
2-digit DPC add-on, and the eLOT sequence code.
Sequence Codes (Part 1 of 8)
Sequence Order
Release 4.1.0
DPC add-on
eLOT
Sequence
Code
1-character
Hexadecimal
Sequence
Code
2-Byte
Alternate
Sequence
Code
001
99
D
X'21'
A0
002
98
D
X'22'
A1
003
97
D
X'23'
A2
004
96
D
X'24'
A3
005
95
D
X'25'
A4
006
94
D
X'26'
A5
007
93
D
X'27'
A6
008
92
D
X'28'
A7
009
91
D
X'29'
A8
010
90
D
X'2A'
A9
011
89
D
X'2B'
B0
012
88
D
X'2C'
B1
013
87
D
X'2D'
B2
014
86
D
X'2E'
B3
015
85
D
X'2F'
B4
016
84
D
X'30'
B5
017
83
D
X'31'
B6
018
82
D
X'32'
B7
019
81
D
X'33'
B8
020
80
D
X'34'
B9
021
79
D
X'35'
C0
022
78
D
x'36'
C1
023
77
D
X'37'
C2
024
76
D
X'38'
C3
025
75
D
X'39'
C4
336
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sequence Codes (Part 2 of 8)
Sequence Order
Release 4.1.0
DPC add-on
eLOT
Sequence
Code
1-character
Hexadecimal
Sequence
Code
2-Byte
Alternate
Sequence
Code
026
74
D
X'3A'
C5
027
73
D
X'3B'
C6
028
72
D
X'3C'
C7
029
71
D
X'3D'
C8
030
70
D
X'3E'
C9
031
69
D
X'3F'
D0
032
68
D
X'40'
D1
033
67
D
X'41'
D2
034
66
D
X'42'
D3
035
65
D
X'43'
D4
036
64
D
X'44'
D5
037
63
D
X'45'
D6
039
61
D
X'47'
D8
040
60
D
X'48'
D9
041
59
D
X'49'
E0
042
58
D
X'4A'
E1
043
57
D
X'4B'
E2
044
56
D
X'4C'
E3
045
55
D
X'4D'
E4
046
54
D
X'4E'
E5
047
53
D
X'4F'
E6
048
52
D
X'50'
E7
049
51
D
X'51'
E8
050
50
D
X'52'
E9
051
49
D
X'53'
F0
052
48
D
X'54'
F1
053
47
D
X'55'
F2
337
User’s Guide - IBM i
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sequence Codes (Part 3 of 8)
Sequence Order
Release 4.1.0
DPC add-on
eLOT
Sequence
Code
1-character
Hexadecimal
Sequence
Code
2-Byte
Alternate
Sequence
Code
054
46
D
X'56'
F3
055
45
D
X'57'
F4
056
44
D
X'58'
F5
057
43
D
X'59'
F6
058
42
D
X'5A'
F7
059
41
D
X'5B'
F8
060
40
D
X'5C'
F9
061
39
D
X'5D'
G0
062
38
D
X'5E'
G1
063
37
D
X'5F'
G2
064
36
D
X'60'
G3
065
35
D
X'61'
G4
066
34
D
X'62'
G5
067
33
D
X'63'
G6
068
32
D
X'64'
G7
069
31
D
X'65'
G8
070
30
D
X'66'
G9
071
29
D
X'67'
H0
072
28
D
X'68'
H1
073
27
D
X'69'
H2
074
26
D
X'6A'
H3
075
25
D
X'6B'
H4
076
24
D
X'6C'
H5
077
23
D
X'6D'
H6
078
22
D
X'6E'
H7
079
21
D
X'6F'
H8
080
20
D
X'70'
H9
338
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sequence Codes (Part 4 of 8)
Sequence Order
Release 4.1.0
DPC add-on
eLOT
Sequence
Code
1-character
Hexadecimal
Sequence
Code
2-Byte
Alternate
Sequence
Code
081
19
D
X'71'
I0
082
18
D
X'72'
I1
083
17
D
X'73'
I2
084
16
D
X'74'
I3
085
15
D
X'75'
I4
086
14
D
X'76'
I5
087
13
D
X'77'
I6
088
12
D
X'78'
I7
089
11
D
X'79'
I8
090
10
D
X'7A'
I9
091
09
D
x'7B'
J0
092
08
D
X'7C'
J1
093
07
D
X'7D'
J2
094
06
D
X'7E'
J3
095
05
D
X'7F'
J4
096
04
D
X'80'
J5
097
03
D
X'81'
J6
098
02
D
X'82'
J7
099
01
D
X'83'
J8
100
00
D
X'84'
J9
101
00
A
X'85'
K0
102
01
A
X'86'
K1
103
02
A
X'87'
K2
104
03
A
X'88'
K3
105
04
A
X'89'
K4
106
05
A
X'8A'
K5
107
06
A
X'8B'
K6
339
User’s Guide - IBM i
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sequence Codes (Part 5 of 8)
Sequence Order
Release 4.1.0
DPC add-on
eLOT
Sequence
Code
1-character
Hexadecimal
Sequence
Code
2-Byte
Alternate
Sequence
Code
108
07
A
X'8C'
K7
109
08
A
X'8D'
K8
110
09
A
X'8E'
K9
111
10
A
X'8F'
L0
112
11
A
X'90'
L1
113
12
A
X'91'
L2
114
13
A
X'92'
L3
115
14
A
X'93'
L4
116
15
A
X'94'
L5
117
16
A
X'95'
L6
118
17
A
X'96'
L7
119
18
A
X'97'
L8
120
19
A
X'98'
L9
121
20
A
X'99'
M0
122
21
A
X'9A'
M1
123
22
A
X'9B'
M2
124
23
A
X'9C'
M3
125
24
A
X'9D'
M4
126
25
A
X'9E'
M5
127
26
A
X'9F'
M6
128
27
A
X'A0'
M7
129
28
A
X'A1'
M8
130
29
A
X'A2'
M9
131
30
A
X'A3'
N0
132
31
A
X'A4'
N1
133
32
A
X'A5'
N2
134
33
A
X'A6'
N3
340
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sequence Codes (Part 6 of 8)
Sequence Order
Release 4.1.0
DPC add-on
eLOT
Sequence
Code
1-character
Hexadecimal
Sequence
Code
2-Byte
Alternate
Sequence
Code
135
34
A
X'A7'
N4
136
35
A
X'A8'
N5
137
36
A
X'A9'
N6
138
37
A
X'AA'
N7
139
38
A
X'AB'
N8
140
39
A
X'AC'
N9
141
40
A
X'AD'
O0
142
41
A
X'AE'
O1
143
42
A
X'AF'
O2
144
43
A
X'B0'
O3
145
44
A
X'B1'
O4
146
45
A
X'B2'
O5
147
46
A
X'B3'
O6
148
47
A
X'B4'
O7
149
48
A
X'B5'
O8
150
49
A
X'B6'
O9
151
50
A
X'B7'
P0
152
51
A
X'B8'
P1
153
52
A
X'B9'
P2
154
53
A
X'BA'
P3
155
54
A
X'BB'
P4
156
55
A
X'BC'
P5
157
56
A
X'BD'
P6
158
57
A
X'BE'
P7
159
58
A
X'BF'
P8
160
59
A
X'C0'
P9
161
60
A
X'C1'
Q0
341
User’s Guide - IBM i
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sequence Codes (Part 7 of 8)
Sequence Order
Release 4.1.0
DPC add-on
eLOT
Sequence
Code
1-character
Hexadecimal
Sequence
Code
2-Byte
Alternate
Sequence
Code
162
61
A
X'C2'
Q1
163
62
A
X'C3'
Q2
164
63
A
X'C4'
Q3
165
64
A
X'C5'
Q4
166
65
A
X'C6'
Q5
167
66
A
X'C7'
Q6
168
67
A
X'C8'
Q7
169
68
A
X'C9'
Q8
170
69
A
X'CA'
Q9
171
70
A
X'CB'
R0
172
71
A
X'CC'
R1
173
72
A
X'CD'
R2
174
73
A
X'CE'
R3
175
74
A
X'CF'
R4
176
75
A
X'D0'
R5
177
76
A
X'D1'
R6
178
77
A
X'D2'
R7
179
78
A
X'D3'
R8
180
79
A
X'D4'
R9
181
80
A
X'D5'
S0
182
81
A
X'D6'
S1
183
82
A
X'D7'
S2
184
83
A
X'D8'
S3
185
84
A
X'D9'
S4
186
85
A
X'DA'
S5
187
86
A
X'DB'
S6
188
87
A
X'DC'
S7
342
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 16: Using Line of Travel
Alternate Sequence Codes
Sequence Codes (Part 8 of 8)
Sequence Order
Release 4.1.0
DPC add-on
eLOT
Sequence
Code
1-character
Hexadecimal
Sequence
Code
2-Byte
Alternate
Sequence
Code
189
88
A
X'DD'
S8
190
89
A
X'DE'
S9
191
90
A
X'DF'
T0
192
91
A
X'E0'
T1
193
92
A
X'E1'
T2
194
93
A
X'E2'
T3
195
94
A
X'E3'
T4
196
95
A
X'E4'
T5
197
96
A
X'E5'
T6
198
97
A
X'E6'
T7
199
98
A
X'E7'
T8
200
99
A
X'E8'
T9
343
User’s Guide - IBM i
Alternate Sequence Codes
Release 4.1.0
344
User’s Guide - IBM i
Using Residential
Delivery Indicator (RDI)
In this chapter:




What is Residential Delivery File Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Building the Residential Delivery File in CODE-1 Plus. . . . . . . .346
Activating the RDI Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
RDI Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
17
What is Residential Delivery File Processing?
What is Residential Delivery File Processing?
The Residential Delivery Indicator is a licensed product of the USPS. Residential Delivery File (RDI)
processing can help you determine the best cost for shipping your packages based upon the fact
that some delivery services charge a higher price for delivery to a residential address than they do to
a business address. RDI processing can help you shop for the lowest delivery cost for a specific
address by identifying whether an address is listed as a business or a residential address in the
USPS Address Management Systems database.

You must license the raw RDI file directly from the USPS. RDI data is valid for CODE-1 Plus
processing for 105 days from the 1st day of the month of issue. For example, the July 2015
RDI data is valid for CODE-1 Plus processing starting on July 1, 2015 and expires on
October 14, 2015.
RDI is designed to be used in conjunction with CODE-1 Plus. It works similarly to the DPV process,
in that the RDI data is supplied as hash tables. However, it is a much simpler process than DPV in
that the standard hash algorithm is only determined for the 9-digit and 11-digit ZIP Code rather than
the entire address.
While this is called Residential Delivery Indicator, the Residential Delivery File also provides
information regarding business deliveries. The residential status of an input address to which a
ZIP+4 CODE is assigned is determined by the fact that it does not match to a record in either RDI
table.
Using the DPVOUT parameter, CODE-1 Plus provides flags that will allow you to determine between
a residential, business, or mixed (residential and/or business) address.
Building the Residential Delivery File in CODE-1 Plus
To use RDI in your CODE-1 Plus jobs, follow these steps.
1. Obtain the 9-digit and 11-digit hash tables on a CD-ROM from the USPS.
2. Run the program C1DBRDI to build the RDI masterfile.
3. Tell CODE-1 Plus you want to use the RDI option.
Each step is detailed below, with platform-specific detail where needed.
C1DBRDI Program
CODE-1 Plus provides the C1DBRDI program so you can build an RDI file as often as needed. This
program builds a Pitney Bowes-formatted file that will be accessed by the RDI lookup program.
To build the Residential Delivery Indicator with the RDI file, follow these steps.
1. Receive the latest RDI hash tables from the USPS.
2. Run C1DBRDI to build the RDI file.
3. Transfer the RDI file to the platform on which you are running.
Release 4.1.0
346
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 17: Using Residential Delivery Indicator (RDI)
Activating the RDI Option
Importing the RDI Files
1. Using FTP, transfer the files you received from the USPS to the IBM i. You can transfer the files
into the predefined RDI9IN and RDI11IN physical files in your product library (G1C1PGMS by
default) or create your own files with a record length of 24,566 bytes.
2. Select option 3, Import RDI Tables into Database, from the Database Functions menu (F20 from
the Work with Jobs screen).
3. Fill in RDI File Date, or leave blank to use the current date.
4. Specify your Input Files. If you have used the defaults noted in step 1, you should not need to
make any changes to the default values. If you have created your own files, specify their
locations here.
5. Specify your Output File. The default is to store RDIMSTR in your default database library. For
CODE-1 to find the file during job execution, it must be called RDIMSTR and be in the active
database library.
6. Press F6 to build the RDI file. After building the RDI file, the Database Functions screen
(C1CPDB01) displays.
7. Review the PRNTXLG spool file to ensure the file was successfully built.
8. When you finish using the database functions, press F3 to return to the Work with Jobs screen
(C1CPMM03).
Activating the RDI Option
After building the RDI file, you can use RDI in your CODE-1 Plus processing. Use the following
parameters to activate and define options for RDI processing.
DPVIN Parameter
Use the RDI Indicator field in position 52 of the DPVIN parameter to specify whether to perform RDI
processing. For more information on the DPVIN parameter, refer to "DPVIN" in your CODE-1 Plus
Reference Guide.
DPVOUT Parameter
Use the Location for Residential Flag field in positions 50-52 of the DPVOUT parameter to specify
the location on the output record for a 1-character Residential Flag. One of the following codes is
stored:
•
•
R — Yes, this address is a residential-only delivery point.
Blank — Not a residential delivery point.
For more information on the DPVOUT parameter, refer to "DPVOUT" in your CODE-1 Plus
Reference Guide/
Release 4.1.0
347
User’s Guide - IBM i
RDI Reports
PGMNAM Parameter
The RDI Large Memory Module (DPV040L) can improve speed during RDI processing. Please refer
to the PGMNAM parameter in your CODE-1 Plus Reference Guide for more information on using
DPV040L.
REPORT Parameter
Use the following REPORT parameter fields to define the RDI reports.
Position
42
Field Name
Residential Delivery
Indicator (RDI)
Processing Summary
Counts
Description
Optional. Specify a code to indicate whether to print the report:
• Y — Print RDI counts.
• N — Do not print RDI counts.
• Blank — Default is Y.
44
Residential Delivery
Indicator (RDI)
Processing Counts by
List Code
Optional. Specify a code to indicate whether to print the report:
• Y — Print the RDI List Code Report.
• N — Do not print the RDI List Code Report.
• Blank — Default is Y.
RDI Reports
You can print RDI processing results on the following reports:
•
•
•
•
Release 4.1.0
Delivery Point Validation Processing Summary Report
RDI Build Report
RDI Counts by List Code Report
Qualitative Statistical Summary (QSS) section of the PS Form 3553 includes the RDI counts
348
User’s Guide - IBM i
Auxiliary File Processing
In this chapter:






What is the Early Warning System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Auxiliary File Processing and EWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Building the Auxiliary File with the Early Warning System . . . .350
AUXIL Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Activating the Auxiliary File/Early Warning System File . . . . . .352
Auxiliary File Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
18
What is the Early Warning System?
What is the Early Warning System?
The Early Warning System (EWS) was devised by the USPS to prevent address records from
miscoding due to a delay in postal data reaching the USPS address matching files. The less recent
the ZIP+4 File, the higher potential you have for miscoding addresses. When a valid address is
miscoded because the address it matches to in the ZIP+4 File is inexact, it will result in what is
termed a “broken address.” Once an address is broken, the effect is permanent without manual
intervention.
Using the EWS Auxiliary File with CODE-1 Plus will prevent “broken addresses” from occurring.
EWS consists of records containing partial address information limited to the ZIP Code, street name,
pre- and post-directionals, and a suffix. For an address record to be EWS-eligible, it must be an
address not present on the most recent monthly production ZIP+4 File.
Auxiliary File Processing and EWS
CODE-1 Plus implements EWS through Auxiliary File processing. There are two steps to setting up
your auxiliary file. First, you must reformat the record into a structure recognizable by the CODE-1
Plus matching engine. Second, CODE-1 Plus must recognize the additional auxiliary file.
When you activate the Auxiliary File, addresses that match to the EWS File will not be coded.
CODE-1 Plus will report these records as neither matched nor mismatched records. Additionally,
addresses that match to the EWS file will appear on the Control Totals Report as “Confirmed via
Match to Auxiliary File.”


You must build the Auxiliary File using the C1AUXBLD program, supplied with your CODE-1
Plus software.
The USPS refreshes the EWS file on a weekly basis (Thursdays). You can download the
EWS file from at the USPS RIBBS web site https://ribbs.usps.gov/cassmass/documents/
tech_guides/. It is a line sequential file containing 3950 records and is about 345 KB in size.
However, the number of records and file size is subject to change.
Building the Auxiliary File with the Early Warning System
There are three major steps you must perform to use EWS in your CODE-1 Plus jobs:
•
•
•
•
Step 1 — Download the latest EWS File onto the NT/Windows machine. This file can be found
on at the USPS RIBBS web site https://ribbs.usps.gov/cassmass/documents/tech_guides/.
Step 2 — Unzip the downloaded file to extract the EWS raw data.
Step 3 — Translate the downloaded EWS File into a form that is recognized by CODE-1 Plus by
using the C1AUXBLD utility.
Step 4 — Tell CODE-1 Plus you want to use the translated EWS database, the Auxiliary File, in
your job by using the AUXIL1 parameter.
Each step is detailed below, with platform-specific detail where needed.
Release 4.1.0
350
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 18: Auxiliary File Processing
AUXIL Parameter
C1AUXBLD Utility Program
CODE-1 Plus provides the C1AUXBLD utility program so you can build an EWS file as often as
needed. This utility builds a Pitney Bowes-formatted file that will be utilized by the EWS module/
lookup program.
To build the Auxiliary File with the EWS File:
1. Download the latest EWS File from at the USPS RIBBS web site https://ribbs.usps.gov/
cassmass/documents/tech_guides/.
2. Unzip the file and transfer it to the platform on which you are running CODE-1 Plus.

For non-PC-based platforms, convert to a fixed length file with a record length of 89
bytes. Also, if transferring to a mainframe platform, be sure the character set is converted
to EBCDIC. There are approximately 4,000 records on the EWS file, which are subject to
change.
Building Your Auxiliary File
To build your Auxiliary File, follow these steps:
1. Create a file (CRTPF) on your IBM i with a record length of 89.
2. FTP or otherwise upload the EWS file into the file you just created.
3. From the Work With Jobs screen, press F20 to access the Database Functions screen.
4. Select Option 9: Convert EWS file into CODE-1 Plus format.
5. On the next screen, fill in the Input EWS file parameters with the name of the file you created.
The output file is automatically placed in your database library. The Output File and Address
Element Locations are not changeable at this time.
6. Press F6 to run the conversion. When you return to the menu, your file has been successfully
converted and can be used as input to your CODE-1 job using the AUXIL1 parameter.
AUXIL Parameter
The AUXIL parameter is used with the C1AUXBLD program, and is used to define the field positions
on the input Auxiliary File. This parameter comprises the following:
•
•
•
•
Input file number and format
5-Digit ZIP location
Street name/address line length and location
Street suffix, pre-directional, post-directional, house range, secondary range, and secondary
designator locations.
Fields on the AUXIL Parameter (Part 1 of 2)
Position
Field Name
Description
Comments
1-5
Keyword
AUXIL is the only acceptable entry.
Required.
6
Number of the Input File
Only numbers 1 through 9 are acceptable in
this position.
Required.
Release 4.1.0
351
User’s Guide - IBM i
Activating the Auxiliary File/Early Warning System File
Fields on the AUXIL Parameter (Part 2 of 2)
Position
8
Field Name
Format Of Input
Parameter
Description
Code indicating the format type of your input
parameter. Choose one of the following
codes:
• A — Street, Suffix, and Directionals in a
single address line.
Comments
Required.
• E — Address elements separate.
10-12
Location of 5-digit ZIP
Code
Location on the input record of the 5-digit ZIP
Code.
Optional.
14-16
Location of Street Name/
address Line
Location on the input record of the street
name or address line.
Optional.
18-19
Length of Street Name/
address Line
Length of the street name or address line.
Optional.
21-23
Location of Street Suffix
Location on the input record of the street
suffix.
Optional.
25-27
Location of Predirectional
Location on the input record of the predirectional information.
Optional.
29-31
Location of Postdirectional
Location on the input record of the postdirectional information.
Optional.
33-35
Location of House
Range
Location on the input record of 20-character
house range formatted as 10-character low
range followed by 10-character high range.
NOTE: If there is no house range information
in the input record, populate this field with
leading zeros.
Optional.
37-39
Location of Secondary
Range
Location on the input record of 16-character
secondary range formatted as 8-character
low range followed by 8-character high
range.
NOTE: If there is no secondary range
information in the input record, populate this
field with leading zeros.
Optiona.l
41-43
Location of Secondary
Designator
Location on the input record of the secondary
designator.
Optional.
Activating the Auxiliary File/Early Warning System File
Auxiliary File matching is only available through the CODE-1 Plus batch driver (C1BM00), the
callable batch driver (C1BMCBD), or a user-defined program calling the batch matcher C1MATCHx.
When calling C1MATCHx through a user-defined program, you must populate P9IAUX as defined in
the Input Call Area (P9IN).
EWS With C1BM00
Use the Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen to create the AUXIL1 parameter record and indicate the
location and usage of the EWS file during job submission.
To access the Submit CODE-1 Plus Job screen (C1CPSB09):
1. From the Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPDS02), select Submit Batch Job.
Release 4.1.0
352
User’s Guide - IBM i
Chapter 18: Auxiliary File Processing
Activating the Auxiliary File/Early Warning System File
2. From the Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPSB01), page down to the Submit CODE-1 Plus Job
(C1CPSB09).
3. Use the following table to complete the fields on the Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPSB09).
Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job Screen 9 Fields
Field Name
Description
Use Auxiliary Reference File?
Required. Choose one of the following:
• Y — Yes, you would like to use your Auxiliary Reference File.
• N — No, you would not like to use your Auxiliary Reference File.
• Blank - Default is Y.
File Location
Optional. Code indicating where to write the auxiliary file in the output:
• N — Write record to the NCO file.
• C — Write record to the COK file.
• Blank — Default is N.
Function Keys
Submit CODE-1 Plus™ Job Screen 9 Function Keys
Function Key
Name
Description
F3
Exit
Exit from the EWS File Conversion screen, without saving
the data.
F6
Submit
Submit this job.
F7
Parm Test
Submit this job to only test the parameter records that have
been generated for this job.
F8
Run BUILD Report
Submit the Build Report job.
If CODE-1 Plus detects an EWS file in the database library, the filename is automatically filled in,
and CODE-1 Plus will create an override for G1C1AUX.
EWS When Calling C1MATCHx or C1BMCBD
When calling C1MATCHx through a user-defined program, you must populate P9IAUX as defined in
the Input Call Area (P9IN).
When using C1BMCBD to activate and match to the Auxiliary File, you must include the AUXIL1
parameter in your CODE-1 Plus batch job. This is not the same parameter used in the C1AUXBLD
program. The AUXIL1 parameter for the
CODE-1 Plus batch driver is as follows:
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5
AUXIL1............................................
When calling C1MATCHx or C1BMCBD, you must make the Auxiliary File known to CODE-1 Plus by
defining it in your job control set-up script as G1C1AUX. This file definition should be overridden to
the file you created using the C1AUXBLD program described earlier in this chapter.

Release 4.1.0
The Auxiliary matcher is not available as a stand-alone program or as a callable routine.
353
User’s Guide - IBM i
Auxiliary File Reports
Auxiliary File Reports
In this section, we describe the two reports that are generated when using the Auxiliary File Option
in CODE-1 Plus.
Auxiliary File Build (C1AUXBLD) Reports
The Auxiliary File Build program (C1AUXBLD), generates a standard Pitney Bowes job report
(PRNTRPT) and an execution log (PRNTXLG). The report lists the parameter given and the control
totals for the job. The execution log shows when the job started and ended. You should check both
reports for any error messages.

Because of the way the Auxiliary File is built for use by CODE-1 Plus, the number of records
read will not equal the number of physical records written to the output G1C1AUX Auxiliary
File.
Auxiliary File Build Report
You will find the following information on this report:
•
•
Parameter given
Control totals for your Auxiliary File build job
Auxiliary File Build Execution Log
You will find the following information on the execution log:
•
•
•
•
The date and time of the Auxiliary File build
The number of records read
The number of virtual records written
The number of physical records written
Auxiliary File Reporting in the CODE-1 Plus Matcher
There are no new or separate reports from the CODE-1 Plus matcher as a result of Auxiliary File
matching. The records presented to the CODE-1 Plus matcher that match to the Auxiliary File will
show on a new line of the Control Totals Report under the heading “Confirmed via Match to Auxiliary
File.” These records will not be included in the counts for any of the following major headings on the
Control Totals Report:
•
•
•
Total records for which Address Match attempted
Total Unmatched Records
Total Records successfully Matched.
Another new report line, “Total records Matched to EWS,” will appear on the Control Totals Report
when there are EWS matching records. This count will also appear on the PS Form 3553 in Section
E under the heading of EWS.
Release 4.1.0
354
User’s Guide - IBM i
Glossary
Alphabetic character
Any one of the letters A through Z (upper case and lower case).
Alphanumeric character
Any one of the alphabetic characters, or any one of the digits 0 through 9.
Batch job
A batch job consists of a predefined group of processing actions that are done with little or no
interaction between a user and the system. A user puts the batch job on a job queue (or list), where
it waits until the system is ready for it.
Bit
A unit of data used to make up the bytes of information to be used in processing. Either of the binary
digits 0 or 1.
Byte
A group of 8 adjacent bits. In the EBCDIC and ASCII coding systems, 1 byte represents a character,
such as 1 letter in the alphabet. In the double-byte coding system, 2 bytes represent a character.
Character
Any letter, number or other symbol in the data character set that is part of the organization, control,
or representation of data.
Carrier code
A code assigned to each address on a mail carrier’s route.
Coded output file
Output file that contains processed records coded with ZIP + 4 and/or carrier route codes.
Constant
Data that has an unchanging, predefined value to be used in processing. A constant does not
change during the running of the program, while the contents of a field or variable can.
Customer file
An input or output file that contains customer’s names and addresses.
Default value
A value supplied by the system that is used when no other value is specified by the user.
Directional
A prefix or suffix on an address that identifies a direction. Predirectionals precede street names,
such as W. Terry Avenue. Post directionals follow street names, such as 23 Democracy Avenue,
NW.
Dropped address information
Address elements dropped during the matching process.
Embedded blank
A space between the characters in a unit of data.
Exit routine
Programming that enables another routine or module, separate from CODE-1 Plus, to execute a
series of operations and then return to CODE-1 Plus.
Release 4.1.0
355
User’s Guide - IBM i
Glossary
Field
A group of related characters (such as a name or amount) that are treated as a unit in a record.
File
A generic term for a set of related records treated as a unit.
Firm name
The company name associated with an address.
General delivery
Mail picked up at post offices by customers who do not use a post office box.
High-rise delivery point
An address in an apartment or office building that accepts mail for tenants or companies within the
building.
Highway contract route
A mail route assigned to a private carrier on a contract basis. The post office sometimes assigns
contracts for sparsely populated rural areas.
Input file
Contains variable data used for input. It is typically a name-and-address file, but may contain any
type of data. The input file is described by the user. It may have any file attributes and may reside on
either disk, diskette, or tape.
Invalid ZIP Code File
Output file that contains addresses that have invalid ZIP Codes.
Job description
A set of characters that defines how the system handles a job.
Job queue
A waiting list. In this case, a list of the jobs waiting for processing.
Library
An object on disk that serves as a directory of other objects. A library groups related objects, and
enables you to find objects by name.
Leading zeros
Zeroes that are place-holders to the left of numbers that are right-aligned and smaller than the
specified field length.
List codes
A generic term for codes placed next to records in a file. A list code might be used to sort records or
perform other operations that require codes to identify like records.
Match attempts
Number of tries the system made to match the input address.
Matching algorithm
Program logic that controls address matching.
Member
Different files within a library.
National character
One of the characters $, @, #, or _ (underscore).
Numeric character
Any one of the digits 0 through 9.
Release 4.1.0
356
User’s Guide - IBM i
Glossary
Packed data
Data that is in a packed decimal format.
Packed field
A field that contains data in packed decimal format.
Packed decimal format
Representation of a decimal value in which each byte within a field represents two numeric digits
except the rightmost byte, which contains one digit in bits 0 through 3 and the sign in bits 4 through
7. For all other bytes, bits 0 through 3 represent one digit; bits 4 through 7 represent one digit. For
example, the decimal value for +123 would be represented as 0001 0010 0011 1100 in binary
notation, or X'123C' in hexadecimal notation. Note that some computers use alternative
representations for packed decimal numbers.
Parameter
Data passed to or received from another program.
Record
A collection of related data or words, treated as a unit, such as one name, address, and telephone
number.
Record layout
Layout of a record, showing all the fields it contains along with each field's length, type, and position
in the record.
Record position
The position in a record where a field is located.
Record types
The Postal Service categorizes addresses and assigns each category a code called a record type.
For example a rural route is assigned a record type of “R.”
Return codes
Codes produced by the system that indicate matching success and either changes made or
discrepancies found in the input address during matching.
Rural route
A delivery route operated in communities lacking convenient postal facilities and maintained by area
residents.
Uncoded output file
Output file that contains processed records left uncoded with either ZIP + 4 or carrier route codes.
ZIP Code
A 5-digit code identifying the post office or delivery station associated with an address.
ZIP + 4 Code
A 4-digit code added to a ZIP Code. The first two digits designate a sector that corresponds to a
portion of a zone, rural route, several city blocks, or a large building. A company on one floor of a
large office building can have its own ZIP + 4 Code.
Release 4.1.0
357
User’s Guide - IBM i
Glossary
Release 4.1.0
358
User’s Guide - IBM i
Index
Symbols
Address Match Screen 252
Address Stack Screen 266
capabilities 234
Delivery Sequence Footnotes Screen 253
Dropped Information/Base Address Screen 254
example work session 244
Expanded Return Codes Screen 255
Geocoder Information Screen 255
Match Settings Screen 256
Multiple Elements Screen 257
Parsed Elements Screen 258
Return Codes Screen 259
Statistics Screen 264
Address Probable Correctness field
batch reference 124
example 199
Address Stack Screen 266
Address standardization 14
example 15
what is it all about? 14
Addressing conventions 14
Address-Match Execution Statistics Report
example 221
Administration Sign-on Screen (Interactive) 275
Alias street name
defined 112
Alias type code
defined 113
storage location 113
Alias/base return code
defined 112
storage location 112
Alternate Address Scheme Indicator field
batch reference 122–123
Alternate city name, defined 269
Alternate sequence code 335
Analysis of Matched Records Report
example 223
Apartment designator 15
Apartment Designator field
batch reference 116
Apartment number 15
Apartment Number field
batch reference 116
Apartment Return Code field
batch reference 122–123
example 198
Apartments at a House Range Screen
(Interactive) 268
"Exitop" Screen (C1CPSB06)
fields 158
A
Accept Multiple Matches field
batch reference 152
Accessing
interactive system 241
Accessing Line of Travel 326
Activate Z4CHANGE Option Screen (C1CPID12)
fields 84
Activating the Auxiliary File/Early Warning
System File Option 352
additional 15
Additional Address Match Information Storage
Screen (C1CPOD22)
fields 217
Address
dropped information 17
normalized 17
standardized 17
what is an address? 15
when no match is found 17
Address and ZIP Code Locations Screen
(C1CPID10)
fields 160, 353
function keys 353
using 187
Address elements
apartment designator 15
apartment number 15
defined 15
house number 15
leading directional 15
rural route or highway contract numbers 15
rural route or highway contract route type 15
rural route, highway contract, or P.O. box
numbers 15
street name 15
suffix 15
trailing directional 15
Address Match Information Storage Screen
(C1CPOD22)
using 198
Address Match Screen (Interactive) 252
Address matching function (interactive
environment)
Release 4.1.0
359
User’s Guide - IBM i
Ascending/descending sequence 326
Automatically printed reports 231
Address-Match Execution Statistics 221
Control Totals 222, 230
Execution Log 223
Parameter Record Listing 223
AUXIL Parameter 351
AUXIL1 Screen (C1CPSB09)
example 160
fields 160, 353
function keys 353
Auxiliary File Build (C1AUXBLD) Reports 354
Auxiliary File Build Execution Log 354
Auxiliary File Build Report 354
Auxiliary File Reporting in the CODE-1 Plus
Matcher 354
Auxiliary File Reports 354
defined 17
Stage 1 tape 18
Stage 2 tape 18
CASS Configuration suffix 154
CASSA1 Screen (C1CPSB07)
fields 159
CCD
See Census County Division 170
Census Block Group field
batch reference 167
Census County Division
storage location 170
Census GEOCODE field
batch reference 167
Census tract field
batch reference 167
Cities in a State Screen (Interactive) 268
Cities in a ZIP Code Screen (Interactive) 269
City and State Storage Screen (C1CPOD20)
using 197
City Information Screen (Interactive) 270
City name
alternate 269
short 269
City Name (short form) field
batch reference 118
City Type, defined 269
CMRA 292
CODE-1 Plus
database 17
using other Pitney Bowes products 21
CODE-1 Plus database
installing 65
CODE-1 Plus Identifier field
batch reference 158
Coded output file
review sample jobs 206, 208
Command field
in interactive system 236
Commands
C1RUNJOB 44
C1SBMJOB 44, 48
commercial mail receiving agency 292
Concatenated commands
using in interactive system 250
Condition field
Normalized Address 128
Confidence code
storage location 170
Control Totals Report
example 222, 230
Converting EWS file into CODE-1 Plus format 75
Corrected or confirmed ZIP Code field
example 192
Correcting uncoded records
G1CPNBC user exit program 281
in interactive system 235, 245
interactive system 281
County and Congressional Storage Option
screen (C1CPOD21)
fields 120
County Code (FIPS) 167
B
Base street name
defined 112
Batch system
C1BM00 standard driver 22
C1BM00XL driver program (additional list
codes) 22
screen components 24
Block Group (Census) 167
Box Number field
batch reference 116
Building
RDI file 346
C
C1AUXBLD Utility Program 351
C1BM00 driver program
batch system 22
C1BM00XL driver program
batch system (additional list codes) 22
C1DBRDI
RDI utility program
definition 346
C1RUNJOB 44
command 44
C1SBMJOB 48
command 44, 48
Submit jobs screen 48
Callable modules
overview 28
Callable subroutine
LTO10 callable subroutine 326
Calling Z4CHANGE
from your own driver 288
Carrier Route 326
Carrier Route Code field
batch reference 104, 106
example 193
Carrier Route Storage Screen (C1CPOD12)
using 193
CASS
certification 231
certifying your configurations 18
Release 4.1.0
360
User’s Guide - IBM i
County Name field
batch reference 168, 170
Create New Job Screen (C1CPNJ01)
example 180
Create Reduced Database screen
changing your selections 63
how to access 60
Creating a new job
steps to follow 179
Creating the reduced database 65
Delivery Point Validation database
installing
Windows NT 306
verify the install 311
Delivery Point Validation processing
expiration of 296
Delivery Point Validation Screen (C1CPID18)
example 94
Delivery Sequence File (DSF) footnotes
explained 124
Delivery Sequence Footnotes Screen
(Interactive) 253
Directional Return Code field
batch reference 121
example 198
Directional/Suffix Comparison field
batch reference 152
Disposition field
for non-stored Standardized Address 113
for non-stored ZIP + 4 Code 109
for non-stored ZIP Code 104, 106
Disposition indicator 100
Domestic Mail Manual 292, 326
Domestic Mail Manual (DMM) 17
DPBC Add-on with Check-Digit field
batch reference 107
DPV
Getting started with 293
License Management 293
DPV database
installing
Windows NT 306
verify the install 311
DPV errors
interactive 252
DPV Large Memory Module 348
DPV message
interactive 252
DPV Parameters and Return Codes 294–295
DPV processing
expiration of 296
improving speed of 348
DPV Processing Summary Report 296
DPV010L 348
DPVIN Parameter 294, 347
DPVOUT Parameter 295
Dropped Information field
batch reference 128
Dropped Information/Base Address Screen
(Interactive) 254
Dual Address Match Logic field
batch reference 153
D
Database
for CODE-1 Plus 17
for Z4CHANGE 286
installing 65
Database expiration 30
and interactive matcher 235
Database functions
changing selections of 63
reducing the CODE-1 Plus database 60
what are they? 58
Database functions menu
how to access 58
Database functions screen
example 59
Database information
displaying 73
Database inquiry function (interactive system)
Apartments at a House Range Screen 268
capabilities 234
Cities in a State Screen 268
Cities in a ZIP Code Screen 269
City Information Screen 270
defined 27
Firms on a Street Screen 270
Houses on a Street Screen 271
in interactive system 236
information displayed 234
Streets in a City Screen 272
Database Library field
batch reference 143
DATE field (HEADER) 71
Date for all Reports field
batch reference 219
Decimal fraction field
batch reference 156
Default database library
changing 74
Defaults for print output
steps to follow 182
Defaults for Print Output component
description 24
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen
(C1CPDS01)
example 41, 181
Defining input
steps to follow 185
Delivery Point Validation
Getting started with 293
License Management 293
Release 4.1.0
E
Early Warning System
what is it? 350
Enhanced Alternate Highrise Match
storage options
SA2OUT parameter record 115
Enhanced Carrier Route 292, 326
EWS
361
User’s Guide - IBM i
what is it? 350
EWS file
converting into CODE-1 Plus format 75
EWS File Conversion Screen (C1CPDB01)
example 75
Executable programs
overview 29
Executing Line of Travel 326
Execution Log
example 223
Exit routine
LTO60 exit routine 326
Exit Routine field
input 142
invalid-ZIP output file 148
successfully coded output file 145–146
uncoded records file 149
Exit Routine Name field
batch reference 158
Exit routines
input, defined 139
output, defined 139
Expanded Return Codes Screen (Interactive) 255
Expired database 30
bypassing 30
using with interactive system 235
EXTADDR2, short description 28
for output ZIP + 4 Code 107–108
for vintage date 84
of ZIP + 4 Add-on for GEOCODING 165
of ZIP Code for GEOCODING 165
Fraction of Records field
batch reference 157
Function keys
description and example 34
in interactive system 236
G
G1C1AUX 353
G1CPBNC user exit program
correcting uncoded records (interactive system)
281
for correcting uncoded records 284
G1CPFDF 280
General Return Code field
batch reference 121
example 198
Generating reports
for Z4CHANGE processing 289
Geocoder Information Screen (Interactive) 255
Geographic Coding Definition Screens
Accessing 163
Geographic Coding Plus
Additional Geographic Coding Storage Screen
(C1CPG913) 163
Geographic Coding Plus/System 234, 241, 244
overview picture of screens 163
Geographic Coding System Interface
(Interactive) 272
GeoTAX Key 275
GeoTAX Key Return Code 275
GeoTAX Output Key field
batch reference 171
GeoTAX Return Code field
batch reference 171
Getting Started with Delivery Point Validation
293
F
False/Positive
seed record
report 296
False/Positive Table
reporting a match 298
Field 236
Fields
description and example 34
File names 23
Files created for CODE-1 Plus jobs 42
FIPS County Code field
batch reference 167
FIPS State Code field
batch reference 167
Firm Name Comparison field
batch reference 152
Firm name matching
changing 152
Firm-name Match Score field
batch reference 124
example 198
Firm-name Return Code field
batch reference 122–123
Firms on a Street Screen (Interactive) 270
First Interactive Customization Screen
(Interactive) 276
Footer Lines field
batch reference 220
Footers, defining
steps to follow 184
Format field
for output City/State 117
Release 4.1.0
H
Handbooks, USPS
Domestic Mail Manual (DMM) 17
Header Lines field
batch reference 220
HEADER parameter record
DATE 71
Headers, defining
steps to follow 184
Heading for all Reports field
batch reference 219
Help
online for screens 35
Hexadecimal sequence code 335
High ZIP Code field
batch reference 156
example 205
Highway contract or rural route
numbers 15
type 15
362
User’s Guide - IBM i
Hold on job queue field
batch reference 142
House number 15
House Number field
batch reference 115
Houses on a Street Screen (Interactive) 271
online help 237
overview picture 26
Parsed Elements Screen 258
querying the database 243
Return Codes Screen 259
screen components 236
Second Interactive Customization Screen 278
site customization file (G1CPFDF) 280
Statistics Screen 264
Streets in a City Screen 272
using concatenated commands 250
using with expired database 235
Invalid-ZIP Output File (name) field
batch reference 147
Invoking Line of Travel 326
I
IDS installation
preparing the database library 67
Include/Exclude Option field
batch reference 157
Input
defining to CODE-1 Plus 189
exit routines 139
Input N/A file field
batch reference 142
example 40, 180
Input record
reformat 24, 97
Install CODE-1 Plus Database screen
example 65
Installing
CODE-1 Plus database 65
DPV database
verify the install 311
Windows NT 306
Interactive Screen Reference
GeoTAX Key 275
Interactive site customization
Administration Sign-on screen 275
First Interactive Customization screen 276
Second Interactive Customization screen 278
Interactive system
accessing 241
Address Match Screen 252
address matching 26, 234, 237
Address Stack Screen 266
Administration Sign-on Screen 275
Apartments at a House Range Screen 268
Cities in a State Screen 268
Cities in a ZIP Code Screen 269
City Information Screen 270
Command field 236
correcting uncoded records 235, 245
database inquiry 27, 234, 236
Delivery Sequence Footnotes Screen 253
description 26
Dropped Information/Base Address Screen 254
example work session 241
Expanded Return Codes Screen 255
Firms on a Street Screen 270
First Interactive Customization Screen 276
function keys 236
Geocoder Information Screen 255
Houses on a Street Screen 271
introduction to 234
match results 236
Match Settings Screen 256
matching an address 242, 244
Multiple Elements Screen 257
Release 4.1.0
J
Job description field
example 40, 180
for input N/A file 142
Job ID field
description and example 33
Job name field
batch reference 142
L
LACS/Link Option
overview 14
LACS/Link processing
processing
described 304
LACSLink
using Interactive processing 307–308
Latitude 169–170
Latitude/Longitude Level Indicator field
batch reference 168
Latitude/Longitude level indicator field
batch reference 170
Leading directional 15
Leading Directional field
batch reference 115
Length field
for normalized address 128
for output city name 117
for output City/State line 117
for output record length 144
for output Street Name 116
Library (Job description) field
batch reference 142
Library field
for input N/A file 40, 142, 180
for job description 40, 180
invalid-ZIP output file 147
successfully coded output files 144–145
uncoded records file 148–149
Library for job objects field
example 40, 180
License Management
DPV processing 293
Limit Input Screen (C1CPSB90)
fields 155–156
363
User’s Guide - IBM i
Line of Travel
accessing 326
executing 326
LTO10 callable subroutine 326
LTO60 exit routine 327
output records 326
Line of Travel code
LOT code 326
Line of Travel number 326, 335
Line of Travel sequence code 326
Line Side
UFTxx parameter record 71
UHDxx parameter record 71
LINE SIDE field
(UFTxx) 71
(UHDxx) 71
Lines-per-page
PAGESZ parameter record 71
LINES-PER-PAGE field (PAGESZ) 71
List codes
processing up to 10,000 list codes (C1BM00XL
driver program) 22
reporting on 200
List Processor/Mailer Information Screen
(C1CPID15)
fields 92
Location field
Position field
batch reference 116
Location for Delivery Point Barcode (DPBC) field
batch reference 166
Location Method field
example 187–188
Location, Length for House Number field
(Rooftop Matching)
batch reference 166
Longitude 169–170
Looseness/tightness settings
in interactive matching 234
LOT code 292, 326
defined 326
LOT coded records
alternate sequence code 327
hexadecimal sequence code 327
Sorting 327
Low ZIP Code field
batch reference 156
example 205
limiting processing with 140
Match Settings Screen (Interactive) 256
Matching an address 242, 244
Max Address Correctness for Storage field
batch reference 153
Maximum address correctness
defined 101
Maximum Correctness for Storage field
city and state storage options 119
match configuration options 153
standardized address storage options 113
ZIP + 4 Add-on storage options 108
ZIP Code storage options 104–105
Maximum Overall Correctness for Storage field
batch reference 154
MCD
See Minor Civil Division 170
Member field
for input N/A file 40, 142, 180
invalid-ZIP output file 148
successfully coded output file 144–145
uncoded records file 149
Minor Civil Division
storage location 170
Mixed Case Option field
batch reference 153
Move Output Data Screen (C1CPOD26)
fields 130
Moving to a line
in interactive system 239
MSA Code field
batch reference 168, 170
MSA Name field
batch reference 168, 170
multiple conditions 292
Multiple Elements Screen (Interactive) 257
N
NAIC 14
Name/Address File Layout component
description 24
Name/Address Record Posting component
description 24
National Address Information Center 14
National Deliverability Index (NDI) Report
example 230
NDI
See National Delivery Index (NDI) Report 230
New Job ID field
example 39, 180
Normalized address
description 17
Normalized Address field
batch reference 128
Nth Number of Records to Process field
batch reference 157
M
Master file vintage date
defined 84
Match
reporting a seed record 298
Match Configuration Screen (C1CPSB04)
fields 152
Match level
for geographic coding 167
Match results
in interactive system 236
Release 4.1.0
O
Online help 35
interactive system 237
Open Systems Series
Geographic Coding Plus Screen 163
364
User’s Guide - IBM i
Open/Read failure
DPV 297
Output exit routine 139
Output record
reformat 25
Output records 326
Overall Probable Correctness field
batch reference 122–123
example 198
Override print file page size field
batch reference 219
Overview picture
interactive system 26
example 229
Processing Summary Report
DPV 296
Produce Invalid-ZIP output file (indicator) field
batch reference 145, 147
Produce Statistics Output File (indicator) field
example 205
Produce Uncoded Output File (indicator) field
batch reference 148
example 204
Program modules
overview 27
Program parameters
for correcting uncoded records 283
Puerto Rican addressing
urbanization names 85
P
P9IAUX 352–353
PAGESZ parameter record
LINES-PER-PAGE 71
Parameter Record Listing
example 223
Parsed Elements Screen (Interactive) 258
PFKEYS (Interactive)
Definition of 279
Place code (Geographic Coding Plus)
storage location 170
Place name (Geographic Coding Plus)
storage location 170
PMB 292
PMBs
standardizing 16
Position field
Delivery Point Bar Code 107
DPBC Add-on 107
for normalized address 128
for output address elements 116
for output city name 117–118
for output City/State line 117
for output Street Name 115
of ZIP Code for GEOCODING 165
output address elements 116
Postal Addressing Standards 14
Postal Form 3553 231
Preferred city name, defined 269
private mail boxes 292
Private Mailboxes
normalizing 16
standardizing 16
PRIZM
Cluster code storage location 170
Cluster name storage location 170
Social group code storage location 170
Social group name storage location 171
Probable correctness
and the Analysis of Matched Records report 223
explained 101
return code 122–123
Processing Summary by 3-digit ZIP Code Report
example 229
Processing Summary by List Code Report
example 229
Processing Summary by State Report
Release 4.1.0
Q
Quality addressing 14
Querying the database
in interactive system 240, 243
R
R777 Carrier Route 108
RDI
definition of 346
RDI processing
building the RDI File step-by-step 346
building your RDI file 346
Specifying location for RDI flag 347
RDI utility program
C1DBRDI 346
Record Length for Output Files field
batch reference 144
Record limit field
batch reference 156
Records to Skip field
batch reference 156
Reduced database
creating 65
how to specify the library 61
selecting states 61
Reducing the database 60
Reformat Input Record component
description 24
Reformat Input Record Screen (C1CPMI13) 97
Reformat Output Record component
description 25
Replace Input? field
batch reference 117
example 195
Report Selection component
description 25
Report Selection Screen (C1CPRP10)
using 201
Reporting a match
seed record 298
Reports
Address-Match Execution Statistics 221
Analysis of Matched Records 223
coded output file, sample 206, 208
365
User’s Guide - IBM i
Control Totals 222, 230
Control Totals Report 222, 230
Execution Log 223
National Deliverability Index (NDI) Report 230
Parameter Record Listing 223
printed automatically 231
printing 212
Processing Summary by 3-digit ZIP 229
Processing Summary by List Code 229
Processing Summary by State 229
required 212
uncoded output file 209
USPS Form 3553 17, 231
Residential Delivery File processing
building the RDI file step-by-step 346
building your RDI file 346
C1DBRDI 346
definition of 346
Return a Vanity City Name field
batch reference 152
Return code
for alias street name type 113
for alias/base street name 112
Return code for alias street name type
batch reference 113
example 112
Return code for alias/base street name
batch reference 112
Return Code for Carrier Route storage field
batch reference 105
example 193
Return Code for City/State Storage field
batch reference 117
example 197
Return Code for level of ZIP Code match field
for geographic coding 167
Return Code for Standardized Address storage
field
example 195
Return code for Z4CHANGE processing
batch reference 108
example 108
Return Code for ZIP + 4 Storage field
example 194
Return Code for ZIP + 4 storage field
batch reference 107
Return Code for ZIP Code storage field
example 192
Return codes
address probable correctness 124
for apartment 122–123
for city/state line 117
for directional 121
for firm name 122–123
for street suffix 122–123
for Z4CHANGE processing 108
for ZIP + 4 Code 107
general 121
match score 122–123
overall probable correctness 122–123
Return Codes Screen (Interactive) 259
Return ZIP When Not Correlated to City/State
Release 4.1.0
field
batch reference 153
Rooftop Access Method field
batch reference 165
RR/HC Number field
batch reference 116
RR/HC Type field
batch reference 116
Rural route or highway contract numbers 15
Rural route or highway contract route type 15
Rural Route/Highway Contract
RR/HC 116
S
SA2OUT parameter record
ENHANCED ALTERNATE HIGHRISE MATCH
STORAGE OPTIONS 115
Screen (Batch)
Print Output Screen (C1CPPX01) 218
Screen components 31
for batch system 24
for interactive system 236
Screens (Batch)
Activate Z4CHANGE Option Screen
(C1CPID30) 84
Additional Address Match Information Storage
(C1CPOD23) 124, 126, 132
Additional Geographic Coding Storage
(C1CPG912) 168
Additional Geographic Coding Storage
(C1CPG913) 169
Additional Input File Information (C1CPID20) 83
Address Element Storage (C1CPOD18) 115
Address Match Information Storage
(C1CPOD22) 120
Carrier Route Storage (C1CPOD12) 105
CASSA 1, CASSA 4, CASSA 7 (C1CPSB08)
158, 160
City and State Storage (C1CPOD20) 117
City and State Storage Options (C1CPOD21)
118
Confirmation Options (C1CPID50) 88
County and Congressional Storage Option
(C1CPOD21) screen 120
Create New Job (C1CPNJ01) 180
Define headers and footers 220
Define/Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPDS01)
41, 181
EXITOP (C1CPSB07) 157–158, 160
Geographic Coding Plus/System 234, 241, 244
Geographic Coding Storage (C1CPG911) 166
Limit Input Screen (C1CPSB06) 156
Match Configuration Continued (C1CPSB05)
154
Match Configuration Screen (C1CPSB03) 151
Normalized and Care-Of Address Information
Storage (C1CPOD24) 127
Standardized Address Storage (C1CPOD16)
109
Standardized Address Storage Options
(C1CPOD17) 112
366
User’s Guide - IBM i
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPSB01) 203
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job (C1CPSB02) 204
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB01)
141
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB02),
screen two 144
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB03),
screen three 147, 151
ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage (C1CPOD14) 107
ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage Options (C1CPOD15)
108
ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Add-on Locations
(C1CPG910) 164
ZIP Code Storage (C1CPOD10) 102
ZIP Code Storage Options (C1CPOD11) 104
Screens (batch)
Delivery Point Validation (C1CPID80) screen 94
Delivery Point Validation Screen (C1CPID80)
94
Delivery Point Validation Screen (C1CPID85)
96
Input File Sequence Check Information Screen
(C1CPID70) 93
Input Urbanization Definition Screen
(C1CPID40) 85
List Processor/Mailer Information Screen
(C1CPID60) 92
Reformat Input Record Screen (C1CPMI13) 97,
135
Screens (Interactive)
Address Match Screen 252
Address Stack Screen 266
Administrative Sign-on Screen 275
Apartments at a House Range Screen 268
Cities in a State Screen 268
Cities in a ZIP Code Screen 269
City Information Screen 270
correcting uncoded records 281
Delivery Sequence Footnotes Screen 253
Dropped Information/Base Address Screen 254
Expanded Return Codes Screen 255
Firms on a Street Screen 270
First Interactive Customization Screen 276
Geocoder Information Screen 255
Geographic Coding System Interface 272
Houses on a Street Screen 271
Match Settings Screen 256
Multiple Elements Screen 257
Parsed Elements Screen 258
program parameters for correcting records 283
Return Codes Screen 259
Second Interactive Customization Screen 278
Statistics Screen 264
Streets in a City Screen 272
Second Interactive Customization Screen
(Interactive) 278
Seed ID
interactive 259
what does it look like?
interactive 259
Seed Record
reporting a match 298
Release 4.1.0
Seed records
definition 297
Selecting reports
steps to follow 200
Short city name
City Name (short form) 118
Short city name, defined 269
Site customization file (G1CPFDF) 280
recovering 280
Skipping records
see Records to Skip 156
Sorting LOT-coded records 327, 335
Specifying the library
reduced database 61
Speed of
improving DPV processing 348
Standardization
address
what is it all about? 14
Standardized address
description 17
Standardized Address Storage Screen
(C1CPOD16)
using 194
State Abbreviation (USPS Standard) field
batch reference 168, 170
State Code (FIPS) 167
State size reports
printing 72
States
selecting to be included in reduced database 61
Statistics Screen 264
Storage space requirements
viewing your selections 62
Store default City if City not matched 119
Store if any information is dropped? field
city and state storage options 119
standardized address storage options 113
ZIP + 4 Add-on storage options 108
ZIP Code storage options 104–105
Store if multiple Standardized Address matches
field
batch reference 113
Store if multiple ZIP + 4 matches field
batch reference 109, 119
Store if multiple ZIP matches field
city and state storage options 119
standardized address storage options 113
ZIP + 4 add-on storage options 109
ZIP Code storage options 104, 106
Store input if no match? field
batch reference 118
Store Non-standard PMB Numbers field
batch reference 153
Storing blanks
instead of carrier route 104, 106
Street name 15
base and alias names 112
specifying output length 116
specifying output position 115
Street Name Comparison field
batch reference 152
367
User’s Guide - IBM i
Street-name Match Score field
batch reference 122–123
example 198
Streets in a City Screen (Interactive) 272
Submit Batch Job component
description 25
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB01)
example 203
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB02)
example 204
fields 144
Submit CODE-1 Plus Job Screen (C1CPSB03)
fields 147
Submit Job command 48
Submitting batch jobs
steps to follow 202
Successfully Coded output file field
batch reference 144–145
Suffix 15
Suffix field
batch reference 116
Suffix Return Code field
batch reference 122–123
example 198
Suffix, for CASS configuration 154
SuiteLink
defined 316
eligibility 317
input and output examples 323
mainframe DD names 322
reporting 323
return codes 322
using batch processing 294, 307, 320
using Interactive processing 295, 306, 308, 320
SuiteLink Option
overview 14
Suppress DPBC if R777 Carrier Route detected
batch reference 108
System-defined Screen Heading field
description and example 33
LINE SIDE 71
Uncoded output file
review sample jobs 209
Uncoded records
correcting in Interactive environment 281
Uncoded Records File (name) field
batch reference 148
undeliverable-as-addressed 292
Unique ZIP and Small Town 292
UPRUNJOB
Run jobs screen 44
UR command
for correcting uncoded records 282
Urbanization name
defined 85
User exit routines
for correcting uncoded records Interactive 284
User-controlled CASS Configuration Suffix field
batch reference 154
User-controlled CASS Configuration suffix field
batch reference 154
User-defined Data field
batch reference 158
User-defined System Heading field
description and example 33
USPS
RDI processing 346
USPS Form 3553 17
explained with example 231
USPS Publication 28 14
USPS Record Type field
batch reference 121
example 198
USPS rules and exception
for Z4CHANGE processing 286
USPS State Abbreviation
State abbreviation (USPS Standard) 121
USPS-preferred
alias street name 112
city name, defined 269
UW command
for correcting uncoded records 282
T
Terminate If Non-CASS Certified field
batch reference 154
This 175
Tightness/looseness settings
in interactive matching 234
Trailing directional 15
Trailing Directional field
batch reference 116
Treatment when Standardized Address not
Available field
batch reference 116
Tutorial
steps of 177
What is Delivery Point Validation? 292
What is EWS? 350
What is Line of Travel? 326
What is Residential Delivery File processing?
346
Why Use Line of Travel? 326
U
Z
UAA 292
UFTxx parameter record
LINE SIDE 71
UHDxx parameter record
Z4CHANGE Option
defined 84
Z4CHANGE processing
Release 4.1.0
V
Vanity city name, returning 152
Vintage date
defined 84
W
368
User’s Guide - IBM i
activating 286
calling from your own driver 288
database requirements 286
defined 286
parameter records 287
reports generated 289
using 287
USPS rules and exception 286
ZIP + 4 Add-on field
example 194
ZIP + 4 add-on field
batch reference 107–108
ZIP + 4 Add-on Storage Screen (C1CPOD14)
using 193
ZIP + 4 Add-on--Position on the Output Record
field
batch reference 165
ZIP Code Confirmed/Altered/Original indicator
field
batch reference 124
example 199
ZIP Code Storage Options Screen (C1CPOD11)
fields 104–105
ZIP Code Storage Screen (C1CPOD10)
using 191–192
ZIP+4
Suppress if R777 108
Release 4.1.0
369
User’s Guide - IBM i
Feedback
Document Title:
CODE-1 Plus User's Guide for IBM i
Document Date:
May 2016
Software Version: 4.1.0
Comment regarding page: 1
Contact Preferences
May we contact you if we have questions about your comments?
Yes
No
Contact Information
Name:
Email:
Phone:
Best time to contact: Any time
Comments
Enter you comments here:
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement